The URL can be used to link to this page

00-Project Manual-Prospect Place 100% CD Building Permit Set Prospect Place Family Housing PROJECT MANUAL Project: Prospect Place Family Housing 737 Bridge Road Northampton, MA 01060 Owner: Prospect Place, LLC 256 Pleasant Street, Suite A Northampton, MA 01060 Contact: Laura Baker (413) 586-5855 Developer: Valley Community Development 256 Pleasant Street, Suite A Northampton, MA 01060 Contact: William Womeldorf (413) 586-5855 Architect: Austin Design Cooperative, Inc. 167 Main Street, Suite 302 Brattleboro, VT 0301 801-451-5966 Contact: Thomas C. Chalmers tom@austin.design Civil Stonefield Engineering and Design Engineer: 120 Washington Street, Suite 201 Salem, MA 01970 Landscape Berkshire Design Group Architect: 4 Allen Place Northampton, MA 01340 Plumbing, FP, Hesnor Engineering HVAC & 2 River Street Electrical Engineer: Adams, MA 01220 Structural Stevens & Associates Engineer: 96 Main Street Brattleboro, VT 05301 Solar PV Squared Engineer: 311 Wells Street, Suite B Greenfield, MA 01301 Energy Center for Eco Technology Consultant 320 Riverside Drive Florence, MA 01062 100 % CD Building Permit Set February 24, 2024 This Page Intentionally Left Blank Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA September 19, 2023 Table of Contents 00 01 10 1 of 6 TABLE OF CONTENTS Number of Pages INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 00.01.00 Title Sheet for Project Manual ................................................................................................ 2 00.01.10 Table of Contents ................................................................................................................... 6 PROCUREMENT DOCUMENTS 00.11.00 Request for Proposals .......................................................................................................... 14 00.21.00 Special Conditions ................................................................................................................ 18 00.41.00 Form Of General Bid .............................................................................................................. 4 CONTRACTING FORMS 00.52.00 Agreement Form AIA A101 Standard Form Of Agreement .................................................... 8 00.61.00 Performance Bond and Payment Bond AIA A312 – 2017 ...................................................... 8 00.63.00 Notice Of Award ........................................................................................................................ 2 00.63.10 Notice To Proceed .................................................................................................................... 2 00.63.20 Change Order AIA G709-2001 ................................................................................................ 2 00.63.30 Application For Payment AIA G702-703 - 1992 ...................................................................... 2 00.63.50 Certificate Of Substantial Completion AIA G704 - 2000. .......................................................... 00.63.70 Certificate Of Final Acceptance ................................................................................................ 2 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 00.72.00 General Conditions of Contract AIA 201-2017 ...................................................................... 38 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 11 00 - Summary of Work .......................................................................................................... 4 Section 01 14 00 - Work Restrictions and Site Conduct ............................................................................ 2 Section 01 22 00 - Unit Prices ...................................................................................................................... 4 Section 01 23 00 - Alternates and Allowances ............................................................................................ 4 Section 01 26 00 - Contract Modification Procedures ................................................................................. 2 Section 01 29 00 - Payment Procedures ..................................................................................................... 2 Section 01 31 00 - Project Management, Coordination, and Construction Documentation ....................... 4 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures and Substitutions ......................................................................... 6 Section 01 41 00 - Regulatory Requirements ............................................................................................... 2 Section 01 42 00 - References ...................................................................................................................... 4 Section 01 45 00 - Quality Requirements .................................................................................................. 4 Section 01 51 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls ................................................................................ 4 Section 01 56 39 - Temporary Tree and Plant Protection ........................................................................... 9 Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements ..................................................................................................... 2 Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements ................................................................................................. 2 Section 01 77 00 - Close-out Procedures and Submittals ......................................................................... 2 Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training ............................................................................................ 2 Section 01 81 00 - Energy Performance Requirements................................................................................ 4 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA September 19, 2023 Table of Contents 00 01 10 2 of 6 DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS Section 02 41 00 –Demolition .......................................................................................................................…14 DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - Cast In Place Concrete .................................................................................................. 18 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY Section 04 20 00 - Masonry ............................................................................................................................ 16 DIVISION 5 - METALS Section 05 10 00 – Structural Steel ................................................................................................................. 10 Section 05 50 00 - Miscellaneous Metals ........................................................................................................ 10 DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry .............................................................................................................. 10 Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry ................................................................................................................. 8 DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation ............................................................................................................. 8 Section 07 27 00 - Air and Vapor Barriers .................................................................................................... 14 Section 07 53 00 –Membrane Roofing and Flashing ..................................................................................... 14 Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping ....................................................................................................................... 10 Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants .................................................................................................................... 6 DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS Section 08 11 00 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames ..................................................................................... 6 Section 08 14 00 - Wood and Composite Doors and Frames ....................................................................... 4 Section 08 41 13 - Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts .............................................................. 10 Section 08 57 20 - Fiberglass Windows ......................................................................................................... 6 Section 08 63 00 - Skylights ........................................................................................................................... 8 Section 08 71 00 - Hardware ........................................................................................................................ 26 Section 08 81 00 - Glass and Glazing .............................................................................................................. 8 DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 09 20 00 - Gypsum Board and Plaster................................................................................................ 8 Section 09 30 00 - Ceramic Tile ...................................................................................................................... 6 Section 09 51 13 - Acoustic Ceiling Panels .................................................................................................... 6 Section 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring .............................................................................................................. 8 Section 09 90 00 - Painting ............................................................................................................................. 10 DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 10 00 00 - Miscellaneous Specialties ................................................................................................ 8 DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT Section 11 31 00 - Appliances .......................................................................................................................... 4 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA September 19, 2023 Table of Contents 00 01 10 3 of 6 DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS Section 12 21 13 - Window Treatments ......................................................................................................... 6 Section 12 35 00 - Cabinets and Countertops ............................................................................................... 6 DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT Section 14 20 00 - Passenger Elevators .......................................................................................................... 6 DIVISION 23 Section 23 57 33- Closed Loop Geothermal Heat Exchanger ....................................................................... 14 DIVISION 21, 26, 27 See Drawings DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK Section 31 10 00 – Site demolition and Clearing… ………………………………………………………………6 Section 31 20 00 – Earthwork……………………………………………………………………………………...24 Section 31 25 00 – Erosion Sediment Control………… . ………………………… ……………………………...6 DIVISION 32- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Section 32 12 16 – Bituminous Concrete Paving ……………… ...................................................................... 6 Section 32 13 13 – Concrete Paving ……………………… ............................................................................ 26 Section 32 13 73 – Concrete Paving Joint Sealants……………………… ....................................................... 8 Section 32 14 04 – Rubber Surfacing……………………… .............................................................................. 6 Section 32 92 00 – Seeding and Sodding ………………… ........................................................................... 16 Section 32 93 00 – Plantings …………………… ......................................................................................... 29 DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES Section 33 12 00 – Water Distribution…… ....................................................................................................... 8 Section 33 31 00 – Sanitary Sewer ………… ................................................................................................... 6 Section 33 41 00 – Storm Drainage ………………………………………………… .......................................... 6 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA September 19, 2023 Table of Contents 00 01 10 4 of 6 INDEX OF DRAWINGS: COVER Site Drawings C-1 Site Cover C-2 Demolition Plan C-3 Site Plan C-4 Grading Plan C-5 Stormwater and Utility Plan C-6 Lighting Plan C-7 Soil Erosion & Sediment Control Plan C-8 Construction Details C-9 Construction Details C-10 Construction Details C-11 Truck Turn (Fire Truck) L 100 Tree Protection & Removal Plan L 111 Planting Plan L111.1 Notes L 400 Courtyard Enlargement L 501 Planting Details L 502 Site Details E0.1 Electrical Site Plan Architectural Drawings A0.01 Cover E A0.10 Notes, Code Summary A1.31 1st Floor Post Remediation A1.32 2nd Floor Post Remediation A1.33 Roof Plan Post Demo A1.41 Existing Sanitary A1.51 1st Floor Plan A.152 2nd Floor Plan A1.53 Roof Plan A2.10 Exterior Elevations - Existing A2.11 Courtyard Elevations - Existing A2.20 Exterior Elevations A2.21 Courtyard Elevations A3.11 Corridor Sections A3.12 Corridor Sections A3.20 Building Sections A3.50 Wall Sections, Full Height A4.10 Studio Units A4.11 One Bed Units A4.12 Two Bed Units A4.13 Three Bed Units A4.21 Kitchens K 1-3 A4.22 Kitchens K 4-6 A4.23 Kitchens K 7-9 A4.24 Kitchens K 10-12 A4.25 Kitchens K13 A4.30 Bathrooms A4.31 Bathrooms A4.32 Bathrooms A4.33 Bathrooms A4.34 Bathrooms A4.35 Bathrooms A4.36 Public Restrooms A4.40 Courtyard, Elevator Plan Details A4.41 Laundry & Mechanical Room Details A4.42 Corridor Detail Plans-Post Demo A4.43 Corridor Detail Plans-Proposed A4.65 Stair Plans, Elevations and Details A4.50 North Entry Details A4.66 Stair Plans, Elevations and Details A5.20 Details: 1-1/2" A5.30 Details: 3" A5.31 Roof Details: 3" A6.20 Unit Finish Schedule A6.21 Common Finish Schedule, Wall Types A6.22 1st Flr Floor Finish Plan A6.23 2nd Flr Floor Finish Plan A6.24 1st Floor Ceiling Finish Plan A6.25 2nd Floor Ceiling Finish Plan A6.30 Door Schedule A6.31 Door Types & Details A6.40 Window Schedule A6.41 Window Types & Details A6.51 Mail Box Details A6.52 Signage A7.10 Energy and Compartmentalization September 19, 2023 Table of Contents 00 01 10 5 of 6 Structural Drawings S-001 General Notes S-100 Foundation & First Floor Framing Plan S-101 First Floor Framing Plan S-102 Roof Floor Framing Plan S-103 Enlarged Framing Plan S-104 Roof Framing Plan S-500 Concrete & Masonry Details S-501 Concrete Details MEP Drawings P0.00 Plumbing Notes & Legend P1.10 First Floor Domestic Water Plumbing Plan P1.20 Second Floor Domestic Water Plumbing Plan P2.10 First Floor Drain Piping Plan P2.20 Second Floor Drain Piping Plan P3.10 First Floor Vent Piping Plan P3.20 Second Floor Vent Piping Plan P4.10 Roof Plumbing Plan P5.01 Plumbing Details P5.02 Plumbing Details P7.01 Plumbing Schedules M0.0 Mechanical Notes & Legends M1.0 First Floor Ductwork Plan M1.1 Second Floor Ductwork Plan M1.2 First Floor Piping Plan M1.3 Second Floor Piping Plan M2.0 Typical First Floor Unit Mechanical Plans M2.1 Typical First Floor Unit Mechanical Plans M2.2 Typical Second Floor Unit Mechanical Plans M2.3 Typical Second Floor Unit Mechanical Plans M2.4 Typical Second Floor Unit Mechanical Plans M3.0 Mechanical Roof Plan M5.0 Mechanical Details M5.1 Mechanical Details M5.2 Mechanical Details M6.0 Mechanical One Lines M6.1 Mechanical One Lines M7.0 Mechanical Schedules E0.0 Electrical Notes & Legends E0.1 Electrical Site Plan E1.0 First Floor Lighting Plan E1.1 Second Floor Lighting Plan E1.2 First Floor Electrical & Fire Alarm Plan E1.3 Second Floor Electrical & Fire Alarm Plan E1.4 First Floor HVAC Power Plan E1.5 Second Floor HVAC Power Plan E1.6 Roof Electrical Plan E2.0 Typical Apartment Unit Electrical Plans E2.1 Typical Apartment Unit Electrical Plans E5.0 Electrical Details E5.1 Electrical Details E6.0 Power Riser Diagram E6.1 DAS System & Fire Alarm Riser Diagram E7.0 Electrical Schedules E7.1 Electrical Schedules PS6.0 MEP Specifications PS6.1 MEP Specifications PS6.2 MEP Specifications Geothermal Drawings G-101 Geothermal General G-102 Geothermal GSHX Site Layout G-103 Geothermal Details G-104 Geothermal Diagrams and Schedules G-105 Geothermal Testing Solar Site and Electrical Plans PV- M1.1 Site Plan and Project Info. PV-E1.0 Electric Single Line PV-E1.1 Electrical EQ/ Circuits PV-E2.0 Electrical EQ/ Layout PV-E2.1 Electrical EQ/ Layout Racking Construction Drawings PC-1 Cover PC-2 PROJECT SUMMARY PC-3 ARRAY SITE MAP PC-4 ARRAY SITE MAP PC-5 TYPICAL ARRAY DIMENSIONS PC-6 ASSEMBLIES PC-7 RACKING COMPONENTS PC-8 BALLAST LEGEND PC-9 BALLAST LAYOUT - 1.1 PC-10 BALLAST LAYOUT - 1.2 PC-11 BALLAST LAYOUT - 1.3 PC-12 BALLAST LAYOUT - 1.4 September 19, 2023 Table of Contents 00 01 10 6 of 6 PC-13 BALLAST LAYOUT - 2.5 PC-14 BALLAST LAYOUT - 2.6 PC-15 BALLAST LAYOUT - 2.7 PC-16 BALLAST LAYOUT - 2.8 PC-17 BALLAST LAYOUT - 2.9 PC-18 BALLAST LAYOUT - 2.10 PC-19 BALLAST LAYOUT - 2.11 PC-20 BALLAST LAYOUT - 2.12 PC-21 BALLAST LAYOUT - 2.13 PC-22 BALLAST LAYOUT - 2.14 PC-23 BALLAST LAYOUT - 2.15 PC-24 MECAHNICAL ATTACHMENT DETAIL End of Section Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Request for Proposals 00.11.10 1 of 12 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS GENERAL CONTRACTING SERVICES Prospect Place Family Housing 737 Bridge Road Northampton, MA 01002 By: Owner / Sponsor: Prospect Place LLC in Partnership with Valley CDC Project Architect: Austin Design Cooperative, Inc February 24, 2024 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Request for Proposals 00.11.10 2 of 12 I. Identification of Parties Owner Prospect Place, LLC 256 Pleasant Street, Suite A Northampton, MA 01060 Contact: Laura Baker (413) 586-5855 Sponsor/ Valley Community Development Developer 256 Pleasant Street, Suite A Northampton, MA 01060 Contact: William Womeldorf (413) 586-5855 Architect Austin Design Cooperative, Inc. 167 Main Street Brattleboro, VT 05301 413-624-9669 Tom Chalmers Cell: 617-538-7886 tom@austin.design Civil Stonefield Engineering and Design Engineer: 120 Washington Street, Suite 201 Salem, MA 01970 Landscape Berkshire Design Group Architect: 4 Allen Place Northampton, MA 01340 Plumbing, FP, Hesnor Engineering HVAC & 2 River Street Electrical Engineer: Adams, MA 01220 Structural Stevens & Associates Engineer: 96 Main Street Brattleboro, VT 05301 Energy Center for Eco Technology Consultant: 320 Riverside Drive Florence, MA 01062 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Request for Proposals 00.11.10 3 of 12 II. Project Description Summary: 737 Bridge Road is an existing 67,976 sq ft, 2 story brick building previously used as a nursing home that has been vacant since 2011, falling into severe disrepair. The property was acquired in 2022 by Prospect Place Owner LLC, a joint venture between the previous owner and the non-profit corporation Valley Community Development (Valley). 737 Bridge Road was acquired with a plan to change its use, following remediation and gut rehabilitating of the existing building, to approximately 60 affordable family apartments. Unit Break Down: Unit 1st floor 2nd Floor Total Studio 7 3 10 1 Bedroom 8 6 14 2 Bedroom 16 15 31 3 Bedroom 1 4 5 Total 32 28 60 Universal Design and Accessible Features – Site: • Site layout and features provide an accessible route from the street to parking and all building entrances. Accessible parking spaces are located adjacent to building entrances. Universal Design and Accessible Features - Building: • Vertical access to all floors is achieved by on-grade entrances and two elevators. • All units, at a minimum, are visitable with MAAB Group 1 floor and door clearances, kitchens and baths; • One of these is equipped for the hearing impaired • Four units are MAAB Group 2A fully accessible; • One of these is equipped for the hearing impaired • Two units are MAAB Group 2A fully accessible and additionally designed to meet DHCD CBH guidelines. • Two Units are adaptable to meet MAAB Group 2A fully accessible. Construction Features: • Site work includes changes to existing driveway entrance locations, changes to driveway route and parking, paving and surfacing, plantings, accessory bike storage and dumpster structures and fencing. • Utilities includes sanitary sewer, water service, storm water, electrical and geothermal wells. • Building Renovation: • The existing building is fully gutted with all nonbearing partitions, finishes, mechanical systems removed. • Envelope improvements include replacement of roof insulation and roofing, replacement of windows, cutting in of new windows, replacement of exterior doors, installation of new skylights, repointing and treatment of brick and stucco facade. • Energy improvements will include increase roof insulation, increased wall insulation and new thermally broken double insulated windows and insulated thermally broken entrance doors. • Interior will have new partitions fixtures and finishes. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Request for Proposals 00.11.10 4 of 12 • MEP HVAC work to include geothermally sourced ducted heat pump units in each apartment, central ducted ERV units for ventilation and tempered fresh air supply. Plumbing to include geothermally assisted heat pump water heaters and low flow fixtures. • The building is fully sprinklered in accordance with NFPA 13. The full scope of work is identified in the Construction Drawings and Specifications (Exhibits A & B). Site Inspection: GCs are strongly encouraged to attend a site inspection on TBD at 11:00 AM. Attendance is not mandatory for bidding. GCs are welcome to invite team members and sub-contractors to this site inspection. Questions from attendees will be recorded at this time. Questions of substance will subsequently be answered in writing and disseminated to all prospective GC respondents. Timetable: Key Milestones Task Duration Milestone Dates Issuance of GC RFP Site Inspection 2 hours Questions due in writing 2 weeks Answers will be distributed in writing 3 days GC Proposals Due 4 weeks from RFP Issuance Review of Proposals by Owner; Interviews as Needed 2 weeks GC Selection 2 weeks GC / Owner finalize and execute contract 1 month GC obtains Building Permit 1 month Owner closes on Financing 2 months Construction Start Construction Completion (final C.O.) 16 months Please note attachments to the Specifications include: • Hazardous materials assessment identifying materials the GC is required to remediate using qualified licensed tradespersons and following applicable regulations prior to demolition of the existing house • Geotechnical Report • Soils Report • Zoning Permit including permit conditions. Together with the Owner, the GC must ensure compliance with all permit conditions related to construction. GC / Owner Contract: AIA Form A101-2017 is attached and will form the basis of the contract between the Owner and the GC. Minor language changes may be negotiated by the parties prior to execution. The GC will stipulate consent to assign this contract from Valley to an ownership entity (LLC) to be Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Request for Proposals 00.11.10 5 of 12 created for the sole purpose of owning and managing East Gables, as is required by project funders. Valley will be the managing partner for this new entity. Financing Sources / Bid Assumptions: All financing for this project has been secured by the Owner and includes multiple sources of private and public funds. The bid price should reflect that this project is not subject to prevailing wages and the cost of construction materials are exempt from sales tax. As a project with public sources, typical paperwork will be required with requisitions, including lien waivers and MBE utilization reports. General Contracting Services: It is assumed that all units are to be completed in one phase. It is assumed that weekly meetings will be conducted once construction has begun and the General Contractor (GC) will have the project manager, site supervisor and other major subs (as applicable) present for regular meetings. It is assumed that the GC will procure all general and sub- contracting services specified and is responsible for coordinating all work on site. It is expected that all paperwork required in the Contract Documents be provided in a timely manner. Requisitions will not be paid without full compliance with reporting requirements. Energy Efficiency Priorities: The project incorporates green building elements such as energy conserving construction methods and details, including roof-mounted solar panels for electricity production, energy efficient lighting and controls, appliances, efficient plumbing systems and fixtures, as well as building materials which promote a healthy indoor environment and protect natural resources. It is expected that apartments will be compartmentalized and individually tested for energy performance and will achieve HERS ratings of 35 or less. GC must provide demonstrated experience with construction that has been designed to be extremely low energy use, zero net energy, or Passive House. A proven track record with crews that understand and have been successful with air barriers, taping and foaming to prevent air movement, insulation techniques using rigid exterior insulation, dense-pack cellulose, and rooftop photovoltaic installations will be required of all bidders. Work Force Requirements and Goals: MBE/WBE: Based on financing sources, the selected GC will be subject to MBE/WBE hiring goals. Expectations for this project include the GC taking affirmative steps to subcontract with minority owned and women owned business enterprises and to utilize minority and women employees in the GC and subcontractor workforce. GC obligations include providing documentation of affirmative marketing / outreach as well as regular utilization reports. Goal for utilization of MBE firms is expected to be 15% of contract value with 25% minority workforce participation. Section 3: This project will be subject to Section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968, as amended, including implementing regulations at 24 CFR Part 135, intended to direct economic opportunities (including employment and contracting/subcontracting opportunities) to local low-income persons and businesses that provide opportunities for low-income persons. Reporting requirements will be applicable. Fair Wages / Prevention of Wage Theft: Periodic certification will be required by the GC and subcontractors that fair wage standards are being followed. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Request for Proposals 00.11.10 6 of 12 Covid-19 Protocols & Related Costs: As part of the base bid price, the Contractor assumes the implementation of, and the costs related to, Covid-19 protocols in place as of the date of bidding (October 2021). Such protocols are based upon guidance from the Governor’s office and the locality as of that date. Should there be future orders or public guidance issued related to Covid-19 or other health emergency during the period of construction that involve new or enhanced requirements, the methods of compliance and costs of compliance will be negotiated by the Contractor and Owner. Price Escalation / Shipping Delays: This is a fixed bid contract. GCs are expected to include within their fixed bid price any contingencies they deem necessary and prudent to anticipate and account for price escalation between the time of bid and the time of construction as well as any costs related to shipping delays or delays in receiving materials. This is critical so that the Owner can fairly evaluate the bid prices. III. Submission Requirements 1. Required Qualifications - The selected GC shall have the following demonstrated qualifications: • Provide evidence of bonding capacity for 100% Performance and Payment Bonds • Evidence of insurance typical for a project of this size, including general liability, workman’s compensation, commercial auto liability, and umbrella coverage. • Financial stability, as demonstrated by at least the past 2 years of financial statements. • Residential construction project experience including renovation and new construction – at least 2 projects of similar size and scope in the last 5 years (wood framed 2-3 story projects preferable) • Qualified, specific personnel assigned to the project. Please itemize personnel expected to be assigned to the project: name, title, role, years of experience, hours / week assigned to project, and qualifications as demonstrated by a resume • Demonstrated ability to meet schedules • Demonstrated ability to meet budgets • Experience with successful green, high energy performance buildings • Experience value engineering projects to meet available budgets, as required • No current listing on federal or state debarment lists Please provide a narrative and supporting documentation to demonstrate compliance with the required qualifications. Note that other requirements and qualifications may be required pursuant to the construction contract. 2. Preferred Qualifications: In addition to the qualifications listed above, the following qualifications are desired: • Affordable housing construction project experience – at least 3 projects of similar scope in the last 3 years Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Request for Proposals 00.11.10 7 of 12 • Experience with Passive House Certified construction • Statements describing worker or management training programs and/or certifications in high performance building techniques • Demonstrated high utilization of MBE, WBE, minority and women employees, Section 3 Please provide a narrative and supporting documentation to demonstrate compliance with preferred qualifications. 3. Contractors Qualification Statement: Complete and submit the attached GC Qualification Statement form. Fill in all blanks and provide attachments as required or to supplement the Statement. 4. Fixed Lump Sum Bid Price: • GC shall provide a fixed lump sum price for all project work. Provide this fixed price on the FORM FOR GENERAL BID provided in Exhibit B (Project Manual). Bid must be signed by an authorized signatory for the GC. • Include the TRADE COST BREAKDOWN FORM. • As applicable, provide separate list of any exclusions from price or assumptions that impact price. • Provide separate itemization for General Conditions, General Requirements, and Overhead expenses. 5. Detailed Project Schedule: Provide a detailed project schedule by trade showing how completion will be achieved within the 16-month timeline. 6. Project Budget: The Owner’s budget for construction of this project (without Owner’s construction contingency) is TBD . 7. Value Engineering: Provide suggestions for cost reduction of the project as compared with the scope identified in the plans and project manual. Briefly describe suggested change and approximate anticipated savings. Owner will evaluate these suggestions in the event that price proposals are over budget. Submission Details: Not later than TBD submit one complete digital copy of your proposal to: Laura Baker, Real Estate Development Director at lb@valleycdc.com Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Request for Proposals 00.11.10 8 of 12 If the file size of the proposal is large, please supply a link to the proposal in lieu of a file attachment. Owner will acknowledge receipt of all proposals. If you do not receive a timely acknowledgement, please contact Laura Baker to ensure your proposal has been received. IV. Evaluation of Proposals: The Owner is soliciting proposals from approximately six General Contractors. The opening of proposals is private and the Owner reserves the right to waive any informalities, to request additional information or clarifications, to reject any or all proposals, and to negotiate minor points with the selected GC. The proposals will be evaluated based upon the qualifications listed above combined with the bid price. The Owner in its sole discretion may decide to interview GCs including key team members. Unless there is a difference in qualifications, the Owner expects to select the qualified GC with the lowest bid price. The Owner reserves the right to select a GC with a higher bid price based upon GC qualifications. V. Questions: Questions should be submitted in writing only by TBD to: Tom Chalmers, Project Architect Austin Design Cooperative, Inc. 617-538-7886 tom@austin.design and copied to: Laura Baker Valley Community Development Corporation (VCDC) lb@valleycdc.com Answers or addenda (as applicable) will be issued to all GCs by TBD . Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Request for Proposals 00.11.10 9 of 12 General Contractor's Qualification Statement The Undersigned certifies under oath that the information provided herein is true and sufficiently complete so as not to be misleading. SUBMITTED TO: Valley Community Development Corporation ADDRESS: 256 Pleasant Street, Suite A, Northampton, MA 01060 SUBMITTED BY: Corporation NAME: Partnership ADDRESS: LLC PRINCIPAL OFFICE: Individual Joint Venture Other NAME OF PROJECT: 23 Laurel Street Affordable Housing, 23 Laurel Street Northampton, MA 01002 1. ORGANIZATION • How many years has your organization been in business as a General Contractor? • How many years has your organization been in business under its present business name? • Under what other or former names has your organization operated? • If your organization is a corporation, answer the following: o Date of incorporation: o State of incorporation: o President’s Name: o Vice President’s Name: o Secretary's name: o Treasurer’s Name • If your organization is a partnership, answer the following: o Date of Organization: o Type of partnership (if applicable): o Name(s) of general partner(s): • If your organization is a limited liability company (LLC), answer the following: o Date of Organization: o State of Organization: o Name(s) of managers: o Name(s) of members: • If your organization is individually owned, answer the following: o Date of Organization o Name of owner: Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Request for Proposals 00.11.10 10 of 12 • If the form of your organization is other than those: listed above, describe it and name the principals: • How many people does your organization presently employ? Home Office ______ Field Supervisory _______ Tradespeople _______ • How many people did your organization employ on average for the last 3 years? Home Office ______ Field Supervisory _______ Tradespeople _______ 2. LICENSING • List jurisdictions and trade categories in which your organization is legally qualified to do business, and indicate registration or license numbers, if applicable. • List jurisdictions in which your organization’s partnership or trade name is filed. 3. EXPERIENCE • List the categories of work that your organization normally performs with its own forces. • What percentage of your Company’s work is normally subcontracted? % • What trades do you normally subcontract? • What is the largest contract your Company has completed? Amount: Year: Project name and scope: • What is your expected annual volume in 2020: $ _____________ # of Projects ________ • What is your expected annual volume in 2021: $ _____________ # of Projects ________ • Has your organization ever failed to complete any work awarded to it? • Are there any judgments, claims, arbitration proceedings, suits or violation notices pending or outstanding against your organization or its officers? (If the answer is yes, please attach details.) • In the last ten years, have there been any judgments, claims, arbitration proceedings, suits or violation notices against your organization or its officers with respect to the conduct of the organization, or contracting or construction work? (If the answer is yes, please attach details.) Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Request for Proposals 00.11.10 11 of 12 • Has your organization filed any lawsuits or requested arbitration with regard to construction contracts within the last ten years? • Within the last five years, has any officer or principal of your organization ever been an officer or Principal of another organization when it failed to complete a construction contract? (If the answer is yes, please attach details.) • On a separate sheet, list major construction projects your organization has in progress, giving the name of project, owner, architect, contract amount, percent complete and scheduled completion date. • State total worth of work in progress and under contract: • On a separate sheet, list the major projects your organization has completed in the past five years, giving the name of project, owner, architect, contact information for the owner and architect, contract amount, date of completion and percentage of the cost of the work performed with your own forces. Identify any projects that were federally or state funded affordable housing projects. Identify any housing projects that were highly energy efficient. • State average annual amount of construction work performed during the past five years: • Does your organization use union employees? ____ Yes ____ No • Is your organization SOMBWA certified? ____ Yes ____ No (If yes, please attach the SOMBWA certification letter.) • Are you a “Section 3” business under HUD regulations and Section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968? ___Yes ___No ___Not sure • Have you done previous work covered by Section 3? ___Yes ___No • Have you ever been cited for noncompliance with Section 3? ____ Yes ____ No • Are you currently listed on HUD’s list of Debarred and Suspended Contractors (also known as the List of Parties Excluded from Federal Procurement or Nonprocurement Programs, and as the Excluded Parties List)? ____ Yes ____ No 4. REFERENCES • Trade References: Please list at least 3 references including name of reference, title, contact information including phone number, project name, role of your company on the project, and dollar value of your work on the project. • Surety: o Name of bonding company: __________________________ o Name and address of agent: _________________________ 5. FINANCING • What is your organization’s current bonding capacity (dollar amount)? _________________ Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Request for Proposals 00.11.10 12 of 12 • Based on your knowledge of the East Gables development, and the attached plans, would you be able to obtain a payment and performance bond for 100% of the likely construction contract amount? _______ • Is your organization able to meet insurance requirements specified in the attached draft AIA contract documents? _______________ 6. SIGNATURE: ___________________________________________________________________ By: Title: Dated at this ____ day of , 2018. LIST OF EXHIBITS EXHIBIT A TBD Prospect Place Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Special Conditions 00 21 10 1 of 18 SECTION 00 21 00 SPECIAL CONDITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 Section 3 Residents And Section 3 Business Concerns Assurance Of Compliance And Compliance Plan ___________________________. (the "General Contractor" or "Contractor") acknowledges that the policy requirements of the Department of Housing and Urban Development ("HUD'') set forth in Section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968 as amended, are applicable to this contract and will be met as outlined in this Section 3 Compliance Plan in its work on the Sergeant House project in Northampton, MA (the "project"). The General Contractor agrees to this Assurance of Compliance and Compliance Plan for its work on the project. I. ASSURANCE OF COMPLIANCE 1. Assurance of Compliance with Section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968 ("Section 3 clause") A. The work to be performed under this contract is subject to the requirements of section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968, as amended, 12 U.S.C. 1701u (section 3). The purpose of Section 3 is to ensure that employment and other economic opportunities generated by the United States Department of Housing and Urban Development (“HUD”) assistance or HUD-assisted projects covered by section 3, shall, to the greatest extent feasible, be directed to low- and very low-income persons who are recipients of HUD assistance for housing. B. The parties to this contract agree to comply with HUD's regulations in 24 CFR part 135, which implement Section 3. As evidenced by their execution of this contract, the parties to this contract certify that they are under no contractual or other impediment that would prevent them from complying with the part 135 regulations. C. The Contractor agrees to send to each labor organization or representative of workers with which the Contractor has a collective bargaining agreement or other understanding, if any, a notice advising the labor organization or workers' representative of the Contractor's commitments under this Section 3 clause, and will post copies of the notice in conspicuous places at the work site where both employees and applicants for training and employment positions can see the notice. The notice shall describe the Section 3 preference, shall set forth minimum number and job titles subject to hire, availability of apprenticeship and training positions, the qualifications for each; and the name and location of the person(s) taking applications for each of the positions; and the anticipated date the work shall begin. D. The Contractor agrees to include this Section 3 clause in every subcontract subject to compliance with regulations in 24 CFR part 135, and agrees to take appropriate action, as provided in an applicable provision of the subcontract or in this Section 3 clause, upon a finding that the subcontractor is in violation of the regulations in 24 CFR part 135. The Contractor will not subcontract with any subcontractor where the Contractor has notice or knowledge that the subcontractor has been found in violation of the regulations in 24 CFR part 135. E. The Contractor will certify that any vacant employment positions, including training positions, that are filled (1) after the Contractor is selected but before the contract is executed, and (2) with persons other than those to whom the regulations of 24 CFR part 135 require employment opportunities to be directed, were not filled to circumvent the Contractor's obligations under 24 CFR part 135. Prospect Place Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Special Conditions 00 21 10 2 of 18 F. Noncompliance with HUD’s regulations in 24 CFR part 135 may result in sanctions, termination of this contract for default, and debarment or suspension from future assisted contracts. G. With respect to work performed in connection with section 3 covered Indian housing assistance, section 7(b)of the Indian Self Determination and Education Assistance Act (25 U.S.C. 450e) also applies to the work to be performed under this contract. Section 7(b) requires that to the greatest extent feasible (i) preferences and opportunities for training and employment shall be given to Indians, and (ii) preference in the award of contracts and subcontracts shall be given to Indian organizations and Indian-owned Economic Enterprises. Parties to this contract that are subject to the provisions of section 3 and section 7(b) agree to comply with Section 3 to the maximum extent feasible, but not in derogation of compliance with section 7(b). II. COMPLIANCE PLAN 1. Policy Section 3 requires that each grantee, sub-grantee, Contractor or sub-contractor undertaking work funded in whole or in part with Community Development Block Grant and/or HOME program funds and certain other housing and community development programs shall ensure to the greatest extent feasible, that: a. Opportunities for training and employment be given to Section 3 residents (giving particular priority where feasible to Section 3 residents residing in the service area or neighborhood of the Project, and participants in HUD YouthBuild programs); and, b. Contracts for work to be performed are awarded to Section 3 business concerns (giving particular priority where feasible to Section 3 business concerns providing economic opportunities for low- and very low-income persons residing within the service area or the neighborhood of the Project and to YouthBuild programs). Note that Section 3 does not require the employment of a Section 3 resident who does not meet the qualifications for the position. 2. Definitions a. The Section 3 project area means the Springfield, MA metropolitan statistical area, which includes Hampden and Hampshire Counties. b. A Section 3 resident means a: (1) public housing resident, or (2) an individual who resides in the metropolitan area or nonmetropolitan county in which the section 3 covered assistance is expended (in this case, the Springfield, MA metropolitan statistical area), and who is: (i) a low-income person, meaning a (person from a) family, including single persons, whose incomes do not exceed 80 percent of the median income for the area. For the Springfield, MA MSA in 2020, 80% of median income is: 1 person 2 person 3 person 4 person 5 person 6 person 7 person 8 person $47,850 $54,650 $61,500 $68,300 $73,800 $79,250 $84,700 $90,200 or Prospect Place Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Special Conditions 00 21 10 3 of 18 (ii) a very low income person, meaning a family, including single persons, whose income does not exceed 50 per cent of the median family income for the area, For the Springfield, MA MSA in 2020, 50% of median income is: 1 person 2 person 3 person 4 person 5 person 6 person 7 person 8 person $47,850 $54,650 $61,500 $68,300 $73,800 $79,250 $84,700 $90,200 c. An eligible Section 3 business concern means any business: (1) That is 51 percent or more owned by Section 3 residents, or (2) Whose permanent, full time employees include persons, at least 30 percent of whom are currently Section 3 residents, or within three years of the date of first employment with the business concern were section 3 residents; or (3) That provides evidence of a commitment to subcontract in excess of 25 percent of the dollar award of all subcontracts to be awarded to business concerns that meet the qualifications set forth in paragraphs (1) or (2) in this definition of 'section 3 business concern.' 3. Preliminary Statement of Workforce Needs The General Contractor _______[does not (?)] anticipate additional hiring or the enrollment of trainees or apprentices as a result of work to be performed under this contract. Therefore, no goal has been established for the employment or training of lower income project area residents. In the event that employment of regular, permanent employees or enrollment of trainees or apprentices becomes necessary, the General Contractor pledges that it will make a good faith effort to utilize eligible Section 3 residents. 4. Affirmative Action Plan for Utilization of Section 3 Businesses The General Contractor anticipates that it will be necessary to let subcontracts to fulfill its obligations under this contract. Therefore, the General Contractor pledges that it will make a good faith effort to utilize at least 10% Section 3 businesses. This good faith effort will include: a. The direct notification of eligible Section 3 businesses that a contract will be let and the provision of information necessary to allow them maximum feasible opportunity to develop and submit responsive bids. Way Finders, Inc. will share with the General Contractor its list of possible Section 3 businesses; b. The inclusion in bid specifications of the Section 3 project area definition and income limits for qualification as a lower income person; c. Requiring the bidders to comply with Section 3. The General Contractor further agrees whenever possible to purchase materials necessary for performance of the work under this contract from eligible Section 3 businesses. 5. Record Keeping and Reporting The General Contractor agrees to maintain data on employment, contracting, and purchase of materials in sufficient detail as to allow accurate preparation of Section 3 compliance reports. The General Contractor agrees to submit to the grantee each month the attached Section 3 compliance reports for employment of lower income residents and for utilization of businesses: • Schedule 1 Solicitation of MBE/WBE/Section 3 subcontractors • Schedule 2 Form HUD-60002 Section 3 Summary Report • Schedule 3 Form HUD-2516 Contract and Sub Contract Activity report IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the General Contractor hereby acknowledges and agrees to this Assurance of Compliance and Compliance Plan for its work on the project. Date: _____________________________ _____________[Constr. Company] ________________[Address] By:________________________________ Authorized Signatory Prospect Place Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Special Conditions 00 21 10 4 of 18 1.02 Equal Opportunity During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows: (1) The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex, sexual orientation, gender identity, or national origin. The contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, color, religion, sex, sexual orientation, gender identity, or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to the following: Employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause. (2) The contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex, sexual orientation, gender identity, or national origin. (3) The contractor will not discharge or in any other manner discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because such employee or applicant has inquired about, discussed, or disclosed the compensation of the employee or applicant or another employee or applicant. This provision shall not apply to instances in which an employee who has access to the compensation information of other employees or applicants as a part of such employee's essential job functions discloses the compensation of such other employees or applicants to individuals who do not otherwise have access to such information, unless such disclosure is in response to a formal complaint or charge, in furtherance of an investigation, proceeding, hearing, or action, including an investigation conducted by the employer, or is consistent with the contractor's legal duty to furnish information. (4) The contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which he has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice to be provided advising the said labor union or workers' representatives of the contractor's commitments under this section, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment. (5) The contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and of the rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor. (6) The contractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and by rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto, and will permit access to his books, records, and accounts by the administering agency and the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations, and orders. (7) In the event of the contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination clauses of this contract or with any of the said rules, regulations, or orders, this contract may be canceled, terminated, or suspended in whole or in part and the contractor may be declared ineligible for further Government contracts or federally assisted construction contracts in accordance with procedures authorized in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and such other sanctions may be imposed and remedies invoked as provided in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, or by rule, regulation, or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by law. (8) The contractor will include the portion of the sentence immediately preceding paragraph (1) and the provisions of paragraphs (1) through (8) in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by rules, regulations, or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to section 204 of Executive Order Prospect Place Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Special Conditions 00 21 10 5 of 18 11246 of September 24, 1965, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The contractor will take such action with respect to any subcontract or purchase order as the administering agency may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions, including sanctions for noncompliance: Provided, however, that in the event a contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of such direction by the administering agency, the contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States. Prospect Place Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Special Conditions 00 21 10 6 of 18 This Page Intentionally Left Blank Prospect Place Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Special Conditions 00 21 10 7 of 18 1.03 Form of Lien waivers CONTRACTOR’S PARTIAL WAIVER AND SUBORDINATION OF LIEN (To be submitted with each application for payment) (M.G.L. c. 254, §32) Application for Payment No.__________________________ OWNER: CONTRACTOR PROJECT ADDRESS PROJECT LENDER/MORTGAGEE The Commonwealth of Massachusetts acting by and through the Department of Housing and Community Development under the Affordable Housing Trust Fund Statute, M.G.L. c. 121D, by its administrator Massachusetts Housing Finance Agency; the Community Economic Development Assistance Corporation; and Community Economic Development Assistance Corporation, as agent for The Commonwealth of Massachusetts, acting by and through the Department of Housing and Community Development under the Housing Innovations Trust Fund Statute, M.G.L. c. 121E 1. Original Contract Amount: $___________ 2. Approved Change Orders: $___________ 3. Adjusted Contract Amount (Line 1 plus Line 2): $___________ 4. Work Completed to Date: $___________ 5. Less Retainage: ($__________) 6. Total Payable to Date (Line 4 less Line 5): $___________ 7. Less Previous Payments: ($__________) 8. Current Amount Due (Line 6 less Line 7): $___________ Pending Change Orders: $___________ Disputed Claims: $___________ The undersigned Contractor, who has a contract with Owner for furnishing labor or materials, or both labor and materials, and/or rental equipment, appliances or tools for the erection, alteration, repair and/or removal of the building(s) and/or structure(s) or other improvement of real property known and identified as __________________________________, Massachusetts and owned by Owner, upon receipt of ___________________________ Dollars ($_______) in payment of an invoice/requisition/application for payment dated ________________ and does hereby: (a) waive, release, discharge and relinquish any and all liens and claims or rights of lien on such real property for labor or materials, or both labor and materials, and/or rental equipment, appliances or tools, performed or furnished through the following date: __________________ (the "payment period"), except for retainage, unpaid agreed or pending change orders, and disputed claims as stated above; and (b) subordinate any and all liens and claims or rights of lien to secure payment for such unpaid, agreed or pending change orders and disputed claims, and such further labor or materials, or both labor and materials, and/or rental equipment, appliances or tools, except for retainage, performed or furnished at any time through the twenty-fifth day after the end of the above payment period, to the extent of the amount actually advanced by the above lender/mortgagee through such twenty-fifth day. The undersigned represents and warrants that is has paid in full each and every subcontractor, sub- subcontractor, laborer and labor and/or materials supplier with whom undersigned has dealt in connection with the Project and all taxes and benefits on account thereof and the undersigned agrees at its sole cost and expense to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner against any and all claims made by such subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, laborers and labor and/or material suppliers or third parties arising out of or in any way related to the Project. Prospect Place Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Special Conditions 00 21 10 8 of 18 The undersigned individual represents and warrants that he/she is the duly authorized representative of the Contractor, empowered and authorized to execute and deliver this document on behalf of the Contractor and that this document shall be binding upon the undersigned. Signed under seal and under the penalties of perjury this _____ day of ____________________, 20____. _________________________________________ By: ___________________________________ Name: Title: Hereunto duly authorized COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS ____________________ County, ss. On this _________ day of _________, 20____, before me, the undersigned notary public, personally appeared ______________________, proved to me through satisfactory evidence of identification, which was (a current driver’s license) (a current U.S. passport) (my personal knowledge of the identity of the principal), to be the person whose name is signed on the preceding or attached document, and acknowledged to me that he/she signed it voluntarily, as ______________ of _____________________, for its stated purpose as the voluntary act of __________________. __________________________________________ Notary Public My commission expires: Prospect Place Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Special Conditions 00 21 10 9 of 18 CONTRACTOR’S CONDITIONAL WAIVER AND RELEASE UPON FINAL PAYMENT (To be submitted with final application for payment) (M.G.L. c. 254, §32) Application for Payment No.__________________________ OWNER: CONTRACTOR PROJECT ADDRESS PROJECT LENDER/MORTGAGEE The Commonwealth of Massachusetts acting by and through the Department of Housing and Community Development under the Affordable Housing Trust Fund Statute, M.G.L. c. 121D, by its administrator Massachusetts Housing Finance Agency; the Community Economic Development Assistance Corporation; and Community Economic Development Assistance Corporation, as agent for The Commonwealth of Massachusetts, acting by and through the Department of Housing and Community Development under the Housing Innovations Trust Fund Statute, M.G.L. c. 121E 1. Original Contract Amount: $___________ 2. Approved Change Orders: $___________ 3. Adjusted Contract Amount (Line 1 plus Line 2): $___________ 4. Less Previous Payments: ($__________) 5. Final Payment Amount: $___________ In consideration of all past payments received from the Owner in connection with the Project, the undersigned acknowledges and agrees that, except for the Final Payment Amount (as set forth above), it has received full payment of all amounts due, including all amounts due under its contract, for labor, materials and/or rental equipment, appliances or tools for the erection, alteration, repair and/or removal of the building(s) and/or structure(s) or other improvement of real property known and identified as _______________________________, Massachusetts and owned by Owner, furnished by the undersigned to or in connection with the Project. The undersigned further acknowledges and agrees that upon receipt of a check in the Final Payment Amount and payment of such check by the bank upon which it is drawn, the undersigned will release, discharge, relinquish and waive any and all liens, claims and rights of lien under the statutes of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts with respect to the Owner, the Project and/or against the Owner on account of any labor, materials and/or rental equipment, appliances or tools furnished in connection with the Project. The undersigned hereby (i) releases, remises and discharges the Owner, any and all partners, agents and affiliates of the Owner, including but not limited to the project architect, and their respective predecessors, successors, assigns, employees, officers, shareholders, directors, and principals, whether disclosed or undisclosed (collectively “Releasees”) from and against any and all claims, demands, losses, damages, suits, disputes, actions, causes of action, liens and claims of lien, costs and expenses (including attorneys’ fees and expenses) (collectively “Claims”) which the undersigned and anyone claiming by, through or under the undersigned has or may have against the Releasees, including, without limitation, any Claims arising out of or in connection with the contract or contracts between the Owner and the General Contractor for the construction of the Project and the work performed thereunder, other than its claim for the Final Payment Amount, (ii) acknowledges, understands and agrees that the payment of the Final Payment Amount is not to be construed as an admission of liability on the part of Owner and that any such liability is hereby denied, (iii) warrants and represents that it has not sold, assigned, granted, conveyed or transferred to any other firm, person, corporation, partnership, limited liability company or other entity any of the Claims, and (iv) represents and warrants that is has paid in full each and every subcontractor, sub-subcontractor, laborer and labor and/or materials supplier with whom undersigned has dealt in connection with the Project and all taxes and benefits on account thereof and the undersigned agrees at its sole cost and expense to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner/Releasees against any and all Claims made by such subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, laborers and labor and/or material suppliers or third parties arising out of or in any way related to the Project. Prospect Place Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Special Conditions 00 21 10 10 of 18 The undersigned individual represents and warrants that he/she is the duly authorized representative of the undersigned, empowered and authorized to execute and deliver this document on behalf of the undersigned and that this document shall be binding upon the undersigned. Signed under seal and under the penalties of perjury this _____ day of ____________________, 20___. _________________________________________ By: ___________________________________ Name: Title: Hereunto duly authorized COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS ____________________ County, ss. On this _________ day of _________, 20___, before me, the undersigned notary public, personally appeared ______________________, proved to me through satisfactory evidence of identification, which was (a current driver’s license) (a current U.S. passport) (my personal knowledge of the identity of the principal), to be the person whose name is signed on the preceding or attached document, and acknowledged to me that he/she signed it voluntarily, as ______________ of _______________, for its stated purpose as the voluntary act of ________________________. __________________________________________ Notary Public My commission expires: Prospect Place Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Special Conditions 00 21 10 11 of 18 PARTIAL LIEN WAIVER — SUBCONTRACTOR OR SUPPLIER WHO DOES NOT HAVE A DIRECT CONTRACT WITH THE OWNER (To be submitted with each application for payment) Application for Payment No.____________ OWNER: CONTRACTOR PROJECT ADDRESS PROJECT SUBCONTRACTOR AND/OR SUPPLIER: 1. Original Contract Amount: $___________ 2. Approved Change Orders: $___________ 3. Adjusted Contract Amount (Line 1 plus Line 2): $___________ 4. Work Completed to Date: $___________ 5. Less Retainage: ($__________) 6. Total Payable to Date (Line 4 less Line 5): $___________ 7. Less Previous Payments: ($__________) 8. Current Amount Due (Line 6 less Line 7): $___________ Pending Change Orders: $___________ Disputed Claims: $___________ In consideration of all past payments received from the Contractor and/or the Owner in connection with the Project, the undersigned acknowledges and agrees that it has been paid all sums shown above as previously paid for labor, materials and/or rental equipment, appliances or tools for the erection, alteration, repair and/or removal of the building(s) and/or structure(s) or other improvement of real property known and identified as ________________________________, Massachusetts and owned by Owner, furnished by the undersigned to or in connection with the Project and the undersigned hereby releases, discharges, relinquishes and waives any and all liens, claims or rights of lien under the statutes of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts with respect to the Owner, the Project and/or against the Owner on account of any labor, materials and/or rental equipment, appliances or tools previously furnished and paid for as shown above. The undersigned represents and warrants that it has paid in full (or will pay in full with the payment received in connection herewith) each and every sub-subcontractor, laborer and labor and/or material supplier with whom the undersigned has dealt in connection with the Project and all taxes and benefit payments on account thereof and the undersigned agrees at its sole cost and expense to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor and Owner against any claims, demands, suits, disputes, damages, costs, expenses (including attorneys’ fees), liens and/or claims of lien made by such sub- subcontractors, laborers and labor and/or material suppliers arising out of or in any way related to the Project. The undersigned hereby subordinates any and all liens and right of lien to secure payment for unpaid, agreed or pending change orders and disputed claims, each as stated above, and such further labor or materials, or both labor and materials, or rental equipment, appliances or tools, except for retainage, performed or furnished at any time through the twenty-fifth day after the end of the above payment period, to the extent of the amount actually advanced by the above lender/mortgagee through such twenty-fifth day. The undersigned individual represents and warrants that he/she is the duly authorized representative of the Subcontractor/Supplier, empowered and authorized to execute and deliver this document on behalf of the Subcontractor/Supplier and that this document shall be binding upon the undersigned. Prospect Place Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Special Conditions 00 21 10 12 of 18 Signed under seal and under the penalties of perjury as of this _____ day of _________, _____. SUBCONTRACTOR: By: ___________________________________ Name: Title: Hereunto duly authorized Submitted with General Contractor’s Application for Payment No. _________________ Prospect Place Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Special Conditions 00 21 10 13 of 18 CONDITIONAL WAIVER AND RELEASE UPON FINAL PAYMENT SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER WHO DOES NOT HAVE A DIRECT CONTRACT WITH THE OWNER (To be submitted with Contractor’s Final Application for Payment) OWNER: CONTRACTOR PROJECT ADDRESS PROJECT SUBCONTRACTOR AND/OR SUPPLIER 1. Original Contract Amount: $___________ 2. Approved Change Orders: $___________ 3. Adjusted Contract Amount (Line 1 plus Line 2): $___________ 4. Less Previous Payments: ($__________) 5. Final Payment Amount: $___________ In consideration of all past payments received from the Contractor and/or the Owner in connection with the Project, the undersigned acknowledges and agrees that, except for the Final Payment Amount (as set forth above), it has received full payment of all amounts due, including all amounts due under its Subcontract, for labor, materials and/or rental equipment, appliances or tools for the erection, alteration, repair and/or removal of the building(s) and/or structure(s) or other improvement of real property known and identified as __________________________, Massachusetts and owned by Owner, furnished by the undersigned to or in connection with the Project. The undersigned further acknowledges and agrees that upon receipt of a check in the Final Payment Amount and payment of such check by the bank upon which it is drawn, the undersigned will release, discharge, relinquish and waive any and all liens, claims and rights of lien under the statutes of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts with respect to the Owner, the Project and/or against the Owner on account of any labor, materials and/or rental equipment, appliances or tools furnished in connection with the Project. The undersigned hereby (i) releases, remises and discharges the Owner, any and all partners, agents and affiliates of the Owner, including but not limited to the Contractor and the project architect, and their respective predecessors, successors, assigns, employees, officers, shareholders, directors, and principals, whether disclosed or undisclosed (collectively “Releasees”) from and against any and all claims, demands, losses, damages, suits, disputes, actions, causes of action, liens and claims of lien, costs and expenses (including attorneys’ fees and expenses) (collectively “Claims”) which the undersigned and anyone claiming by, through or under the undersigned has or may have against the Releasees, including, without limitation, any Claims arising out of or in connection with the contract or contracts between the undersigned and the Contractor for the construction of the Project and the work performed thereunder, other than its claim for the Final Payment Amount, (ii) acknowledges, understands and agrees that the payment of the Final Payment Amount is not to be construed as an admission of liability on the part of Owner and that any such liability is hereby denied, (iii) warrants and represents that it has not sold, assigned, granted, conveyed or transferred to any other firm, person, corporation, partnership, limited liability company or other entity any of the Claims, and (iv) represents and warrants that is has paid in full each and every subcontractor, sub-subcontractor, laborer and labor and/or materials supplier with whom undersigned has dealt in connection with the Project and all taxes and benefits on account thereof and the undersigned agrees at its sole cost and expense to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner/Releasees against any and all Claims made by such subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, laborers and labor and/or material suppliers or third parties arising out of or in any way related to the Project. The undersigned has not and will not assign any claim against Contractor, its sureties, and other guarantors on the Bond or other undertaking, nor any lien or right to perfect a lien against the Project. The undersigned warrants that no security interest has been given or executed by the undersigned for or in connection with any materials, appliances, machinery, fixtures, or furnishings placed upon or installed in the Project. This CONDITIONAL WAIVER AND RELEASE UPON FINAL PAYMENT shall be an independent covenant and shall operate and be effective with respect to all work, services, labor, equipment or materials furnished in connection with the Project under any contract or supplemental contract, Prospect Place Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Special Conditions 00 21 10 14 of 18 whether oral or written, and shall be applicable to any and all contract, extra or additional work performed or costs incurred at any time by the undersigned with respect to the Project. The undersigned individual represents and warrants that he/she is the duly authorized representative of the undersigned, empowered and authorized to execute and deliver this document on behalf of the undersigned and that this document shall be binding upon the undersigned. Signed under seal and under the penalties of perjury as of this _____ day of _______, ______. SUBCONTRACTOR: By: ___________________________________ Name: Title: Hereunto duly authorized Prospect Place Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Special Conditions 00 21 10 15 of 18 1.04 Contractor MBE Reporting Forms Prospect Place Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Special Conditions 00 21 10 16 of 18 Prospect Place Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Special Conditions 00 21 10 17 of 18 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Prospect Place Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Special Conditions 00 21 10 18 of 18 This Page Intentionally left Blank Prospect Place Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Form for General Bid 00 41 00 1 of 4 FORM FOR GENERAL BID TO THE AWARDING AUTHORITY A. The undersigned proposes to furnish all labor and materials required for the Amherst Supportive Studio Apartments In Amherst, Massachusetts, in accordance with the accompanying plans and specifications prepared by Austin Design, Inc. For the contract price specified below, subject to additions and deductions according to the terms of the specifications. B. This bid includes addenda numbered: C. The proposed Fixed Total Lump Sum Contract price is: Dollars $ Bid Amount in Words Bid Amount in Numbers For Alternate No. Add $ Subtract $ No. $ $ No. $ $ No. $ $ Each Alternate shall be listed separately. Owner may elect to accept any or no alternates in any order. For Allowance No. Add $ Subtract $ No. $ $ No. $ $ No. $ $ Each Allowance shall be listed separately. Owner may elect to accept any or no alternates in any order. D. Price Breakdown: • Attach a breakdown of the Fixed Total Lump Sum Contract price on the Trade Cost Breakdown Form provided below • As applicable, provide separate list of any exclusions from price or assumptions that impact price. • Provide separate itemization of General Conditions, General Requirements, and Overhead expenses. E. The undersigned agrees that, if he is selected as general contractor, he will within five days, Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays excluded, after presentation thereof by the awarding authority, execute a contract in accordance with the terms of this bid and furnish a performance bond and also a labor and materials or payment bond, each of a surety company qualified to do business under the laws of the Prospect Place Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Form for General Bid 00 41 00 2 of 4 Commonwealth and satisfactory to the awarding authority and each in the sum of the full (100%) contract price, the premiums for which are to be paid by the general contractor and are included in the contract price; provided, however, that if there is more than 1 surety company, the surety companies shall be jointly and severally liable. F. The undersigned hereby certifies that he is able to furnish labor that can work in harmony with all other elements of labor employed or to be employed on the work; that all employees to be employed at the worksite will have successfully completed a course in construction safety and health approved by the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration that is at least 10 hours in duration at the time the employee begins work and who shall furnish documentation of successful completion of said course with the first certified payroll report for each employee G. The undersigned further certifies under the penalties of perjury that this bid is in all respects bona fide, fair and made without collusion or fraud with any other person. As used in this subsection the word "person" shall mean natural person, joint venture, partnership, corporation or other business or legal entity. The undersigned further certifies under penalty of perjury that the said undersigned is not presently debarred from doing public construction work in the Commonwealth under the provisions of section twenty-nine F of chapter twenty-nine, or any other applicable debarment provisions of any other chapter of the General Laws or any rule or regulation promulgated there under. NAME OF BIDDER BUSINESS ADDRESS SIGNATURE AND TITLE OF PERSON SIGNING BID Date Prospect Place Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Form for General Bid 00 41 00 3 of 4 TRADE COST BREAKDOWN FORM PROSPECT PLACE NO. DIV ITEM SUBCONTRACTOR NAME AMOUNT NOTES 2 Demolition 3 Concrete 4 Masonry 5 Structural Steel 5 Miscellaneous Metals 6 Rough Carpentry 6 Finish Carpentry 7 Thermal Insulation 7 Air and Vapor Barriers 7 Membrane Roofing and Flashing 7 Firestopping 7 Joint Sealants 8 Hollow metal Doors and Frames 8 Wood and Composite Doors and Frames Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts 8 Windows 8 Metal Framed Skylights 8 Hardware 8 Glass and Glazing 9 Gypsum Board & Plaster 9 Ceramic Tile 9 Acoustic Ceiling Panels 9 Resilient Flooring 9 Painting 10 Miscellaneous Specialties 11 Appliances 12 Window Treatments 12 Cabinets and Countertops 14 Passenger Elevators 21 Fire Protection 22 Plumbing & Hot Water 23 HVAC 23 Geothermal 26 Electrical 27 Communications Subtotal Structure Prospect Place Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Form for General Bid 00 41 00 4 of 4 31 Site Demolition 31 Earthwork 31 Erosion and Sediment Control 32 Bituminous Concrete Paving 32 Concrete Paving 32 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 32 Rubber Surfacing 32 Seeding and Sodding 32 Plantings 33 Water Distribution 33 Sanitary Sewer 33 Storm Drainage Subtotal Site Work Hazardous Material Removal 1 General Conditions Subtotal 1 Builders Overhead 1 Builders Profit Allowances TOTAL BASE BID AMOUNT Alternates 1 Solar Phase 2 2 Eliminate Berms from Base Bid 3 Plumbing Fixtures 4 Lighting Fixtures Allowances 1 Playground Equipment 2 Shade sails 3 Courtyard furniture 4 Radon System 5 Bike Shelter 6 Fall protection 7 National Grid Utility Fee 8 Camera Equipment 9 Graffiti Removal Sample Sample Sample Sample Sample Sample Sample Sample Prospect Place Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Notice of Award 00.63.00 1 of 2 NOTICE OF AWARD NOTICE OF AWARD Project: Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA 01002 TO:____________________________ ____________________________ ____________________________ PROJECT Description: The OWNER has considered the BID submitted by you for the above described WORK in response to its Advertisement for Bids dated ________________, 20 ____, and Information for Bidders. You are hereby notified that your BID has been accepted for items in the amount of $ _____________. You are required by the Information for Bidders to execute the Agreement and furnish the required Contractor’s Performance BOND, Payment BOND and certificates of insurance within ten (10) calendar days from the date of this Notice to you. If you fail to execute said Agreement and to furnish said BONDS within ten (10) days from the date of this Notice, said OWNER will be entitled to consider all your rights arising out of the Owner’s acceptance of your BID as abandoned and as a forfeiture of your BID BOND. The OWNER will be entitled to such other rights as may be granted by law. You are required to return an acknowledged copy of this NOTICE OF AWARD to the OWNER. Dated this ________________ day of _____________, 20____. _________________________ Owner By ______________________ Title ___________________ ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE Receipt of the above NOTICE OF AWARD is hereby acknowledged by ____________________________________________________________________. this the ____________________________ day of ____________________, 20____. By _____________________________Title ______________________ Prospect Place Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Notice of Award 00.63.00 2 of 2 This Page Intentionally Left Blank Prospect Place Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Notice To Proceed 00.63.10 1 of 2 NOTICE TO PROCEED Project: Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA 01002 TO: _______________________________ DATE:___________________________ _______________________________ Project:________________________ _______________________________ ________________________________ _______________________________ ________________________________ You are hereby notified to commence WORK in accordance with the Agreement dated _______________, 20___, on or before _________________, 20___, and you are to complete the WORK within ____________ consecutive calendar days thereafter. The date of completion of all WORK is therefore ___________________, 20___. _________________________ Owner By _____________________ Title __________________ ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE Receipt of the above NOTICE TO PRO- CEED is hereby acknowledged by _______ _____________________________________, This the _____________________, 20____ ______________________________________ By ___________________________________ Title ________________________________ Employer Identification Number _______________________________ Prospect Place Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Notice To Proceed 00.63.10 2 of 2 This Page Intentionally Left Blank This Page Intentionally Left Blank This Page Intentionally Left Blank Prospect Place Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Certificate Of Final Acceptance 00.63.70 1 of 2 CERTIFICATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE CERTIFICATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE Project: Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA 01002 Contractor This Certificate of Final Acceptance applies to all work under the Contract Documents for the above project or to the following specified parts thereof: _________________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ The work to which this Certificate applies has been inspected by authorized representatives of the Municipality and the Contractor, and that work is hereby declared to be completed in accordance with the Contract Documents on: Date of Final Acceptance The responsibilities between the Municipality and the Contractor for security, operations, safety, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance, and warranties shall be as follows: Municipality: Contractor: The following documents are attached to and made a part of this Certificate: This certificate does not constitute an acceptance of work not in accordance with the Contract Documents nor is it a release of Contractor's obligation to complete the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Accepted by: Accepted by: ________________________ _____________________________ Contractor Prospect Place Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Certificate Of Final Acceptance 00.63.70 2 of 2 This Page Intentionally Left Blank TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS This Page Intentionally Left Blank Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Summary Of Work 01 11 00 1 of 4 SECTION 01 11 00 Summary of Work PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes a summary description of the work, definitions, work by owner if any, and contract time. 1.03 PROJECT DESCRIPTION A. 737 Bridge Road is an existing 67,976 sq ft, 2 story brick building previously used as a nursing home that has been vacant since 2011, falling into severe disrepair. The property was acquired in 2022 by Prospect Place Owner LLC, a joint venture between the previous owner and the non-profit corporation Valley Community Development (Valley). 737 Bridge Road was acquired with a plan to change its use, following remediation and gut rehabilitating of the existing building, to approximately 60 affordable family apartments. B. Unit Break Down: Unit 1st floor 2nd Floor Total Studio 7 3 10 1 Bedroom 8 6 14 2 Bedroom 16 15 31 3 Bedroom 1 4 5 Total 32 28 60 C. Universal Design and Accessible Features – Site: 1. Site layout and features provide an accessible route from the street to parking and all building entrances. Accessible parking spaces are located adjacent to building entrances. D. Universal Design and Accessible Features - Building: 1. Vertical access to all floors is achieved by on-grade entrances and two elevators. 2. All units, at a minimum, are visitable with MAAB Group 1 floor and door clearances, kitchens and baths; a. One of these is equipped for the hearing impaired 3. Four units are MAAB Group 2A fully accessible; a. One of these is equipped for the hearing impaired 4. Two units are MAAB Group 2A fully accessible and additionally designed to meet DHCD CBH guidelines. 5. Two Units are adaptable to meet MAAB Group 2A fully accessible. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Summary Of Work 01 11 00 2 of 4 E. Construction Features 1. Site work includes changes to existing driveway entrance locations, changes to driveway route and parking, paving and surfacing, plantings, accessory bike storage and dumpster structures and fencing. 2. Utilities includes sanitary sewer, water service, storm water, electrical and geothermal wells. 3. Building Renovation: a. The existing building is fully gutted with all nonbearing partitions, finishes, mechanical systems removed. b. Envelope improvements include replacement of roof insulation and roofing, replacement of windows, cutting in of new windows, replacement of exterior doors, installation of new skylights, repointing and treatment of brick and stucco facade. c. Energy improvements will include increase roof insulation, increased wall insulation and new thermally broken double insulated windows and insulated thermally broken entrance doors. d. Interior will have new partitions fixtures and finishes. e. MEP HVAC work to include geothermally sourced ducted heat pump units in each apartment, central ducted ERV units for ventilation and tempered fresh air supply. Plumbing to include geothermally assisted heat pump water heaters and low flow fixtures. f. The building is fully sprinklered in accordance with NFPA 13.6 & 7 will be protected in accordance with NFPA 13D. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. The term “Owner” used in this specification refers to: Prospect Place, LLC 256 Pleasant Street, Suite A Northampton, MA 01060 Contact: Laura Baker (413) 586-5855 B. The term “Sponsor/Developer” used in this specification refers to: Valley Community Development 256 Pleasant Street, Suite A Northampton, MA 01060 Contact: Contact: William Womeldorf (413) 586-5855 B. The term “Architect” used in this specification refers to: Austin Design Cooperative, Inc. 167 main Street Brattleboro, VT 05301 Contact: Tom Chalmers 413 624 9669 tom@austin.design Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Summary Of Work 01 11 00 3 of 4 1.05 CONTRACT TIMETABLE Key Milestones Task Duration Milestone Dates Issuance of GC RFP Site Inspection 2 hours Questions due in writing 2 weeks Answers will be distributed in writing 3 days GC Proposals Due 3 weeks from RFP Issuance Review of Proposals by Owner; Interviews as Needed 2 weeks GC Selection 2 weeks GC / Owner finalize and execute contract 1 month GC obtains Building Permit 1 month Owner closes on Financing 2 months Construction Start Construction Completion (final C.O.) 16 months PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Summary Of Work 01 11 00 4 of 4 This Page Intentionally Left Blank Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Work Restrictions And Site Conduct 01 14 00 1 of 2 SECTION 01 14 00 Work Restrictions and Site Conduct PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary A. Section includes the requirements for work restrictions including Use of premises, occupancy requirements, work hours, use of public sidewalks and parking requirements. 1.3 Use of premises A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to areas where work is permitted. 2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner access to the site. 3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. 4. During construction, the Applicant shall maintain all feasible and reasonable means of dust control and shall collect all debris on a daily basis. 1.4 Occupancy Requirements A. The site will not be occupied by the owner during construction. 1.5 Work hours A. No construction, deliveries or any other activities may occur on Sundays or on New Year's Day, Memorial Day, July 4th , Labor Day, Thanksgiving, or Christmas. B. No construction or deliveries may begin before 7:00 a.m. nor continue past 6:00 p.m., unless approved in advance by the Amherst Board of Selectmen. C. Notwithstanding the foregoing, interior construction that doesn't generate excessive noise may occur on weekday evenings, until 10:00 p.m., and on Sundays from 8:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m.. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Work Restrictions And Site Conduct 01 14 00 2 of 2 1.6 Use of public sidewalks A. Public sidewalk shall remain open during the duration of construction. Contractor shall provide all barriers, signage, protections, etc. necessary to provide and maintain full use of sidewalk for pedestrians. Safety of pedestrians shall be maintained at all times. 1.7 Parking requirements A. Contractor, sub-contractor and all other construction-related vehicles shall park in the areas designated by the Owner. 1.8 Recycling requirements A. Contractor to achieve a minimum of 50% construction waste recycling of total construction and demolition materials, with filing of monthly waste management reports to the Project Architect. B. Construction procedures are to use materials efficiently, and that at least 75% of construction waste is to be recycled. Recycle all cardboard and foam packaging materials. Part 2 Products (not used) Part 3 Execution (not used) End of Section Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Unit Prices 01 22 00 1 of 4 Section 01 22 00 Unit prices PART 1 - GENERAL 1.10 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements that affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. B. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.20 DESCRIPTION OF WORK This Section contains instructions and references other Contract Documents that relate to Unit Prices. The Owner may elect certain aspects of the work, whose quantities cannot be determined at this time, to be performed or deleted by the Contractor. If such work items are elected, the Contract price will be adjusted by the Unit Price amount shown for each item in the Bid Forms. A. A Unit Price is an amount proposed by Bidders and stated on the Bid Form as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services that will be added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by Change Order in the event the estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. B. The Bidders shall submit with their Bids, prices for the performance of Unit Price work. The scope of the Unit Price work is defined within this section. C. The successful Bidder shall coordinate related work and modify or adjust adjacent work as necessary to ensure that work affected by each Unit Price Item is complete and fully integrated into the project. D. The specific quantities of Unit Price Work included in the Base Bid are provided herein. This applies to items whose exact quantities are unknown but are anticipated to exist, for example, deteriorated roof decking. E. The quantities of Unit Price Work listed in this Section and the bid and contract forms are in addition to the quantities shown on the Contract Drawings (if any). F. The Unit Prices requested herein shall include a pro-rata share of all costs for materials, labor, equipment costs, overhead, profit, and applicable taxes. G. Where not otherwise specified, Unit Prices cover net costs and credits to the Owner for executing authorized changes in the Work. No separate adjustments are made for labor, Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Unit Prices 01 22 00 2 of 4 materials, transportation, handling, storage, overhead, profit, or other related work expenses. H. If unit price quantities vary greater than twenty (20) percent above the amounts carried in the Base Bid, the Owner reserves the right to re-negotiate lower unit price costs. The Contractor will be required to notify the Owner once they approach this limit as the work progresses. 1.30 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Unit Prices for items of Work, as set forth in the Schedule of Unit Prices, shall be used to determine adjustments to the Contract Amount when changes in the Work involving said items are made in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Materials, methods of installation, and definitions of terms set forth under the various Unit Price items in the Schedule of Unit prices shall be as indicated in the Contract Documents. C. The successful Bidder shall coordinate related work and modify or adjust adjacent work as necessary to ensure that work affected by each Unit Price Item is complete and fully integrated into the project. 1.40 APPLICABILITY OF UNIT PRICES A. Prior to commencing removal or replacement of materials set forth in the schedule of Unit Prices, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in sufficient time to permit proper inspection and measurements to be taken. Only quantities that have been approved in writing by the Owner will be considered in the determination of adjustments to the Contract Sum. B. Unit Price Work includes providing and installing all accessories and appurtenant work necessary to properly execute the Unit Price Work. C. Performance of work not required by the Contract Documents, or which is not authorized by Change Order or Field Order, whether or not such work is set forth hereunder as a Unit Price item, shall not be considered cause for extra payment. The Contractor will be held fully responsible for such unauthorized work, including the performance of all corrective measures required by the Owner. 1.50 VERIFICATION OF UNIT PRICE QUANTITIES The following minimum procedures must be included by the Contractor for each of the indicated unit repair items for the duration of the project: A. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices and estimated quantities. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices and estimated quantities are as follows: 1. For work covered by scheduled quantities, notify the Owner and Engineer a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the performance of such work. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Unit Prices 01 22 00 3 of 4 2. Document such work in writing, identifying type of work, quantity and location of work. Submit documentation on Contractor’s letterhead. 3. All documentation of work covered by scheduled quantities will be subject to verification and approval by the Owner and Engineer. 4. In order to be considered for payment, documentation for work covered by scheduled quantities shall be submitted within one month of performance of such work. Requests for payment of such work submitted more than one month after the work has been performed will not be accepted. 5. Only documentation signed and verified by the Contractor, Trade, and the Owner’s Representative will be considered valid. Documentation not signed by all these parties will be considered invalid. B. The Contractor shall contact the Owner and Engineer if a Unit Price quantity is anticipated to be reached prior to exceeding that quantity. No additional costs will be awarded to the Contractor for additional Unit Price Work without written approval from the Owner and/or Engineer. C. The Contractor must provide safe, adequate, and ample access to the Owner and Engineer for verification of the Unit Price Work throughout the course of construction. D. The Contractor is required to track, and record actual placed and completed Unit Price Work throughout the course of construction and submit a breakdown to the Owner and Engineer on a weekly basis or as requested. The breakdown shall include the following for each Unit Price item: 1. Completed quantity to date 2. Remaining quantity to date 3. Percentage of total quantity remaining 1.60 UNIT PRICE SCHEDULE The following unit prices as defined in the specifications are designated for items of work on the basis of unknown quantities or quantities estimated by the Engineer. These unit prices will be used to add or to deduct from the dollar amounts shown, depending on whether the actual amount is greater or less than the estimated amount. The unit prices listed below are above and beyond that shown on the Contract Drawings and shall be included by the Contractor under the appropriate Base Bid Scope of Work. The Contractor’s Schedule of Values will carry each item under the bid amount selected for this project. Should the unit price work not be performed on this project, the total amount, or remaining amount if portions of unit price work are performed, shall be credited to the Owner. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Unit Prices 01 22 00 4 of 4 Unit Prices Base Bid: No. Section Item Quantity Carried Unit of Measure Unit Price Dollars/Cents Total Amount Dollars/Cents 1 04 20 00 Graffiti Removal Square Feet $ $ 2 04 20 00 Infill masonry at pipe penetration openings Each $ $ 3 04 20 00 Infill masonry at openings > 1 sf Square Feet $ $ 4 09 65 00 Floor levelling, patching Square Feet $ $ PART 2 – PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Alternates 01 23 00 1 of 4 Section 01 23 00 Alternates and Allowances PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary A. This Section includes specifications and requirements for Add and Deduct alternates including, Instructions and Provisions, add and deduct alternates. 1.4 Instructions and Provisions A. Each Bidder shall be held fully responsible for examining the scope of the alternates generally defined herein and for recognizing any modifications to the work caused by any alternate whether or not the particular trade Section is mentioned therein. B. All work which is affected by the alternates will be included in the bid by the General Contractor. C. General bidders shall enter a single amount in the appropriate space provided in the Form for Bid, which total amount shall consist of the amount for all work to be performed by the General Contractor including all labor, materials and accessories. D. The work of the various trades to be performed under Alternates shall be in strict accordance with the requirements of the particular trade Section of the Specifications. E. All bidders should take special notice of the strict requirement that the Alternate Section of the bid form must be properly filled out. 1.5 Allowances: A. Allowances by Number: 1 Courtyard playground Equipment shown on drawings. 2 Courtyard shade sails shown on drawings. 3 Courtyard furniture shown on drawings. 4 Radon System, design to be finalized. 5 Bike Shelter shown on drawings. 6 Fall protection and structural support per OSHA regulations 7 National Grid Utility Fee 8 Surveillance camera equipment 9 Graffiti Removal Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Alternates 01 23 00 2 of 4 1.6 Alternates A. Alternates by Number: 1. Alternate 1: Add Solar PV, Phase 2 as shown on solar drawings. 2. Alternate 2: Delete earthwork berms and associated plantings along Bridge Rd and Hatfield Street as shown on site plan from the base bid and substitute finish grade, loam and seeding. 3. Alternate 3: Substitute the plumbing fixture schedule shown below for the plumbing fixture schedule shown in the base bid. a. Aker CM60 one-piece fiberglass tub & shower units. b. Delta 1300 Series tub & shower valves. c. Gerber 41-610 waste & overflows. d. Gerber Viper comfort height water closets with seats. e. Delta Woodhurst 4" center lavatory faucets. f. Moen 2522 single bowl S/S kitchen sinks. g. Delta 400 DST 400 kitchen faucets. h. 60" Clarion one-piece ADA fiberglass showers. i. Delta ADA shower valves with handheld shower. j. Gerber 20 x 18 china wall hung lavatories. k. Delta 2559 ADA lavatory faucets. l. Washing machine connections. m. Lint Interceptors n. Oil separators o. ABS waste & vent. p. CPVC & Pex domestic water supply. q. Backflow and PRV Included r. Water Meter not included s. Price Subject to Product and Fixture Approvals t. Permit fees included u. Concrete cutting or coring not included/done by others v. Digging of trenches and backfilling by others. w. Pipe Insulation Included x. Fire caulking included y. Condensation piping for any equipment outside of plumbing equipment not included/done by others HV AC contractor z. Connections to the existing sewer per scoped plan of existing conditions aa. Replace all above ground roof drain piping and allowance for several feet offsetting at concrete penetrating location at each riser for new wall locations. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Alternates 01 23 00 3 of 4 4. Alternate 4: Substitute the lighting fixture schedule shown below for the lighting fixture schedule shown in the base bid. a. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Alternates 01 23 00 4 of 4 Part 2 Products (not used) Part 3 Execution (not used) End of Section Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Contract Modification 01 26 00 1 of 2 Section 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. 1.3 Section Includes: A. Minor Changes in the Work B. Documentation of change in Contract Sum and Contract Time C. Proposal Requests D. Change Order Procedures 1.4 Minor Changes in the Work A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, by appropriate, written documentation clearly indicating the scope of such minor changes. 1.5 Documentation of change in Contract Sum and Contract Time A. Maintain detailed records of work performed on a time and material basis. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs of changes in the Work. B. Document each quotation for a change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow evaluation of the quotation. 1.6 Proposal Requests A. Owner-initiated proposal requests: Architect will issue a description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised drawings and specifications. 1. Include a list of quantities and products required or eliminated and unit costs with total amounts of purchases and credits to be made. 2. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment costs, and discounts. 3. Include costs of labor directly attributed to the change 4. Include an updated Contractor’s construction schedule indicating the effect of the change on the contract time. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Contract Modification 01 26 00 2 of 2 B. Contractor-initiated proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the work. 2. Include a list of quantities and products required or eliminated and unit costs with total amounts of purchases and credits to be made. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment costs, and discounts. 4. Include costs of labor directly attributed to the change 5. Include an updated Contractor’s construction schedule indicating the effect of the change on the contract time. 1.7 Change Order Procedures A. All Change Orders must be submitted by the Applicant to the architect for review and approval signature, and then to the Owner for review and approval signature. Part 2 Products (not used) Part 3 Execution (not used) End of Section Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Payment Procedures 01 29 00 1 of 2 Section 01 29 00 Payment Procedures PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. 1.3 Definitions A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor’s Applications for Payment. 1.4 Schedule of Values A. Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one item for each Specification Section. Arrange Schedule of Values consistent with AIA document G703 or equal. 1. Differentiate between installed items, items stored on-site, and items stored off-site. 2. Provide separate lines for Contractor’s fee and Change Orders. 1.5 Applications for Payment A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. B. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Contractor to submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by Architect. D. Use AIA document G702 and G703 for Application for Payment. 1. Retainage: 5% E. Initial Application for Payment: Action and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. OSHA cards for all employees working on project F. With each partial requisition for payment submit the following: 1. Report on MBE/WBE, Section 3, and Minority Workforce Utilization 2. Partial lien waivers. 3. Updated PCO Log 4. Updated project schedule. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Payment Procedures 01 29 00 2 of 2 G. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. H. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706 or equal, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA document G706A or equal, “Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens”. 6. Evidence that claims have been settled. Part 2 Products (not used) Part 3 Execution (not used) End of Section Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Project Management And Coordination 01 31 00 1 of 4 Section 01 31 00 Project Management, Coordination, and Construction Documentation PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 Summary A. Definitions. B. Project Coordination. C. Project administration. D. Requests for Information (RFI’s). E. Project meetings. F. Contractor’s construction schedule and updating reports. G. Record Drawings. 1.03 Definitions A. RFI, Request for Information: Request from Owner, Construction Manager, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents. B. Covid-19 Protocols & Related Costs: As part of the base bid price, the Contractor assumes the implementation of, and the costs related to, Covid-19 protocols in place as of the date of bidding (October 2021). Such protocols are based upon guidance from the Governor’s office and the locality as of that date. Should there be future orders or public guidance issued related to Covid-19 or other health emergency during the period of construction that involve new or enhanced requirements, the methods of compliance and costs of compliance will be negotiated by the Contractor and Owner. C. Price Escalation / Shipping Delays: This is a fixed bid contract. GCs are expected to include within their fixed bid price any contingencies they deem necessary and prudent to anticipate and account for price escalation between the time of bid and the time of construction as well as any costs related to shipping delays or delays in receiving materials. This is critical so that the Owner can fairly evaluate the bid prices. 1.04 Project Coordination A. The Contractor is fully responsible for coordinating the Work of this Contract including scheduling, submittals, Work and other activities included in various Sections to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. The Contractor is responsible for Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Project Management And Coordination 01 31 00 2 of 4 coordinating actual installed location and interface of work, and to make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Where installation of one component depends on installation of other components before or after its own installation, schedule activities in the sequence required to obtain efficient installation with the least amount of alterations, or cutting and patching, to completed Work. 1.05 Project site administration A. Conduct conferences among separate contractors, sub-contractors and others concerned with the Work, to establish and maintain coordination and schedules, and to resolve coordination matters in dispute. B. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of administrative procedures with other activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress. C. Pre-Construction Conference: Prior to the commencement of work, Contractor shall schedule a meeting on or near the site. Attendance is required by Owner, Architect, Construction Coordinator, major sub-contractors, installers, and suppliers, and other persons the Architect or Construction Coordinator may direct or the General Contractor may wish to have present. Items of agenda: 1. Use of premises by Owner, Contractor, and subcontractor(s). 2. Temporary utilities. 3. Barricading and protection of the public, dust barriers. 4. Potentially difficult areas of work. 5. Project coordination. 6. Security and housekeeping procedures. 7. Construction schedules. 8. Application and Payment procedures 9. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 1.06 Requests for Information A. Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. B. Contractor shall prepare and maintain a log of RFI’s by number, date of request, subject, date of response. C. All RFI’s are to be submitted by General Contractor. RFI’s received by other entities controlled by Contractor will be returned with no response. 1.07 Project Meetings A. The Architect shall schedule and administer regular job meetings throughout the progress of the Work; make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings, record minutes and distribute copies within one week to Contractor, Owner and participants of meeting only. Contractor is responsible for distribution to subcontractors, vendors, suppliers and others who are affected by decisions made. 1. Meetings shall be on or near the site every two weeks. B. In addition to regular job meetings, other meeting shall include; Pre-construction conference, Pre-installation conferences (if necessary), Project close-out conference. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Project Management And Coordination 01 31 00 3 of 4 1.08 Contractor’s construction schedule and updating reports A. Scheduling of the Work: Submit Gantt/Bar progress schedule within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement for Architect's review. Revise and resubmit schedule for each Project Meeting, minimum. B. The Schedule shall show the sequence and phasing of activities required and reflect the manner in which actual work will be performed. The number of activities shown in the Schedule must be at least equal and related to the number of items listed in the Schedule of Values including back-up detail. C. Conclude all activities on one common end date, show contract completion date as a milestone activity on the Schedule. D. Schedule shall be revised as necessary to show the effect of all Contract modifications. E. Furnish copies of the Progress schedule, and revisions, to all subcontractors, installers, equipment vendors and suppliers. F. Schedule to be of a size adequate to display entire schedule for entire construction period. 1.09 Record Drawings A. Contractor shall keep on site a duplicate copy of the Contract Documents in order to neatly and clearly record any and all modifications and revisions to the Work during Construction. These drawings shall form the basis of the Record Drawings to be provided at the end of the project. 1. Deliver one hardest copy and one PDF the Owner. Part 2 Products (not used) Part 3 Execution (not used) END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Project Management And Coordination 01 31 00 4 of 4 This Page Intentionally Left Blank Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Submittals And Substitutions 01 33 00 1 of 6 Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures and Substitutions PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary A. Section includes the requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Product substitution procedures. 1.3 Submittal Procedures - General A. The process of submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples is intended to give the Owner, the Architect and the Architect’s consultants an opportunity to review proposed building components before they are ordered, fabricated or installed. This is the only purpose of the procedure. The Architect/Engineer's stamp on a submittal indicates only that A/E review has taken place and the results of that review. It in no way certifies that the submittal is complete, accurate, coordinated with the work of other trades, or consistent with the Contract Documents. B. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect’s approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or other submittals unless the Contractor has specifically, clearly and unambiguously informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation. C. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in submittals by the Architect’s failure to uncover such errors and omissions in the submittal review process. 1.4 Submittal Coordination A. Make submittals in a proper and timely fashion, allowing for administrative procedures, Architect’s review, corrections to submissions and resubmittal, if necessary, and fabrication of products without delaying the project. Minimum processing times required by the Architect are as follows: 1. Review for Architect’s Office only: Allow a minimum of 10 working days for review and processing. 2. Review by Architect and its consultant: Allow 10 working days for review and processing of submittals by Architect plus an additional 5 working days for review by each consultant. 3. Reprocessing of submittals: For submittals requiring resubmittal, re- processing time required shall be the same as first submittal. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Submittals And Substitutions 01 33 00 2 of 6 4. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized due to failure to transmit submittals sufficiently in advance of scheduled performance of Work. B. Make submittals of similar items, systems, or those specified in a single specification section together. C. Make submittals for products which other products are contingent upon, first. D. The Contractor is fully responsible for delay in the delivery of materials or progress of work caused by late review of shop drawings due to failure of the Contractor to submit, revise, or resubmit shop drawings in adequate time to allow the Architect checking and processing of each submission or resubmission. 1.5 Submittal Procedures and Grading A. Prepare and submit to the Architect a Construction Schedule, a Schedule of Values, and a Schedule of shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Provide space for Contractor, Architect and engineering consultant review stamps, on the front page of each item's submittal copy. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. The Architect's stamp shall contain the following data: ________ REVIEWED ________ FURNISH AS CORRECTED ________ REVISE AND RESUBMIT ________ REJECTED 1. The Architect will insert the date of action taken and an identification of the person taking the action. 2. Submittal grading: a. REVIEWED - No corrections, no marks. b. FURNISH AS CORRECTED - Resubmission not required. Minor amount of corrections; all items can be fabricated without further corrections to original submission; checking is complete and all corrections are deemed obvious without ambiguity. c. REVISE AND RESUBMIT - Resubmission required. Minor amounts of corrections; checking is not complete; details of items noted by checker are to be clarified further before full review can be given. Correct and resubmit, do not fabricate noted items requiring correction. d. REJECTED - Submittal is rejected as not in accord with the Contract Documents, too many corrections, or other justifiable reasons. When returning submission, Architect will state reasons for rejection. Correct and resubmit, do not fabricate. 3. Review/approval neither extends nor alters any contractual obligations of the Architect, Engineer or Contractor. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Submittals And Substitutions 01 33 00 3 of 6 C. Identify all variations from Contract Documents, and product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed work. D. Coordinate related submittals and schedule submissions to expedite the Project and deliver to the Architect. E. Contractor's review: Review all shop drawings, product data and samples. Include, without limitation, verification of the following: 1. Proper title, original date, drawing number (which shall be changed if resubmitted), revision numbers and dates, designation of project contractor, subcontractor and/or supplier. 2. Identification of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples by Specification Section and subsection or paragraph where appropriate and identification of Contract Drawings by number and detail. 3. On each submittal, as a minimum, Contractor shall identify the following: a. Errors, inconsistencies, and omissions discovered in the contract documents and field conditions must be reported at once to the Architect. b. Any variations from code requirements contained in the contract documents must be reported promptly in writing to both the Architect and owner. c. Promptly report to the Architect information that any design, process, or product infringes on a patent. d. Names of Subcontractors and Suppliers must be given in writing to the Architect as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, preferably at the pre-construction meeting. (Note: If objection is made, a change order is possible.) List shall include name(s) of contact person(s), address, telephone and fax number(s). F. Revise and resubmit submittals as required, identify all changes made since previous submittal. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties; instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. 1.6 Submittal Quantity Requirements A. Furnish Architect with the following quantities of each submittal: 1. Shop drawings: 1 reproducible and 3 blackline prints per drawing. 2. Product data, manufacturer’s instructions and certificates and similar submissions: 4 copies. 3. Samples: Sets of 2 identical samples of each submission required. 4. Emergency addresses: 1 copy to Architect, 1 copy direct to Owner, and 1 copy direct to Construction Coordinator. 1.7 Submittals A. Shop Drawings: General: Provide accurately prepared, large scale and detailed shop drawings prepared specifically for this Project. Show adjacent conditions and related work. Show accurate field dimensions where appropriate. Identify materials and products shown. Note all conditions where require coordination with other trades and special installation procedures. Standard information prepared without specific reference to Project are not considered shop drawings. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Submittals And Substitutions 01 33 00 4 of 6 B. Product Data: Submit Product data as specified, and as the Architect may additionally prescribe. Product data includes, but is not limited to: 1. Catalog cuts. 2. Complete specifications. 3. Standard color charts. 4. Performance data. 5. Certified laboratory test report data. 6. Health and safety precautions. 7. Illustrated capacities, characteristics, wiring diagrams, controls, and other pertinent information for complete product and product use description. 1.8 Emergency Addresses A. Within 15 days of Notice to Proceed, submit in writing, the name, addresses and telephone numbers of key members of their organization including Contractor’s Superintendent and personnel at the site, to be contacted in the event of emergencies at the building site, which may occur during non-working hours. 1.9 Product Substitution Procedures A. Product Options 1. Products specified by reference standards or by description only: Provide any acceptable product meeting those standards or description. 2. Products specified by performance requirements only: Provide any acceptable product which has been tested to show compliance with specified requirements, including indicated performances. 3. Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers: Provide products of manufacturers named, or submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer or product not named. B. Product Substitution Procedures 1. Document each request for substitution with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. 2. A request constitutes a representation that the Contractor has; investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product; will provide the same warranty of for the specified product; will coordinate installation and make changes to other work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner; waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. 3. Substitution submittal procedure: Submit 3 copies of request. Limit each request to one proposed Substitution. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Submittals And Substitutions 01 33 00 5 of 6 Part 2 Products (not used) Part 3 Execution (not used) END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Submittals And Substitutions 01 33 00 6 of 6 This Page Intentionally Left Blank Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Regulatory Requirements 01 41 00 1 of 2 Section 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary A. This section consists of applicable codes and regulations. Regulations include laws, ordinances, statutes and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work, whether lawfully imposed by authorities having jurisdiction or not. 1.3 Applicable Codes and Regulations A. All work shall be performed in accordance with the latest version, by DATE OF ISSUE for Contract Documents, current on date of Owner-Contractor Agreement, except as indicated otherwise, of all applicable codes including the following: 1. Massachusetts State Building Code, Eighth edition, as amended. 2. Massachusetts Lead Law. 3. Local Town Zoning Bylaws, as amended. 4. Massachusetts Fuel, Gas, and Plumbing Code. 5. Massachusetts Electrical Code (National Electrical Code, with Massachusetts amendments from 527 CMR 12.00). 6. Massachusetts Fire Prevention Regulations (527 CMR). 7. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Regulation 521 CMR: Architectural Access Board, as amended. 8. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Wetlands Protection Act. 9. United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 10. United States Environmental Protection Agency 40 CFR Part 745 Lead: Requirements for Lead-Based Paint Activities in Target Housing and Child-Occupied Facilities. 11. United States Department of Justice, Nº 28 CFR Part 36 - Americans with Disabilities Act, (Public Law 101-336). 12. Byrd Anti-Lobbying Amendment, 31 USC1352. 13. Nondiscrimination Provisions of Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, Title IX of the Education Amendments of 1972 (as amended), Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 (as amended), the Age Discrimination Act of 1973 (as amended) and the regulations issued pursuant thereto by NEH (Code of Federal Regulations, Title 45, Chapter XI). 14. The Drug-Free Workplace Act of 1988, 41 USC 701. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Regulatory Requirements 01 41 00 2 of 2 15. All local, state, and federal health and safety rules and regulations for Covid-19 construction site compliance. B. Publication Dates: Where the date of issue of a code or regulation is not specified, comply with the standard in effect as of date of Contract Documents, or as otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 Trade Union Jurisdictions A. Maintain current information on Jurisdictional matters, regulations, actions and pending actions; and administer/supervise performance of Work in a manner which will minimize possibility of disputes, conflicts, delays, claims, or losses. Part 2 Products (not used) Part 3 Execution (not used) End of Section Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 References 01 42 00 1 of 4 Section 01 42 00 References PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 Section includes A. Reference Standards. B. Abbreviations and Acronyms. 1.2 Reference standards A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal Standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard by DATE OF ISSUE for Contract Documents, current on date of Owner-Contractor Agreement. C. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. The contractual relationship to the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. E. Schedule of References 1. Listed below are abbreviations for the names and titles of trade association names, federal government agencies and similar organizations which are referenced in the individual specification sections. The addresses and phone numbers provided are for the Contractor’s convenience and are believed to be current and accurate, however addresses and phone numbers frequently change, and no assurance is made on their accuracy: ADC Air Diffusion Council 104 S. Michigan Ave, Suite 1500, Chicago, IL 60603 (312) 201-0101 AFPA American Forest & Paper Association (Formerly NFPA National Forest Products Association) 1111 19th St. N.W., Suite 800, Washington, DC 20036 (202) 463-2700 AGA American Gas Association Inc. 1515 Wilson Blvd. Arlington, VA 22209-2469 (800)-841-8430 AIA American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W., Washington, DC 20006-5292 (202) 626-7426 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 1 E. Wacher Dr., Suite 3100, Chicago, IL 60601-2001 (312) 670-2400 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association 30 W. University Drive, Arlington Heights, IL 60004-1893 (847) 394-0150 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 References 01 42 00 2 of 4 ANSI American National Standards Institute 11 W. 42nd Street, 13 Floor, New York, NY 10036 (212) 642-4900 ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 4301 N. Fairfax Dr., Suite 425, Arlington, VA 22203 (703) 524-8800 ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers 1015 15th St. N.W., Washington, DC 20005 800-548-2723 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air- Conditioning Engineers 1791 Tullie Circle NE, Atlanta GA.30329 404-636-8400 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017-2392 (212) 705-7722 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428 (610) 832-9500 AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 1952 Isaac Newton Square W., Reston, VA 20190 (703) 733-0600 AWPA American Wood Preservers’ Association P.O. Box 286, Woodstock, MD 21163-0286 (410) 465-3169 AWPI American Wood Preservers’ Institution 1945 Old Gallows Rd., Suite 150, Vienna, VA 22182 (703) 893-4005 AWS American Welding Society 550 LeJeune Road, N.W., Miami, FL 33126 (800) 443-9353 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc. 355 Lexington Ave., 17 Floor New York, NY 10017 (212) 661-4261 CRI Carpet and Rug Institute 310 Holiday Ave Dalton, GA 30720 (800) 882-8846 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 N. Plum Grove Road Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758 (847) 517-1200 CTIOA Ceramic Tile Institute of America 12061 W.Jefferson BLVD, Culver City, CA 90230-6219 (310) 574 - 7800 DHI Door and Hardware Institute 14170 Newbrook Dr. Chantilly, VA 22021-2223 (703) 222-2010 EWA The Engineered Wood Association (formerly APA - American Plywood Association) P.O. Box 11700, Tacoma, WA 98411-0070 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 References 01 42 00 3 of 4 (253) 565-6600 FM Factory Mutual Engineering & Research Corp. 1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike Norwood, MA 02062 (781) 762-4300 GA Gypsum Association 810 First Street, N.E., Suite 510 Washington, DC 20002 (202) 289-5440 IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council 3933 US Route 11, PO Box 2040, Cortland, NY 13045 (800)345-3851 MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association 60 Revere Drive, Suite 500, Northbrook, IL 60062 (847) 480-9138 NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau 8575 Government Circle, Gaithersburg, MD 20877-4121 (301) 977-3698 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association 1300 N. 17th St., Suite 1846, Rosslyn, VA 22209 (703) 841-3200 NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association O’Hare International Center 10255 W. Higgins Road, Suite 600, Rosemont, IL 60018- 5607 (847) 299-9070 NSF National Sanitary Foundation PO Box 1468. Ann Arbor, MI (313) 769 - 8010 PS Product Standard U. S. Department of Commerce Washington, DC 20203 SDI Steel Door Institute 30200 Detroit Road, Cleveland, OH 44145-1967 (440) 899-0010 SGCC Safety Glass Certification Council RMS, P.O. Box 9 Henderson Harbor, NY 13651 (315) 938-7444 SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association 401 N. Michigan Ave., Suite 2400, Chicago, IL 60611 (312) 644-6610 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association 4201 Lafayette Center Dr., Chantilly, VA 22022-1209 (703) 803-3732 SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau 4709 Scenic Highway, Pensacola, FL 32504-9094 (850) 434-2611 SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 40 24th Street, 6th Floor, Pittsburgh PA 15222-4623 (412) 281-2331 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 References 01 42 00 4 of 4 SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing & Restoration Institute 2841 Main Street, Suite 585, Kansas City, MO 64108 (816) 472-7974 TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. 100 Clemson Research Blvd., Anderson, SC 29625 (864) 646-8453 TPI Truss Plate Institute 583 D’Onofrio Dr., Suite 200Madison WI (608) 833-5900 UL Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingston Road, Northbrook, IL 60602 (847) 272-8800 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau 6980 S.W. Varns Road, Box 23145, Portland, OR 97223 (503) 639-0651 WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (formerly National Wood Window & Door Association, NWWDA) 205 E. Touhy Avenue, Suite G-54, Des Plaines, IL 60018 (708)399-5200 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. The following list of abbreviations are referenced in individual specification sections. This list is provided for convenience to the Contractor and is not intended to define all abbreviations use in the Contract Documents. MEPA Massachusetts Environmental Protection Agency MGL Massachusetts General Laws NIC Not in Contract OFCI Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed OFI Owner Furnished and Installed PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Quality Requirements 01 45 00 1 of 4 Section 01 45 00 Quality Requirements PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary: A. This Section includes requirements for General quality assurance, source quality control, contractor’s quality control program, manufacturer’s field services and quality control and testing laboratory and inspection services. 1.3 General Quality Assurance A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including performance of each step in sequence. Notify Architect when manufacturers' instructions conflict with the provisions and requirements of the Contract Documents; obtain clarification before proceeding with the work affected by the conflict. C. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate high standards or more precise workmanship. D. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. E. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement. F. Publication Dates: Where the date of issue of a code or regulation is not specified, comply with the standard in effect as of date of Contract Documents, or as otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 Contractor’s quality control program A. Procedures: Contractor and each subcontractor shall include all labor, materials, equipment, services and incidental items necessary to implement quality control procedures to the extent necessary to demonstrate and maintain compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.5 Manufacturer’s field services and quality control A. When called for by individual Specification Sections, provide at no additional cost to the Owner, manufacturers’ or product suppliers’ qualified staff personnel, to observe site conditions, start-up of equipment, adjusting and balancing of equipment, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, and as specified under the various Sections. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Quality Requirements 01 45 00 2 of 4 1.6 Testing Laboratory and Inspection Services A. To achieve the insulation levels and air tightness required by the HERS rating requirements, sequence of the work related to gypsum board installation, insulation installation and air and weather barrier installation may be required to differ from traditional sequence standards. B. CET has been contracted to be the HERS Rater for this project. The contractor is to coordinate with and provide access to the site for inspection and testing over the course of the work, and to meet all Checklist Requirements as verified by CET. 1. HERS rating of 45 or better. 2. Insulation should all be installed to RESNET quality grade I 3. CET will perform a mid-construction whole building blower door test after air barriers and windows have been installed but before interior or exterior insulation to verify that air sealing approach is working. A final blower door test for the whole building will be performed upon completion of construction. 4. CET will perform mid-construction compartmentalization blower door tests of 3 apartments after drywall and air sealing have been installed. A final blower door test of a random sample of units will be performed upon completion of construction. 5. Apartment compartmentalization blower door test results shall be <0.29 CFM, ACH 50 or better. 6. Whole building compartmentalization blower door test results shall be <0.96 CFM, ACH 50 or better. 7. Measured overall ventilation rate in each apartment shall be within 15 CFM of design, with bathrooms exhausting a minimum of 20 CFM continuously and kitchens exhausting a minimum of 25 CFM continuously. A. Job Mark-Ups: Job mock-ups will be required for trades and installations identified below and as determined necessary during the course of construction: 1. Section 06 20 00-Finish Carpentry – Exterior door installation 2. Section 07 10 00-Waterproofing and Dampproofing 3. Section 07 21 00-Thermal Insulation 4. Section 072700 Air and Vapor Barriers 5. Section 08 53 45- Windows 6. Section 09 20 00-Gypsum Board and Plaster B. Construction testing shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1. Section 03 30 00 Concrete: a. Slump, air content, temperature, reinforcing, compressive strength: At each pour 2. Section 07 27 00 Air and Vapor Barriers: a. Blower Door Test 2 tests 3. 085313 Windows AAMA air and water test sample windows selected by architect. 4. Section 312000 Earthwork: a. Soils analysis, sieve, moisture/density . Test at source prior to delivery Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Quality Requirements 01 45 00 3 of 4 5. Section 312000 & 329200 Earthwork & Lawns and grasses. a. Loam sample Characteristics: Test at site prior to removal and again prior to delivery. 6. Section 31 20 00 Earthwork: a. Field placement monitoring and Compaction/density: At placement throughout major fill process. 7. Section 321313 Concrete Paving: a. Slump, air content, compressive strength: At each pour Part 2 – Products (not used) Part 3 – Execution (not used) End of Section Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Quality Requirements 01 45 00 4 of 4 This Page Intentionally Left Blank Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Temporary Facilities And Controls 01 51 00 1 of 4 Section 01 51 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary: A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. 1.3 Use Charges A. Temporary water services are to be provided by the Contractor. B. Temporary electric, telephone, communications and data services are to be provided by the Contractor. 1.4 General Information A. Contractor shall provide a temporary facilities plan including; utility hook-ups, staging areas, safety barriers, etc. Contractor shall provide a dust and noise control plan including: locations of dust control partitions and barriers, measures to be taken for general noise control, waste management plan, etc. B. Contractor shall provide and maintain all temporary facilities, controls, and construction aides as specified herein and as required for the Work. C. All costs and charges for temporary measures and controls are not chargeable to the Owner, Architect, or Construction Coordinator and will not be accepted as a basis of claims for a Change Order. 1.5 Weather Protection A. The General Contractor shall furnish and install weather protection. B. Definition of Weather Protection: “Weather Protection” means temporary protection of work which may be adversely affected by moisture, cold, heat, and wind by the use of temporary covers, enclosures, and heat. Maintain at least the minimum conditions as required for individual products, equipment, and operating conditions. C. The General Contractor is responsible to ensure that the protection is provided for the building interior year round. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Temporary Facilities And Controls 01 51 00 2 of 4 1.6 Field Offices A. Contractor shall provide all temporary office facilities as needed for the project. If a temporary field office is deemed necessary by the Contractor for the project, Contractor shall coordinate and the Architect as to size, location, etc. of the temporary office. 1.7 Sanitary Facilities A. The Contractor shall provide and service an adequate number of toilet booths with chemical type toilets. B. The toilets shall be erected in a location approved by the Architect and shall be maintained by the Contractor in a clean and orderly condition in compliance with all local and state health requirements. 1.8 Construction Aides: Hoists, Scaffolding, Staging, Cranes, Chutes, Platforms, Traffic Control A. Contractor shall provide all necessary hoists, scaffolding, staging, cranes, chutes, platforms, ladders, ramps, railings, fences, barricades, building protection, planting and tree protection, erosion and pollution controls, traffic control, pedestrian control, and other construction aides as necessary to facilitate and perform the Work. B. Maintain all necessary aides in a safe condition and dismantle when no longer required. 1.9 Fire Prevention Measures A. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the prevention of fire during construction. Install and maintain fire protection facilities of the types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Maintain un- obstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, stairways, and temporary fire protection facilities. Ascertain and comply with requirements of Project insurance carrier, local fire department and the state fire marshal. B. Provide and maintain on site adequate fire extinguishers UL rated for A-B-C type fires. 1.10 Security Measures A. Protect Work, existing premises, and Owner’s operations from theft, vandalism, and unauthorized entry. Maintain security measures throughout construction period until Owner occupancy precludes the need for Contractor security. 1.11 Project Identification and Temporary Signage A. General: Signs other than those specified herein are not permitted, except those required by law or expressly authorized by the Owner. 1. At all times during the project, signage must clearly direct occupants and the general public in the safe use of the building. Signs must clearly indicate areas of no admittance, and further must clearly define and direct users to building entries, exits, and other important destinations. Coordinate required signage with Architect/Engineer. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Temporary Facilities And Controls 01 51 00 3 of 4 B. Project sign: 1. A project sign will be furnished by the owner to the contractor for installation on the site. 1.12 Removal of Temporary Utilities, Controls, and Facilities A. Remove temporary materials and construction at Substantial Completion. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. Part 2 – Products (not used) Part 3 – Execution (not used) END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Temporary Facilities And Controls 01 51 00 4 of 4 This Page Intentionally Left Blank Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Northampton, MA TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 5639 – 1 SECTION 01 5639 - TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Divi- sion 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.The Contractor, Subcontractors, and/or suppliers providing goods or services referenced in or related to this Section shall also be bound by the Documents identified in Division 01 Section “Summary”, Paragraph 1.1A, entitled “Related Documents.” 1.4 DESCRIPTION Work Included A.Section includes general protection and pruning of existing trees Eartand plants that are affected by execution of the Work, whether temporary or permanent construction. 1.Tree protection fencing of existing trees 2.Tree pruning of existing trees B.Related Work Described Elsewhere General Building Commissioning Requirements………………….…………...…….Division 01 Exterior Enclosure Commissioning……………………….………………...…...…….Division 01 Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control……………...……………………..….….Division 01 Site Demolition Clearing and Grubbing for clearing of existing vegetation…..…...Division 31 Excavation, Backfill, Earthwork, and Grading………………..…………………..…..Division 31 1.5 DEFINITIONS A.Caliper: Diameter of a trunk measured by a diameter tape 6 inches (150 mm) above the ground for trees up to, and including, 4-inch (100-mm) size; and 12 inches (300 mm) above the ground for trees larger than 4-inch (100-mm) size. B.Plant-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other vegetation to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings. Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 5639 – 2 C.Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings and/or defined by a circle concentric with each tree with a radius 1.5 times the diameter of the drip line unless otherwise indicated. Additional protection areas as noted on plans and field verified by landscape architect/ Civil Engineer. D.Accessible Clear Zone: Area along an accessible path or route requiring 60” clear horizontally and 80” clear vertically. E.Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A.Qualification Data: For qualified arborist and tree service firm. B.Certification: From arborist, certifying that trees indicated to remain have been protected during construction according to recognized standards and that trees were promptly and properly treated and repaired when damaged. C.Tree Protection Staking Field Verification: Submit notice of tree protection staking conference. D.Existing Conditions Report: Documentation of existing trees and plantings indicated to remain, which establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by construction activities. 1.Use sufficiently detailed photographs. 2.Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each tree or other plants designated to remain. 3.Identify existing tree edge along area to be cleared and any stabilization procedures for ensuring existing tree stability during and after construction. E.Maintenance Recommendations: From arborist for care and protection of trees indicated to remain, which establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by construction activities. F.Tree Pruning Schedule: Written schedule detailing scope and extent of pruning of trees to remain that interfere with or are affected by construction. 1.Species and size of tree. 2.Location on site plan. Include unique identifier for each. 3.Reason for pruning. 4.Description of pruning to be performed. 5.Description of maintenance following pruning. 6.Description of proposed root cutting and tree and shrub repairs. G.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. H.Samples for Verification: For each type of the following: 1.Organic Mulch: [1-pint (0.5-L)] volume of organic mulch; in sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of materials by percentage of weight and source of mulch. Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 5639 – 3 2. Protection-Zone Fencing: Assembled Samples of manufacturer's standard size made from full-size components. I.Shop drawings: Showing tree protection zones, fencing, area of mulching and gate locations. Submit after preliminary staking in the field for approval prior to site review of stake locations. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Arborist Qualifications: Certified Arborist as certified by ISA. B.Tree Service Firm Qualifications: An experienced tree service firm that has successfully completed temporary tree and plant protection work similar to that required for this Project and that will assign an experienced, qualified arborist to Project site during execution of the Work. C.Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at the Project Site. Prior to mobilizing construction efforts the Owner’s Representative, Landscape Architect, and all site contractors will meet to discuss tree protection preliminary staking, discuss tree protection, soil handling, soil testing procedures, submittals, shop drawings, samples, scheduling, soil preparations, grading, and planting procedures. Contractor to notify all members of the team with 14 days advance notice. 1.Review methods and procedures related to temporary tree and plant protection including, but not limited to, the following: a.Construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, personnel, and equipment needed to make progress and avoid delays. b.Enforcing requirements for protection zones. c.Arborist's responsibilities. d.Field quality control. e.Staking of tree protection areas. D.Tree Protection Site Review: After preinstallation conference and prior to mobilization of construction efforts, contractor to stake out preliminary tree protection areas for review by the Landscape Architect, OPM, and Civil Engineer. Contractor to provide 14 days notice for staking site conference. Upon approval of staking locations, existing Site Trees to be protected, enclosed with protection-zone fencing, and signage around the drip-lines of trees to remain. E.Weekly Reports: The contractor is to report weekly to the owner’s representative the terms of the protection zone maintenance and necessary disturbance for the purposes of demolition, excavation, and construction. PROJECT CONDITIONS A.The following practices are prohibited within protection zones: 1.Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2.Parking vehicles or equipment. 3.Foot traffic. 4.Erection of sheds or structures. 5.Impoundment of water. Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 5639 – 4 6.Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7.Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise indicated. B.Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust toward protection zones. C.Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones and organic mulch. D.If any of the prohibited practices take place within the tree protection zones, contractor to provide credit equal to the cost of replacing, purchasing, and transplanting a replacement tree of similar size. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.Topsoil: Natural or cultivated top layer of the soil profile or manufactured topsoil; containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than [1 inch (25 mm)] in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, and toxic and other nonsoil materials. 1.Obtain topsoil only from well-drained sites where topsoil is 4 inches (100 mm) deep or more; do not obtain from bogs or marshes. 2.Coordinate with specific topsoil performance specifications as listed in Division 32 Planting Preparation. B.Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing for trees and shrubs, consisting of one of the following: 1.Type: [Shredded hardwood] mulch 2.Size Range: [3 inches (76 mm) maximum, 1/2 inch (13 mm) minimum] 3.Color: Natural. C.Protection-Zone Fencing: Fencing fixed in position and meeting the following requirements: 1.Chain Link Tree Protection-Zone Fencing a.Height: 6 feet b.Fences to be mounted on two-inch diameter galvanized iron posts, driven into the ground to a depth of at least 2 feet at no more than 10 foot spacing. c.The diameter of fencing shall have a minimum diameter of 5’ beyond the tree’s dripline. 2.Gates: Double swing access gates matching material and appearance of fencing, to allow for maintenance activities within protection zones; leaf width 36 inches (914 mm). a.Use Double swing access gates for larger areas enclosing 3 or more trees, b.Use single access gates for single trees. Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 5639 – 5 F.Temporary Trunk/Limb Protection Wrap: to provide specific protection to tree trunks when construction activities are expected to be in close proximity. 1. Plastic snow fencing constructed of high-density extruded and stretched polyethylene fabric with a 2 inch (50 mm) maximum opening in pattern and weighing a minimum of 0.4lb/ft (0.6 kg/m); remaning flexible from minus 60 to plus 200 degrees F; inert to most chemicals and acids; minimum tensile yield strength of 2000 psi and ultimate tensile strength of 2680 psi (18.5 Mpa); secured with plastic bands or galvanized-steel or stainless-steel wire ties. 2. Height: 4 feet (1.2 m) 3. Color: High-visibility orange, non-fading. . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Examine the site to verify that temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures are in place. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones. B.For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by arborist, listing conditions detrimental to tree and plant protection. C.For the record, prepare a written report, endorsed by an arborist evaluating the tree edge conditions along the edge of the forest clearing. Itemize or highlight any procedures or protocols for stabilization using guy wires or stakes as deemed necessary. 3.2 PREPARATION A.Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain. Flag a 1-inch (25-mm) candy striped vinyl tape each tree trunk at 54 inches (1372 mm) above the ground to be protected. B. Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage of noxious materials while mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from ponding, eroding, or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations. C.Tree-Protection Zones: Mulch areas inside tree-protection zones and other areas indicated. 1.Apply 4-inch (100-mm) average thickness of organic mulch. Do not place mulch within 6 inches (150 mm) of tree trunks. 2.Review with Landscape Architect Tree protection zones and determine if Root Aeration Matting will be required. Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 5639 – 6 3.3 TREE- AND PLANT-PROTECTION ZONES A.Protection-Zone Fencing: Install protection-zone fencing along edges of protection zones before materials or equipment are brought on the site and construction operations begin. Install fencing in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering protected area except by entrance gates. Construct fencing so as not to obstruct safe passage or visibility at vehicle intersections where fencing is located adjacent to pedestrian walkways or in close proximity to street intersections, drives, or other vehicular circulation. 1. Chain-Link Fencing: Install to comply with ASTM F 567 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 2.Posts: Set or drive posts into ground one-third the total height of the fence without concrete footings. Where a post is located on existing paving or concrete to remain, provide appropriate means of post support acceptable to Architect. 3.Access Gates: Install to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. B.Maintain protection zones free of weeds and trash. C.Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. D.Maintain protection-zone fencing and signage in good condition as acceptable to Architect and remove when construction operations are complete and equipment has been removed from the site. 1.Do not remove protection-zone fencing, even temporarily, to allow deliveries or equipment access through the protection zone. 2.Temporary access is permitted subject to preapproval in writing by arborist if a root buffer effective against soil compaction is constructed as directed by arborist. Maintain root buffer so long as access is permitted. 3.4 EXCAVATION A.General: Excavate at edge of protection zones and for trenches indicated within protection zones according to requirements in Division 31 “Excavation, Earthwork, Filling, and Grading”. B.Trenching near Trees: Where utility trenches are required within protection zones, hand excavate under or around tree roots or tunnel under the roots by drilling, auger boring, or pipe jacking. Do not cut main lateral tree roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities. Cut roots as required for root pruning. C.Redirect roots in backfill areas where possible. If encountering large, main lateral roots, expose roots beyond excavation limits as required to bend and redirect them without breaking. If encountered immediately adjacent to location of new construction and redirection is not practical, cut roots approximately 3 inches (75 mm) back from new construction and as required for root pruning. Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 5639 – 7 D.Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing permanent backfill. Provide temporary earth cover or pack with peat moss and wrap with burlap. Water and maintain in a moist condition. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated and covered with soil. 3.5 ROOT PRUNING A.Prune roots that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Submit a report to landscape architect and arborist notifying of any required root pruning procedures. 1.Cut roots manually by digging a trench and cutting exposed roots with sharp pruning instruments; do not break, tear, chop, or slant the cuts. Do not use a backhoe or other equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots. 2.Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected and covered with soil. 3.Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 4.Backfill as soon as possible according to requirements in Division 31 “Excavation, Earthwork, Filling, and Grading” 5.Root Pruning at Edge of Protection Zone: Only prune roots if required at the edge of the protection zone. Prune roots flush with the edge of the protection zone, by cleanly cutting all roots to the depth of the required excavation. B.Root Pruning within Protection Zone: Clear and excavate by hand to the depth of the required excavation to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. 3.6 CROWN PRUNING A.Tree pruning will be conducted after review of a certified arborist. Pruning will be utilized for cleaning, reduction, restoration, and compliance with accessibility and playground safety related non-protrusion zones. B.Prune branches that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune branches as required by certified arborist. 1.Prune trees to remain to compensate for root loss caused by damaging or cutting root system. 2.Provide subsequent maintenance during Contract period as recommended by arborist. 3.Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to ANSI A300 Part 1 4.Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop. 5.Tie up or guy limbs that are beyond the tree protection area as directed by certified arborist for stabilization of forest edge. 6.Chip removed branches and spread over areas identified by Landscape Architect. 3.7 REGRADING A.Lowering Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone. Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 5639 – 8 B.Lowering Grade within Protection Zone: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope grade away from trees as recommended by arborist unless otherwise indicated. 1.Root Pruning: Prune tree roots exposed by lowering the grade. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots. Cut roots as required for root pruning. C.Raising Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated above existing grade around trees, slope grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone. D.Minor Fill within Protection Zone: Where existing grade is 2 inches (50 mm) or less below elevation of finish grade, fill with topsoil. Place topsoil in a single uncompacted layer and hand grade to required finish elevations. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Inspections: Engage a qualified arborist to direct plant-protection measures in the vicinity of trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain and to prepare inspection reports. 3.9 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT A.General: Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. 1.Submit details of proposed root cutting and tree and shrub repairs. 2.Have arborist perform the root cutting, branch pruning, and damage repair of trees and shrubs. 3.Treat damaged trunks, limbs, and roots according to arborist's written instructions. 4.Perform repairs within 24 hours. 5.Replace vegetation that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by Architect & Landscape Architect. B.Trees: Remove and replace trees indicated to remain that are more than [25] percent dead or in an unhealthy condition before the end of the corrections period or are damaged during construction operations that Architect determines are incapable of restoring to normal growth pattern. C.Protected trees that are more than 25% dead will need to be replaced with trees of similar size. 1.Provide new trees of same size and species as those being replaced for each tree that measures [6 inches (150 mm)] or smaller in caliper size. 2.Provide [two] new tree(s) of [4-inch (100-mm)] caliper size for each tree being replaced that measures more than [6 inches (150 mm)] in caliper size. 3.Plant and maintain new trees as specified in Division 32 Planting and Division 32 Landscape Maintenance D.Soil Aeration: Where directed by Landscape Architect and Certified Arborist, aerate surface soil compacted during construction. 1. Aerate 10 feet (3 m)beyond drip line and no closer than 36 inches (900 mm) to tree trunk. Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 5639 – 9 2.Drill 2-inch- (50-mm-) diameter holes a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) deep at 24 inches (600 mm)o.c. 3.Backfill holes with an equal mix of augured soil and sand. E.Snow removal 1.Deicing Applications: For maintenance of hardscape features during construction and O&M manual, be sure that cast-in-place concrete is treated with Urea and NOT salt mixtures. 2.Follow snow removal plans for equipment, placement and stockpiling areas. 3.10 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A.Disposal: Remove excess excavated material, displaced trees, trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. END OF SECTION Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 This Page Intentionally Left Blank Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Product Requirements 01 60 00 1 of 2 Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary: A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in the Project; product delivery, storage, and handling. 1.3 Basic Product Requirements A. Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at the time of installation. B. When Contractor has the option of selecting from two or more products, ensure that products selected shall be compatible with products previously installed or approved. C. Provide and install products with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect. D. Fasteners Anchors, and Connections: Engineer and provide all fasteners, anchors, and connections needed to safely, securely, and appropriately permanently secure all Work in place. 1.4 General Environmental Requirements for Projects A. Prohibit the use of or incorporation into the Work of materials which contain toxic, hazardous and harmful materials. B. Do not install, use for installation, and use for cleaning those materials which may produce objectionable (to Owner and public) vapors, gases, fumes, odors, or similar conditions. 1.5 Product Delivery, Handling, and Storage Requirements A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturers instructions and as specified in individual specification sections. B. Promptly inspect shipments and deliveries to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. C. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers instructions and as specified in individual specification sections. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Product Requirements 01 60 00 2 of 2 D. Provide off-site storage and protection when site or weather conditions do not permit on-site storage or protection. E. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. 1.6 Packaging Requirements A. Minimize packaging materials while still providing adequate protection for products. B. Use recyclable packaging wherever possible. Part 2 Products (not used) Part 3 Execution (not used) End of Section Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Execution Requirements 01 70 00 1 of 2 Section 01 70 00 Execution Requirements PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary: A. This Section includes Examination of existing conditions and acceptance of conditions, protecting installed work and cleaning. 1.3 Examination of Existing Conditions A. Contractor and subcontractors shall inform themselves of existing conditions before submitting bid, and shall be full responsible for carrying out all work required to completely and properly execute the work of the Contract, regardless of the conditions encountered in the actual work. B. Prior to Demolition, inspect areas in which work will be performed and document any existing damage. File documentation with Architect prior to starting work. 1.4 Protecting Installed Work A. Protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from demolition and construction operations. B. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, and damage. C. After installation, provide coverings to protect products from damage due to traffic and construction operations. 1.5 Cleaning A. Progress Cleaning: Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. Maintain work and surrounding area free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish; remove from site on an on-going basis through-out the term of construction. B. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile substances. C. Provide containers for collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish. D. Final Cleaning: Perform final cleaning immediately prior to the Architect’s review of the project for issue of Substantial Completion. Protect surrounding materials and finishes against undue damage. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Execution Requirements 01 70 00 2 of 2 Part 2 Products (not used) Part 3 Execution (not used) End of Section Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Close-Out Procedures And Submittals 01 77 00 1 of 2 Section 01 77 00 Close-out Procedures and Submittals PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary: A. This Section includes punch List, close-out Procedures, record Documents. 1.3 Punch List A. Contractor shall prepare a Contractor’s Punch List prior to request of Architect’s inspection for Substantial Completion. The Contractor’s Punch List shall clearly identify the location and description of each item. B. The Architect’s Punch List is based on and modifies the Contractor’s Punch List and will be prepared by the Architect after acceptance of the Contractor’s Punch List. The Architect will not proceed with the Punch List process until a sufficient level of work has been completed on the Project. 1.4 Close-out Procedures A. Substantial Completion 1. Prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion, Contractor shall have completed the following: a. Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion of all work claimed as substantially complete. b. Obtained the Certificate of Occupancy c. Submitted product warranties d. Removed temporary facilities e. Completed final cleaning f. Notification of shifting insurance coverage g. Change over permanent locks and advised Owner of same. 2. When the Architect concurs that the Work is substantially complete, the Architect will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Close-Out Procedures And Submittals 01 77 00 2 of 2 B. Final Acceptance 2. Prior to requesting inspection for certification of Final Acceptance, Contractor shall have completed the following: a. Completion of all incomplete work. Submit a copy of the final Punch List stating each item is complete. b. Prove all taxes and legal obligations have been paid. c. Submit updated final statement. d. Submit to Owner any and all remaining deliverables and Close-out documents. 3. When Architect concurs that the Work is complete, the Architect will review all final close-out submittals. 4. Application for Final Payment: Contractor shall submit Application for Final Payment in accordance with procedures and requirements of the General Contract and Supplementary Conditions. 1.5 Record Documents A. Record Documents include but are not limited to: Project Record Drawings (as- builts); Operation and maintenance data; Product warranties; Record of all tests and inspections; Material and finishes manual. B. All Record Documents shall be clearly labeled with the project name and the words “Record Documents” C. Provide 1 copy of all Record Documents. D. All Operation and Maintenance Data shall include, at a minimum, the name and contact information for the Contractor performing the work; the name and contact information for equipment and material suppliers, all warranty information, cleaning and maintenance instructions. Part 2 Products (not used) Part 3 Execution (not used) End of Section Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Demonstration And Training 01 79 00 1 of 2 Section 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Section Includes: A. Instruction and training of Owner’s personnel. 1.3 Instruction and training of Owner’s personnel A. Before Final Inspection, instruct Owner’s designated personnel in operation, adjustment, maintenance of products, equipment, and systems at agreed upon times. B. Use operation and maintenance manuals as the basis for instruction. C. Prepare and insert additional data in Operation and Maintenance manual when need for such data becomes apparent during instruction. D. All training sessions to be videotaped, with digital copy of video delivered to the Parish. Part 2 Products (not used) Part 3 Execution (not used) End of Section Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Demonstration And Training 01 79 00 2 of 2 This Page Intentionally Left Blank Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Energy Performance Requirements 01 81 00 1 of 4 SECTION 01 81 00 Energy Performance Requirements PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein B. Complete Work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein to bridge gaps and seal the building envelope against air leakage and water intrusion. 1. A Home Energy Report has been completed by CET and applies to this project. The repot includes design performance standards and HERS rating targets that must be met by the project. 2. Coordinate with CET for inspection and testing of air and vapor barrier materials and installation for conformance with design intent and HERS rating Process. 3. Coordinate with CET for three preliminary blower door compartmentalization tests during construction and final testing of a sampling of units at completion of construction. C. Alternates: Not Applicable. D. Install Items Furnished Under Other Sections: Not Applicable. E. Furnish Items to Other Sections: Not Applicable. F. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 2. Section 06 16 00 SHEATHING 3. Section 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION 4. Section 07 27 00 AIR AND VAPOR BARRIERS 5. Section 08 41 13 ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 6. Section 08 57 20 WINDOWS 7. Section 08 63 00 SKYLIGHTS 8. Section 09 20 00 GYPSUM BOARD AND PLASTER Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Energy Performance Requirements 01 81 00 2 of 4 1.03. CET PRELIMINARY ANALYSIS REPORT: Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Energy Performance Requirements 01 81 00 3 of 4 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Energy Performance Requirements 01 81 00 4 of 4 Part 2 Products (not used) Part 3 Execution (not used) END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 DEMOLITION 02 41 00 1 OF 14 SECTION 024100 DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein. B. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. All miscellaneous demolition of portions of existing building components including but not limited to walls, ceilings, partitions, floors, finish flooring, windows, doors, frames and transoms, abandoned equipment and other related materials for the various renovations and constructions as described in the drawings and specifications including but not limited to the following: 2. Elevator: a. Decommission elevator and prep for HASMAT removal b. Removal of all hazardous material. c. Remove existing elevator equipment to make way for new elevator equipment d. Vertical enlargement of elevator door openings. 3. Heavy demolition of front entrance Porte Coche 4. Complete interior demolition to remove all partitions, ceilings exterior wall finishes, finish flooring, equipment, plumbing, HVAC, electrical fixtures and equipment. 5. Removal of portions of interior CMU. 6. Removal of all windows and doors. 7. Removal of all roof equipment. 8. Removal of stone ballast, roof membrane, flashings and roof insulation where water damaged, and as specified under Membrane Roofing. a. Provide a unit price for removal of water damaged roof insulation 9. Cutting of new openings, enlarging of existing openings for doors and windows 10. Cutting of floor and roof openings for skylights, internal courtyard, chases and duct runs 11. Removal of curbs, sidewalks and road paving as indicated on site drawings. 12. Removal, stockpiling, maintenance and replanting of flagged shrubs and small trees. 13. Salvage, handling and storage of materials to be re-used. 14. In addition to demolition specifically shown, cut, move or remove items as necessary to provide access or to allow alterations and new work to proceed. Coordinate such relocations and removal to accommodate the demands and requirements of other trades. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 DEMOLITION 02 41 00 2 OF 14 15. Cleaning of surfaces, and removal of surface finishes as needed to install new work and finishes 16. Maintenance, watering and care of trees designated to remain by a certified arborist during the construction period. 17. Demolition and removal work shall properly prepare for alteration work and new construction to be provided under the Contract. 18. Recycling of demolished materials and of waste construction materials C. Alternates: See Section 012300. D. Items To Be Installed Only: Not Applicable. E. Items To Be Furnished Only: Not Applicable. F. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 033000 – CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE: a. Cutting and patching of existing concrete slabs for all new plumbing, electrical and structural work. Removal and disposal of concrete materials not scheduled for salvage shall be then done under this Section 024100 - DEMOLITION. 2. Section 042000 - MASONRY: a. Disassembly, removal, cataloging and storage of masonry material to be salvaged including marble stone wall caps, granite curbs, stair treads and cap mounted light fixtures. Removal and disposal of masonry materials not scheduled for salvage shall be then done under this Section 024100 - DEMOLITION. 3. Section 07 40 00 – ROOFING AND FLASHING: a. Removal of ballast, roofing and flashing materials. Disposal of such materials shall be then done under this Section 024100 - DEMOLITION. 4. Section 22 00 00 - PLUMBING: a. Disconnecting, capping and removal of plumbing fixtures and equipment. 5. Section 23 00 00 - HVAC: a. Disconnecting, capping and removal of existing mechanical equipment and ductwork. 6. Section 26 00 00 - ELECTRICAL WORK: a. Disconnecting, capping and removal of existing electrical fixtures, wiring, and conduit. 7. Section 31 20 00 - EARTHWORK: a. Excavation and removal of earth, asphalt and concrete paving, foundations and footings. 8. Section 31 00 00 - SITE DEMOLITION & CLEARING: a. Demolition and clearing of site materials and elements. 1.03. DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 DEMOLITION 02 41 00 3 OF 14 B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and store. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. E. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. 1.04. MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner. 1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner. 1.02. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. The General Contractor shall assign the work of cutting and patching to the particular trade experienced in the installation of each material to be cut and patched, especially where highly skilled craftsmanship is required. B. Coordinate work of trades and schedule elements of alterations and renovation work by procedures and methods to expedite completion of the work. C. Patch, repair and refinish existing items to remain which are disrupted during demolition to the specified condition for each material, with workmanlike transitions. D. Remove and legally dispose of demolished materials off site. Except those items specifically designated to be relocated, reused, or turned over to the facility, all existing removed materials, items, trash and debris shall become property of the Contractor and shall be completely removed from the site and legally disposed of at her/his expense. Salvage value belongs to the Contractor. On-site sale of materials is not permitted. 1. Contractor to achieve a minimum of 50% construction waste recycling of total construction and demolition materials, with filing of monthly waste management reports to the Project Architect. 2. Construction procedures are to use materials efficiently, and that at least 75% of construction waste is to be recycled. Recycle all cardboard and foam packaging materials. E. Schedule and sequence operations without interrupting utilities serving occupied areas. If interruption is required, obtain written permission from the Library Director. Schedule interruption when the least amount of inconvenience will result. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 DEMOLITION 02 41 00 4 OF 14 1.03. SUBMITTALS A. All submittals, including shop drawings, manufacturer's specifications and product data shall be submitted for the following in accordance with the requirements of Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures and Substitutions. 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with early and late starting and finishing dates for each activity. Ensure User Agency's on-site operations are uninterrupted if applicable. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Locations of proposed dust- and noise-control temporary partitions and means of egress, including for other occupants affected by selective demolition operations. 6. Coordination of User Agency's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of User Agency's partial occupancy of completed Work. 7. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from building. B. Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged, and turned over to the User Agency. 1.04. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with all regulations, including but not limited to, OSHA, EPA, and hauling and disposal regulations of the authority having jurisdiction. B. Examination of Existing Conditions: The Contractor shall examine the Contract Drawings for demolition and removal requirements and provisions for new work. Verify all existing conditions and dimensions before commencing work. The Contractor shall visit the site and examine the existing conditions as he finds them and shall inform herself/himself of the character, extent and type of demolition and removal work to be performed. Submit any questions regarding the extent and character of the demolition and removal work in the manner and within the time period established for receipt of such questions during the bidding period. C. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. D. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program. E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. F. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT, COORDINATION AND COMMISSIONING. Review methods and procedures related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 DEMOLITION 02 41 00 5 OF 14 of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 1.05. SHORING AND SHEETING AND BRACING A. Provide bracing, shoring, sheeting, temporary tie-backs, hydraulic jacks and accessories, sheet piling, underpinning, temporary or permanent columns and bracing or other retaining and supporting structures necessary to prevent any movement or settlement of existing or new construction, utilities, paving, light standards, piping or conduit. Responsibility for the strength, stiffness, and adequacy of retaining structures, and for the safety and support of construction, utilities or paving, and for any movement, settlement or damage thereto shall be the Contractor's responsibility. In exercising this responsibility the Contractor shall retain a qualified consultant who is a licensed Professional Structural Engineer registered in the State of Massachusetts to design, check and approve all temporary retaining structures and other items pertinent to this work. 1. Submit a plan showing shoring and sequencing proposals to the architect as described above. No demolition is to proceed until such plan is approved. 2. Refer to the Structural Drawings for specific deflection and pre-loading requirements. 1.06. PRECAUTIONS AND COORDINATION A. Conduct the work in a manner giving prime consideration to protection of the public; protection from the weather; control of noise, shocks and vibration; control of dirt and dust; orderly access for and storage of materials; protection of existing buildings; protection of adjacent surfaces and property; coordination and cooperation with the Owner at all times. B. Comply with all requirements of this contract relative to protection, scheduling and coordination with the Owner. C. Coordinate and arrange with mechanical and electrical trades for their disconnecting, rerouting and maintenance of existing services in the buildings as required, as part of the work of this Contract. D. Provide necessary drop cloths or other protection to completely cover all adjacent surfaces, existing equipment, furniture and furnishings during removal operations. E. Dust and Debris Control: Do not allow dust or debris to accumulate in demolition areas or the project site as work progresses. Dampen debris to control dust from demolition work. Removed debris promptly from the site. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 DEMOLITION 02 41 00 6 OF 14 F. Disturbance of Materials Containing Lead Based Paint: Some existing materials may have paint or other surfaces which contain lead base and must be removed and disposed of according to applicable Local, State, and Federal regulations and the following requirements: 1. The General Contractor and all Sub Contractors shall comply with Massachusetts Department of Labor and Industries Regulations 454 CMR 22.00 and Federal OSH Regulations 29 CFR 1926.62, 1.07. USE OF PREMISES A. All apparatus, storage and the operation of workmen in connection with activities under this section shall be confined to limits of the Contract as shown on the Drawings and shall not encumber the premises at any time. B. Parking for personnel, cars, trucks, etc. shall be in areas designated by the Owner. Parking on-site is limited and Contractor will have to make arrangements for offsite parking at most times. C. Trucks carrying loose, dry material such as debris, broken drywall, roof materials, etc., shall be covered by tarpaulins to prevent blowing away or spillage of contents. All spillage of whatever nature shall be promptly taken up and removed. 1.08. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Hazardous Materials: hazardous materials are to be removed by a certified contractor prior to the start of all demolition activities. B. Conduct lead tests and perform all preparation and painting work in conformance with the Massachusetts Deleading and Lead-Safe Renovation Regulation, 454 CMR 22.00. This regulation requires that firms performing renovation, repair, and painting projects that disturb lead-based paint in pre-1978 homes, child care facilities and schools be certified by EPA and that they use certified renovators who are trained by EPA-approved training providers to follow lead-safe work practices. C. Damage or loss to buildings and structures (whether by reason of fire, theft, or other happenings) shall be at the risk of the Contractor from and after the date of Contract execution and no such damage or loss to buildings or structures shall relieve the Contractor from any obligation under the Contract. D. Protection of Persons and Property: Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection as required to protect Owner's personnel, students and general public from injury due to selective demolition work. 1. Provide protective measures as required to provide free and safe passage of Owner's personnel and the general public to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Erect temporary covered passageways as required by authorities having jurisdiction. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 DEMOLITION 02 41 00 7 OF 14 E. Condition of Structures: Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to be demolished. Conditions existing at time of commencement of contract will be maintained by Owner insofar as practicable. However, variations within structure may occur by Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to start of selective demolition work. F. Partial Removal: Items indicated to be removed but of salvageable value to Contractor may be removed from structure as work progresses. Transport salvaged items from site as they are removed. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted. G. Protect existing finishes, equipment, and adjacent work which is scheduled to remain, from damage. Protect existing and new work from weather and extremes of temperatures. Maintain existing interior work above 60 degrees F. Provide weather protection, waterproofing, heat and humidity control as needed to prevent damage to remaining existing work and to new work. H. Provide temporary enclosures to separate and secure work areas and to provide weather protection. I. Traffic: Conduct selective demolition operations and debris removal in a manner to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close, block or otherwise obstruct streets, walks or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. J. Discoveries of construction, furnishings and articles having a historic or private value shall remain in possession of Owner. 1. Promptly notify Architect. 2. Protect discovery from damage from elements or work. 3. Architect will promptly transmit Owner's decision for disposition of discovery. 4. Contractor shall store items to be retained by Owner in a safe, dry place on site, or shall dispose of items which Owner releases. K. Explosives: Use of explosives will not be permitted. L. Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain, keep in service, and protect against damage during demolition operations. M. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 DEMOLITION 02 41 00 8 OF 14 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01. SALVAGED MATERIALS A. Salvage sufficient quantities of cut or removed material to replace damaged work of existing construction, when material is not readily obtainable on current market or when instructed to do so by the Owner. 1. Salvaged material to be removed and reinstalled shall include: a. . 2. Plantings: a. Flagged shrubs and small trees. B. Catalogue and store salvaged items in a dry, secure place on site. C. Items not required for use in repair of existing work shall remain the property of Owner. D. Do not incorporate salvaged or used material in new construction except with permission of the Architect. 2.02. PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING, EXTENDING AND MATCHING A. General Requirements that work not required to be demolished be left complete: B. Provide same products or types of construction as that in existing structure, as needed to patch, extend or match existing work. C. Generally Contract Documents will not define products or standards of workmanship present in existing construction; Contractor shall determine products by inspection and any necessary testing, and workmanship by use of the existing as a sample of comparison. D. Presence of a product, finish, or type of construction, requires that patching, extending or matching shall be performed as necessary to make work complete and consistent to identical standards of quality. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01. EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Designer. E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction videotapes. F. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction. G. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 DEMOLITION 02 41 00 9 OF 14 3.02. UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies and User Agency. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. Where entire wall is to be removed, existing services/systems may be removed with removal of the wall. 4. Prior to commencing cutting work in existing surfaces, take all precautionary measures to assure that mechanical and electrical services to the particular area have been made inactive. Coordinate with Fire Protection, Plumbing, HVAC, and Electrical subcontractors. Only licensed tradesmen of that particular trade shall disconnect and cap existing mechanical and electrical items that are to be removed, abandoned and/or relocated. 5. If, during the process of cutting work, existing utility lines are encountered which are not indicated on the Drawings, regardless of their condition, immediately report such items to the Designer. Do not proceed with work in such areas until instructions are issued by the Designer. Continue work in other areas. 3.03. PREPARATION A. Site access: Conduct selective demolition to ensure minimal interference with roads, streets, walkways and other adjacent business and facilities. B. Provide temporary barricades and other protection to prevent injury to people and adjacent facilities. C. Provide temporary weather protection during construction to prevent damage to structure and interior finishes. D. Protect adjacent surfaces, furniture and finishes from damage while performing selective demolition. E. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement or collapse of structures to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain. F. Provide by-pass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas of building. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner if shut-down of service is necessary during change-over. G. Provide dust-proof enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration, and to provide separation from fumes and noise. H. Cease operations and notify the Architect immediately if safety of structure appears to be endangered. Take precautions to properly support structure. Do not resume operations until safety is restored. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 DEMOLITION 02 41 00 10 OF 14 3.04. POLLUTION CONTROLS A. Clean adjacent structures of dust, dirt and debris, and return to condition existing before selective demolition began. B. Do not let debris accumulate on site. 3.05. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire- suppression devices during and after flame- cutting operations. 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with all State and local requirements and regulations. B. Removed, salvaged and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment. 2. Catalogue and pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. 5. After removal and temporary replanting of flagged shrubs and small trees maintain plant material in good condition with protection and regular watering until replanting at the end of the project. C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Designer, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 DEMOLITION 02 41 00 11 OF 14 D. Items for Re-use and Preservation of Existing Surfaces to Remain: 1. The Contractor shall inspect closely each item specifically designated to be relocated, re- used, or turned over to the Owner prior to its removal, and immediately report damages and defects to the Designer and Project Manager. The Contractor shall be responsible for any subsequent damage to the same other than latent defects not readily apparent from close inspection, and shall bear responsibility for its repair or same replacement as directed by the Designer, to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. 2. Unless special surface preparation is specified under other Specification Sections, leave existing surfaces that are to remain in a condition suitable to receive new materials and/or finishes. 3.06. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. B. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, and then remove concrete between saw cuts. C. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts. D. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and remove. E. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings." Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers. F. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than what can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. 1. Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof accessories. 2. Remove existing roofing system down to substrate. 3.07. PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND PROPERTY A. Provide all measures required by federal, state and municipal laws, regulations, and ordinances for the protection of surrounding property, the public, workmen, and Commonwealth’s employees during all demolition and removal operations. Measures are to be taken, but not limited to installation of sidewalks, sheds, barricades, fences, warning lights and signs, trash chutes and temporary lighting. B. Protect all walks, roads, streets, curbs, pavements, trees and plantings, on and off premises, and bear all costs for correcting such damage as directed by the Designer, and to the satisfaction of the Library Director. C. Demolition shall be performed in such a manner that will insure the safety of adjacent property. Protect adjacent property from damage and protect persons occupying adjacent property from injuries which might occur from falling debris or other cause and so as not to cause interference with the use of other portions of the building, of Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 DEMOLITION 02 41 00 12 OF 14 adjacent buildings or the free access and safe passage to and from the same. D. Every precaution shall be taken to protect against movement or settlement of the building, of adjacent buildings, structures, sidewalks, roads, streets, curbs and pavements. Provide and place at the Contractor’s own expense, all necessary bracing and shoring in connection with demolition and removal work. E. Remove portions of structures with care by using tools and methods that will not transfer heavy shocks to existing and adjacent building structures, both internal and external of the particular work area. F. Provide and maintain in proper condition, suitable fire resistive dust barriers around areas where interior demolition and removal work is in progress. Dust barriers shall prevent the dust migration to adjacent areas. Remove dust barriers upon completion of major demolition and removal in the particular work area. G. Protect unaltered portions of existing construction, including finishes, furnishings and equipment H. Provide secure weather protection where demolition has removed a portion of the exterior envelope. 3.08. TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES AND BARRIERS A. Erect and maintain weatherproof enclosures where required to control outside elements such as weather, dust and the like, and remove and/or relocate same as required during and at completion of work under this section. B. Temporary enclosures shall be of such height and construction as to eliminate airborne dust, exterior rain, snow and other elements, and to reduce noise level. Lock doors and provide for security of buildings as approved by Owner. C. Furnish and erect signs, lights, barricades and other equipment as may be necessary for the safe prosecution of this work. Furnish and erect signs or markings of bypasses and detours, where necessary, in compliance with applicable rules and regulations of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts and the Town of Berlin. D. Furnish, erect and maintain all fences, planking, bracing, shoring, sheathing, lights, barricades, warning signs, and guards necessary for the protection of streets, sidewalks, adjoining property, and of the public. 3.09. DISCOVERY OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS A. If hazardous materials, such as chemicals, asbestos-containing materials, or other hazardous materials are discovered during the course of the work, cease work in affected area only and immediately notify the Designer and the Project Manager of such discovery. Do not proceed with work in such areas until instructions are issued by the Designer. Continue work in other areas. B. If unmarked containers are discovered during the course of the work, cease work in the affected area only and immediately notify the Designer and the Project Manager of such discovery. Do not proceed with work in such areas until Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 DEMOLITION 02 41 00 13 OF 14 instructions are issued by the Designer. Take immediate precautions to prohibit endangering the containers integrity. Continue work in other areas. 3.10. TRANSITION FROM EXISTING TO NEW WORK A. When new work abuts or finishes flush with existing work, make a smooth and workmanlike transition. Patched work shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance so that the patch or transition is invisible at a distance of five feet. 3.11. ADJUSTMENTS A. Perform cutting and removal work to remove minimum necessary and in a manner to avoid damage to adjacent work. Cut finish surfaces such as masonry, tile, plaster or metals, by methods to terminate surfaces in a straight line at a natural point of division. B. Where partitions are removed, patch floors, walls, and ceilings, with finish materials to match existing. C. Where removal of partitions results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors and ceilings to provide smooth planes without breaks, steps, or bulkheads. Where extreme change of plane of one inch or more occurs, request instructions from Architect as to method of making transition. D. Trim and refinish existing doors as necessary to clear new floors. 3.12. DAMAGED SURFACES A. Patch or replace any portion of an existing finished surface which is found to be damaged, lifted, discolored, or shows other imperfections as a result of demolition, with matching material. B. Provide adequate support of substrate prior to patching the finish. C. Refinish patched portions of painted or coated surfaces in a manner to produce uniform color and texture over entire surface. D. When existing surface finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections. 3.13. CLEANING UP A. Completely remove from the project area all demolition debris and dispose of all materials off the site. Disposal of the materials shall be done in such a manner that there shall be no accumulation of any demolition material which may, in the opinion of the Owner, the Fire Department, or any other public agency having jurisdiction, constitute a hazard to the public or the structure. B. Where specifically called for on the drawings, remove and dispose of tanks and other containers above or below ground used for the storage of gasoline, fuel oil or other flammable materials in accordance with the regulations of the City of Boston Fire Department and Massachusetts Department of Public Safety. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 DEMOLITION 02 41 00 14 OF 14 C. Refuse and debris resulting from work under this section shall be removed from the site at regular intervals. Make all required arrangements for legal disposal of such materials as per Section 1.01B and provide ongoing proof of legal disposal. D. Wet down thoroughly, dry and dust producing materials to be transported and all such work during demolition to prevent spread of dust. Make all arrangements and pay for all water and necessary connections therefore. E. Do not burn materials or debris on the project site. F. At completion of removal work, all rubbish, debris, waste, materials and salvaged materials from and about the building and structures that have been overlooked, including all tools, scaffolds, apparatus and appliances used in connection with work under this section shall be removed and the premises shall be left in broom clean condition ready for alteration work to be done under other sections. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Cast In Place Concrete 03 30 00 Page 1 of 18 Section 03 30 00 Cast In Place Concrete PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein. B. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Coordination with and cutting and patching of mechanical and electrical penetrations through cast-in-place concrete. 2. Cutting of existing concrete slabs for new structural footings. 3. Patching new openings in existing slabs. 4. Reinforced concrete footings, foundations, and slabs. 5. Concrete pads and slabs. C. Alternates: Not Applicable. D. Install Items Furnished Under Other Sections: Not Applicable. 1. Section 25 00 01 MISCELLANEOUS METALS a. Sleeves, anchors, inserts, plates, and similar items for embedment in concrete. E. Furnish Items to Other Sections: Not Applicable. F. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 02 41 00 DEMOLITION 2. Section 07 10 00 WATERPROOFING AND DAMPPROOFING 3. Section 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION 4. Division 22 00 00 PLUMBING 5. Division 26 00 00 ELECTRICAL 6. Section 31 20 00 EARTHWORK 7. 9. Section 33 40 00 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 1.03. DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements. B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Cast In Place Concrete 03 30 00 Page 2 of 18 1.04. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. 2. Indicate amount of fly ash in the mix. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. 1. Indicate coordination requirements for reinforcement locations with requirements of structural steel, steel joints, and steel deck. D. Anchor Bolt Location: Indicate compliance with approved shop drawings. E. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements: 1. Aggregates. 2. Design Mix. F. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Fiber reinforcement. 6. Waterstops. 7. Curing compounds. 8. Floor and slab treatments. 9. Bonding agents. 10. Adhesives. 11. Vapor retarders. 12. Semi-rigid joint filler. 13. Joint-filler strips. 14. Repair materials. G. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements to determine compliance with specified tolerances and requirements for applied finishes and materials, except as noted for slope to drains. H. Field quality-control test and inspection reports. 1.05. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Cast In Place Concrete 03 30 00 Page 3 of 18 C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. 2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade II. D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M. 1.06. TESTING CONTROL AND INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall retain the services of a qualified testing agency, approved by the Architect, to test aggregate and to prepare mix design for each strength of concrete specified; and shall submit such mix designs and test results to the Architect for approval. The costs of all such preliminary services shall be borne by the Contractor. All other testing and inspection will be performed by the Owner's testing agency. B. A qualified testing agency for construction testing and inspection will be selected by the Owner and shall be paid directly by the Owner. Such testing to include, but not be limited to: Soil testing and monitoring using a Nuclear Density gauge; Concrete monitoring and testing. C. Two cylinders out of each set shall be tested at 7 days and the other 2 at 28 days. The testing laboratory shall furnish all materials and labor and shall make all field test cylinders. D. Cooperate fully with the testing agency's work in taking and storing samples. Provided storage facilities must protect cylinders from effects of low or high temperatures. E. Accept as final results of tests made by the qualified professional testing organization engaged by the Owner. F. Testing required because of changes requested by the Contractor in materials, sources of materials, or mix proportions; and extra testing of concrete or materials because of failure to meet the Specification requirements are to be paid for by the Contractor. G. Advise the Testing Agency of intent to place concrete by notification at least 24 hours prior to time of placement. 1.07. FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 305.1, and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Cast In Place Concrete 03 30 00 Page 4 of 18 1.08. COORDINATION AND NOTIFICATION OF RELATED TRADES C. Notify all other trades responsible for installing chases, inserts, sleeves, anchors, louvers, etc., when ready for such installation, and for final checking immediately before concrete is placed. Cooperate with such trades to obtain proper installation. D. Coordinate foundation and slab work with Elevator Subcontractor's requirements for well hole drilling and cylinder installation. 1.09. DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING E. All materials shall be stored to prevent damage from the elements and other causes. F. Cement and aggregates shall be stored in such a manner as to prevent deterioration or intrusion of foreign matter. Any materials which have deteriorated, or which have been damaged, shall not be used for concrete. G. Store reinforcement steel on wood skids to protect it from weather, oil, earth and damage from trucking or other construction operations. Reinforcement shall be free from loose mill scale, rust, form oil, concrete splatter and other extraneous coatings at the time it is embedded in the concrete. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01. CONCRETE, GENERAL A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301. 2. ACI 117. 2.02. FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. Only new wood materials shall be permitted. 1. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows: a. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge sealed. 2. Overlaid Finnish birch plywood. 3. Aluminum. B. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum. C. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal. D. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. E. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Cast In Place Concrete 03 30 00 Page 5 of 18 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface. 3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing. 2.03. STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 2.04. REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless- steel bar supports. 2.05. CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I/II, gray. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C. 3. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989/C 989M, Grade 100 or 120. 4. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica. B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. C. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M. D. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. 7. Accelerating admixture: PolarSet by W.R. Grace or Accelguard 80 by Euclid Chemical Company, or approved equal. 8. Pumping admixture: Darex Pumping Aid by W.R. Grace, or approved equal E. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Cast In Place Concrete 03 30 00 Page 6 of 18 2.06. CURING MATERIALS A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry. B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. C. Water: Potable. D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, 18 to 25 percent solids, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering. 1. Burke by Edoco; Spartan Cote WB II 20 Percent. 2. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear. 3. Dayton Superior Corporation; Safe Cure and Seal (J-19). 4. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Diamond Clear VOX. 5. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc; Dress & Seal WB. 6. Meadows, W.R., Inc.; Vocomp-20. 7. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Kure-N-Seal. 8. Symons Corporation, a Dayton Superior Company; Cure & Seal 18 Percent E. 2.07. RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: [ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber] [or] [ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork]. B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. C. Concrete sealer for finished slabs as indicated on finish schedule: Thompson’s Multi Surface Waterproofer or similar. 2.08. REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Cast In Place Concrete 03 30 00 Page 7 of 18 2.09. CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. 3. Slag Cement: 50 percent. 4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Slag Cement: 50 percent portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent. 5. Silica Fume: 10 percent. 6. Combined Fly Ash, Pozzolans, and Silica Fume: 35 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent. 7. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolans, Slag Cement, and Silica Fume: 50 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent. C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of cement. D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a w/c ratio below 0.50. 4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated. 2.10. CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS A. Footings: Normal-weight concrete. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 5 inches. 4. Air Content: 5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2inch nominal maximum aggregate size. B. Foundation Walls: Normal-weight concrete. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 5 inches. 4. Air Content: 5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. C. Slabs-on-Grade: Normal-weight concrete. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3500 psi at 28 days. 2. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 3. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 2.11. FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Cast In Place Concrete 03 30 00 Page 8 of 18 2.12. CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01. FORMWORK INSTALLATION A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 2. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 3. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Cast In Place Concrete 03 30 00 Page 9 of 18 3.02. EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303. 3.04. REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained. 1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that support weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength. 2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent. C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.05. SHORING AND RESHORING INSTALLATION A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring. 1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete. B. In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will induce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement. C. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection. 3.06. VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. B. Bituminous Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair bituminous vapor retarder according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Cast In Place Concrete 03 30 00 Page 10 of 18 3.07. STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. F. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated steel reinforcement. G. Zinc-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged zinc coatings with zinc repair material according to ASTM A 780/A 780M. Use galvanized-steel wire ties to fasten zinc-coated steel reinforcement. 3.08. JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. 4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 5. Space vertical joints in walls no more than 40 feet apart. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 7. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints using Form Lok Joint System. 1. Do not saw cut joints. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Cast In Place Concrete 03 30 00 Page 11 of 18 D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. 3.08. CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed. B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect. C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture. D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Cast In Place Concrete 03 30 00 Page 12 of 18 3.010. FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed- surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish,. C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed-finished as-cast concrete where indicated: 1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. 2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix 1 part portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches, so color of dry grout matches adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours. 3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches, so color of dry grout matches adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float. D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.10. FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power-driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo. C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Cast In Place Concrete 03 30 00 Page 13 of 18 2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and of levelness, F(L) 15. b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on- grade. c. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 15; for suspended slabs. d. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 45; and of levelness, F(L) 35; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 24. 3. Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/4 inch. D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. E. Slip-Resistive Finish: Before final floating, apply slip-resistive aggregate finish where indicated and to concrete stair treads, platforms, and ramps. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Uniformly spread 25 lb/100 sq. ft. of dampened slip-resistive over surface in one or two applications. Tamp aggregate flush with surface, but do not force below surface. 2. After broadcasting and tamping, apply float finish. 3. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone and water to expose slip-resistive aggregate. 3.11. MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: 1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. 2. Construct concrete bases 4 inches high unless otherwise indicated, and extend base not less than 6 inches in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions of supported equipment unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support. 3. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete substrate. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Cast In Place Concrete 03 30 00 Page 14 of 18 6. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 7. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3.12. CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 305.1 for hot- weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period. D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces. E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Cast In Place Concrete 03 30 00 Page 15 of 18 4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.13. JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least [one] [six] month(s). Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joints clean and dry. C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 3.14. CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2- 1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Cast In Place Concrete 03 30 00 Page 16 of 18 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.15. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports. C. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Headed bolts and studs. 4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs. D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. 2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Cast In Place Concrete 03 30 00 Page 17 of 18 a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 3. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 4. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete;one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below or 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 6. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567/C 567M, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. b. Cast and field cure three sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 8. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 9. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 10. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 11. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. 12. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 13. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 14. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 15. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Cast In Place Concrete 03 30 00 Page 18 of 18 This Page Intentionally left Blank Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Unit Masonry 04 20 00 1 of 16 SECTION 042000 UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein. B. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. For demolition of masonry for wall removal and cutting for new windows and doors see Section 02 41 00 Demolition and drawings 2. Vertical enlargement of elevator door openings including cutting, new lintels and new enclosure. 3. New CMU walls and at infills, repairs and patches after demolition and as required for new work. 4. New brick veneer at infills, repairs and patches after demolition and as required for new work. 5. New stucco at infills, repairs and patches after demolition and as required for new work. 6. Repointing of existing brick as indicated on drawings. 7. All masonry reinforcing including vertical and horizontal reinforcing, brick and stone ties, pins and other anchors. 8. All shoring required in carrying out new or demolition work to protect existing structure, walls and surfaces to remain. 9. Graffiti removal – see Section 012200 Unit Prices 10. Masonry Cleaning C. Alternates: Not Applicable D. Items To Be Installed Only: Install the following items as furnished by the designated Sections: 1. Section 055000 MISCELLANEOUS METALS a. Build in items including leveling plates, beams, lintels, anchors, bar reinforcing, angles, fixtures, flashings, louvers and elevator guide rail anchors. 2. Section 075300 ROOFING AND FLASHING a. Build in items including flashings E. Items To Be Furnished Only: Not Applicable. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Unit Masonry 04 20 00 2 of 16 F. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 012200 UNIT PRICES: a. Unit prices for graffiti removal, masonry infill at pipe openings, masonry infill at openings larger than 1 sf. 2. Section 024100 DEMOLITION: a. Demolition and removal of material not scheduled for re- use. 3. Section 033000 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE a. Foundations and footings. 4. Section 055000 MISCELLANEOUS METALS a. Furnishing of miscellaneous items to be built into masonry. 5. Section 075300 ROOFING AND FLASHING a. Furnishing of flashings to be built-in 6. Section 079200 JOINT SEALANTS a. Caulking of stone cap and ledge joints as indicated on drawings. G. Coordination with roofing subcontractor for scheduling and sequencing of masonry repairs and thru-wall flashing work. H. Protection of adjacent materials, finishes and equipment including roof areas I. Furnish and remove all scaffolding and hoists required to complete the job. J. Proper disposal of all demolished materials not to be reused. 1.03. SUBMITTALS A. All submittals, including shop drawings, manufacturer's specifications and product data shall be submitted for the following in accordance with the requirements of Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures and Substitutions. B. Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and data for each type of masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured products, including certifications that each type complies with specified requirements. Include instructions for handling, storage, installations and protection. C. Samples: Submit the following samples to the Architect in accordance with requirements of the General Conditions: 1. Face brick and block for each different type and color of existing masonry. Submit a number of alternates for selection by Architect. Samples to be resubmitted as required until approved match is obtained. 2. Mortar mix and colored masonry mortar samples showing full range of colors available. Samples to be resubmitted as required until approved match is obtained. 3. Stone and brick patching and crack filling compounds. 4. Flashings, reinforcing and accessories. 5. Chemical cleaners. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Unit Masonry 04 20 00 3 of 16 1.04. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications - Applicator: 1. Provide one person to supervise Work of this Section thoroughly familiar with manufacturer's recommended methods, materials, and nature of Work specified. 2. No Contractor will be considered who has not demonstrated through previous experience of at least 5 years, ability to perform Work required of this Section. B. Material Match for Historical Consistency: 1. Brick: Brick specified has been selected as a close match to existing. Other brick samples to be considered if offering an equal or better match as determined by Architect and owner. 2. Mortar: Mortar to be mixed so as to precisely match existing in texture, consistency and color. a. Provide a mortar analysis of the original existing mortar. Analysis is to be performed by a licensed laboratory experienced in historical mortar analysis. b. Samples to be resubmitted as required until approved match is obtained. c. Provide mortar from a single source of supply throughout all work. C. Job Mock-Up: 1. New Masonry: a. 4x4 sample panel of new brick work wall section at both veneer and solid wall construction, including stone, reinforcement and typical corner conditions. a. One set of three masonry prisms shall be built and tested in accordance with ASTM E447. The materials and workmanship used to build the prisms shall be representative of those that will be contained within the actual project construction. The test results shall be submitted to the Architect and General Contractor for review within 24 hours of the test. Masonry Construction shall not commence until test results have been reviewed by both the Architect and the General Contractor. All costs associated with this preconstruction testing shall be borne by the General Contractor. 2. Repair and Repointing: a. Repair and repoint a 9 ft. sq. section of wall in the presence of the Architect, include new brick, brick and stone patch, crack patch and saw cut repointing. (1) Include area for Sealant Subcontractor to perform caulking mock-up. b. Replace 1 lintel at each school in presence of Architect. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Unit Masonry 04 20 00 4 of 16 3. Cleaning: a. Conduct mockups for cleaning, graffiti removal and masonry painting as appropriate on separate 16 ft. sq. sections of wall to the desired degree of cleanliness as approved by Architect. b. Repeat cleaning if first method is unacceptable using different cleaning methods acceptable to Architect on up to three different panels until method and cleanliness is acceptable. 4. Test panels and methods will become standard for Work of this Section. Retain panels during construction as standard for judging completed masonry work. 1.03. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition. B. Store and handle mortar and masonry units to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion or other causes. 1.04. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Prior to submitting bid, and with prior arrangement with the Owner, the Bidder shall visit the site and examine existing conditions thoroughly to ascertain the exact scope of work and to determine conditions that will affect the work required under this contract. New masonry is to be laid up in a manner that matches closely the existing building in coursing and joint type and finish. Existing work will have to be modified to accept new work, and new work will have to join carefully to existing conditions. B. Protection of work: During erection, cover top of walls with heavy waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 " down both sides and secure cover tightly in place. 2. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 22 hours after building masonry walls or columns 3. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns 4. Prevent grout or mortar from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed. Remove immediately grout or mortar exposed to such masonry. 5. Protect base of walls from rain splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. 6. Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar. 7. Thoroughly protect all existing surfaces including masonry walls, parapets and roofing from damage and staining during construction. Repair all damage caused by the work immediately and at no cost to the owner. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Unit Masonry 04 20 00 5 of 16 C. Environmental Requirements: 1. Health and Safety Precautions: 2. Comply with following precautions to reduce risk of danger arising during paint removal operations. a. Fire: Maintain fire extinguisher in area of operations at all times. b. Chemical Poisoning: For solvent-base strippers, wear toxic vapor respirator, cotton lined gloves, full covering on arms and legs; and source of water to flush solvent-base and caustic-base strippers from skin. c. Eye Damage: Wear safety goggles when using manual, mechanical, or fluid paint scrapers, sanders, or strippers. 3. Potential Health and Safety Dangers of Paint Removal: a. Methods detailed in this Section present health and safety dangers. b. Take precautions to reduce dangers during Work. 4. Temperature Restrictions: a. Do not lay masonry or stonework, repaint, caulk, wash down, or wet surface when temperature may drop below 40 deg. F. within 24 hours. b. Comply with ANSI A41.1 cold weather procedures when temperature may drop below 40 deg. F. c. Do not use masonry materials which are likely to contain frost or use accelerating ingredients with any mortar. d. Take down completed work found to be affected by frost and rebuild at no cost to the owner. 5. Dust Generating Processes: Do not perform processes creating dust or dirt when wind exceeds 10 mph. D. Sequencing: 1. Existing Masonry: a. Complete necessary routing of joints and replacement of designated damaged masonry units before starting cleaning processes. b. Complete final pointing after cleaning. E. Scheduling: 1. Perform cleaning or washing of exterior masonry without interruption to Owner's operations. 2. Coordinate with Work performed on adjacent surfaces and by other trades. a. Perform cleaning work prior to installation of new doors and windows. 1.05. SCAFFOLDING AND HOISTS A. Furnish, erect and maintain all necessary scaffolding, ladders, platforms, planks and hoisting equipment required for the execution of the work. Remove these items when no longer needed. B. All such apparatus, equipment and construction shall meet the requirements of the Labor Laws and State Laws and regulations applicable thereto and the authorities having jurisdiction over this work. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Unit Masonry 04 20 00 6 of 16 1.06. GUARANTEE A. Upon completion of the work, submit to the Architect a written guarantee stating that the work of this Section 04500 will be free from defective materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion. Upon written notice of any defect within the one year period, make all repairs at no cast to the owner. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01. MASONRY UNITS A. Salvaged materials to be reused wherever possible. B. Face brick to meet the requirements of ASTM C216, Grade SW, Type FBS. 1. Size and type to match existing material in color, size, texture, type, quality and conform to the minimum standard of ASTM C216, Grade SW, Type F. More than one brick type and /or brick mix may be required at each site. Make submittals and coordinate with Architect to achieve optimal match. Furnish special shapes as necessary. Supply not limited to a single manufacturer. a. Brick: Brick to be selected to match existing building brick. Submit range of samples for selection by architect. C. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): All hollow CMU shall conform to ASTM C140, Grade N, Type 1. All solid CMU shall conform to ASTMC145, Grade N, Type 1. All Hollow and solid CMU shall attain a minimum ultimate compressive strength of 2,800 PSI as determined by AASTM C140, yielding a prism strength of 2,000 psi minimum as determined by ASTM E447. Use two core CMU in running bond except where solid core CMU is specified or required for maintaining a fire rated assembly. 2.02. REINFORCING AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES A. Reinforcing for grouted forecourt walls to consist of the following: 1. # 4 bar 12” oc each way in center of cavity, with rebar positioners / ties every third course. 2. Horizontal reinforcing bars to tie to bars from reinforced concrete piers 3. Stone caps to be pinned to forecourt walls with stainless steel pins as indicated on drawings. B. Reinforcing for brick piers to consist of the following: 1. Tie brick face to concrete pier back-up with heavy duty masonry veneer anchors: Hohmann and Barnard HB-213-HS or equal. C. All bond beams, masonry lintels, knock-out web block, reinforced vertical cores and all other cores shown in the contract documents to be grouted, shall be grouted solid and vibrated. Do not use mortar where grout is specified. D. Epoxy anchors to be to be equal to Dur-O-Pair Epoxy Anchors by Dur-O- Wall or similar epoxy anchors by Hilti or Rawl. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Unit Masonry 04 20 00 7 of 16 E. Furnish and install all miscellaneous anchors, ties and other reinforcing shown on drawings or as required to complete the work. F. Closed cell neoprene expansion joint shall be 3/8" x 3" conforming to ASTM D1056, Class RE41 as manufactured by Dur-O-Wall, Hoffmann & Barnard AA Wire Products or Heckman. 2.03. MORTAR A. Mortar materials shall be as follows: 1. Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C150, except complying with the staining requirements of ASTM C91 for not more than 0.03% water soluble alkali. Furnish Type I, except Type III may be used for cold weather construction. Provide coloring agents as required to produce required mortar color. 2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, special finishing hydrated lime, non-air- entrained. 3. Aggregate for mortar: Sand, ASTM C144, except for joints 1/4 inch and less (if any) use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. 4. Water: Clean, free of deleterious materials which would impair strength or bond. B. Mix Measurement: Use methods which will ensure that specified proportions are controlled and accurately maintained. Measure aggregate materials in a damp, loose condition. Use of a tile box or similar device is required. C. Mortar for Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270, proportion specifications, except limit materials to those specified herein, and limit cement/lime ratio (by volume) as follows: 1. Provide type M mortar for masonry above grade and interior and exterior work, except as indicated otherwise. Mortar proportions by volume shall be one part Portland Cement; 1/4 to 1/2 parts hydrated lime; not less than 2-1/4 and not more than 3 times the sum of the volumes of cement and lime shall be aggregate. 2. Provide minimum 2,000 psi Type S mortar at 28 days for unexposed joints at reinforced and load bearing masonry. Mortar proportions by volume shall be one part Portland Cement; over 1/4 to 1/2 part hydrated lime; not less than 2-1/4 and not more than 3 times the sum of the volumes of cement and lime shall be aggregate. 3. Add colored mortar pigment to match sample approved by Architect not exceeding pigment-to-cement ratio of 1 to 10 by weight to produce mortar color required. 4. Mix and test mortar to achieve match between new mortar and existing mortar for hardness and components at each different condition and location. 5. Exact proportions may be determined by mason within the limits specified herein, and submitted for approval, but the Architect reserves the right to establish exact proportions by laboratory tests should he so elect. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Unit Masonry 04 20 00 8 of 16 D. Pointing Mortar for Brick: 1. Mortar mix shall be calibrated so that new pointing mortar matches existing in color and texture. Submit samples until match is achieved. Final mix shall be approved by architect, and sample kept on site. 2. Use only pre-hydrated mortars for brick repointing. 3. Examine existing mortars and make recommendations to architect for duplicating original mortar in proportions, strength, hardness and color. Where not able to duplicate propose either type N or type O mortars for approval by architect. 4. Type N Mortar with the following proportions: one part Portland Cement; 1 part hydrated lime; not less than 4-1/2 and not more than 6 times the sum of the volumes of cement and lime shall be aggregate. 5. Type O Mortar with the following proportions: one part Portland Cement; 2 parts hydrated lime; not less than 4-1/2 and not more than 6 times the sum of the volumes of cement and lime shall be aggregate. 6. Mix and test mortar to achieve match between new mortar and existing mortar for hardness and components at each different condition and location. 7. Add colored mortar pigment not exceeding pigment-to-cement ratio of 1 to 10 by weight to produce mortar color required. E. Grout for masonry shall conform to ASTM C476 and the following: 1. Use "Fine Grout" where specified. Proportion by volume; one part Portland Cement, Zero to 1/10 part lime and sand equal to 2-1/4 to 3 times the sum of the volumes of cement and lime materials. 2. Use "Coarse Grout" where specified. Proportion by volume; one part Portland Cement, Zero to 1/10 part lime, and fine aggregate (sand) equal to 2-1/4 to 3 times the sum of the volumes of cement and lime materials, and coarse aggregate equal to one to two times the sum of the volumes of cement and lime. 3. All grout shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days. 4. Mix grout to have a slump of 8-10 inches plus/minus 1 inch, at time of placement. F. Concrete Patching Compound: Shall be "MASCO" or "MASCRETE" latex cements by Silpro, "Sika Top" by Sika Corporation, or similar by Conproco Coatings or W.R. Grace, or approved equal. G. Chemical Cleaning Solutions: 1. Dilute chemical cleaning solutions to produce solutions of concentrate indicated. 2. Do not exceed that recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer. H. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients, in quantities needed for immediate use. I. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. J. Plasticizers, accelerators, retardants, water repellent agents and other admixtures shall not be added to the mortar mix unless approved by architect. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Unit Masonry 04 20 00 9 of 16 K. Use mortar within two hours of mixing at temperatures over 74 degrees F., and two and one half hours at temperatures over 50 degrees F. but under 74 degrees F. L. If necessary retemper mortar within two hours of mixing to replace water lost by evaporation. Do not retemper mortar after two hours. 2.04. STONE PATCH REPAIRS A. Stone patch material to be a colored polymer-modified portland cement- based repair mortar formulated to imitate the substrate in performance characteristics, MIMIC by Conproco Corporation, Jahn Restoration Patching Mortars by Cathedral stone or similar product by Diedrich Chemicals Restoration Tech, or approved equal. Material to reach a 28 day compressive strength of 4800 psi, a 28 day tensile strength of 530 psi and a 28 day adhesion strength of 320 psi. Ultimate shrinkage shall not exceed .07%. B. Preparation of existing surfaces shall be done with a penetrating polymer to chemically strengthen existing material, Conpro Start by Conproco , Cathedral Stone or Diedrich Chemicals Restoration Tech, or approved equal. C. Anti Corrosion coating to be Armatec 110 by Sika Corporation, Kem Kromik Metal Primer by Sherwin Williams, or Iron Clad Retardo Rust Inhibitive Paint by Benjamin Moore, or approved equal. 2.05. STONE CRACK REPAIRS A. Material for stone crack repairs is to be an injected 2-component, solvent free, moisture insensitive epoxy resin adhesive. Items listed below are as manufactured by Sika Corporation for identification of type and quality only. Similar products by Permagile Epoxy Products and W. R. Meadows Resi- Weld Products are acceptable, or approved equal. Contractor to select from three products as follows: 1. Deep cracks where controlling flow is a problem: Sikadur Injection Gel. 2. Very fine cracks or use at low temperatures: Sikadur 52, low viscosity. 3. For use at higher temperatures: Sikadur 35, Hi Mod LV. 4. Furnish all injection equipment, injection ports, crack sealants and other accessories required. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Unit Masonry 04 20 00 10 of 16 2.06. CLEANING SUPPLIES AND EQUIPMENT A. Masonry Cleaning: 1. Water for Cleaning: Clean, potable, free of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, and organic matter. Brushes: Fiber bristle only. 2. Acidic Restoration Cleaner: a. Manufacturer's standard hydrofluoric-acid-based restoration cleaner. b. Product: ProSoCo Inc. Sure Klean Restoration Cleaner, Heavy Duty restoration Cleaner, 766 Limestone and Masonry Prewash and After wash as indicated by material and degree of soiling or similar products by American Restoration Chemicals and Arcal Chemicals, or approved equal. B. Liquid-Strippable Masking Agent: 1. Manufacturer's standard product for protecting glass, metal and polished stone surfaces from effects of masonry cleaners. 2. Product: ProSoCo Inc. Sure Klean Acid Stop, Diedrich Chemicals Model Diedrich Acid Guard soiling or similar products by American Restoration Chemicals and Arcal Chemicals, or approved equal. C. Spray Equipment for Chemical Cleaners: Low-pressure tank or chemical pump with cone-shaped spray tip as recommended by cleaner manufacturer. D. Spray Equipment for Water: Equipment capable of controlled spray application of water at pressures, volume, and temperature, if any, indicated with min. 20 deg. fan- shaped spray tip. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01. PROTECTION A. Remove and store fixtures, fittings, finish hardware, and accessories in areas affected by restoration and cleaning processes. B. Close off, mask, seal, and board-up designated areas, materials, and surfaces to protect from damage. C. Provide plastic sheeting to protect plants, shrubs, stems, and branches. D. Fence off Work area. E. Secure chemicals in secure location when not in use and in protected location when in use. F. Thoroughly test glass, aluminum, roofing and other surfaces where damage could result due to cleaning materials and provide protection as required. G. Aluminum Trim and Glass: Use ProSoCo. Inc. Model Sure Klean Acid Stop soiling or similar products by American Restoration Chemicals and Arcal Chemicals where cleaning chemicals cannot be diverted from aluminum and glass surfaces. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Unit Masonry 04 20 00 11 of 16 3.02. DEMOLITION AND SHORING A. Remove all existing masonry, inserts, lintels, and abandoned equipment to create the new conditions documented on the drawings. B. All demolition work must be carried out in such a way that it does not disrupt any work that is to remain. All removed materials must be promptly set aside in an approved location for prompt removal by the General Contractor. All areas must be kept broom clean at all times following demolition work. C. Provide any and all shoring, bracing, and temporary structural support to secure existing walls while new openings are being cut. The subcontractor is responsible for determining the necessary shoring and providing it. Any damage caused by inadequate shoring and/or structural protection during masonry work must be repaired to the standards of the existing conditions without extra cost. D. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar grout, or concrete (if any). Brace, tie and support as required to maintain proportion and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. E. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry member has hardened sufficiently to carry its own weight and all other reasonable temporary loads that may be placed on it during construction. F. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever possible. Use dry cutting saws to cut concrete masonry units. G. All demolition shall conform to the requirements of Section 02050 Demolition. 3.03. MASONRY WORK, GENERAL A. Build masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Match coursing, bonding, color and texture of new masonry work with existing work. B. Cut masonry units with motor driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp and unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Do not cut brick to form special shapes required, but use manufactured shapes at these locations. Use full units without cutting whenever possible. Use die cutting saws to cut concrete masonry units. No cut edges shall be left exposed. C. Wet brick made from clay or shale which have ASTM C67 initial rates of absorption of more than 30 grams per 30 square inches per minute. Use wetting methods which insure each clay masonry unit being nearly saturated but surface dry when laid. D. Do not wet concrete masonry units. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Unit Masonry 04 20 00 12 of 16 E. Lay exposed masonry to match existing pattern. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not more than two inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners unless otherwise shown. 1. Match coursing, bonding, color and texture of new masonry work with that of existing work and as shown on the drawings or as directed. F. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns, with uniform joint widths to properly locate openings, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less than half size units at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations. G. Lay-up work plumb and with courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. H. Rake back 1/2 masonry unit length in each course when stopping and resuming work. Do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. I. Build in items specified under this and other Sections of these specifications as the work progresses. Fill-in solidly with masonry around built-in items. J. Setting Loose Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of any bond- reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates. K. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges, or other adjustable devices. After the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout. Use metallic non-shrink grout on concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use non-metallic non-shrink grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. L. Install steel plates and angles over openings where indicated on drawings. Maintain minimum 6 inch bearing on each side of openings. M. Set precast concrete in accordance with drawings and final shop drawings for pre cast work. Provide anchors, supports, fasteners and other attachments shown or necessary to secure precast work in place. Shim and adjust accessories for proper setting of precast. Completely fill holes, slots and other sinkages for dowels, anchors, fasteners and supports with mortar during setting of the precast work. Allow 3/8" reveal at joint at all flat precast work for installation of caulk joint by caulk subcontractor. 3.04. MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay brick with completely filled bed, head and collar joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Unit Masonry 04 20 00 13 of 16 B. Maintain joint widths to match existing coursing, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or to be covered by other materials. Tool exposed joints slightly concave to match existing using a jointer larger than joint thickness. Rake out mortar joints in preparation for application of caulking or sealants where shown. C. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and relay in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar. 3.05. REINFORCING A. All brick at forecourt walls to be anchored to grout core reinforcing with bar ties 12” oc at every third course. B. All brick at piers to be anchored to concrete back-up with high strength veneer anchors C. All new brick at general locations is to be anchored to existing masonry back- up with galvanized brick ties, one anchor per brick repair area of less than 16" x 16", and at a frequency of one every 24" horizontally and 16" vertically on larger areas. D. Where shown on drawings install epoxy anchors to secure new work to existing. E. Install Stainless steel pin reinforcement epoxy anchors and straps in resetting of loose and shifted stone work. . 3.06. GROUTING A. Preparation of grout spaces: prior to grouting, inspect and clean grout spaces. Remove dust, dirt, mortar droppings, loose pieces of masonry and other foreign materials from grout spaces. Clean reinforcing and adjust to proper positions. Clean top surfaces of structural members supporting masonry to insure bond. B. Grouting: All grouting shall conform to NCMA standards. 1. Use "Fine grout" for filling spaces less than 4 inches in both horizontal directions. 2. Use "Coarse grout" for filling 4 inch spaces or larger in both horizontal directions. 3.07. FLASHING OF MASONRY WORK A. Build into the work metal thru and cap flashings, counter flashings and other items furnished under other sections in conjunction with roof and parapet flashing. Build in metal flashings in conjunction with concealed flashings where indicated. 1. Place so as to allow adequate width to be turned up against the wall, at least 4", and 8" inches minimum beyond the opening. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Unit Masonry 04 20 00 14 of 16 2. Where necessary, form flashing ends into pans against masonry to divert water to exterior. 3. Apply in thick mastic bed and cover with mastic. 4. Wherever openings are cut in flashings for reinforcing or other fixtures, thoroughly seal all penetrations with mastic to make watertight. B. Form weep holes at locations where flashing has Been installed, at the bottom of lintel angles, immediately above flashings. Form weep holes by placing short lengths of neoprene tubing 3/8" in diameter in the mortar bed. Withdraw weep holes after mortar has hardened sufficiently to permit withdrawal without disturbing the mortar. 3.08. REPAIR OF EXISTING MASONRY A. Remove and replace all cracked, spalled, chipped or damaged individual bricks in areas where indicated on drawings. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Remove and rebuild all sections of brickwork where face brick has become loosened from back-up material as evidenced by large cracks and bowing out of vertical alignment. C. Remove and rebuild all sections of brickwork where face brick shows large degree of severe spalling and other surface damage. D. Remove and reset all loosened and out of alignment stone blocks with all necessary stainless steel straps, epoxy set anchors. Reinforcing of stonework shall be designed by a registered engineer and submitted to the Architect for review. 3.09. LINTEL REPLACEMENT A. At all areas indicated on drawings, shore walls as needed, remove as much face masonry, brick or stone, as necessary to fully expose all steel members to be replaced and/or repaired, replace and/or repair steel members and install new flashing as shown on appropriate details and rebuild missing face masonry panels or reset missing stone lintels. B. Prior to commencing work review shoring requirements with an engineer and submit a shoring plan certified by structural engineer registered in the state of Massachusetts to the Architect. C. Investigate internal lintel and bearing steel for rust and deterioration. If directed by the Architect perform additional replacement of internal steel bearing members as additional work as described under Section 0825 Unit Price Schedule. 3.010. JOINT REPOINTING A. Cut out and repoint all joints at wall areas where indicated on the drawings. 1. Certain joints are to be finished with backer rod and / or bond breaker tape and caulked under Section 07900 Joint Sealants. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Unit Masonry 04 20 00 15 of 16 B. Cut mortar from joints of existing masonry where repointing is indicated to depths equal to 2-1/2 times widths but min. 3/4 in. and not less than required to expose sound, unweathered mortar. Leave clean joints with bond surfaces of masonry exposed and reveals with square backs. Where caulking exists together with mortar in the joints, the caulking shall be thoroughly removed. 1. In removal of the existing mortar joint using either hand or power tools, special care shall be used to prevent damage to existing masonry. No evidence of saw or hand cutting shall be visible on the brick surface. The cut joints shall be square and true. The contractor will be responsible for replacing all brick or stone damaged by joint cutting and or which does not meet the standards established in the approved mock-up. 2. The Masonry Subcontractor shall be responsible for removal and replacement of all brick, stone, flashing or other inserts damaged during the course of the work, at no cost to the owner C. After completion of joint cutting in any one area, the joints shall be wire brushed to remove loose mortar and power washed. If repointing does not occur within 12 hours, the joints shall be protected with polyethylene or a suitable material in order to prevent water penetration into the building. D. Joint Pointing: 1. Pre-hydrate mortar to obtain a damp, workable consistency which retains its shape when worked into a ball. Let stand in dampened condition for 1 to 1- 12 hours. 2. Rinse masonry surfaces with water to remove dust and mortar particles. At time of pointing provide damp joint surfaces free of standing water. 3. Add water to the pre-hydrated mortar to bring it to a workable consistency (somewhat drier than conventional mortar). 4. Apply and compact first layer of mortar to areas where existing mortar was removed to depth greater than surrounding areas. 5. After depths of joints are uniform, apply pointing mortar in thin layers, compacting each in turn after each becomes thumbprint hard. Do not featheredge final layer. 6. Tool joints to match original appearance of joints. 7. Cure mortar for 72 hours. 8. Where repointing work precedes cleaning of existing masonry, allow mortar to harden min. 30 days before beginning cleaning work. 3.011. CLEANING OF EXISTING MASONRY A. Extent of work: Masonry cleaning to consist of: 1. Graffiti removal 2. General cleaning and washing of all existing and new stucco, brick and stone. B. Protection: Protect the following surfaces from contact with chemical cleaners of type indicated by use of liquid Strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape or other appropriate and approved material: 1. Glass, unpainted metal trim, and polished stone exposed to acidic chemical cleaners. 2. Unpainted metal exposed to alkali cleaners. 3. Built-up and membrane roofing, membrane and metal flashings. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Unit Masonry 04 20 00 16 of 16 C. Plant Removal: 1. Remove plant growth from masonry surfaces. 2. Cut roots and allow vegetation to dry before removal. 3. Apply ammonium sulfamate or other acceptable root killing material to plant roots indicated for removal. D. Graffiti Removal: Prior to general surface cleaning, remove all graffiti from brick, stucco and stone surfaces with appropriate cleaning product, starting from weakest to strongest solution as necessary. See section 012200 Unit Prices for graffiti removal. E. General Masonry Cleaning: Wash down all exterior masonry surfaces with acid restoration cleaner according to manufacturer's recommendations. Use solutions specified to clean both brick , stucco and stone. 3.012. CLEAN-UP A. Promptly as work proceeds and upon completion, remove excess mortar, smears, droppings. B. Clean adjacent and adjoining surface of marks arising out of execution of work of this Section. C. Sweep up and remove daily sand, cleaning compounds and mixtures, dirt, debris and rubbish. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Structural Steel 05 10 00 Page 1 of 10 Section 05 10 00 Structural Steel PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein. B. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Structural steel framing including but not limited to: a. Steel columns b. Steel Beams c. Miscellaneous angles and plates d. Bolts e. Steel assemblies to be embedded in concrete or masonry f. Drilling and punching holes for attachment of operable partitions. g. Laboratory testing and inspection h. Shop painting i. Supplementary parts and members necessary to complete and erect structural steel frame 2. Proper Disposal of all materials not to be reused C. Alternates: Not Applicable D. Install Items Furnished Under Other Sections: Not Applicable. E. Furnish Items to Other Sections: Not Applicable. F. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE. 2. Section 05 50 00 MISCELLANEOUS METALS 3. Section 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 4. Section 10 22 00 OPERABLE PARTITIONS G. Protection of adjacent materials, finishes and equipment including roof areas H. Furnish and remove all scaffolding and hoists required to complete the job. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AlSC): 1. AISC Manual of Steel Construction 2. Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings 3. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Structural Steel 05 10 00 Page 2 of 10 B. Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC): 1. Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A36, Standard Specification for Structural Steel 2. ASTM A53 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Galvanized, Seamless and Welded 3. ASTM 108, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality 4. ASTM A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners 5. ASTM A325, Standard Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints 6. ASTM A500, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes 7. ASTM A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts 8. ASTM A570, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Structural Quality 9. ASTM A992 (Grade 50), Standard Specification For Steel for Structural Shapes for Use in Building Framing. D. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel 2. AWS D 1.3, Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel E. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): 1. Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 1, Good Painting Practice 2. Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2, Systems and Specifications F. Underwriter’s Laboratory Inc. (UL): 1. Fire Resistance Directory. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed shop and installation drawings showing shop and erection details including member sizes, grades of materials, details of fabrication and erection, camber, and end connections. 1. Do not begin fabrication of materials prior to review of shop drawings. 2. Review of shop drawings is for member sizes, spacings, details, and general compliance with Contract Drawings only. 3. Material quantities, lengths, fit, verification of job conditions and coordination with other trades are responsibility of Contractor. 4. Reproductions of Contract Drawings shall not be used for shop drawings. B. Design Calculations: Submit design calculations for any connections not designed or detailed on Contract Drawings. C. Manufacturer’s Mill Certifications: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Arc-Welding: Welding procedures and techniques, welders and tackers shall be qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1. 1. Welders to be employed on work shall maintain current AWS certification throughout duration of project. 2. If requested by Architect, submit identifying stenciled test coupons made by operator whose workmanship is subject to question, and if reasonable doubt of Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Structural Steel 05 10 00 Page 3 of 10 proficiency exists, welder shall be re-qualified and certified by independent testing laboratory at no additional expense to Owner. 3. Work suspected of deficient quality may be subject to removal of coupons from any location on any joint for testing. Remove section of welds found defective and properly reweld before proceeding with work. B. Steel Fabricator: not less than 5 years of experience in fabrication of structural steel. C. Steel Erector: not less than 5 years of experience in erection of structural steel. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Coordinate delivery of anchor bolts and other anchorage assemblies to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Provide setting drawings, instructions and templates required for proper placement of anchor bolts and embeds. B. Sequence shipments of fabricated steel to expedite erection and minimize field handling of material. C. Store structural steel above ground on skids or platforms, and protect from corrosion. Store packaged materials in unbroken containers. D. Do not bend or damage materials during shipment, handling and erection. E. Take precautions in the removal of packaging or bundling devices to prevent damage to materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Connections: Provide details of connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360. 2. Use Allowable Stress Design; data are given at service-load level. B. Moment Connections: Type FR, fully restrained. C. Construction: Combined system of moment frame and shear walls. MATERIALS A. Structural Steel Shapes, Bars and Plates: 1. W Shapes and Structural Tees: ASTM 992 (Grade 50). 2. All other shapes, Steel Bars, Plates and Angles: ASTM A36. B. Steel pipes: ASTM A53, Grade B or ASTM A500, Grade B. C. Steel Tubes: ASTM A500, Grade B. D. Bolts 1. High Strength Bolts: ASTM A325, Type 1. 2. Nuts: ASTM A563, Grade C, D, DH or DH3. 3. Washers: ASTM F436, Type 1. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Structural Steel 05 10 00 Page 4 of 10 E. Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 55. F. Welding Electrodes: E70. G. Paint for structural steel 1. Rust-inhibiting primer meeting SSPC Paint 13 for interior steel. 2. Paint shall be compatible with welding procedures and shall produce no significant difference in strength of weld material. H. Headed Stud Anchors for Embedded Assemblies 1. Steel shall conform to ASTM A108 grades C1010-1020, minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi. 2. Headed fusion welded shear connectors with proper ferrules and accessories especially designed to create composite deck action by mating of shear connectors, concrete deck, and supporting beams. 3. Studs shall be of uniform diameter, heads concentric and normal to shaft, and weld end chamfered and solid flux. I. Non-shrink grout 1. Metallic Non-Shrink Grout: Pre-mixed factory packaged, ferrous aggregate grout complying with CE CRD-C588, Type M. 2. Non-Shrink Non-Metallic Grout: Pre-mixed, factory packaged, non-staining, non- corrosive, non-gaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C62 3. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior application of type specified in this section. DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS A. Fabricator to design connections not designed or detailed on Contract Drawings to resist required forces. B. Complete penetration butt weld moment connections to develop 100% of flexural capacity of member. C. Detail bolted connections using bolts conforming to ASTM A325N, Bearing Type Connections with threads allowed in shear plane, unless noted otherwise on Contract Drawings. D. Do not use welds in combination with bolts in the same face of any connection. FABRICATION A. Fabricate materials in accordance with applicable AISC Specifications and Standards. B. Pre-assemble work as much as possible and deliver to site ready for erection. Mark and match-mark pieces where field assembly is required. C. Prior to fabrication; straighten materials, remove twists and bends and clean facing surfaces of scale and rust. D. Provide required camber in beams to within 1/8th inch per 10 feet of beam length. Mark all beams indicating direction of fabricated camber or natural camber due to rolling tolerance. E. Provide members of required sizes, weights, shapes, and lengths. Do not splice members to achieve required lengths except where specifically allowed by the Architect. Do not alter member shapes or lengths or enlarge bolt holes in the field for proper fit. Return materials to the fabrication shop for correction where required. Member splices allowed for the convenience of the fabricator or erector shall not result in additional cost to the Owner. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Structural Steel 05 10 00 Page 5 of 10 F. Punch and drill holes for bolts. Hole sizes shall conform to AISC Specifications. 1. Coordinate with operable partition manufactureer for locations of holes ppunched to sopport operable partitions. G. Compression joints shall have both contact surfaces milled for precision fit. Other joints shall be cut or dressed straight and true, and prepared as required for welding. Components of assemblies and built-up members shall be pinned and rigidly accurate position during final assembly. WELDED CONSTRUCTION A. Comply with AWS D1.1. B. Clean surfaces of loose scale, rust, grease and dirt. Remove oil with benzene. Wire brush welds after depositing for visual inspection. Welds shall be smooth and uniform in cross section, shall be free of porosity and clinkers, and shall have required fusion and penetration into base metal. C. Secure members in proper position for welding. D. Take proper precautions to minimize residual stresses and distortions in members being welded. E. Preheat and interpass temperatures shall conform to AWS D1.1 continuous fillet with minimum sizes specified by AWS D1.1. F. Prepare members to be butt-welded in accordance with AISC recommendations for pre- qualified welds and provide required clearances and back-up bars. Remove back-up bars after completing welds. G. Lay fillet welds of required sizes in proper position and with gaps not exceeding AISC recommendations. H. Tack welding shall not affect quality of finished welds. BOLTS, CONNECTORS AND ANCHORS A. Provide holes at right angles to members of sizes recommended by AISC Specifications. Short-slotted holes shall not be used for primary frame connections (members connecting to columns), trusses and wind bracing unless specifically allowed by the Architect. Where used, short-slotted holes shall be oriented normal to the direction of load. B. Provide beveled washer for surfaces out of parallel more than 1:20. C. Provide bolts of sufficient length to extend entirely through nuts. D. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F 3125/F 3125M,Grade A325, Type 1, heavy- hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436/F 436M, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish. E. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F 3125/F 3125M, Grade A490, Type 1, heavy- hex steel structural bolts or Grade F2280 tension-control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies with splined ends; ASTM A 563, Grade DH, heavy-hex carbon- steel nuts; and ASTM F 436/F 436M, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish. F. Zinc-Coated High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F 3125/F 3125M,Grade A325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436/F 436M, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Structural Steel 05 10 00 Page 6 of 10 G. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 3125/F 3125M, Grade F1852, Type 1, round head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends; ASTM A 563, Grade DH, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436/F 436M, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain. E. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold- finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B. F. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 1. Configuration: Straight. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 5. Finish: Plain. G. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, straight. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Plain. H. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A 449 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. Finish: Plain I. Holes for anchor bolts in base plates may be oversized in accordance with AISC Specifications. Provide washers as indicated on Contract Drawings. SHOP PAINTING A. Apply one coat of rust-inhibitive primer to exposed surfaces of structural steel members except: surfaces required to be field welded, to be encased in concrete, to be spray fireproofed, and top flanges of beams with shear connectors to support metal deck. Primer must be compatible with fireproofing. B. Prepare faying surfaces of slip critical connections in accordance with RCSC. C. Thoroughly clean surfaces to be painted of all loose mill scale, dirt, rust and other foreign matter with steel scrapers, wire brushes, or sandblasting in accordance with SSPC SP-3. Remove oil and grease with solvents. D. Mix paint in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, continuously stirring during application. Do not add thinner after initial mixing. E. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Thoroughly work over surfaces and into corners. Minimum dry thickness of coating shall be 1.5 mils. F. Repair damage to coating prior to delivery. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Structural Steel 05 10 00 Page 7 of 10 HEADED STUD ANCHORS A. Comply with AWS D1 .1, Section 7. B. Clean surfaces to be welded of rust, oil, grease, paint and dirt. Remove mill scale by scraping or sandblasting. C. Weld headed studs with appropriate equipment properly adjusted for climatic conditions. D. Remove ceramic ferrules after welding. PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations. B. Verify condition and position of anchor bolts and embeds in concrete prior to commencing erection. C. Correct misaligned or missing components required for connections to steel framework before commencing erection. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ERECTION AND FIELD ASSEMBLY A. Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications. Work shall be plumb, square, true to line, level and in proper position and orientation. B. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360. C. Provide temporary bracing and guys to maintain stability of framework during erection for stresses and loads due to erection equipment and its operation, weight on structure, wind, and temporary loads imposed during erection. Check and adjust bracing frequently during progress of erection and assembly. Maintain temporary bracing until all components of the structure required for lateral stability are in place and final connections made. Temporary bracing design and installation are construction means and methods and are solely the responsibility of the Contractor. D. Do not stack material on partially completed framework, or in a manner to cause damage or overloading to the structure. E. Do not use thermal cutting during erection F. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. G. Tolerances shall be in accordance with AISC 303 Code of Standard Practice and as follows: Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Structural Steel 05 10 00 Page 8 of 10 1. Individual members plumb or level to within 1:750. 2. Vertical dimensions: 1/4 inch per story, exclusive of elastic shortening of columns. 3. Floor framing members: + 1/4 inch from column splice next above. 4. Horizontal dimensions: + 1:2000 for overall length or width. H. Field Assembly: 1. Assemble steel framework accurately to lines and elevations indicated and within specified tolerances. Align and adjust members forming parts of a completed frame before fastening. 2. Erect structural steel in proper sequence with work of other trades. 3. Tie anchor bolts securely in position before concrete is placed. 4. Thoroughly clean bearing surfaces and surfaces to be in permanent contact before assembly. 5. Adjust bolt holes requiring enlargement only by reaming, not by drifting or burning. 6. Erection bolts may be tightened and left in place, except in architecturally exposed work. Fill holes left from removed bolt by plug welding. Grind welds smooth where architecturally exposed. 7. Straighten and correct members damaged during handling, or replace without additional cost to the Owner. I. Field Corrections: 1. After frame is aligned and plumb, make final welded and bolted connections in accordance with AISC Specifications. 2. Properly sequence welding to prevent distortion, and misalignment of the framework. 3. Maintain temporary bracing of the structure until connections are complete and other required components of the structure (e.g. floor slabs and metal roof decks) are in place. QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection of Structural Steel: 1. Provide access to materials in fabrication and full cooperation to testing laboratory. 2. Laboratory Testing and Inspection: Test or inspect the following for conformance with Contract Drawings: a. Verify temporary bracing is installed for steel frames during construction. b. Verify location, size, spacing, projection and condition of anchor bolts. c. Verify plumbness and tolerances of steel frame to specification. d. Verify qualifications of welders and welding techniques. e. Visually inspect common bolts. f. Inspection of high-strength bolting: i. Visually inspect connection; ii. Check tightness of at least 33% of connections; iii. Check at least 2 bolts of each girder to column connection. g. Visually inspect field and shop welds. h. Ultrasonic or x-ray testing of complete-penetration welds. B. Contractor shall remove and replace connections found to be faulty at no additional cost to Owner. C. Inspect corrective measures required at no additional cost to owner. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Structural Steel 05 10 00 Page 9 of 10 ADJUSTING A. Touch-up field welds, abrasions and scarred areas of structural steel with same paint used for shop coating after erection of frame and final connections are completed. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Structural Steel 05 10 00 Page 10 of 10 This Page Intentionally left Blank Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Miscellaneous Metals 05 50 00 Page 1 of 10 SECTION 05 50 00 Miscellaneous Metals PART 1 GRNERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: work includes but is not limited to the following: A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein. B. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Furnish miscellaneous steel including steel channels, tubes, leveling plates, shelf angles and loose lintels for installation under other Sections. 2. Furnish structural metal deck where required for repair of floors and slabs. 3. Furnish and install exterior guardrails and handrails. 4. Furnish and install interior guardrails and handrails including all brackets and anchors. Coordinate with Concrete, Masonry and carpentry trades. a. Existing interior egress stairs: (1) Remove existing handrails (2) Fabricate and install new guardrails between existing newel posts on both sides of stairs and at all open landings. (3) Install new handrails on both sides of stairs. b. Existing interior courtyard stair: (1) Remove existing handrails (2) Fabricate and install new guardrails between existing newel posts on both sides of stairs and at all open landings. (3) Install new handrails on both sides of stairs. c. New exterior stairs at NE egress (1) Install new handrails 5. All anchors, bolts and inserts required for attaching the above items. 6. Shop applied metal coatings for metal railings. 7. Shop priming and protection of all other ferrous metal work. 8. All other metalwork items shown on drawings, required by the specifications or otherwise necessary to complete the work and not specifically called for under other sections of the specifications. C. Alternates: Not Applicable. D. Install Items Furnished Under Other Sections: Not applicable Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Miscellaneous Metals 05 50 00 Page 2 of 10 A. Furnish Items to Other Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE: a. Sleeves, anchors, inserts, plates and similar items. 2. Section 04 20 00 MASONRY: a. Lintels, miscellaneous metal and iron sleeves, anchors, inserts and plates to be built into masonry walls. B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 05 10 00 STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 2. Section 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 1.04. SUBMITTALS A. All submittals, including shop drawings, manufacturer's specifications and product data shall be submitted for the following in accordance with the requirements of Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures and Substitutions. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, data, anchor details, and installation instructions for products used in miscellaneous metal fabrications, including paint products and grout. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Include plans, elevations and details of sections and connections. Show all dimensions, details of construction, details of installation, relation to adjoining work, reinforcement, welds, fastenings, anchorage, and specifications of shop finishes, for Architect's approval before fabrication. D. Samples: Submit 2 sets of representative samples of materials and finished products as may be requested by the Architect. 1. Submit two 3" x 6" samples of factory-applied coatings and colors proposed for use for approval prior to coating application. 1.05. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide assemblies which, when installed, comply with following minimum requirements for structural performance, unless otherwise indicated. 1. "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel Buildings" by the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 2. "Code for Welding in Building Construction" by the American Welding Society. 3. ASTM listed standards by the American Society for Testing and Materials. 1.06. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All work shall be executed by experienced mechanics and shall conform to details, be clean and straight with sharply defined profiles. Unless otherwise particularly noted, finished surfaces shall have smooth finish. B. Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinate installation. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Miscellaneous Metals 05 50 00 Page 3 of 10 C. All materials and workmanship under this Section shall be subject to inspection in the mill, shop or field by the Architect, or by qualified inspectors retained by the Owner. Inspection shall be without expense to the Contractor. However, such inspection, wherever conducted, shall not relieve Contractor of his responsibility to furnish materials and workmanship in accordance with Contract requirements. D. Galvanizing: 1. Galvanizer’s Qualifications: Galvanizer must have a minimum of ten year’s experience in hot-dip galvanizing using the dry kettle process and the application of the coatings required in this specification. The coating application must be performed in the same facility as the galvanizing. 2. Coordination between Fabricator and Galvanizer: The galvanizer shall review fabricator's shop drawings for suitability of materials for galvanizing and coatings and will notify the fabricator of any required modifications. 3. Coating Applicator: For the purpose of establishing a standard of quality, appearance and performance of the finished product, the finish provide by the coating applicator must be equal to or better than the finish provided by Duncan Galvanizing. 1.07. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site. 1.08. COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.09. DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store and handle all metal work in strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Protect material adequately against damage from the elements, construction activities and other hazards before, during and after installation. 1.010. Warranty: A. Provide galvanizer’s warranty that materials will be free from 10 percent or more visible rust for 20 years. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Miscellaneous Metals 05 50 00 Page 4 of 10 PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01. MATERIALS A. All metals shall be free from defects impairing strength, durability or appearance and shall be of best commercial quality for each intended purpose. B. Ferrous metals shall conform to the following: 1. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36. 2. Steel Bar Grating: ASTM A 569 or ASTM A 36. 3. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed, ASTM A 500; or hot-rolled, ASTM A 501. 4. Structural Steel Sheet: Hot-rolled, ASTM A 570; or cold-rolled ASTM A 611, Class 1; of grade required for design loading. 5. Galvanized Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A 446, of grade required for design loading. Coating designation as indicated, or if not indicated, G90. 6. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; Type and grade (if applicable) as selected by fabricator and as required for design loading; black finish unless galvanizing is indicated; standard weight (schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated. 7. Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30. 8. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, grade as selected by fabricator. 9. Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 10. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron, ASTM A 47, or cast steel, ASTM A 2 10. Provide bolts washers and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized, ASTM A 153. C. For steel to be hot dipped galvanized, provide steel chemically suitable for metal coatings with the following requirements: Carbon below 0.25%, silicon below 0.24%, phosphorous below 0.05%, and manganese below 1.35%. Notify galvanizer if steel does not conform to these requirements to determine suitability for processing. D. Grout: 1. Metallic Non-Shrink Grout: Pre-mixed factory packaged, ferrous aggregate grout complying with CE CRD-C588, Type M. 2. Non-Shrink Non-Metallic Grout: Pre-mixed, factory packaged, non-staining, non- corrosive, non-gaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C62 3. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior application of type specified in this section. E. Fasteners: Provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade and class required. 1. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307. 2. Grade A. 3. Lag Bolts: Square head type, Federal Specification FF-B-561. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, Federal Specification FF-S-92. 4. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, Federal Specification FF-S-111. 5. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, Federal Specification FF-W-92. 6. Masonry Anchorage Devices: Expansion shields, Federal Specification FF-S- 325. 7. Toggle Bolts: Tumble-Wing type, Federal Specification FF-B-588, type, class and style as required. 8. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, Federal Specification FF-W-84. F. Paint: For shop priming of ferrous metals shall be fast curing, lead free, "Tnemec 10-99" primer as manufactured by Tnemec Company, Inc., Kem Kromik by Sherwin Williams Iron Clad Retardo rust Inhibitive Paint by Benjamin Moore. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Miscellaneous Metals 05 50 00 Page 5 of 10 G. Galvanizing Repair Paint; High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, complying with the Military Specifications MIL-P-21035 (Ships) or SSPC-Paint-20; one of the following or equal: Tnemec Company 90-93, ZRC Cold Galvanizing Compound, Sherwin Williams Galvite B50. 2.02. FABRICATION A. All structural steel and other metal work shall be fabricated in accordance with Reference Specifications, approved shop drawings, and as hereinafter specified. B. The design members and connections for any portions of the structure not indicated on the drawings and including all bolted/welded beam connections shall be completed by the fabricator. All connection designs shall be prepared by and submitted with the stamp of a structural engineer. C. All shop connections shall be welded. All welds shall develop full strength of members to be welded. D. All field connections shall be bolted unless otherwise indicated. E. For fabrications that are to be hot dipped galvanized, and where assembly is too large for galvanizing kettle, galvanize components prior to fabrication and assemble after galvanizing. 2.03. ROUGH HARDWARE A. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are specified in Division 6 sections. B. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable-iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers. 2.04. LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction, made flat, free from warps or twists, and of required thickness and bearing area. Use standard AISC and AITC Design Criteria. 1. Drill plates as necessary to receive anchor bolts and for grouting access. Galvanize after fabrication. 2.05. LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Provide steel angle loose lintels for all openings in masonry walls and partitions as indicated on the drawings. Refer to Mechanical and Electrical drawings for openings required by these trades. 1. Where replacing lintels at existing openings, replace steel plates below lintel where noted and required due to rust and deterioration. Thickness of plate to be 1/4" minimum, or same as existing. B. Bolt or weld lintels together where required and tap to receive other work. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Miscellaneous Metals 05 50 00 Page 6 of 10 C. Lintels shall be as shown on drawings, or if not specifically shown shall be in accordance with the following schedule; one angle for each 4-inch thickness of masonry; length to provide for 6 inch bearing at each end. 1. 3-1/2 x 3 x 1/4 inch angle 3-1/2 inch vertical leg for openings 3' 0" . 2. 4 x 3-1/2 x 5/16 inch angle 4 inch vertical leg for openings 3' 0" to 4' 6". 3. 5 x 3-1/2 x 5/16 inch angle 5 inch vertical leg for openings 4' 6" to 6' 0". 4. 6 x 3-1/2 x 3/8 inch angle 6 inch vertical leg for openings 6' 0" to 8' 0". 5. For lengths larger than 8’ see structural drawings. D. Lintels and relieving angles for support of exterior masonry shall be hot-dip galvanized steel; angles supporting exterior masonry shall be continuous with appropriate expansion spaces. Provide angles of sizes shown on drawings, welded top and bottom to steel anchor plates at brickwork where shown. If necessary, weld steel plate shims of required thickness to face of anchor plates for alignment of shelf angle; angle to be welded to shim, top and bottom. Provide clip angle lintel supports as required. 2.06. STEEL PIPE RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS A. Fabricate steel pipe railings and handrails to design, dimensions and details indicated. Provide handrails and handrail members formed of pipe of sizes and wall thickness indicated, but not less than that required to support design loading. Fabricate pipe railing from mechanical steel tubing internally vented with holes 3/4 the size of the pipe's internal diameter. B. Interconnect railing and handrail members by welding with internal connectors, at fabricator's option, unless otherwise indicated. 1. At tee and cross intersections provide coped joints. 2. At bends interconnect pipe by means of prefabricated elbow fittings or flush radius bends, as applicable, of radii indicated. C. Form simple and compound curves by bending pipe in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross-section of pipe throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of pipe. D. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, except where otherwise indicated. E. Close exposed ends of pipe by welding 3/16" thick steel plate in place or by use of prefabricated fittings. F. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings and Anchors: provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings and anchors for interconnections of pipe and attachment of railings and handrails to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings and handrails to concrete or masonry work. 1. For railing posts set in concrete provide sleeves of galvanized steel pipe not less than 1/2" greater than the outside diameter of pipe. Provide steel plate closure welded to bottom of sleeve and of width and length not less than 1" greater than outside diameter of sleeve. G. Exterior steel railings, including pipe, fittings, brackets, fasteners, and other ferrous components to receive hot dip galvanizing and shop applied metal coatings finish as specified herein. H. Interior railings to be shop primed and receive factory applied finish. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Miscellaneous Metals 05 50 00 Page 7 of 10 2.07. HOT-DIP GALVANIZING – EXTERIOR METALS B. Hot-Dip Galvanizing: For steel exposed to the elements, weather or corrosive environments and other steel indicated to be galvanized, provide coating for iron and steel fabrications applied by the hot-dip process. Galvanizing bath shall contain special high-grade zinc. 1. Basis of design: DuragalvⓇ 2. Comply with ASTM A 123 for fabricated products and ASTM A 153 for hardware. 3. If required, plug vent holes after galvanizing and grind smooth. 4. Galvanized surface shall be prepared per SSPC SP2 or SP3 to provide a smooth surface removing all runs, drips or sags. 5. Galvanizing shall exhibit a rugosity (smoothness) of 16-25 microns or less when measured by a profilometer. This pertains to those elements that are less than 24 pounds per running foot. 6. Galvanized surfaces, that are to receive coatings, must be blasted per SSPC SP 16. The use of iron, steel shot, and aluminum oxide grit as a blast medium, and power wire brushes are not permitted. 7. 2.08. FACTORY-APPLIED PRIMER – EXTERIOR METAL A. FACTORY-Applied Primer over Galvanized Steel: Provide factory-applied polyamide epoxy prime coat over hot-dipped galvanized steel. 1. Basis of design: Primergalv®. 2. Primer shall be certified OTC/VOC compliant at less than 2.8 lbs. / gal. and conform to EPA and local requirements. 3. Apply the primer at the galvanizer’s facility within 12 hours after galvanizing or blasting. Application must be in a controlled environment meeting applicable conditions as required by the coating manufacturer. Primer shall have a one- year re-coat window for application of finish coat. 4. Primer shall be applied at 4-6 mils DFT and meet or exceed the following performance criteria as stipulated by the coating’s manufacturer: a. Abrasion Resistance: ASTM D 4060 (CS17 Wheel, 1,000 grams load) 1 kg load, 200 mg loss. b. Adhesion: ASTM D 4541, 1050 psi. c. Corrosion Weathering: ASTM D 5894, 13 cycles, 4,368 hours, 10 per ASTM D 714 for blistering; 7 per ASTM D 610 for rusting. d. Direct Impact Resistance: ASTM D 2794, 160 in. lbs. e. Flexibility: ASTM D 522, 180 degrees bend, 1-inch mandrel, Passes. f. Pencil Hardness: ASTM D 3363, 3H. g. Moisture Condensation Resistance: ASTM D 4585, 100 degrees F, 2000 hours, Passes no cracking or delamination. h. Dry Heat Resistance: ASTM D 2485, 250 degrees F. i. Accelerated Weathering: QUV- ASTM D 4587 QUV A 5000 Hours, Passes. j. Salt Fog Resistance: ASTM B 117, 5,600 hours No cracking or blister. k. Color to be custom color as selected by Architect. Applicator to submit samples to match color chips designated by Architect. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Miscellaneous Metals 05 50 00 Page 8 of 10 2.09. TOPCOAT: – EXTERIOR METAL A. PROVIDE factory applied aliphatic acrylic urethane topcoat in specified color and gloss range per approved samples. 1. Basis of design: Colorgalv® 2. Topcoat shall be certified OTC/VOC compliant and conform to EPA and local requirements. 3. Topcoat shall be applied over the primer at the galvanizer’s facility within 12 hours after galvanizing or blasting. Topcoat shall be applied in a controlled environment meeting applicable conditions and recoat times as required by the coating manufacturer. 4. Topcoat shall be applied at 4-6 mils DFT and meet or exceed the following performance criteria as stipulated by the coating’s manufacturer: a. Abrasion Resistance: ASTM D 4060, CS17 Wheel, 1,000 cycles 1 kg load; 87.1 mg loss. b. Adhesion: ASTM D 4541; 1,050 psi. c. Direct Impact Resistance: ASTM D 2794; greater than 32 in. pounds. d. Dry Heat Resistance: ASTM D 2485; 200 degrees F (93 C). e. Salt Fog Resistance: ASTM B 117, 9,000 hours; Rating 10 per ASTM D 714 for blistering, Rating 9 per ASTM D 610 for rusting. f. Flexibility: ASTM D522, 180 degrees bend, 1/8-inch mandrel; Passes. g. Pencil Hardness: ASTM D 3363; F. h. Moisture Condensation Resistance: ASTM D 4585, 100 degrees F, 1,000 hours; No rusting blistering or delamination. i. Corrosion Weathering: ASTM D 5894, 21 Cycles, 7056 Hours; Rating 10 per ASTM D714 for blistering. Rating 9 Per ASTM D 610 for rusting. j. Thermal Shock: ASTM D 2246, 15 cycles; Excellent 2.10. FACTORY APPLIED ARCHITECTURAL FINISH (Over Non-Galvanized Material) – INTERIOR METALS A. Factory-applied high performance architectural finish: Provide factory-applied polyurethane color coating, 2.5 mils dry film thickness minimum over metal primer. 2.11. ELEVATOR PIT LADDER A. Furnish for installation under Section 042000, Masonry, a fixed vertical iron ladder per Otis layout or as coordinated with Otis personnel. Ladder width and pit wall pocket requirements are shown in the pit plan view on the Otis layout. For entrance heights of up to 7' the top rung of the ladder must be even with the bottom landing. Hand grips must be provided to a height of 4' above the bottom landing. Hand grips must have 4-1/2" radial clearance, from their centerline, to any obstruction in the hoistway. 2.12. ELEVATOR HOISTING BEAM A. Furnish for installation under Section 042000, Masonry, a steel I-beam shaped safety beam with a maximum flange width of 8 11/16", from side wall to side wall, capable of withstanding a minimum net live load of 7500 lb. per elevator. Reference Otis Layout for location. A 4" minimum clearance is required from top of beam to top of hoistway. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Miscellaneous Metals 05 50 00 Page 9 of 10 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01. PREPARATION A. Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might delay work. B. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. 3.02. INSTALLATION A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction; including, threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other connectors as required. B. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plus, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into concrete masonry or similar construction. Cut steel deck for roof drain and coordinate with plumbing subcontractor as required. C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind exposed joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. D. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work. E. Steel Pipe Railings and Handrails: 1. Adjust railing prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at spacing indicated, or if not indicated, as required by design loadings. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and railing ends to building construction as follows: 2. Anchor posts in pre existing concrete by core drilling holes not less than 5" deep and 3/4" greater than outside diameter of post. Clean holes of all loose material, insert posts and fill annular space between post and concrete with non-shrink, non-metallic grout mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's directions. Cover anchorage joint with a round steel flange welded to post. 3. Anchor posts to steel with steel oval flanges, angle type or floor type as required by conditions, welded to posts and bolted to steel supporting members. 4. Anchor rail ends into concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends and anchored into wall construction with expansion bolts. 5. Anchor rail ends to steel with steel oval or round flanges welded to rail ends and bolted to structural steel members, unless otherwise indicated. ASTM E 935. 6. Secure handrails to wall with wall brackets and end fittings. Locate brackets as indicated, or if not indicated, at spacing required for design loading. Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to building construction with bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Miscellaneous Metals 05 50 00 Page 10 of 10 3.03. APPLICATION OF METAL COATINGS A. Galvanizing Application: Galvanize materials exposed to exterior conditions in accordance with specified standards and this specification. The dry kettle process shall be used to eliminate any flux inclusions on the surface of the galvanized material. The use of the wet kettle process is prohibited. B. Prior to Galvanizing: The steel shall be immersed in a flux solution (zinc ammonium chloride). The flux tank must be 12 to 14 Baumé density and contain less than 0.4 percent iron. 1. To provide the galvanized surface required, the following procedures shall be implemented: a. A monitoring recorder shall be utilized and inspected regularly to observe any variances in the galvanizing bath temperature. b. The pickling tanks shall contain hydrochloric acid with an iron content less than 12 percent and zinc content less than 3 percent. Titrations shall be taken weekly at a minimum. c. All chemicals and zinc shall be tested at least once a week to determine compliance with ASTM standards. All testing shall be done using atomic absorption spectrometry or x-ray fluorescence (XRF) equipment at a lab in the galvanizing facility. C. Coatings shall be applied under the following conditions: 1. Surface of the substrate shall be dry and free from dust, dirt, oil, grease or other contaminants. Coating and cure facility shall be maintained free of airborne dust and dirt until coatings are completely cured. 2. All coatings must be applied in a controlled environment under the conditions specified by the coating’s manufacturer. All coatings must be mixed and applied according to the coating manufacturer’s specifications. D. Touch-up and repair: for damaged and filed-welded metal coated surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas. 1. For galvanized surfaces, apply organic zinc repair paint complying with requirements of ASTM A 780, modified to 95 percent zinc in dry film. Galvanizing repair paint shall have 95 percent zinc by weight. Basis of design is ZIRP by Duncan Galvanizing. Thickness of applied galvanizing repair paint shall be not less than coating thickness required by ASTM A 123 or A 153 as applicable. 2. For factory-applied finish coatings, field-touch-up shall be performed by qualified applicators with experience in the application of high-performance industrial coatings. Touch-up shall be such that repair is not visible from 6 feet. A touch-up repair kit and repair procedures shall be provided to the Owner for each type of factory-applied finish upon request. 3.04. ADJUST AND CLEAN B. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. D.F.T. C. For non hot-dip galvanized surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Rough Carpentry 06 10 00 Page 1 of 10 SECTION 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein. B. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Wood Framing: a. Wood studs and blocking in metal frame partitions 2. Curbs at roofs for skylights and roof mounted equipment. 3. Various wood blockings, edgings, nailers, curbs, cants, grounds, furring, sheathing, framing members including wood preservative, as required for receipt of various finishes and surfacing materials, not described herein above. a. Blocking for mounting of all accessories, cabinets, railings, etc. 4. Rough installation hardware, including bolts, screws, spikes, nails, clips, hangers and connection assemblies, as needed for installation of the rough carpentry work. 5. Furnish install and remove removable barricades at all hoistway openings, in compliance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.502 in addition to any local code requirements 6. Furnish install and remove Lifeline attachments capable of withstanding 5000 lb. load in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.502. Provide a minimum of 2 at the top, front of each hoistway. 7. Coordinate work of this Section with the work of the various trades responsible for applying finish materials and other items to rough carpentry work. Furnish and install furring, blocking, and shims, and other usual items of normal rough carpentry work as required by the various trades for the proper completion of the project C. Alternates: Not Applicable. D. Install Items Furnished Under Other Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 2. Division 23 HVAC a. Build in items including Louvers and vents. E. Furnish Items to Other Sections: Not Applicable. F. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 2. Section 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY 3. Section 07 53 00 MEMBRANE ROOFING AND FLASHING 4. Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING 5. Section 08 11 00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 6. Section 08 14 00 WOOD AND COMPOSITE DOORS AND FRAMES 7. Section 08 41 13 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 8. Section 08 53 45 WINDOWS 9. Section 08 63 00 METAL FRAMED SKYLIGHTS Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Rough Carpentry 06 10 00 Page 2 of 10 1.01. ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. 1.02. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Engineered wood products. 3. Shear panels. 4. Power-driven fasteners. 5. Powder-actuated fasteners. 6. Expansion anchors. 7. Metal framing anchors. 1.04. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All lumber shall: 1. Be new, dressed four sides (S4S), clear and free from warping and other defects. 2. Have a moisture content not exceeding 15 percent when delivered to the project. 3. Be in accordance with the grading rules of the lumber manufacturer's association under whose jurisdiction the lumber is produced and bear the mark of grade and mill identification. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire- retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.05. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Rough Carpentry 06 10 00 Page 3 of 10 1.06. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate work of this Section with the work of the various trades responsible for applying finish materials and other items to rough carpentry work, and ensure that the work performed hereunder is acceptable to such trades for the installation of their work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01. WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Certified Wood: Materials shall be produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship.” 1. Retain items required to be made from certified wood if not all rough carpentry must be certified wood; verify that certified wood is available for each item before retaining. 2. Dimension lumber framing. 3. Laminated-veneer lumber. 4. Parallel-strand lumber. 5. Prefabricated wood I-joists. 6. Rim boards. 7. Miscellaneous lumber. B. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules- writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Retain only first option in first subparagraph below if authorities having jurisdiction require grade stamps on all materials. 3. In DOC PS 20, dressed sizes of green lumber are larger than dry lumber. 4. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 5. Revise subparagraph below if rough lumber is acceptable for all work. 6. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. C. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent unless otherwise indicated. D. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.02. WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Rough Carpentry 06 10 00 Page 4 of 10 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. 4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas. 5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 2.03. FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame- spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. 3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. 4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to ASTM D 5664 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841. C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 15 percent. D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece. E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations shall not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. F. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Rough Carpentry 06 10 00 Page 5 of 10 2.04. DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: No. 2 grade or better. 1. Application: All interior partitions 2. Species: a. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. B. Load-Bearing Partitions: No. 2 grade or better. 1. Application: Exterior walls and interior load-bearing partitions. 2. Species: Spruce-Pine-Fir a. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. C. Ceiling Joists: No. 2 grade or better 1. Species: a. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. D. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: No. 2 grade or better. 1. Species: b. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 2.05. ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Engineered Wood Products, General: Products shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of engineered wood product from single source from a single manufacturer. C. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. 1. Boise Cascade Corporation. 2. Georgia-Pacific. 3. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. 4. Trus Joist Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Rough Carpentry 06 10 00 Page 6 of 10 D. Parallel-Strand Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood strand elements with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. 1. Boise Cascade Corporation. 2. Georgia-Pacific. 3. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. 4. Weyerhaeuser Trus Joist E. I-Joists: joists shall be manufactured by one of the companies listed below: 1. Boise Cascade Corporation. 2. Georgia-Pacific. 3. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. 4. Weyerhaeuser Trus Joist 5. APA I-Joist 2.06. MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Cants. 5. Furring. 6. Grounds. 7. Utility shelving. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide No. 2 grade lumber and the following species: 1. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. E. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Rough Carpentry 06 10 00 Page 7 of 10 2.07. FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure- preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2.8. METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Manufactures: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 2. USP Structural Connectors 3. Or approved equal. B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation. 1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated. D. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), high-strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch thick. 1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated. E. Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- long seat and 1-1/4-inch wide nailing flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth. F. Top Flange Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers, full depth of joist, formed from metal strap with tabs bent to extend over and be fastened to supporting member. G. Bridging: Rigid, V-section, nailless type, 0.050 inch thick, length to suit joist size and spacing. H. Post Bases: Adjustable-socket type for bolting in place with standoff plate to raise post 1 inch above base and with 2-inch minimum side cover, socket 0.062 inch Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Rough Carpentry 06 10 00 Page 8 of 10 thick, and standoff and adjustment plates 0.108 inch thick. I. Joist Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying joists together over supports. J. Rafter Tie-Downs: Bent strap tie for fastening rafters or roof trusses to wall studs below, 1-1/2 inches wide by 0.050 inch thick. K. Hold-Downs: Brackets for bolting to wall studs and securing to foundation walls with anchor bolts or to other hold-downs with threaded rods and designed with first of two bolts placed seven bolt diameters from reinforced base. L. Wall Bracing: T-shaped bracing made for letting into studs in saw kerf, 1-1/8 inches wide by 9/16 inch deep by 0.034 inch thick with hemmed edges. 2.9. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. B. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01. PREPARATION A. All materials shall be inspected before use, with all checked, split and otherwise deficient stock rejected, or used only for miscellaneous blocking, furring or other incidental use. The Contractor shall be responsible for replacing all lumber which, due to warpage, twist, splitting, or checking, results in unsatisfactory work. Such replacement shall be required at any time, whether before or after application of finish material under other Sections. 3.02. INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Rough Carpentry 06 10 00 Page 9 of 10 E. Shear Wall Panels: Install shear wall panels to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. F. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole. G. Install sill sealer gasket to form continuous seal between sill plates and foundation walls. H. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. I. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. J. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows: 1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 120 inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. 2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 120 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal thickness. 3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill space below partitions. 4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 10 feet o.c. K. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. L. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. M. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings. N. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. O. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered. 1. Comply with approved fastener patterns where applicable. 2. Use finishing nails unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler. 3. Use common nails unless otherwise indicated. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Rough Carpentry 06 10 00 Page 10 of 10 3.03. WOOD SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. 3.04. WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 2-by-4-inch nominal size furring at 24 inches o.c. C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 2-by-4-inch nominal size furring vertically at 16 inches o.c. 3.05. WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non-load-bearing partitions. Fasten plates to supporting construction unless otherwise indicated. B. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb studs. 3.06. PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes sufficiently wet that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. 3.7. CLEANING A. Daily clean work areas by sweeping and disposing of scraps and sawdust. B. Upon completion of the work of this Section in any given area, remove tools, equipment and all rubbish and debris from the work area; leave area in broom-clean condition. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA September 30, 2023 Finish Carpentry 06 20 00 Page 1 of 8 SECTION 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and other division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein B. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Exterior trim and Accessories a. PVC fascias at entry awning b. Column covers at entry awning. 2. Interior wood trim, including casing, stools, aprons, baseboard, chair rail at corridors and other miscellaneous woodwork as shown on drawings. 3. Closet and other built-in shelving. a. Closet made type vinyl coated adjustable shelving. Combination of shelf closet rods in coat closets, 5 adjustable shelves in linen and storage closets. 4. Casework: a. Counters and benches in mailroom b. Hardwood caps on half walls c. Parcel shelves in units. 5. Installation of miscellaneous material and products specified herein. 6. Cutting and patching and installation of access panels, as required for work of other trades. 7. Installation of access panels 8. Fabrication and installation of custom access panels. 9. Fasteners. 10. All other finish carpentry, casework and millwork indicated or required to complete the work of the contract. C. Alternates: Not Applicable. D. Install Items Furnished Under Other Sections: 1. Section 08 11 00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES a. Interior and exterior doors, frames and transoms 2. Section 08 14 00 WOOD AND COMPOSITE DOORS AND FRAMES a. Interior doors, frames and transoms 3. Section 08 71 00 HARDWARE a. Door hardware. 4. Section 10 00 00 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES a. Exterior signage. b. Fire extinguishers. c. Toilet accessories d. Mail boxes e. Louvers 5. Section 12 35 00 CABINETS AND COUNTERTOPS a. Casework and countertops E. Furnish Items to Other Sections: Not Applicable Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA September 30, 2023 Finish Carpentry 06 20 00 Page 2 of 8 F. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 2. Section 08 41 13 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 3. Section 08 53 45 WINDOWS 4. Section 09 90 00 PAINTING 5. Section 11 31 00 APPLIANCES 6. Section 12 21 13 WINDOW TREATMENTS 7. Division 22 PLUMBING a. Installation of one piece lav/counter on vanity and open support. 1.03. SUBMITTALS A. All submittals, including shop drawings, manufacturer's specifications and product data shall be submitted for the following in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures and Substitutions. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, data, anchor details, and installation instructions for products. C. Shop Drawings: Submit large scale shop drawings for fabrication, installation and erection of all parts of the work. Provide large scale detailed plans, elevations and details of anchorages, connections and accessory items. 1. Take accurate field measurements before preparation of shop drawings and fabrication. Allow for field cutting and fitting where taking of final field measurements is not possible prior to fabrication. 2. Details: Draw at scale of min. 3 in. = 1 ft. D. Samples: 3. Wood and Plastic Samples: Min. 2 ft. long x full width of item with finish on one side. 4. Submit color samples of material for selection by architect. 5. Siding Samples: Min. 6 in. sq. of each style for selection of texture and finish. 1.04. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Finish carpentry items shall conform to the "Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI). Any reference to Premium, Custom or Economy in this Specification shall be as defined in the latest edition of the AWI "Quality Standards". Any item not given a specific quality grade shall be Custom grade as defined in the latest edition of the AWI "Quality Standards". 1. Manufacturer: Provide millwork only from manufacturers complying with AWI Standards producing similar Work for min. 5 yrs. 2. Installer: Employ only experienced personnel for fabrication and installation of millwork. B. CET has been contracted to be the Passive House Verified for this project. The contractor is to coordinate with and provide access to the site for inspection and testing over the course of the work, and to meet all Checklist Requirements as verified by CET. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA September 30, 2023 Finish Carpentry 06 20 00 Page 3 of 8 C. Job Mock-Up: 1. Sample exterior door installation: a. Contractor shall perform sample exterior door installation mock-ups. The materials and workmanship used to build the mock-up shall be representative of those that will be contained within the actual project construction. The mock-up shall form the basis for all testing. General exterior door installation shall not commence until reviewed by both CET, the Architect and the General Contractor. All costs associated with this preconstruction testing shall be borne by the General Contractor. 2. Mock-ups and methods will become standard for Work of this Section. D. Lumber and plywood shall be identified by an official grademark, except where grademark will interfere with the natural finish. In such cases, the material shall be accompanied by a certificate of inspection agency. Plywood shall bear the APA grade-trademark of the American Plywood Association. E. Nominal lumber dimensions shall conform to minimum established by the American Lumber standard of the U.S. Department of Commerce. F. Reference Standards: The following publications of the issues listed below, form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the references thereto: G. National Bureau of Standards: 1. PSI-83 Construction and Industrial Plywood. 2. PS20-70 American Softwood Lumber Standard. H. American National Standards Institute: ANSI/HPMA HP-1983 Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. 1.02. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tolerances: 1. Plumb and Level: 1/8 in. in 8 ft. 2. Offset in Surface Alignment: Max. 1/16 in. 3. Offset in Revealed Adjoining Surface: Max. 1/8 in. 1.03. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver finish carpentry items until site conditions are adequate to receive the work of this section. Protect materials from weather while in transit. B. Store inside, in ventilated areas with a constant but minimum temperature of 60 degrees F. and maximum relative humidity of 25 to 55 percent. 1.04. WARRANTY A. Provide standard manufacturer's warranty covering full cost of material and labor for a period of one year. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA September 30, 2023 Finish Carpentry 06 20 00 Page 4 of 8 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01. MATERIALS GENERAL A. Fasteners: 1. Wood Screws: ANSI B18, type, size, and material as required for condition of use. 2. Bolts and Nuts: ANSI B18 and ASTM A307 type, size, and material as required. 3. Exterior Fasteners: ASTM A153, hot-dip galvanize. 2.02. INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY AND CASEWORK MATERIALS A. Architectural woodwork and finish materials shall conform to "Premium Grade" quality standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute for paint finished and laminated plastic finished woodwork and “Premium finish for Transparent Finish. B. Interior trim: 1. Lumber shall be graded in accordance with the requirements of AWI; maximum moisture content of 6 percent. 2. Interior trim shall be as follows: a. Wood baseboard to be primed 3” primed finger jointed wood base for paint finish. b. Window casing to be wrapped gyp returns c. Door casing to be 2” primed finger jointed wood for paint finish. d. Window stools to be primed poplar 5/4” stock for paint finish. e. Aprons to be 2” primed finger jointed wood for paint finish. C. Plywood for shelving and casework shall be graded in accordance with AWI with a core material of veneer; of the following grades and eventual finishes: 1. All plywood indicated as "Painted" shall be Paint Grade Birch AWI Grade II. 2. All plywood indicated to have clear finish shall be as indicated on the drawings: a. White Maple AWI Grade I, plain sliced, book matched. b. Baltic Birch Plywood in thicknesses indicated. 3. All plywood shelving shall have hardwood lumber edge bands, glued and nailed. 2.03. EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY MATERIALS A. Exterior Column Covers: Aluminum hook on column covers, SAF Metal Fabrication Series C-1000, or equal. 12” diameter, 2” reveal at top and bottom. B. Exterior fascias, trim: Composite board of compressed hardwood fiber protected with Borate-based preservative as manufactured by Boral or MiraTEC. 1. Use Azek PVC sills at windows, in profiles shown on drawings. 2.04. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide nails, screws and other anchoring devices of the type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible, and complying with applicable Federal Specifications. 1. Where carpentry is exposed on exterior or in areas of high relative humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot-dipped zinc coating (ASTM A153.) B. Supply and installation of miscellaneous access panels not specified under other trades. C. Interior closets to have adjustable coated metal shelving as detailed, Closet made or similar. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA September 30, 2023 Finish Carpentry 06 20 00 Page 5 of 8 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01. PREPARATION A. Examine substrates and adjoining construction, and conditions under which Work will be installed. B. Do not proceed with Work until conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of Work have been corrected. C. Verify dimensions before proceeding and obtain measurements at site for Work required to be accurately fitted to other construction. 3.02. GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to fabricate work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true and accurately cut and fitted. C. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required. D. CET has been contracted to be the Passive House Verified for this project. The contractor is to coordinate with and provide access to the site for inspection and testing over the course of the work, and to meet all Checklist Requirements as verified by CET. 1. HERS rating of 40 or better. 2. Insulation should all be installed to RESNET quality grade I 3. CET will perform a mid-construction whole building blower door test after air barriers and windows have been installed but before interior or exterior insulation to verify that air sealing approach is working. A final blower door test for the whole building will be performed upon completion of construction. 4. Whole building blower door test results shall be <0.06 CFM60/sqft shell 5. CET will perform mid-construction compartmentalization blower door tests of 3 apartments after drywall and air sealing have been installed. A final blower door test of a random sample of units will be performed upon completion of construction. 6. Apartment compartmentalization blower door test results shall be <0.30 CFM50/sqft of enclosure 7. Measured overall ventilation rate in each apartment shall be within 15 CFM of design, with bathrooms exhausting a minimum of 20 CFM continuously and kitchens exhausting a minimum of 25 CFM continuously. 3.03. FINISH CARPENTRY, WORKMANSHIP AND INSTALLATION A. Fabrication and installation of finish carpentry work shall be by fully skilled finish carpenters in conformance with best trade practice and manufacturer's printed instructions, in no case less than the standards established by Architectural Woodwork Institute "Custom" quality standards. B. Millwork and trim shall be finished smooth and free from machine or tool marks that will show through the finish. Nails used to fasten work requiring field finishing shall be countersunk with set punch to receive filler. Each piece requiring face nailing shall be double-face nailed, with nails spaced not over 16 inches apart, as far as practicable. Interior finish work shall be blind-nailed wherever possible. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA September 30, 2023 Finish Carpentry 06 20 00 Page 6 of 8 C. All joints shall be tapered and formed to conceal shrinkage. Miters, four inches or more from heel to point, shall be glued and locked. Dowel, splines and tenons shall be made to a driving fit. All jointing shall be made in accordance with the recognized quality standards and as approved by the Architect for appearance. All butt joints shall be attached blocking. D. Prime paint contact surfaces of items and assemblies in contact with cementitious materials. E. Where sections of millwork are joined together, including sections of framing, they shall be secured with wood screws. Nailing will not be permitted. Where millwork is secured to wood grounds during installation, wood screws shall be used. F. Trim members shall be in single lengths without splicing. Corners shall be mitered unless otherwise noted. Finger joints are not acceptable in trim for clear finish. G. Running finish shall be in long lengths and joined only where solid fastenings can be made. End joints in built-up members shall be well distributed. Unless otherwise noted, miter exterior corners and cope interior corners. H. Install work plumb, level, true, and securely anchored and attached with fully concealed fasteners and/or adhesive, as applicable. I. Install sprinkler pipe concealment system in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 3.04. FINISH CARPENTRY - FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and leave ready to receive finishes. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces, and of type recommended for applied finishes. B. Seal and varnish concealed surfaces. Brush apply only. C. Leave all field fabricated carpentry work items in a satisfactory condition to receive field applied finishes specified in Section 09900: Painting. 3.05. INSTALLATION OF DOORS, FRAMES AND HARDWARE A. Install doors and frames plumb and square, and with maximum diagonal distortion of 1/16 inch. Fit doors accurately in frames. B. Install wood trim to door frames as shown. Drill screw and plug trim show crews are concealed. Fit tightly to adjoining carpentry work. C. Install security screen panels on exterior door. Use non tamper thru-bolts. D. Install all hardware according to manufacturer's and hardware supplier's recommendations. All hardware to function smoothly without binding and to lock securely. 3.06. EXTERIOR DOOR INSTALLATION A. Install jamb assembly. 1. Caulk sill along outside edge and ½ inch in from edge of subfloor. 2. Set door unit into center of opening and tack in place. 3. Shim hinge then latch side jambs straight. Inspect jamb for square, level and plumb. 4. Shim and fasten top of unit where sidelight joins door jamb. 5. Fasten hinge side jamb to studs. 6. Verify door opens freely and weatherstrip meets door evenly. 7. Verify door sweep contacts threshold evenly. 8. Fasten latch side jamb to studs. B. Install transom. 1. Apply caulk on top of door head jamb. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA September 30, 2023 Finish Carpentry 06 20 00 Page 7 of 8 2. Set transom jamb on door head jamb and fasten. 3. Shim transom straight. Inspect transom for square, level and plumb. 4. Fasten transom to studs. C. Caulk outside perimeter of door unit between casing and wall face, along front side of threshold, and between jamb sides and threshold. D. Field Check for Water Leakage: 1. After completion of installation and nominal curing of sealant and glazing compounds, but before installation of interior finishes, perform AAMA 502 test. Architect will determine the quantity and type(s) of doors(s) to be tested. 2. In case of water penetration take corrective action and re-test as necessary until the problem is resolved. E. Coordinate with CET for passive House mock-up, inspections and testing. 3.07. INSTALLATION OF SIGNAGE A. Install all HP signs with screws, vinyl tape or adhesive as substrate required and as directed by Architect according to approved shop drawings. B. Install exterior signage with expansion bolts into masonry according to approved shop drawings. 3.08. INSTALLATION OF TOILET ACCESSORIES A. Install all items complete, according to approved layout in strict accord with manufacturer's authorized representative. B. Install toilet accessories at locations and heights indicated on drawings. Mount plumb and level at heights shown. Provide blocking at new walls. Bolt accessories to masonry with expansion bolts. Remove protective maskings. Clean surfaces free of oil and imperfections. 3.9. INSTALLATION OF FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Install all items complete, according to approved layout in strict accord with manufacturer's authorized representative. B. Install fire extinguishers at locations and heights indicated on drawings. Mount plumb and level at heights shown. Provide blocking at new walls. Bolt accessories to masonry with expansion bolts. Remove protective maskings. Clean surfaces free of oil and imperfections. 3.10. INSTALLATION OF CABINETS AND COUNTERTOPS A. EXAMINATION 1. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. 2. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. B. PREPARATION 1. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. 2. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA September 30, 2023 Finish Carpentry 06 20 00 Page 8 of 8 C. INSTALLATION 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Coordinate with other trades and installation of other materials for proper tolerances and the sequence of the Work being performed. 3. Coordinate with other trades for connections of appliances to plumbing, HVAC and electrical equipment, piping, wiring and ducting. 4. All kitchen cabinets to be installed so that they are removeable D. PROTECTION 1. Protect installed products until completion of project. 2. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. 3.11. CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Contractor shall do all cutting and patching of floors and walls required by all other subcontractors, including plumbing, HVAC and Electrical subcontractors. B. Cutting and drilling is to be done in a manner satisfactory to the Architect and so as to minimize the damage to the strength and appearance of parts disturbed. C. Seal around all pipes at wall openings; install pipe escutcheons. 3.12. CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Exercise every reasonable precaution to avoid damage to new and existing work or the work of other trades and repair any damage so caused. All damaged work that cannot be repaired shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost. B. Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely, as directed by the Architect. C. Adjust all toilet accessories, cabinet doors, drawers and other operable items to assure smooth and proper operation. Deliver keys and instruction sheets to owner. D. All work installed under this section shall be thoroughly cleaned after completion in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and protected from damage until the work is completed and accepted. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Thermal Insulation 07 21 00 1 of 8 SECTION 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and other division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein B. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Exterior walls, band joists: 3” closed cell foam continuous from slab to floor/ roof deck. 2. Underside of second floor deck: Spray on acoustic sound insulation. 3. Mineral wool batt acoustic insulation at all unit, common space corridor and utility walls, and as indicated on drawings. 4. Fiberglass bat insulation above acoustic ceilings. 6. Spray foam insulation at window and door jambs, envelope penetrations and where required for air sealing. 7. Coordinate with CET for inspection and testing of insulation materials and installation. 8. Coordinate with CET for two air door test of each unit and the public space over the course of the construction period.. C. Alternates: See Alternate A. D. Install Items Furnished Under Other Sections: Not Applicable. E. Furnish Items to Other Sections: Not Applicable. F. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 2. Section 06 16 00 SHEATHING 3. Section 06 17 53 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 4. Section 07 27 00 AIR BARRIERS 5. Section 07 53 00 MEMBRANE ROOFING AND FLASHING a. Roof Insulation 6. Section 08 53 45 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED VINYL WINDOWS 1.03. SUBMITTALS A. All submittals, including shop drawings, manufacturer's specifications and product data shall be submitted for the following in accordance with the requirements of Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures and Substitutions. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations for each material used. Provide certifications stating that materials comply with requirements. C. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports for performance required. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Thermal Insulation 07 21 00 2 of 8 D. Samples: Submit samples of insulation materials as requested by the Architect. 1.04. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The work is intended to retard passage of heat and water vapor through exterior building assembles and to retard passage of sound through interior partitions. To this end take special care to fully extend insulation and vapor barrier coverage over all areas indicated, without gaps or voids. B. Fire performance: Provide products which meet or exceed flammability ratings indicated and required by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Thickness: Where thicknesses are indicated, they are related to the k values specified. Provide additional thickness, if necessary, to obtain the same level of performance with acceptable substitute materials which have different values of thermal conductivity. Where R values are indicated, provide thickness required to achieve value specified. D. Job Mock-Up: 1. Sample underslab, exterior and interior installation: a. Contractor shall perform sample underslab, exterior and interior installation mock-ups at areas and conditions identified on the compartmentalization drawings for review. The materials and workmanship used to build the mock-up shall be representative of those that will be contained within the actual project construction. The mock-up shall form the basis for all testing. General air and vapor barrier installation shall not commence until reviewed by both CET, the Architect and the General Contractor. All costs associated with this preconstruction testing shall be borne by the General Contractor. 2. Mock-ups and methods will become standard for Work of this Section. 1.05. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver insulation materials until site conditions are adequate to receive the work of this section. Protect materials from weather while in transit. B. Deliver materials and products in unopened factory labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Protect from moisture and damage. Protect plastic insulations from sunlight. Take every possible precaution to avoid fire. Conceal materials within building assemblies as quickly as possible. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site damage. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01. BOARD TYPE INSULATION A. Rigid polyisocyanurate foam board insulation with aluminum and paper faces 1. Foil or Paper Faced Polyisocyanurate Foam Board Insulation: High performance rigid cellular foam board complying with ASTM C1289 [Type I, Class 1][Type I, Class 2] consisting of an ASTM E84[Class A][Class B] closed cell polyisocyanurate foam core laminated between a coated foil facer on front side of board and a reflective foil facer on the back side of the board. 2. Minimum R 6 per inch, aged. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Thermal Insulation 07 21 00 3 of 8 3. Facer Materials: Class A durable reflective aluminum facer on each face of insulation. 4. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed: Less than [25][75] and less than 450, respectively, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 5. Moisture Vapor Transmission: Less than 0.3 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96, Desiccant Method. 6. Compressive Strength: Grade 3 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1289. 7. Water Absorption: Less than 1% by volume when tested in accordance with ASTM C 209. 8. Dimensional Stability: Less than 1% linear change when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2126. 9. Service Temperatures: -100 ºF to + 250 ºF (-73 ºC to +122 ºC) 10. Potential Heat: 12,000 Btu/lb. 11. Auto-Ignition Temperature: 800 ºF 12. Accessories: a. Adhesive as recommended by manufacturer and compatible with substrates b. Mechanical Fasteners: Low profile, 2 inch (50 mm) diameter high-density polypropylene washer and screw assembly designed specifically to fasten insulation board to designated substrate as recommended by manufacturer. c. Joint Sealant: Single component, non-shrink joint sealants and backings which are compatible with each other and with other materials in the assembly. d. Expanding Foam Sealant: Single component, non-shrink, Class A polyurethane insulating closed cell foam that is compatible with insulation board; Complies with ASTM E814 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops; air and vapor permeance not greater than insulating board. e. Joint Tape: Minimum 2 mil thick x 3 inch (76 mm) wide, high strength aluminum foil coated tape with high temperature acrylic adhesive intended for adhesion to foil substrate. 2.02. BATT OR BLANKET TYPE INSULATION A. Mineral wool acoustic insulation: Provide resilient, flexible batts or blankets of inorganic, non-asbestos fibers and binders complying with ASTM C665 and having the following properties and characteristics: 1. Thickness: Full depth of stud unless otherwise indicated. 2. Minimum R-4 per inch. 3. Type: Unfaced. 4. Size: Coordinate with spaces to be insulated for friction fit. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with contract requirements, products which may be incorporated into the work include the following: 1. Roxul, Inc - Comfortbatt. 2. Owens-Corning - Thermafiber - UltraBatt. 3. Johns Mansville - TempControl Batts. 4. Or Equal approved by the Architect and Owner in accordance with General Conditions. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Thermal Insulation 07 21 00 4 of 8 2.03. SPRAY FOAM INSULATION A. Closed Cell Foam Insulation: HFC-blown type: a medium-density, MDI-based polyurethane thermoset rigid foam. 1. Physical and Mechanical Properties: a. Core Density: 1.9-2.4 pcf when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1622. b. Thermal Resistance (aged): 5.8 less than or equal to 2-1/2 inches / 6.4 when greater than 2-1/2 inches when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518 at 75 degrees F, (h-ft2- degrees F)/Btu. c. Thermal Resistance (initial): 6.4 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518 at 75 degrees F, (h-ft2- degrees F)/Btu. d. Closed Cell Content: 88-95 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2842. e. Compressive Strength: Greater than 25 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1621. f. Tensile Strength: 23 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1623. g. Water Absorption: Less than 2 percent by volume when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2842. h. Dimensional Stability: Less than 9 percent by volume when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2126 at 75 degrees F/95 percent RH, 28 Day. i. Water Vapor Transmission: 1.3 perm/inch when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96. j. Air Permeability: 0.013 when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at 1 inch thickness, L/s/m2. k. Fungi Resistance: Pass, with no growth when tested in accordance with ASTM C1338. 2. Fire performance a. Flame Spread: Less than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. b. Smoke: Less than 450 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Thermal Performance (aged): Tested in accordance with ASTM C518 and/or ASTM C177 at 75 degrees F (24 degrees C) mean temperature. a. Thickness 1 inch (25 mm), R-Value 5.8 (h-ft2-degreesF)/Btu (1.0 (m2- degreesC)/W). 2.04. SPRAY FOAM INSULATING SEALANT A. Spray foam insulating sealant for sealing gaps, window and door openings, penetrations. 1. Dupont Great Stuff or equal, Big gap Filler, Window and Door or other appropriate for size of opening and environmental conditions.. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01. INSPECTION, TESTING AND SEQUENCE A. The installer shall examine the substrates, supports and conditions under which this work is to be performed and notify the Contractor, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work means installer accepts substrates and conditions. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Thermal Insulation 07 21 00 5 of 8 A. CET has been contracted to be the Passive House Verified for this project. The contractor is to coordinate with and provide access to the site for inspection and testing over the course of the work, and to meet all Checklist Requirements as verified by CET. 1. HERS rating of 35 or better. 2. Insulation should all be installed to RESNET quality grade I 3. CET will perform a mid-construction whole building blower door test after air barriers and windows have been installed but before interior or exterior insulation to verify that air sealing approach is working. A final blower door test for the whole building will be performed upon completion of construction. 4. Whole building blower door test results shall be <0.06 CFM60/sqft shell 5. CET will perform mid-construction compartmentalization blower door tests of 3 apartments after drywall and air sealing have been installed. A final blower door test of a random sample of units will be performed upon completion of construction. 6. Apartment compartmentalization blower door test results shall be <0.30 CFM50/sqft of enclosure 7. Measured overall ventilation rate in each apartment shall be within 15 CFM of design, with bathrooms exhausting a minimum of 20 CFM continuously and kitchens exhausting a minimum of 25 CFM continuously. B. To achieve the insulation levels and air tightness required by the Passive House requirements, sequence of the work related to gypsum board installation, insulation installation and air and weather barrier installation may be required to differ from traditional sequence standards. 3.02. INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Thermal Insulation: 1. Foundation Walls: No new insulation at existing foundation walls. 2. Slab On Grade: No new insulation at existing foundation walls. 3. Exterior walls band Joists a. 3” closed cell foam continuous from slab to floor/ roof deck, (R-21) 4. Roof: a. 7” minimum Polyiso roof insulation, tapered from drains to roof edge)) 5. Underside of second floor deck: a. Spray on acoustic sound insulation. B. Sound Insulation: 1. 1st and 2nd floor gypsum board ceiling truss cavity: 20" loose fill cellulose. 2. ACT ceilings get 3 1/2" sound batts 3. Unit demising, special space rooms (Laundry, offices, public restroom) and corridor walls: 3 1/2" or 5 ½” sound batts. 3.03. BATT INSTALLATION A. General Installation requirements: Strictly comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations, except where more restrictive requirements are specified in this Section. 1. Clean substrates and remove projections which could puncture vapor barriers. 2. Extend insulation over entire area indicated to be insulated. 3. Fit tightly around penetrations and obstructions. Fill all holes, gaps and voids. 4. Do not over compress insulation. 5. Provide insulation in one layer with tightly butted edges, unless indicated otherwise. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Thermal Insulation 07 21 00 6 of 8 B. Sound Insulation Installation: Friction fir batt and blanket type insulations into spaces indicated to be insulated and in all cavities, voids, and spaces in exterior wall assemblies. Provide supplemental stick clips as needed to hold insulation in cavities and prevent falling. 1. Install sound insulation where indicated on drawings, including, unit demising partitions, corridor walls, ceiling / floor cavity, Laundry, kitchen, office and other public space partitions. 3.04. BOARD INSULATION: A. Install manufacturer’s recommended adhesive. Fit board tightly, stagger all joints, and seal seams and joints with spray foam. 3.05. SPRAY FOAM INSTALLATION A. EXAMINATION 1. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. 2. Verify that all exterior and interior wall, partition, and floor/ceiling assembly construction has been completed to the point where the insulation may correctly be installed. 3. Verify that substrate and cavities are dry and free of any foreign material that will impede application. 4. Verify that mechanical and electrical services in ceilings, walls and floors have been installed and tested and, if appropriate, verify that adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation. 5. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. B. PREPARATION 1. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. 2. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3. Mask and protect adjacent surfaces from overspray or dusting. C. INSTALLATION 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Product must be installed according to local code, and must be applied by a qualified applicator. 3. Apply to minimum cured thickness as indicated on the Drawings or as scheduled at the end of this Section. 4. Apply insulation to seal voids at truss ends to prevent wind scouring of ceiling insulation. 5. Seal plumbing stacks, electrical wiring and other penetrations into attic to control air leakage. 6. Apply insulation to fill voids around bathtubs to point of accessibility. 7. Apply insulation to fill voids around doors and windows. Apply insulation to fill voids around accessible service and equipment penetrations. 8. Do not install spray foam insulation in areas where it will be in contact with equipment or materials with operating temperatures of 180 degrees F (82 degrees C) or greater. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Thermal Insulation 07 21 00 7 of 8 D. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. Inspection will include verification of insulation and density. 3.06. PROTECTION A. Provide temporary protection to ensure work being without damage or deterioration from weather or physical abuse. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Thermal Insulation 07 21 00 8 of 8 This Page Intentionally Left Blank Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Air and Vapor Barriers 07 27 00 1 of 14 SECTION 07 27 00 Air and Vapor Barriers PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein B. Complete Work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein to bridge gaps and seal the building envelope against air leakage and water intrusion. 1. Vapor barriers under floor slab patches at trenches and other areas where existing slab has been removed. 2. Exterior Envelope Air Barrier (AB) The AB includes the existing concrete ground level floor slab with applied sealer; Exterior CMU with applied metal stud and closed cell foam insulation / air barrier; roof concrete slab with closed cell foam air sealing at perimeter; closed cell foam sealing at second floor joist/exterior wall connections; and all window, door, penetration and other sealing required to make a complete air tight membrane between the interior and exterior of the building. a. Ground floor slab AB to consist of existing concrete slab, sealed with applied sealer, and with all cracks and joints sealed with caulk.. b. Exterior wall AB to consist of existing CMU and brick wall with new metal stud wall on interior, cavity insulated and sealed with closed cell foam. c. Ceiling Cap / Roof Truss AB to consist of existing roof deck sealed at perimeter with closed cell foam and with all penetrations sealed. d. See details for unique conditions requiring special treatment, and expect to have encounter conditions that will need on site resolution to achieve complete integrity of the CB. 3. Unit Compartmentalization Barrier (CB) The CB includes all walls and floors that separate dwelling units from other dwelling units. a. Unit demising wall CB to consist metal studs and drywall as detailed. CB barrier is the inside face of the drywall i. Caulk seal at top and bottom plates and at wall ends. ii. Caulk and seal at all penetration, outlet boxes, etc. b. Unit Demising Floor / Ceiling CB to consist of existing floor slab i. Perimeter caulk sealed at bottom plates. ii. Seal all penetrations. c. See details for unique conditions requiring special treatment, and expect to have encounter conditions that will need on site resolution to achieve complete integrity of the CB. 4. Penetrations: All penetrations of AB and CB require sealing to maintain integrity of the barrier envelope. a. Exterior windows and doors. b. Interior doors penetrating the CB to have frames caulk sealed at CB side of corridor wall. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Air and Vapor Barriers 07 27 00 2 of 14 c. Plumbing Piping installed in CB is to be caulked / fire caulked. d. HVAC Ducting installed in CB is to be caulked / fire caulked to plywood. e. Electrical Outlets installed in CB are to be caulked or gasketed to plywood face and to have holes in boxes sealed with duct mastic or equivalent. f. Sealing items recessed into AB or CB walls with tape and sealant. 5. Provide and install EcoSeal gasketing and caulk for misc. areas where drywall forms the CB and requires sealing to wood framing. 6. Provide and install fasteners. 7. Coordinate with CET for inspection and testing of air and vapor barrier materials and installation for conformance with design intent and HERS rating Process. 8. Coordinate with CET for three preliminary blower door compartmentalization tests during construction and final testing of a sampling of units at completion of construction. C. Alternates: Not Applicable. D. Install Items Furnished Under Other Sections: Not Applicable. E. Furnish Items to Other Sections: Not Applicable. F. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 2. Section 06 16 00 SHEATHING 3. Section 06 17 53 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 4. Section 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION 5. Section 08 14 00 WOOD AND COMPOSITE DOORS AND FRAMES 6. Section 08 53 45 WINDOWS 1.03. REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (AATCC): ATCC 127 - Test Method for Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM D 882 - Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting. 2. ASTM E 84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. ASTM E 96/E 96M - Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 4. ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. 5. ASTM E 2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials. 6. ASTM E 2357 - Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies. C. International Code Council Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES): ICC-ES AC38 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Barriers. 1.04. SUBMITTALS A. All submittals, including shop drawings, manufacturer's specifications and product data shall be submitted for the following in accordance with the requirements of Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures and Substitutions. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Air and Vapor Barriers 07 27 00 3 of 14 B. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data, physical properties for each item furnished hereunder. C. Manufacturer’s installation instructions for placement, seaming and opening details. 1.05. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with all regulations, including but not limited to, OSHA, EPA, and hauling and disposal regulations of the authority having jurisdiction. B. Use only new material free from defects. Reject material that is discolored, warped, or otherwise damaged. C. Qualifications 1. Installer shall have experience with installation of weather barrier assemblies under similar conditions. 2. Installation shall be in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer’s installation guidelines and recommendations. 3. Source Limitations: Provide weather barrier and accessory materials produced by single manufacturer. D. Job Mock-Up: 1. Sample Sealing at envelope air barrier and unit compartmentalization: a. Contractor shall perform sample air barrier and compartmentalization sealing mock-ups at areas and conditions identified on the compartmentalization drawings for review. The materials and workmanship used to build the mock-up shall be representative of those that will be contained within the actual project construction. The mock-up shall form the basis for all testing. General air and vapor barrier installation shall not commence until reviewed by both CET, the Architect and the General Contractor. All costs associated with this preconstruction testing shall be borne by the General Contractor. 2. Mock-ups and methods will become standard for Work of this Section. 1.06. AIRTIGHTNESS A. The project must meet the Stretch Energy Code requirements of HERS 55 or less Air barrier continuity within and between building components will be critical for achieving this, including: 1. Sealing existing slab, penetrations and edges. 2. Exterior wall assembly. 3. Roof assembly. B. Whole Building Air Tightness: 0.96. ACH50 or better C. Dwelling Unit Compartmentalization: 0.29 CFM50/sqft enclosure. 1.07. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Deliver weather barrier materials and components in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. B. Store weather barrier materials as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. If hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb, immediately notify Architect and Construction Coordinator. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Air and Vapor Barriers 07 27 00 4 of 14 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01. UNDER SLAB AIR AND VAPOR BARRIER A. Vapor barrier shall have all of the following qualities: 1. Maintain permeance of less than 0.01 Perms [grains/(ft2 · hr · inHg)] as tested in accordance with mandatory conditioning tests per ASTM E1745 Section 7.1 (7.1.1-7.1.5). 2. Other performance criteria: a. Strength: ASTM E1745 Class A. b. Thickness: 15 mils minimum 3. Provide third party documentation that all testing was performed on a single production roll per ASTM E1745 Section 8.1 B. Vapor barrier products: 1. Basis of Design: Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier (15-mil) by Stego Industries LLC., (877) 464-7834 www.stegoindustries.com. C. ACCESSORIES 1. Seams: Stego Tape by Stego Industries LLC 2. Sealing Penetrations of Vapor barrier: Stego Mastic by Stego Industries LLC, Stego Tape. 3. Perimeter/edge seal: Stego Crete Claw by Stego Industries LLC, Stego Term Bar by Stego Industries LLC, StegoTack Tape (double-sided sealant tape) by Stego Industries LLC 2.02. SELF-ADHERED WATER RESISTIVE AIR BARRIER MEMBRANE A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with contract requirements, products which may be incorporated into the work include the following: 1. Henry – Blueskin VP 100. 2. Or Equal approved by the Architect and Owner in accordance with General Conditions. B. Air Barrier and auxiliary materials shall comply with the following system requirements: 1. Obtain air barrier and auxiliary materials as a single-source from the Air Barrier Manufacturer to ensure total system compatibility and integrity. 2. Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Barriers: 3. ICC – ES AC38: Pass 4. Air leakage: 5. ASTM E2178: Pass 6. Water resistance: 7. ASTM E331: Pass 8. Nail Sealability: 9. AAMA 711: Pass 10. ASTM D1970: Pass C. Primary Sheet-Applied, Vapor Permeable Water Resistive Air Barrier (Basis of Design): 1. Self-adhered vapor permeable, water resistive air barrier consisting of a reinforced, modified polyolefin tri-laminate film surface and patented permeable adhesive technology with split-back poly-release film; having the following typical physical properties: Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Air and Vapor Barriers 07 27 00 5 of 14 a. Basis of design: Henry® Blueskin® VP100 Self-Adhered Water Resistive Air Barrier b. Color: Blue c. Thickness: 19 mils (0.48 mm) d. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E96): 33 perms e. Air Permeance (ASTM E2178): Pass f. Nail Sealability (ASTM D1970): Pass g. Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E84): 1. Flame Spread: Class A 2. Smoke Development: Class A h. Low Application Temperature: 40 degrees F (5 degrees C) D. Assembly Auxiliary Materials: 1. Adhesives/Primers: a. Standard VOC adhesive: 1. Synthetic rubber based quick setting adhesive; having the following typical physical properties: a. Basis of design: Henry® Blueskin® Adhesive b. Color: Blue c. Maximum VOC: 450 g/L d. Drying time (initial set): 30 minutes e. Low Application Temperature: 10 degrees F (-12 degrees C) b. Low VOC adhesive: 1. Synthetic rubber based quick setting adhesive with low VOC content; having the following typical physical properties: a. Basis of design: Henry® Blueskin® LVC Adhesive b. Color: Blue c. Maximum VOC: <240 g/L d. Drying time (initial set): 30 minutes e. Low Application Temperature: 10 degrees F (-12 degrees C) 2. Polymer emulsion water based quick setting adhesive with low VOC content; having the following typical physical properties: a. Basis of design: Henry® Aquatac™ Primer b. Color: Aqua c. Maximum VOC: 50 g/L d. Drying time (initial set): 30 minutes e. Low Application Temperature: 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C) c. Aerosol spray adhesive: 1. Quick drying spray adhesive used to prepare construction surfaces for the application of flashings; having the following typical physical properties: a. Basis of design: Henry® Blueskin® Spray Prep Adhesive b. Color: Clear amber c. Solids by weight: 35% d. Drying time (initial set): 3 minutes e. Low Application Temperature: -10 degrees F (-23 degrees C) 2. Self-Adhered Flashing: a. Non-Vapor Permeable Flashing: 1. Non-vapor permeable, self-adhered water resistive air and vapor barrier consisting of a synthetic butyl compound integrally laminated to a white engineered polypropylene film surface; having the following typical physical properties: a. Basis of design: Henry® Blueskin® Butyl Flash b. Color: White Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Air and Vapor Barriers 07 27 00 6 of 14 c. Thickness: 14 mils (0.36 mm) d. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E96): 0.14 perms e. Nail Sealability (ASTM D1970): Pass f. Elongation (ASTM D412): 825% minimum g. Low Application Temperature: 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C) 2. Flexible non-vapor permeable, self-adhered water resistive air and vapor barrier consisting of a synthetic butyl compound integrally laminated to a creped, white engineered film; having the following typical physical properties: a. Basis of design: Henry® Blueskin® Flexible Butyl Flash b. Color: White c. Thickness: 54 mils (1.3 mm) d. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E96): <0.1 perms e. Nail Sealability (ASTM D1970): Pass f. Low Application Temperature: 10 degrees F (-12 degrees C) 3. Non-vapor permeable, self-adhered water resistive air and vapor barrier consisting of an SBS rubberized asphalt compound integrally laminated to a blue engineered thermoplastic film surface; having the following typical physical properties: a. Basis of design: Henry® Blueskin® WB25 Window and Door Flashing b. Color: Blue c. Thickness: 25 mils (.63 mm) d. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E96): 0.05 perms e. Elongation (ASTM D412-modified): 200% minimum f. Low Application Temperature: 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C) 4. Low temperature non-vapor permeable, self-adhered water resistive air and vapor barrier consisting of an SBS rubberized asphalt compound integrally laminated to a blue engineered thermoplastic film surface; having the following typical physical properties: a. Basis of Design: Henry® Blueskin® WB Window and Door Flashing Color: Blue b. Thickness:35 mils (0.9 mm) c. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E96): 0.05 perms d. Nail Sealability (ASTM D1970): Pass e. Elongation (ASTM D412-modified): 200% minimum f. Low Application Temperature: 10 degrees F (-12 degrees C) b. Vapor Permeable Flashing: 1. Self-adhered water resistive vapor permeable air barrier consisting of a reinforced modified polyolefin tri-laminate film surface and patented adhesive technology with split-back poly-release film; having the following typical physical properties: a. Basis of design: Henry® Blueskin® VP100 Self-Adhered Water Resistive Air Barrier b. Color: Blue c. Thickness: 19 mils (0.48 mm) d. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E96): 33 perms e. Nail Sealability (ASTM D1970): Pass f. Low Application Temperature: 40 degrees F (5 degrees C) 3. Sealants: a. Building Envelope Sealant: 1. Moisture cure, medium modulus polymer modified sealing compound; having the following typical physical properties: a. Basis of design: Henry® 925 BES Sealant Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Air and Vapor Barriers 07 27 00 7 of 14 b. Color: Varies c. Elongation: 450 – 550%. b. Termination Sealant: 1. One-part high performance synthetic rubber sealant; having the following typical physical properties: a. Basis of design: Henry® 212 All Purpose Crystal Clear Sealant b. Color: Clear c. Elongation: 200% minimum 2.03. ZIP SYSTEM SEALING MATERIALS A. Self-Adhering Seam and Flashing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, self-adhering, cold- applied, proprietary seam tape consisting of polyolefin film with acrylic adhesive. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements provide Huber Engineered Woods; ZIP System® Seam and Flashing Tape or a comparable product. 2. Thickness: 0.012 inch 3. Width: 3.75 inch and 6 inch. 4. Code Compliance: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. "AC148 - Acceptance Criteria for Flexible Flashing Materials." 5. International Code Council (ICC), ICC-ES ESR2227. 6. American Architectural Manufacturer’s Association; AAMA 711. B. Liquid-Applied Flashing Membrane: Gun-grade, cold-applied, silyl-terminated polyether (STPE) liquid flashing membrane compatible with sheathing/weather barrier and self- adhering seam and flashing tape, and tested as part of an assembly meeting performance requirements. Follow manufacturer's recommendation for integration with self-adhering seam and flashing tape. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Huber Engineered Woods; ZIP System® Liquid Flash or a comparable product. 2. Hardness, Shore A, ASTM C 661: 40 to 45. 3. Total Solids: 99 percent. 4. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 412: 75 psi. C. Self-Adhering Flexible Flashing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, self-adhering, cold-applied, flexible flashing tape consisting of a flexible acrylic foam backing with acrylic adhesive. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements provide Huber Engineered Woods; ZIP System® Stretch Tape or an equal product. 2. Thickness: 0.042 inch. 3. Width: 6 inch and 10 incH. 4. Code Compliance: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. "AC148 - Acceptance Criteria for Flexible Flashing Materials." 5. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO), IAPMO ER365. 6. American Architectural Manufacturer’s Association; AAMA 711. 2.04. FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS A. Fluid Applied Vapor Permeable Air Barrier 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements provide Henry® Air-Bloc® 17MR Fluid Applied Vapor Permeable Air Barrier or an equal product. a. Color: Graphite Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Air and Vapor Barriers 07 27 00 8 of 14 b. Vertical and lateral flame propagation: meets IBC NFPA 285 Exception #2 Per ASTM E1354 and ASTM E84 c. Solids Content: 1. Weight: 63% 2. Volume: 53% d. Minimum Application Temperature: +20 °F (-6 °C) e. Service Temperature: -40 °F to +180 °F (-40 °C to +82 °C) f. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E96): 1. Method B: 14 perms g. Air Permeance: 1. Material (ASTM E2178): 0.0001 cfm/ft2 (0.0005 L/s.m.2) 2. Air Leakage – Assembly (ASTM E2357): Pass h. Elongation (ASTM D412): 250% i. Tensile Strength (ASTM D412): 140 psi j. Nail Sealability (AAMA 711/ASTM D1970 modified): Pass k. Water Absorption (ASTM D570): 5.6% l. Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E84): 1. Flame Spread Index: 10, Class A 2. Smoke developed: 15, Class A m. Fire Testing (NFPA 285): Complies in various assemblies n. VOC Content, max (EPA Method 24): 100g/L Method 24 o. Declaration Status: LBC Red List Free B. Auxiliary Materials 1. Flashings; choose from the following: a. Liquid-applied flashing: 1. Moisture-cure one component elastomeric liquid applied flashing using an STPE (Silyl-Terminated Polyether) polymer, having the following typical properties: a. Basis of Design: Henry® Air-Bloc LF® Liquid Applied Flashing b. Color: Blue b. Self-Adhered flashing: 1. Vapor impermeable, self-adhered water resistive air and vapor barrier consisting of an SBS rubberized asphalt compound, integrally laminated to a blue engineered thermoplastic film, having the following typical properties: a. Basis of Design: Henry Blueskin® SA Self-Adhered Water Resistive Air Barrier b. Color: Blue 2. Adhesives/Primers for Self-Adhered Flashing: a. Standard VOC: 3. Synthetic rubber based quick setting adhesive; having the following typical physical properties: a. Basis of Design: Henry® Blueskin® Adhesive b. Color: Blue c. VOC Content, max (EPA Method 24): 450g/L Method 24 4. Low VOC: d. Synthetic rubber based quick setting adhesive with low VOC content; having the following typical physical properties: c. Basis of Design: Henry® Blueskin® LVC Adhesive d. Color: Blue e. VOC Content, max (EPA Method 24): <240g/L Method 24 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Air and Vapor Barriers 07 27 00 9 of 14 2. Polymer emulsion-based primer for self-adhered membranes, and having the following typical properties: a. Basis of Design: Henry® Aquatac™ Primer b. Color: Aqua. c. VOC Content, max (EPA Method 24): 50g/L Method 24 5. Sealants: a. Moisture cure, medium modulus polymer modified sealing compound, having the following typical properties: 1. Basis of Design: Henry® 925 BES Sealant 2. Complies with Fed. Spec. TT-S-00230C, Type II, Class A. 3. Complies with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 35. 6. Thru-Wall Flashing: a. Vapor impermeable, self-adhered water resistive air and vapor barrier consisting of an SBS rubberized asphalt compound, integrally laminated to a yellow engineered thermoplastic film, having the following typical properties: 1. Basis of Design: Henry® Blueskin® TWF Self-Adhered Thru-Wall Flashing 2. Color: Yellow 2.05. AIR BARRIER CAULK A. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, one part, non sag, acrylic, mildew- resistant, acrylic-emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834, formulated to be paintable and recommended for exposed applications on interior and on protected exterior exposures involving joint movement of not more than plus or minus 7.5 percent. Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. "Chem-Calk 600"; Bostik Construction Products Div. 2. "Sonolac"; Sonneborn Building Products Div.; Rexnord Chem. Prod., Inc. 3. "Tremco Acrylic Latex Caulk"' Tremco Inc. 2.06. AIR BARRIER SEALANT A. Air barrier sealant for use at compartmentalization boundary where drywall meets the plywood/framing at exterior, corridor, and demising walls and where it meets the floor sheathing, and for general sealing at joints and penetrations: 1. Product to be EcoSeal Plus by Knauf Insulation, Inc. Sales (800) 825-4434, ext. 8485; Technical Support (800) 825-4434, ext. 8727; info.us@knaufinsulation.com PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01. INSPECTION, TESTING AND SEQUENCE A. The installer shall examine the substrates, supports and conditions under which this work is to be performed and notify the Contractor, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work means installer accepts substrates and conditions. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Air and Vapor Barriers 07 27 00 10 of 14 B. CET has been contracted to be the HERS Rater for this project. The contractor is to coordinate with and provide access to the site for inspection and testing over the course of the work, and to meet all Checklist Requirements as verified by CET. 1. HERS rating of 45 or better. 2. Insulation should all be installed to RESNET quality grade I 3. CET will perform a mid-construction whole building blower door test after air barriers and windows have been installed but before interior or exterior insulation to verify that air sealing approach is working. A final blower door test for the whole building will be performed upon completion of construction. 4. CET will perform mid-construction compartmentalization blower door tests of 3 apartments after drywall and air sealing have been installed. A final blower door test of a random sample of units will be performed upon completion of construction. 5. Apartment compartmentalization blower door test results shall be <0.29 CFM, ACH 50 or better. 6. Whole building compartmentalization blower door test results shall be <0.96 CFM, ACH 50 or better. 7. Measured overall ventilation rate in each apartment shall be within 15 CFM of design, with bathrooms exhausting a minimum of 20 CFM continuously and kitchens exhausting a minimum of 25 CFM continuously. C. To achieve the insulation levels and air tightness required by the HERS rating requirements, sequence of the work related to gypsum board installation, insulation installation and air and weather barrier installation may be required to differ from traditional sequence standards. 3.02. GENERAL A. Complete Work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein to bridge gaps and seal the building envelope against air leakage and water intrusion. 1. Air and weather barrier is to be achieved thru the AdvanTech Zip System sheathing, tape and accessories. 2. Sealing of the walls at foundations . 3. Sealing of the walls at top plate and truss / rafter connection . 4. Sealing at openings and penetrations of window and door frames. 5. Sealing at piping, conduit, duct and similar penetrations. 6. All other air leakage pathways in the building envelope. 3.03. UNDER SLAB AIR AND VAPOR BARRIER INSTALLATION A. Install vapor barrier in accordance ASTM E1643. 1. Unroll vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the concrete placement and face laps away from the expected direction of the placement whenever possible. 2. Extend vapor barrier to the perimeter of the slab. If practicable, terminate it at the top of the slab, otherwise (a) at a point acceptable to the structural engineer or (b) where obstructed by impediments, such as dowels, waterstops, or any other site condition requiring early termination of the vapor barrier. At the point of termination, seal vapor barrier to the foundation wall, grade beam or slab itself. a. Seal vapor barrier to the entire slab perimeter using Stego Crete Claw, per manufacturer's instructions. b. Seal vapor barrier to the entire perimeter wall or footing/grade beam with double sided StegoTack Tape, or both Stego Term Bar and StegoTack Tape, per manufacturer’s instructions. Ensure the concrete Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Air and Vapor Barriers 07 27 00 11 of 14 is clean and dry prior to adhering tape. 3. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer’s seam tape. 4. Apply seam tape/Crete Claw to a clean and dry vapor barrier. 5. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer’s instructions. 6. For interior forming applications, avoid the use of non-permanent stakes driven through vapor barrier. Use Beast Form Stake and Beast Foot as a vapor barrier-safe forming system. Ensure Beast Foot’s peel-and-stick adhesive base is fully adhered to the vapor barrier. 7. If non-permanent stakes must be driven through vapor retarder, repair as recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer. 8. Use reinforcing bar supports with base sections that eliminate or minimize the potential for puncture of the vapor barrier. 9. Repair damaged areas with vapor barrier material of similar (or better) permeance, puncture and tensile. 10. For vapor barrier-safe concrete screeding applications, install Beast Screed (vapor barrier-safe screed system) per manufacturer’s instructions prior to placing concrete. 3.04. SELF-ADHERED VAPOR PERMEABLE AIR BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Coordination: 1. Self-adhered vapor permeable air barrier sheets may be installed vertically or horizontally over the outside face of exterior sheathing board or substrate. 2. Complete detail Work around corners, wall openings, building transitions and penetrations prior to field applications. 3. Install self-adhered vapor permeable air barrier sheet over the outside face of exterior sheathing board or substrate, measure and pre-cut into manageable sized sheets to suit the application conditions. 4. Install self-adhered vapor permeable air barrier sheet complete and continuous to substrate in a sequential overlapping weatherboard method starting at bottom or base of wall and working up. 5. Stagger all end lap seams. 6. Roll installed membrane with roller to ensure positive contact and adhesion with substrate. B. Building Transition Conditions 1. Tie-in to structural beams, columns, floor slabs and intermittent floors, parapet curbs, foundation walls, roofing systems and at the interface of dissimilar materials with self-adhering air barrier transition and flashing membrane. 2. Align and position self-adhered air barrier transition and flashing membrane, remove protective film and press firmly into place. Provide minimum 3 inch lap on to substrates. 3. Ensure minimum 3 inch overlap at side and end laps of membrane. 4. Roll membrane and lap seams with roller to ensure positive contact and adhesion. C. Window, Door And Other Wall Openings 1. To avoid waste, predetermine best method and sequence to the install self-adhered air barrier transition and flashing membrane around window or wall openings subject to the opening size and installation of window, door or louver type. 2. Wrap self-adhered air barrier transition and flashing membrane into wall openings to cover sill, jambs and head. It is not required to install Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Air and Vapor Barriers 07 27 00 12 of 14 continuous sheets through corners. 3. Remove release film, align flashing membrane and apply pressure to ensure positive contact. Roll Lap seams to ensure adhesion. Provide lap seams to shed water. 4. Install preformed self-adhered corner flashing membrane into corners over flashing membrane. 5. Subject to window installation requirements, install preformed sill pan system and seal to installed self-adhered air barrier window flashing membrane with sealant. 6. Install windows in accordance with window manufacturer’s details and cover nail flange with flashing tape. Install flashing tape along jamb and across head flanges of window and seal to installed self-adhered air barrier transition membrane. Roll tape to ensure positive contact to substrate. Seal exposed leading edge of tape. 7. For windows without nail flange, install specified aluminized tape around perimeter of opening to accommodate placement of backer rod and sealant between window frame and self-adhered vapor permeable air barrier membrane. D. Mechanical Equipment Penetrations 1. Mechanical pipe, electrical conduit and/or duct work must be secured solid into position prior to installation of self-adhered vapor permeable air barrier membrane. 2. Electrical services penetrating the wall assembly and self-adhered vapor permeable air barrier membrane must be placed in appropriate conduit and secured solid into position. 3. Install manufactured flanged penetration sleeves as recommended by sleeve manufacturer. 4. For straight sided penetrations, cut and fit self-adhered vapor permeable air barrier to accommodate sleeve, install specified single sided flashing tape to seal the air barrier membrane to ductwork or preformed flange sleeve. 5. For pipe penetrations, refer to manufacturer’s standard details. E. Vertical Applications 1. For vertical applications, align sheets with an ‘inside’ or ‘outside’ corner to avoid wrinkles and miss-alignment of subsequent applications. 2. Measure and pre-cut into manageable sized self-adhered sheets to suit the application conditions. 3. Hang self-adhered sheets over wall and extend down to lowest point of wall. Allow for excess material at bottom of wall to accommodate tie-ins and connections to adjacent surfaces. 4. Align and position self-adhered membrane, remove release film and press firmly into place. Provide minimum 3 inch overlap at side and end laps of membrane. Roll membrane and lap seams with roller to ensure contact and adhesion. 5. Continue to remove release film and apply pressure to ensure positive contact onto wall substrate. 6. Install subsequent sheets of self-adhered vapor permeable air barrier sheets in overlapping weatherboard format. Ensure sheets lay smooth and flat to surfaces. Roll membrane and lap seams with roller to ensure contact and adhesion. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Air and Vapor Barriers 07 27 00 13 of 14 F. Horizontal Applications 1. A. horizontal applications, align sheets and begin installation of water- resistive weather barrier at bottom or lowest point of wall. 2. To avoid wrinkles and miss-alignment of subsequent applications it is recommended to pre-mark or "Snap" a level line to work from. Measure and pre-cut into manageable sized sheets to suit the application conditions. 3. Allow for excess material at bottom of wall to accommodate tie-ins and connections to adjacent surfaces. 4. Align and position self-adhered membrane, remove release film and press firmly into place. Provide minimum 3 inch overlap at all side and end laps of membrane. Roll membrane and lap seams with roller to ensure contact and adhesion. 5. Continue to remove release film and apply pressure to ensure positive contact onto wall substrate. 6. Install subsequent sheets of self-adhered vapor permeable air barrier sheets in overlapping weatherboard format. Ensure sheets lay smooth and flat to surfaces. Roll membrane and lap seams with roller to ensure contact and adhesion. 3.05. ZIP SYSTEM SEALING INSTALLATION A. Preparation 1. Verify substrate and surface conditions are in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer recommended tolerances prior to installation of weather barrier and accessories. 2. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the Work of this section. Notify Architect in writing of any discrepancies. Commencement of the Work or any parts thereof shall mean acceptance of the prepared substrates. 3. All surfaces must be dry, sound, clean and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar or other contaminants detrimental to the adhesion of the water resistive air barrier membrane and flashings. Fill voids and gaps in substrate greater than ¼ inch in width to provide an even surface. Strike masonry joints full-flush. 4. Minimum application temperature self-adhered membrane and flashings to be above 20 degrees F (minus 6.0 degrees C). 5. Apply roller to tape after installing to complete the seal per manufacturer guidelines. 6. Ensure all preparatory Work is complete prior to applying primary self- adhered vapor permeable air barrier sheet membrane. 7. Mechanical fasteners used to secure sheathing boards or penetrate sheathing boards shall be set flush with sheathing and fastened into solid backing. B. Sheathing Joint Treatment 1. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Apply seam tape to joints between sheathing panels. 3. Utilize tape gun or hard rubber roller provided by manufacturer to ensure tape is completely adhered to substrates. 4. When using liquid-applied flashing to seal sheathing joints follow manufacturer’s recommendations for sealing panel seams. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Air and Vapor Barriers 07 27 00 14 of 14 3.06. FLEXIBLE OR LIQUID-APPLIED FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Apply tape flexible flashing or membrane where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. After flexible flashing tape has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber to ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates. 2. Width for flexible flashing: 6 inch. 3. Apply liquid-applied flashing membrane at penetrations, gaps, and cracks to form continuous weathertight surface. Apply liquid membrane according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Follow manufacturer’s recommendation for integration with seam and flashing tape. B. Apply liquid applied flashing membrane where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. After liquid applied flashing membrane has been applied, tool wet product with a plastic spreader, putty knife, or similar tool to ensure that flashing is opaque and substrate is no longer visible. 2. Minimum Thickness for Liquid Flashing: 12 mils. 3. Apply liquid flashing membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for integration with seam and flashing tape or flexible flashing tape. C. Apply flexible flashing tape where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. After flexible flashing tape has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber to ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates. 2. Width of flexible flashing: 6 inches and 10 inches. 3.07. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Make notification when sections of work are complete to allow review prior to covering self-adhered water-resistive vapor permeable air barrier system. B. Owner to engage independent consultant to observe substrate and membrane installation prior to placement of cladding systems and provide written documentation of observations. C. Adjustments to air barrier installation may be required after blower door test is performed. 3.08. PROTECTION A. Protect wall areas covered with self-adhered water-resistive vapor permeable air barrier from damage due to construction activities, high wind conditions, and extended exposure to inclement weather. B. Review condition of self-adhered water-resistive vapor permeable air barrier prior to installation of cladding. Repair, or remove and replace damaged sections with new membrane. C. Recommend to cap and protect exposed back-up walls against wet weather conditions during and after application of membrane, including wall openings and construction activity above completed self-adhered water-resistive vapor permeable air barrier installations. D. Remove and replace water-resistive weather barrier membrane affected by chemical spills or surfactants. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Membrane Roofing and Flashing 075300 1 of 14 SECTION 07 53 00 Membrane Roofing and Flashing PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein. B. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1 Removal of all equipment, curbs and other items on existing roof. 2 Removal and replacement of roof hatches. 3 Vacuum all stone ballast from main and lower roofs. Stones to be then part of Site Scope. 4 Remove existing membrane from main roof and lower roofs. 5 Evaluate existing 3” polyiso. Remove & Replace as needed. Provide a Unit price/sf. 6 Install wood blocking to same depth of new insulation around perimeter of roofs and at (2) roof hatches. 7 Mechanically attach 7.5” of polyiso over existing 3” polyiso to entire main roof and lower flat roofs to acquire an R60. 8 Mechanically attach white .060 PVC over main roof, and lower flat roofs. 9 Install .24g Kynar finish gravel stop to all roof edges. Color: to be determined. 10 Install required flashing and/or pitch pockets for (2) RTUs, skylights. 11 All PVC related flashings and terminations installed per manufacturer's specifications. 12 Install fall protection tie offs priced under allowance. a. Scope to include spacing, anchoring, load calculations and equipment design by a professional engineer to ensure all local, state and national regulations. 13 All roof drains to be replaced. 14 All hoisting and craning of roofing material and equipment by Florence Roofing. 15 Fasteners, adhesives, and other accessories required for a complete roofing installation. 16 All roof related debris to be disposed of by Florence Roofing. 17 20 year NDL Total System Warranty. 18 All work performed to OSHA regulations and standards A. Alternates: Not Applicable. B. Items To Be Installed Only: 1. Section 100000 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES a. Installation of roof hatches ad curbs. C. Items To Be Furnished Only: Not Applicable. D. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 024100 DEMOLITION a. Disposal of removed materials. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Membrane Roofing and Flashing 075300 2 of 14 2. Section 042000 UNIT MASONRY a. Installation of sheet metal flashings set in masonry. b. Parapet wall and cap repairs and re-setting. 3. Section 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY a. Installation of wood blocking and pt. plywood back-up. 4. Section 08 63 00 SKYLIGHTS a. Installation of skylights on curbs. 5. Section 079200 JOINT SEALANTS a. Caulking related to flashing set into masonry. 6. Section 221000 PLUMBING a. Supply and installation roof drains, snaking and clearing of roof drain lines. 1.02. REFERENCES A. ASTM D 751 - Standard Test Methods for Coated Fabrics. B. ASTM D 4434 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Sheet Roofing. C. ASTM E 108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings. D. ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. E. UL - Roofing Materials and Systems Directory, Roofing Systems (TGFU.R10128). F. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads For Buildings And Other Structures. G. NRCA - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. 1.03. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. Physical Properties 1. Roof product must meet the requirements of type III PVC sheet roofing as defined by ASTM D 4434 and must meet or exceed the following physical properties. 2. Thickness: 50 mil, nominal, in accordance with ASTM D 751. 3. Breaking Strengths: ≥ 390 lbf. (MD) and ≥ 438 lbf. (XMD) in accordance with ASTM D 751, Grab Method. 4. Elongation at Break: ≥ 31% (MD) and ≥ 31% (XMD) in accordance with ASTM D 751, Grab Method. 5. Heat Aging in accordance with ASTM D 3045: 176 °F for 56 days. No sign of cracking, chipping or crazing. (In accordance with ASTM D 4434). 6. Factory Seam Strength: ≥ 417 lbf. in accordance with ASTM D 751, Grab Method. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Membrane Roofing and Flashing 075300 3 of 14 7. Tearing Strength: ≥ 132 lbf. (MD) and 163 lbf. (XMD) in accordance with ASTM D 751, Procedure B. 8. Low Temperature Bend (Flexibility): Pass at -40 °F in accordance with ASTM D 2136. 9. Accelerated Weathering: No cracking, checking, crazing, erosion or chalking after 5,000 hours in accordance with ASTM G 154. 10. Linear Dimensional Change: < 0.5% in accordance with ASTM D 1204 at 176 ± 2 °F for 6 hours. 11. Water Absorption: < 1.7% in accordance with ASTM D 570 at 158 °F for 166 hours. 12. Static Puncture Resistance: ≥ 56 lbs. in accordance with ASTM D 5602. 13. Dynamic Puncture Resistance: ≥ 14.7 ft-lbf. in accordance with ASTM D 5635. D. Cool Roof Rating Council (CRRC) Listing. 1. Membrane must be listed on CRRC website. a. Initial Thermal Emittance: ≥ 88% b. Initial Solar Reflectance: ≥ 87% c. Initial Solar Reflective Index (SRI): ≥ 111 d. 3-Year Aged Solar Reflectance: ≥ 68% e. 3-Year Aged Thermal Emittance: ≥ 84% f. 3-Year Aged Solar Reflective Index (SRI): ≥ 82 1.04. SUBMITTALS A. Product data: Submit manufacturer's product data, specifications and installation and maintenance instructions for all roofing and flashing materials including certifications and other data as may be required to show compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Data sheet on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 4. Maintenance requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate insulation pattern, overall membrane layout, field seam locations, joint or termination detail conditions, and location of fasteners. D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, representing actual product, color, and finish. 1. 4 inch by 6 inch (102 by 150 mm) sample of roofing membrane, of color specified. 2. Sample of roofing membrane with factory weld and T-shaped lap. 3. 4 inch by 6 inch (102 mm by 150 mm) sample of walkway pad. 4. Termination bar, fascia bar with cover, drip edge and gravel stop if to be used. 5. Each fastener type to be used for installing membrane, insulation/recover board, termination bar and edge details. E. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Membrane Roofing and Flashing 075300 4 of 14 F. Installer Certification: Certification from the roofing system manufacturer that Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system. G. Manufacturer's warranties. 1.05. CONTRACTOR'S AND MANUFACTURER'S STATEMENTS A. Contractor's Review: Accompanying manufacturer's literature and data approval request, submit written statement signed by the General Contractor and the roofing and flashing subcontractor stating that the Contract Drawings and Specifications for roofing, flashing and roof insulation have been reviewed with an agent of the manufacture of the primary roofing materials, and that he is in agreement that the selected systems for roofing, flashing and roof insulation are proper, compatible and adequate for the application shown, and that the conditions and details are acceptable and not in conflict with the roofing manufacturer's requirements for 10- year elastomeric roofing and flashing guarantee. Show, by copy of transmittal form that copy of statement has been transmitted to manufacturer. B. Statement of Application: Upon completion of the work of this section, submit a statement signed by the General contractor and the roofing and flashing subcontractor, stating that the roofing, flashing, and roof insulation installed comply with the requirements of this section, and that installation methods complied with the manufacturer's printed instructions and were proper and adequate for the condition of installation and use. C. Membrane manufacturer shall inspect the work during roof installation and furnish copies of his inspection reports to the Architect. Reports shall be on roofing manufacturer's standard inspection report form, dated and signed. Such inspection shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Rubbish Removal: Submit description of method of rubbish control and removal during roof removal and replacement including protection from scattering of nails, roofing and other materials. 1.06. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer specializing in the production of PVC membranes systems and utilizing a Quality Control Manual during the production of the membrane roofing system that has been approved by and is inspected by Underwriters Laboratories. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installation of roofing systems similar to those specified in this project and approved by the roofing system manufacturer. D. Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system from roofing membrane manufacturer. E. There shall be no deviations from the roof membrane manufacturer's specifications or the approved shop drawings without the prior written approval of the manufacturer. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Membrane Roofing and Flashing 075300 5 of 14 1.07. INSPECTION AND TESTING A. An independent roofing inspector and/or testing laboratory may be engaged and paid for by the Owner to perform inspection and testing of vapor barriers, insulation, roofing and flashing material and systems furnished and installed under this section. B. Cooperate with such roofing inspector and/or testing laboratory. Furnish materials and labor as may be required and provide for convenient access to all parts of the work for purposes of inspection and testing. C. Accept as find the results of all such inspection and testing. D. If any material or system tested is not in conformance with specified requirements, roofing and flashing subcontractor, using new approved materials, shall replace any portion of roofing or flashing, as the Owner deems necessary. E. Roofing and flashing subcontractor shall bear all costs for tests where materials or systems have been found unacceptable, and all costs for replacement required due to such unacceptability. F. If any replacement work is required, such work shall also be subject to the terms of this section. 1.08. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for roof assembly wind uplift and fire hazard requirements. B. Fire Exposure: Provide membrane roofing materials with the following fire-test- response characteristics. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: a. Class A; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119 for fire-resistance- rated roof assemblies of which roofing system is a part. 3. Conform to applicable code for roof assembly fire hazard requirements. C. Wind Uplift: 1. Roofing System Design: Provide a roofing system designed to resist uplift pressures calculated according to the most recent edition of the ASCE-7 Specification Minimum Design Loads for Buildings And Other Structures. 1.09. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Proceed with removal of existing and installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's specification. B. Do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather, or to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is anticipated. C. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed in the same day. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Membrane Roofing and Flashing 075300 6 of 14 D. All new and temporary construction, including equipment and accessories, shall be secured from wind damage or blowoff. E. Temporary waterstops shall be installed at the end of each day's work and shall be removed before proceeding with the next day's work. Waterstops shall be compatible with all materials and shall not emit dangerous or incompatible fumes. F. Prior to and during application all dirt, debris and dust shall be removed from surfaces either by vacuuming, sweeping, blowing with compressed air and/or by similar methods. G. The Subcontractor shall provide all necessary temporary protection and barriers to segregate the work area and to prevent damage to adjacent areas. H. The Subcontractor is cautioned that compounded rubber materials are incompatible with oil-based and plastic-based cement. Creosote and "Penta" based materials are also incompatible. The subcontractor should consult the manufacturer with respect to material compatibility. I. Liquid materials such as solvents and adhesives shall be stored and used away from open flames, sparks and excess heat. J. The building will be open to normal use during the time of construction. The Subcontractor shall take all precautions to create as little disruption as possible during the course of the work K. Completed roof areas shall not be trafficked. Work shall be coordinated to prevent this situation by working towards the roof edges and access ways. Roof areas of higher elevation shall be completed prior to low roof areas. Should access to completed roof areas be necessary, the Subcontractor shall provide plywood protection for the trafficked areas. 1.10. PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene meeting not less than one week before starting work of this section. B. Review methods and procedures related to roof deck construction and roofing system including, but not limited to, the following. 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 3. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening. 4. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 5. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Membrane Roofing and Flashing 075300 7 of 14 7. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 8. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. 1.11. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. D. Store roof materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. E. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent- based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. F. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. G. Handle and store roof materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. 1.12. PROTECTION OF WORK A. Protect other work from spillage of roofing materials and prevent materials from entering and clogging drains and conductors. B. Replace or restore other work which has been soiled or otherwise damaged by the performance of the roofing and associated work. 1.13. WARRANTY A. Contractor Warranty: The contractor shall warrant the roof application with respect to workmanship and proper application for two (2) years from the effective date of the warranty issued by the manufacturer. B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Must be no-dollar limit type and provide for completion of repairs, replacement of membrane or total replacement of the roofing system at the then-current material and labor prices throughout the life of the warranty. In addition the warranty must meet the following criteria: 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date issued by the manufacturer. 2. No exclusion for damage caused by ponding water. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Membrane Roofing and Flashing 075300 8 of 14 3. No exclusion for damage caused by biological growth. 4. Issued direct from and serviced by the roof membrane manufacturer. 5. Transferable for the full term of the warranty. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01. MANUFACTURER A. Basis of design: 1. Duro-Last Roofing, Inc. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Duro-Last Roofing, Inc. 2. Sarnafil 3. Fiber-tite 2.02. ROOFING SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. PVC Roofing Membrane: Conforming to ASTM D 4434, Type III, fabric reinforced, PVC. Membrane properties as follows: 1. Thickness: a. 50 mil, nominal. 2. Exposed Face Color: a. white. B. Accessory Materials: Provide accessory materials supplied by or approved for use by roof system manufacturer. 1. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type, reinforcement, thickness, and color as PVC sheet membrane. 2. Factory Prefabricated Flashings: manufactured using manufacturer's PVC membrane. a. Parapet flashings. b. Stack flashings. c. Curb flashings. d. Inside and outside corners. 3. Sealants and Adhesives: Compatible with roofing system and supplied by roof system manufacturer. a. Water-based adhesive. b. Caulk. c. Strip mastic. 4. Slip Sheet: Compatible with roofing system and supplied by roof system manufacturer. 5. Fasteners and Plates: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane and insulation to substrate. Supplied by roof system manufacturer. a. #14 heavy duty fasteners. 6. Termination and Edge Details: Supplied by roof system manufacturer. a. Termination bar. b. 2-Piece compression metal edge system. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Membrane Roofing and Flashing 075300 9 of 14 7. Vinyl Coated Metal Flashings: Supplied by roof system manufacturer. 24 gauge, hot-dipped galvanized, grade 90 metal with a minimum of 17 mil of PVC membrane laminated to one side. C. Substrate Board: 1. Glass-mat-faced, water-resistant gypsum substrate conforming to ASTM C 1177/C 1177M. Provide to: a. ½ inch thick. D. Substrate Board Attachment: 1. Roof system manufacture's supplied mechanical fasteners. E. Walkways: 1. Provide non-skid, maintenance-free walkway pads in areas of heavy foot traffic and around mechanical equipment. a. Remove and reinstall exiting pads at same locations. b. Remove and reinstall existing ladder to lower roof deck. 2.03. VINYL COATED METAL FLASHING AT MASONRY A. New vinyl coated flashing at masonry is limited to replacement of existing as indicated on drawings. B. Vinyl Coated Metal Flashings: Supplied by roof system manufacturer. 24 gauge, hot-dipped galvanized, grade 90 metal with a minimum of 17 mil of pvc membrane laminated to one side. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01. EXAMINATION A. Before any roofing and flashing work is begun, roof deck shall be carefully inspected and checked for all conditions affecting application and performance. Carefully check wood nailing strips, blocking and plywood for adequate anchorage and proper ventilating. Defects shall be reported in writing to the Architect and roofing work shall not proceed until defects have been corrected. Commencement of work shall constitute acceptance of conditions of surfaces to which insulation and roofing work are to be applied. All defects in work resulting from such accepted surfaces shall be corrected under this section without additional expense to the Owner. B. Decks shall be rigid, tight, clean, dry, smooth, and free from fins, sharp edges, other defects and oily substances. Nailers at decks shall be completely fastened and all concrete and masonry work finished prior to commencement of roofing. Immediately before application of roofing, thoroughly inspect surfaces in manner specified above. C. Ensure that all openings through the roof decks for fans, vents, and other such items have been either temporarily or permanently covered to prevent the entry of water into the building prior to commencing the work of this section. Notify the General Contractor of any uncovered openings and request that such openings be covered. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Membrane Roofing and Flashing 075300 10 of 14 D. Fill all cracks, spalls or uneven surfaces of the decks to provide a smooth finish for installation. Allow repairs to cure prior to installing insulation. Follow manufacturers application rates and procedures. Submit application procedures to Architect for approval prior to construction. E. Have sufficient materials on hand to insure immediate temporary coverage of roof areas to maintain weather tightness as work progresses. F. Remove all debris and discard in accordance with the municipal laws and regulations of the City of Adams. G. Verify that the deck surfaces are dry and free of standing water, ice or snow. H. Verify that all roof openings or penetrations through the roof are solidly set. I. Notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. J. Coordinate with plumbing subcontractor for clearing of drain lines and installation of new roof drain inserts. K. Prior to re-covering an existing roofing system, conduct an inspection of the roof system accompanied by a representative of the membrane manufacturer or an authorized contractor. 1. Determine required fastener type, length, and spacing. 2. Verify that moisture content of existing roofing is within acceptable limits. 3. Identify damaged areas requiring repair before installation of new roofing. 4. Conduct core cuts as required to verify information required. 3.02. PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Surfaces shall be clean, smooth, free of fins, sharp edges, loose and foreign material, oil, grease, and bitumen. D. Re-Roofing Over Existing Insulation Decking: 1. Remove all membrane and metal roof flashings down to insulation layer.. 2. Remove all loose or high fasteners. 3. Repair damaged insulation. 3.03. INSTALLATION A. Install roofing system in accordance with the roof manufacturer's installation instructions. B. B. Separation Board: Fiberglass-faced primed roof board 1. Use only fasteners, stress plates and fastening patterns accepted for use by the roof manufacturer. Fastening patterns must meet applicable design requirements. a. Install fasteners in accordance with the roof manufacturer's requirements. Fasteners that are improperly installed must be replaced or corrected. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Membrane Roofing and Flashing 075300 11 of 14 b. Attach boards in parallel courses with end joints staggered 50% and adjacent boards butted together with no gaps greater than ¼ inch (6.3 mm). C. Roof Membrane: 50 mil, PVC thermoplastic membrane 1. Install in accordance with the roof manufacturer's requirements. 2. Use only membrane adhesive acceptable to the roof manufacturer's that meets the applicable design requirements. a. Water-based membrane adhesive. 3. Cut membrane to fit neatly around all penetrations and roof projections. 4. Unroll roofing membrane and positioned with a minimum 6 inch overlap. 5. Apply adhesive in accordance with the roof manufacturer's requirements. a. Apply at the required rate in smooth, even coatings without voids, globs, puddles or similar irregularities. Use care not to contaminate the area of the membrane where hot air welding will occur. b. Follow guidelines outlined in the adhesive's Product Data Sheet. c. Read the adhesive's Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) prior to using the adhesive. D. Seaming: 1. Weld overlapping sheets together using hot air. Minimum weld width is 1- 1/2 inches (38 mm). 2. Check welded seams for continuity and integrity by the end of each work day. Repair all imperfections. E. Membrane Termination/Securement: All membrane terminations shall be completed in accordance with the membrane manufacturer's requirements. 1. Provide securement at all membrane terminations at the perimeter of each roof level, roof section, curb flashing, skylight, expansion joint, interior wall, penthouse, and other similar condition. 2. Provide securement at any angle change where the slope or combined slopes exceeds two inches in one horizontal foot. F. Flashings: Complete all flashings and terminations as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the membrane manufacturer's requirements. 1. Provide securement at all membrane terminations at the perimeter of each roof level, roof section, curb flashing, skylight, expansion joint, interior wall, penthouse, and other similar condition. a. Do not apply flashing over existing thru-wall flashings or weep holes. b. Secure flashing on a vertical surfaces before the seam between the flashing and the main roof sheet is completed. c. Extend flashing membrane a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm) onto the main roof sheet beyond the mechanical securement. d. Use care to ensure that the flashing does not bridge locations where there is a change in direction (e.g. where the parapet meets the roof deck). 2. Penetrations: a. Flash all pipes, supports, soil stacks, cold vents, and other penetrations passing through the roofing membrane as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the membrane manufacturer's requirements. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Membrane Roofing and Flashing 075300 12 of 14 b. Utilize custom prefabricated flashings supplied by the membrane manufacturer. c. Existing Flashings: Remove when necessary to allow new flashing to terminate directly to the penetration. 3. Pipe Clusters and Unusual Shapes: a. Clusters of pipes or other penetrations which cannot be sealed with prefabricated membrane flashings shall be sealed by surrounding them with a prefabricated vinyl-coated metal pitch pan and pourable sealer supplied by the membrane manufacturer. b. Vinyl-coated metal pitch pans shall be installed, flashed and filled with pourable sealer in accordance with the membrane manufacturer's requirements. c. Pitch pans shall not be used where prefabricated or field fabricated flashings are possible. G. Roof Drains: 1. Coordinate installation of roof drains and vents specified in Section 221000 - Plumbing. 2. Remove existing flashing and asphalt at existing drains in preparation for sealant and membrane. 3. Provide a smooth clean surface on the mating surface between the clamping ring and the drain base. 4. Ensure that drains run free and clear prior to roofing work. H. Edge Details: 1. Provide edge details as indicated on the Drawings. Install in accordance with the membrane manufacturer's requirements. 2. Seal joints between individual sections in accordance with the membrane manufacturer's requirements. 3. Coordinate installation of metal flashing and counter flashing with other trades: Masonry 4. Existing roof hatch, ventilators a. Remove hatch and ventilators, etc. prior to setting membrane termination and re install after roof edge is set.. I. Walkways: Install walkways in accordance with the membrane manufacturer's requirements. 1. Provide walkways where indicated on the Drawings. 2. Install at roof hatches, access doors, rooftop ladders and all other traffic concentration points regardless of traffic frequency. Provided in areas receiving regular traffic to service rooftop units or where a passageway over the surface is required. 3. Do not install walkways over flashings or fields seams until field inspections by the membrane manufacturer have been completed. J. Water cut-offs: Provide water cut-offs to ensure that water does not flow beneath the completed sections of the new roofing system. 1. Provide water cut-offs on a daily basis at the completion of work and at the onset of inclement weather. 2. Remove water cut-offs prior to the resumption of work. 3. The integrity of the water cut-off is the sole responsibility of the roofing contractor. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Membrane Roofing and Flashing 075300 13 of 14 4. 4Any membrane contaminated by the cut-off material shall be cleaned or removed. 3.04. WORKMANSHIP: FLASHINGS AND SHEET METAL WORK A. Except as otherwise indicated comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations and with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and Revere Products Co., "Copper and Common Sense." B. Edges of all sheets of uncoated copper to be soldered shall be tinned with solder on both sides for width not less than 1-1/2 inches. C. Sheet metal seams, unless otherwise specified or detailed, shall be flat locked and soldered and shall finish at least 1/2 inch in width. D. All soldering shall be done slowly with well heated coppers, to heat sheet thoroughly and to sweat solder completely through full width of seam. Ample solder shall be used and seam shall show at least one full inch of evenly flowed solder. Wherever possible, all soldering shall be done in flat position. Seams on slopes steeper than 45 degrees shall be soldered a second time. E. Soldering shall be done with heavy soldering coppers of blunt design, properly tinned before using. For flat seam work and gutters, they shall weigh not less than 10 pounds per pair except, when gas-heated soldering torch is used, copper itself shall weigh not less than 3 pounds. 3.05. PROTECTION A. Protect installed roofing products from construction operations until completion of project. B. Where traffic must continue over completed roofing membrane, protect from damage using durable materials that are not incompatible with membrane. C. Repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. 3.06. FINAL CLEANING A. Upon the completion of the work, remove and cart away from the premises all rubbish and accumulated materials and leave the work in a satisfactory condition. B. All stains and damage to the exterior finish of the building caused by faulty workmanship or improper handling of materials in regard to the installation of roofing shall be cleaned or removed and replaced END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Membrane Roofing and Flashing 075300 14 of 14 This Page Intentionally Left Blank Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Firestopping 07 84 00 Page 1 of 10 SECTION 07 84 00 Firestopping PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein. B. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Furnish and install draftstopping, fireblocking, and/or firestopping where required at penetrations in fire rated assemblies. Only tested firestop systems shall be used in specific locations as follows: a. Penetrations for the passage of duct, cable, cable tray, conduit, piping, electrical busways and raceways through fire-rated vertical barriers (walls and partitions), horizontal barriers (floor/ceiling assemblies), and vertical service shaft walls and partitions. b. Safing slot gaps between edge of floor slabs and curtain walls. c. Openings between structurally separate sections of wall or floors. d. Gaps between the top of walls and ceilings or roof assemblies. e. Expansion joints in walls and floors. f. Openings and penetrations in fire-rated partitions or walls containing fire doors. g. Openings around structural members which penetrate floors or walls. C. Install Items Furnished Under Other Sections: D. Furnish Items to Other Sections: Not Applicable. E. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2. Section 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 3. Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS 4. Section 04 20 00 MASONRY 5. Section 09 20 00 GYPSUM BOARD 6. Section 21 00 00 FIRE PROTECTION 7. Division 22 00 00 PLUMBING 8. Division 23 00 00 HVAC 9. Division 26 00 00 ELECTRICAL 1.03 REFERENCES A. Test Requirements: ASTM E 814, "Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops" B. Test Requirements: UL 1479, “Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops” C. Test Requirements: UL 2079, “Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems” Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Firestopping 07 84 00 Page 2 of 10 D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) of Northbrook, IL publishes tested systems in their "FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY" that is updated annually. 1. UL Fire Resistance Directory: a. Firestop Devices (XHJI) b. Fire Resistance Ratings (BXRH) c. Through-Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ) d. Fill, Voids, or Cavity Material (XHHW) e. Forming Materials (XHKU) f. Joint Systems (XHBN) g. Perimeter Fire Containment Systems (XHDG) 2. Alternate Systems: “Omega Point Laboratories Directory” (updated annually). E. Test Requirements: ASTM E 1966, “Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint Systems” F. Test Requirements: ASTM E 2307, “Standard Test Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Perimeter Fire Barrier Systems Using Intermediate-Scale, Multi-story Test Apparatus” G. Inspection Requirements: ASTM E 2174, “Standard Practice for On-site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops” H. ASTM E 84, “Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials” I. International Firestop Council Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Systems Engineering Judgments J. All major building codes: ICBO, SBCCI, BOCA, IBC. K. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Firestopping 07 84 00 Page 3 of 10 THROUGH-PENETRATION UL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM Fire Stopping Systems UL Classification System Construction Type Of System Penetrated Construction Identification 1 No Penetrating Items: F, W, C A, B, J, K, L 0001-0999 2 Metallic Pipes, Conduit or Tubing: F, W, C A, B, J, K, L 1001-1999 3 Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit or Tubing: F, W, C A, B, J, K, L 2001-2999 4 Electric Cables: F, W, C A, B, J, K, L 3001-3999 5 Cable, Trays with Electric Cables: F, W, C A, B, J, K, L 4001-4999 6 Insulated Pipes: F, W, C A, B, J, K, L 5001-5999 7 Electrical Busduct Penetrations: F, W, C A, B, J, K, L 6001-6999 8 Mechanical Ductwork Penetrations: F, W, C A, B, J, K, L 7001-7999 9 Multiple Penetrations Through Common Openings: F, W, C A, B, J, K, L 8000-8999 Construction Penetration F Floor penetration W Wall penetration C Either floor or wall penetration Type of Construction A- Concrete floors equal to of less than 5-inches thick B- Concrete floors greater than 5-inches thick J- Concrete or masonry walls equal to or less than 8-inches thick K- Concrete of masonry walls greater than 8-inches thick L- Framed walls JOINT UL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM Fire-Resistant Joint Systems UL Classification System Joint System Movement Capability Joint Width 1 Floor-to-Floor FF D 0000-0999 2 Wall-to-Wall WW D 0000-0999 3 Floor-to-Wall: FW D 0000-0999 4 Head of Wall: HW D 0000-0999 Movement Capability D- Has Movement Capability Joint Width 0000-0999 Less than or equal to 2 inches 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration fire stop systems and fire- resistive joint systems that comply with specified requirements of tested systems. B. Fire stop System installation must meet requirements of ASTM E 814, UL 1479 or UL 2079 tested assemblies that provide a fire rating equal to that of construction being penetrated. C. Proposed fire stop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governing codes having local jurisdiction. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Firestopping 07 84 00 Page 4 of 10 D. Fire stop Systems do not reestablish the structural integrity of load bearing partitions/assemblies, or support live loads and traffic. Installer shall consult the structural engineer prior to penetrating any load bearing assembly. E. For those firestop applications that exist for which no qualified tested system is available through a manufacturer, an engineering judgment derived from similar qualified tested system designs or other tests will be submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to installation. Engineering judgment documents must follow requirements set forth by the International Firestop Council. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data for each material including the composition and limitations, documentation of qualified tested firestop systems to be used and manufacturer's installation instructions to comply with Section 01 33 00. B. Manufacturer's engineering judgment identification number and document details when no qualified tested system is available for an application. Engineering judgment must include both project name and contractor’s name who will install firestop system as described in document. C. Submit material safety data sheets provided with product delivered to job-site. 1.06 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS A. Engage an experienced Installer who is certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having been provided the necessary training to install manufacturer’s products per specified requirements. A supplier’s willingness to sell its firestopping products to the Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer. B. Installation Responsibility: assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems and fire-resistive joint systems in Project to a single sole source firestop specialty contractor. C. The work is to be installed by a contractor with at least one of the following qualifications: 1. FM 4991 Approved Contractor 2. UL Approved Contractor 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials undamaged in manufacturer's clearly labeled, unopened containers, identified with brand, type, and UL label where applicable. B. Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date to allow minimum storage time at job-site. C. Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in compliance with manufacturer's requirements, including temperature restrictions. D. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies described in material safety data sheets as applicable. E. Do not use damaged or expired materials. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Firestopping 07 84 00 Page 5 of 10 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not use materials that contain flammable solvents. B. Schedule installation of firestopping after completion of penetrating item installation but prior to covering or concealing of openings. C. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. D. Weather conditions: Do not proceed with installation of firestop materials when temperatures exceed the manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation printed on product label and product data sheet. E. During installation, provide masking and drop cloths to prevent firestopping materials from contaminating any adjacent surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill material. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems. C. Firestopping Materials are either “cast-in-place” (integral with concrete placement) or “post installed.” Provide cast-in-place firestop devices prior to concrete placement. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with through penetration firestop systems (XHEZ), joint systems (XHBN), and perimeter firestop systems (XHDG) listed in Volume 2 of the UL Fire Resistance Directory; provide products of the following manufacturers as identified below: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with contract requirements, products which may be incorporated into the work include the following: a. Hilti - Firestop. b. 3M - Fire Barrier. c. Tremco - TREMstop. d. Or Equal approved by the Architect and Owner in accordance with General Conditions. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Use only firestop products that have been UL 1479, ASTM E 814 or UL 2079 tested for specific fire-rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type, annular space requirements, and fire-rating involved for each separate instance. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Firestopping 07 84 00 Page 6 of 10 B. Sealants, caulking materials, or foams for use with non-combustible items including steel pipe, copper pipe, rigid steel conduit and electrical metallic tubing (EMT), the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant. 2. 3M™ Fire Barrier Sealant CP 25WB+. 3. Tremco TREMstop. 4. Or Equal approved by the Architect and Owner in accordance with General Conditions. D. Intumescent sealants, caulking materials for use with combustible items (penetrants consumed by high heat and flame) including insulated metal pipe, PVC jacketed, flexible cable or cable bundles and plastic pipe, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant. 2. 3M™ Fire Barrier Sealant CP 25WB+. 3. Tremco TREMstop. 4. Or Equal approved by the Architect and Owner in accordance with General Conditions. E. Foams, intumescent sealants, or caulking materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant. 2. 3M™ Fire Barrier Sealant CP 25WB+. 3. Tremco TREMstop. 4. Or Equal approved by the Architect and Owner in accordance with General Conditions. F. Non-curing, re-penetrable intumescent putty or foam materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 618 Firestop Putty Stick. 2. 3M Fire Barrier Moldable Putty. 3. Tremco TREMstop Putty. 4. Or Equal approved by the Architect and Owner in accordance with General Conditions. G. Wall opening protective materials for use with U.L. listed metallic and specified nonmetallic outlet boxes, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 617 Firestop Putty Pad. 2. Tremco TREMstop MP. 3. Or Equal approved by the Architect and Owner in accordance with General Conditions. H. Firestop collar or wrap devices attached to assembly around combustible plastic pipe (closed and open piping systems), the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 643N Firestop Collar. 2. 3M Fire Barrier Ultra Plastic Pipe Device. 3. Tremco TREMstop MCR. 4. Or Equal approved by the Architect and Owner in accordance with General Conditions. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Firestopping 07 84 00 Page 7 of 10 I. Sealants or caulking materials used for openings between structurally separate sections of wall and floors, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CFS-SP WB Firestop Joint Spray. 2. 3M FireDam Spray 200. 3. Tremco TREMstop Acrylic Sprya. 4. Or Equal approved by the Architect and Owner in accordance with General Conditions. J. Provide a firestop system with a "F" Rating as determined by UL 1479 or ASTM E814 which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated. K Provide a firestop system with an Assembly Rating as determined by UL 2079 which is equal to the time rating of construction joint assembly. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. 1. Verify penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for application of materials. 2. Surfaces to which firestop materials will be applied shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, rust, laitance, release agents, water repellents, and any other substances that may affect proper adhesion. 3. Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling of adjacent surfaces by firestopping materials. 4. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and humidity conditions before, during and after installation of firestopping. 5. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings, penetrations and construction joints to ensure that the fire stop systems are installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration fire stop systems. Coordinate construction and sizing of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements. C. Coordinate fire stopping with other trades so that obstructions are not placed in the way prior to the installation of the fire stop systems. D. Do not cover up through-penetration fire stop and joint system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by the building inspector, per requirements of Section 109, International Building Code 2000, ed. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Firestopping 07 84 00 Page 8 of 10 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Regulatory Requirements: Install firestop materials in accordance with UL Fire Resistance Directory or Omega Point Laboratories Directory. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of through-penetration and construction joint materials. 1. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water resistant seal. 2. Consult with mechanical engineer, project manager, and damper manufacturer prior to installation of UL firestop systems that might hamper the performance of fire dampers as it pertains to duct work. 3. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Examine sealed penetration areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing areas. B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities. C. Inspection of through-penetration firestopping shall be performed in accordance with ASTM E 2174, “Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops” or other recognized standard. D. Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by cutting or penetrating of existing firestop systems already installed by other trades. E. Manufacturer’s Field Services: During Installation, provide periodic destructive testing inspections to assure proper installation/application. After installation is complete, submit findings in writing indicating whether or not the installation of the tested system identified was installed correctly. 3.05 IDENTIFICATION & DOCUMENTATION A. The firestop contractor is to supply documentation for each single application addressed. This documentation is to identify each penetration and joint location on the entire project. 1. The Documentation Form for through penetrations is to include: a. A Sequential Location Number b. The Project Name c. Date of Installation d. Detailed description of the penetrations location e. Tested System or Engineered Judgment Number f. Type of assembly penetrated g. A detailed description of the size and type of penetrating item h. Size of opening i. Number of sides of assemblies addressed j. Hourly rating to be achieved k. Installers Name Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Firestopping 07 84 00 Page 9 of 10 2. The Documentation Form for Construction Joints is to include: a. A Sequential Location Number b. The Project Name c. Date of Installation d. Detailed description of the Construction Joints location e. Tested System or Engineered Judgment Number f. Type of Construction Joint g. The Width of the Joint h. The Lineal Footage of the Joint i. Number of sides addressed j. Hourly rating to be achieved k. Installers Name B. Copies of these documents are to be provided to the general contractor at the completion of the project. C. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, preprinted vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated construction on both sides of each firestop system installation where labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words: "Warning -Through Penetration Firestop System-Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's Name, address, and phone number. 3. Through-Penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of Installation. 5. Through-Penetration firestop system manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's Name. 3.06 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition. B. Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed holes and joints to be free of excess firestop materials and soiling as work progresses. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Firestopping 07 84 00 Page 10 of 10 Page Intentionally Left Blank Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Joint Sealants 07 92 00 Page 1 of 6 SECTION 07 92 00 Joint Sealants PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein. B. The scope of work without limiting the generality thereof consists of the following: 1. All interior caulking where indicated including sealant and backing. 2. Perimeter caulking of all new doors and windows, thresholds, louvers, countertops and other items occurring at openings in exterior walls. 3. Prepare sealant substrate surfaces. C. Alternates: Not Applicable. D. Install Items Furnished Under Other Sections: Not Applicable E. Furnish Items to Other Sections: Not Applicable. F. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 07 10 00 WATERPROOFING AND DAMPPROOFING 2. Section 07 27 00 AIR AND VAPOR BARRIERS 3. Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING 4. Section 08 11 00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 5. Section 08 14 00 WOOD AND COMPOSITE DOORS AND FRAMES 6. Section 08 41 13 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 7. Section 08 53 45 WINDOWS 8. Section 08 63 00 METAL FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 9. Section 08 53 45 WINDOWS 10. Section 09 20 00 GYPSUM BOARD 11. Section 09 30 00 CERAMIC TILE 12. Section 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING 13. Section 09 90 00 PAINTING 14. Section 12 35 00 CABINETS AND COUNTERTOPS 1.03. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that e stablish and maintain airtight and water- resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Joint Sealants 07 92 00 Page 2 of 6 1.04. SUBMITTALS A. All submittals, including shop drawings, manufacturer's specifications and product data shall be submitted for the following in accordance with the requirements of Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures and Substitutions. B. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data, chemical and physical properties and installation instructions for each item furnished hereunder. C. Manufacturer's certification that the Products supplied meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Compatibility and adhesion test reports: Test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that sealant proposed for use have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with actual samples of substrates and materials to be used on this project. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results, and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation specific to this project E. Selection samples: Sample card indicating Manufacturer's full range of colors available for selection by Architect F. Verification samples: 12 inch long samples of sealant for verification of color, installed where directed by Architect. 1.05. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General Performance: Except as otherwise indicated, joint sealers are required to establish and maintain airtight and waterproof continuous seals on a permanent basis, within recognized limitations of wear and aging as indicated for each application. Failures of installed sealers to comply with this requirement will be recognized as failures of materials and workmanship. B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer who has successfully completed within the last 3 years at least 3 joint sealer applications similar in type and size to that of this project and who will assign mechanics from these earlier applications to this project, of which one will serve as lead mechanic. C. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealer Materials: Obtain joint sealer materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. 1.06. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Each container and package must bear an unbroken seal, test number and label of the manufacturer upon delivery to the site. Failure to comply with these requirements shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the material in question, by the Architect and his requiring its removal from the site. New material conforming to said requirements, shall be promptly furnished at no additional cost to the Contract. 1.07. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install single component solvent curing sealant in enclosed building spaces. 1.08. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and 24 hours after installation. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers under the following conditions: B. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are below 40 degrees F. C. When joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Joint Sealants 07 92 00 Page 3 of 6 D. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until contaminates capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from substrates. 1.09. WARRANTY A. Provide 5 year warranty under provisions of Section 01780 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. Warranty shall include coverage of installed sealant and accessories which fail to achieve air tight and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01. MATERIALS A. Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by testing and field experience. B. Provide color of exposed joint sealers as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. C. Products to be low VOC with < 250 grams/liter rating. 2.02. ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses. B. Multi-Part Non sag Urethane Sealant: Type M, ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 50, and complying with the following requirements for uses T, NT, M, A and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. "Sonolastic NP2": Sonneborn Building Products. 2. "Chem-Calk 500" Bostik Construction Products Div. 3. "Vulkem 227"; Mameco International, Inc. 4. "Isoflex 881"; The Harry S. Peterson Company. 2.03. LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, one part, non sag, acrylic, mildew- resistant, acrylic-emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834, formulated to be paintable and recommended for exposed applications on interior and on protected exterior exposures involving joint movement of not more than plus or minus 7.5 percent. Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. "Chem-Calk 600"; Bostik Construction Products Div. 2. "Sonolac"; Sonneborn Building Products Div.; Rexnord Chem. Prod., Inc. 3. "Tremco Acrylic Latex Caulk"' Tremco Inc. 2.04. 100 % SILICONE JOINT SEALANT A. Provide 100% silicone caulk in kitchen and bath areas. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with contract requirements, products which may be incorporated into the work include the following: a. GE – Silicone II. b. DAP - Silicone Plus. c. Titebond – 100 % Silicone Sealant. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Joint Sealants 07 92 00 Page 4 of 6 d. Or Equal approved by the Architect and Owner in accordance with General Conditions. 2.05. JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. Provide sealant backings of material and type which are non-staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Compressible joint bead back-up: Compressible closed cell polyethylene, extruded polyolefin foam or polyurethane foam rod, 1/3 greater in diameter than width of joint. Shape and size of compressible back-up shall be as recommended by manufacturer for the specific condition used. Provide one of the following, or equal. (only closed cell rods will be considered) 1. Chargar Corporation, Hamden, CT, product "Green Rod". 2. Holdfast Technologies, LCC, Medway, OH, product "Tri-Rod". 3. Industrial Thermo Polymers Ltd., Buffalo, NY, product "ITP Standard Insulating Backer Rod". 4. Sonneborn Building Products Inc., Minneapolis MN, product "Sonofoam". 5. W.R. Meadows Inc., Hampshire, IL, product "Sealtight Cera-Rod". Or equal. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing bond between sealant and joint filler or other materials at back (3rd) surface of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.06. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Provide type recommended by joint sealer manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealer-substrate and field tests. B. Cleaners for Non porous Surfaces: Provide non-staining, chemical cleaner of type acceptable to manufacturer of sealant and sealant backing materials which are not harmful to substrates and adjacent nonporous materials. C. Masking Tape: Provide non-staining, non-absorbent type compatible with joint sealants and to surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01. EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02. PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturers and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates which could interfere with adhesion of joint sealer, including dust; paints, except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer; oil; grease; waterproofing; water repellents; water; surface dirt and frost. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Joint Sealants 07 92 00 Page 5 of 6 2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile and similar porous joint substrate surfaces, by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, acid washing or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealers. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile and other non-porous surfaces by chemical cleaners or other means which are not harmful to substrates or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealers. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealer manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealer-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealer manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealer bond, do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. D. If so recommended and furnished by the specific sealant manufacturer, apply primer to all joint surfaces, taking care not to stain adjacent surfaces. E. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. F. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C 804 and C 790 for solvent and latex base solvents, respectively. 3.03. INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALERS A. Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Elastomeric Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 962 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications and conditions indicated. 1. Apply multi-part, non-sag urethane sealant at exterior and interior of exterior joints in vertical and horizontal surfaces of concrete, masonry and stone; perimeters of metal frames in exterior walls, including doors, windows and glazed curtain walls, and at pavement and sidewalk joints. C. Latex Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 790 for use of latex sealants. 1. Apply Latex sealant at interior joints in field-painted vertical and overhead surfaces, at hollow metal door frames, gypsum drywall, plaster and concrete or concrete masonry; and all other interior locations not indicated otherwise. D. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements: 1. Install joint-fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability. a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint-fillers. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Joint Sealants 07 92 00 Page 6 of 6 b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture or tear joint fillers. c. Remove absorbent joint-fillers which have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. 2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants and joint-fillers, compression seals or back of joints where required to prevent third-side adhesion of sealant to back of joint. 3. Install compressible seals serving as sealant backings to comply with requirements indicated above for joint fillers. E. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Non sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents which discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. 1. Concave joint configuration per Figure 6A in ASTM C 962, unless otherwise indicated. 3.04. SCHEDULE A. General: Seal joints indicated and all interior and exterior joints, seams, and intersections between dissimilar materials. B. Exterior joints to receive elastomeric sealants, interior joints to receive latex sealants 3.05. PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect joint sealers during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealers immediately and reseal joints with new materials to produce joint sealer installations with repaired areas indistinguishable from original work. B. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealers and of products in which joints occur. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 00 1 of 6 SECTION 08 11 00 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and other division 1 specification sections, apply to this section 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein B. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Flush metal exterior and interior doors, complete with internal reinforcing, hardware cut-outs, and factory installed glazing where indicated. a. Hollow Metal exterior doors as indicated on door schedule. 2. Pressed steel frames for new doors and fixed glazed transoms, sidelights and borrowed lights as shown on drawings, complete with internal reinforcing hardware cut-outs and frame anchorage items. a. Hollow Metal thermally broken frames at exterior doors as indicated on door schedule. b. Hollow Metal frames at rated interior doors as indicated on door schedule. 3. Metal glazing beads, loosely screwed to doors and frames for removal and permanent installation during glazing operations under Section 088100 Glass and Glazing . C. Alternates: Not Applicable. D. Install Items Furnished Under Other Sections Not Applicable. E. Furnish Items to Other Sections: 1. Section 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY a. Installation of doors, frames and sidelights F. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 2. Section 08 14 00 WOOD AND COMPOSITE DOORS AND FRAMES 3. Section 08 41 13 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 4. Section 08 71 00 HARDWARE 5. Section 08 81 00 GLASS AND GLAZING a. Glazing of doors and sidelights 6. Section 09 90 00 PAINTING 1.03. SUBMITTALS A. All submittals, including shop drawings, manufacturer's specifications and product data shall be submitted for the following in accordance with the requirements of Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures and Substitutions. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 00 2 of 6 B. Submit complete shop drawings in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions. 1. Coordinate with Window Subcontractor for detailing and installation scheduling of windows that are to be mulled to steel door frames. C. Shop drawings shall include a complete door and frame schedule, elevations of door and frame "YP" profiles and gauges of metal, wall conditions of all anchorages, typical and special details of construction, methods of assembling sections, UL label certifications, hot-dipped galvanizing certification, shop prime materials, description literature and all other necessary information. 1.04. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and Frames" (SDI-100) unless custom fabricated doors are required for the door sizes indicated. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated or required, provide fire-rated door and frame assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 "Standard for Fire Doors and Windows", and have been tested, listed and labeled in accordance with ASTM E 152 "Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies" by a nationally recognized independent testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.05. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work in carton or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. B. Inspect hollow metal work upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4 inch high wood blocking. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 1/4 inch spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. 1.06. JOB CONDITIONS A. Examine all doors, frames and openings to determine extent of work required and take field measurements for fabrication of doors and frames at existing openings. B. Size of doors listed on door schedule is appropriate. All sizes to be field verified by Contractor. The Contractor shall bear full responsibility for fit to and compatibility with existing conditions. C. Alert Architect to any deficiencies or inconsistencies in the existing conditions that affect the satisfactory completion of the work. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 00 3 of 6 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering steel doors and frames which may be incorporated in the work include: but are not limited to, the following: 1. Ceco Corp. 2. Steel Craft Manufacturing Co. 3. Curries 2.02. HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. Exterior doors shall be fabricated from commercial quality stretcher-leveled galvanized 16 gage steel conforming to ASTM A526. 1. Polyurethane core for extreme thermal performance. 2. Full height, epoxy filled edge seam. B. Interior doors shall be fabricated from either commercial quality cold-rolled stretcher- leveled 18 gage sheet steel conforming to ASTM A366, or commercial quality hot-rolled sheet steel conforming to ASTM A56 C. Flush doors shall have continuous internal reinforcing channels or Z-shaped members of 16 gage steel, full height of door, spaced not more than 6 inches on center and spot welded to face sheets 3 inches on centers. Doors having continuous truss inner core, for full height and width, spot welded to face sheets 3 inches on centers, both vertically and horizontally, will also be acceptable. Provide 14 gage stile channels and 14 gage horizontal channels at top and bottom of doors, welded to face sheets. All hollow portions of exterior doors shall be completely filled with foamed-in-place urethane insulation or approved equal. All hollow portions of interior doors shall be filled with a sound deadening insulation. D. Exposed joints shall be fully welded and ground smooth. Interlocking joints or seams will not be permitted on door faces or edges. Exterior doors shall have flush top and bottom caps sealing against water. E. Door panels shall be free from buckles, twists, or other imperfections. Panels having a buckle extending 1/16 inch or more, as determined by a straight edge applied to the face of the panel, shall not be used. F. Label doors shall, in addition to the construction requirements specified herein, be modified in construction to meet all requirements of the Underwriter's Laboratories for required fire rating. Doors shall bear the applicable UL or FM Label. G. Provide all other necessary and proper reinforcing for panic devices, locksets, closers, and all other hardware. Reinforcing plates for locks, escutcheons and closers shall be at least as thick as the diameter of screws used for security hardware. Reinforcing plates for butts shall be 1/4 inch steel plate and extend not less than 6 inches above and below the center line of each butt and be securely welded to channel stiles. 2.03. PRESSED STEEL FRAMES A. Pressed steel frames, including glazing stops and reinforcement shall be of the various profiles to suit the conditions detailed on the Drawings, and shall be formed from new commercial quality grade steel. 1. Exterior frames shall be fabricated from galvanized sheet steel. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 00 4 of 6 a. Roller leveled commercial quality zinc coated carbon steel sheets complying with ASTM A525, G60, mill phosphated. b. Exterior frames to be separated at the stop by a durable polymer extrusion serving as a thermal break, with a U-factor of 0.45 2. Interior frames shall be fabricated from either cold-rolled sheet steel conforming to ASTM A366 or hot-rolled sheet steel conforming to ASTM A569. B. Pressed steel shall be of the following minimum gages: 1. Exterior pressed steel frames, 14 gauge. 2. Interior pressed steel frames except as otherwise specified herein - 16 gauge. 3. Interior pressed steel frames for openings wider than 4 feet and label doors - 16 gauge. 4. Frame splines - Same gauge as frames. 5. Strike reinforcement - 3/16 inch by 1-1/2 inches by 3 inches. 6. Closer and holder reinforcement - 3/16 inch by the required length and width. 7. Hinge reinforcement - 1/4 inch by 1-1/2 inches steel plate and extend not less than 6 inches above and below the center line of each hinge. 8. Floor clips - 2 inches by 3/16 inch thick. 9. Wall anchors - same gauge as frames. 10. Removable glazing beads - 18 gauge for interior and 16 gauge galvanized steel for exterior. 11. Subframes, frame extension, and other internal reinforcements where indicated and not otherwise specified hereunder - 14 gauge. C. All exterior door frames and interior frames, which occur in a masonry partition shall be "all-welded" type construction. All interior door frames which occur in a gypsum drywall partition shall be a standard knockdown type door frame except frames with an integral sidelight or transom which shall be "all-welded" type construction. 1. Accurately form interlocking joints of knocked down frames to maintain alignment of parts when field assembled. 2. Borrowed light and transom frames if shipped disassembled for size or sequence reasons shall be field welded, ground smooth and touch-up primed. D. Locate hardware cutouts accurately from templates, and make to fit the hardware. Except on weather-stripped frames, punch frames for door silencer, 3 on strike jamb of single doors, and one at top of each leaf for pairs of doors. 1. Coordinate work with Hardware Supplier for templates, sizes of butts, door closers, and other hardware, and sizes, diameters and locations of screws used to secure hardware. E. Fabrication: 1. Fabricate exterior frames from galvanized sheet steel with no places to catch or hold water. 2. Fabricate pressed metal frames and anchors for fire-resistive label doors in strict accordance with Underwriters' Laboratories or Factory Mutual requirements and attach the applicable label. F. Provide removable steel channel beads for frame opening to receive 1/4" laminated glass under Section 08800 Glass and Glazing. Fasten beads to frames with Phillips oval head self-tapping machine screws, spaced approximately nine inches on centers. Drill and dimple beads in the shop. Use stainless steel screws for exterior beads. Locate removable beads on interior side of frame with specific regard to security. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 00 5 of 6 G. Anchors and Anchor Clips: 1. Anchor clips for frames in metal screw-stud partitions shall be 12 gage steel z- shaped clips, extending the full width of frame, having 1-1/2 inch upturned and downturned legs, and shop welded to inside of frame. Leg of clip, adjacent to stud, shall be same width as stud. 2. Anchors for frames in new masonry walls (except U.L. Labeled frames) shall be T-shaped and shall positively engage the retainers on both flanges of each jamb members, when placed. The stem of the anchors shall be 2 inches wide by 16 gage, and extend 10 inches into the masonry, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Anchors for frames in existing masonry, existing and new concrete (except U.L. labeled frames) shall be flat head thru-bolts, not less than 3/8 inch diameter, set into expansion shields of sufficient length to extend 3 inches into receiving surface. Drill and countersink frames at shop to receive anchor bolts. Provide steel pipe sleeve separators, or other approved device, welded to backs of frames when bolts are tightened. Locate bolts in rabbet at glazed frames and on center line of integral stop at door frames. 4. Wall anchors at fire-resistive labeled frames shall be as recommended by manufacturer and approved by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. or Factory Mutual. 5. Spacing of anchorage: For frames up to an including 7 feet in height, provide three anchors, anchor clips, or bolts per jamb, and four anchorage items per jamb for frames over 7 feet in height. Locate anchors at head, 12 inches below the head, and spaced equidistant from that point to floor. 6. Floor clips for frames shall consist of 2 by 2 by 3/16 inch steel angles extending the full width of the frames, welded thereto, and provided with two holes for power driven (or expansion type) attachment to the concrete. 2.04. SHOP PAINTING A. Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including galvanized surfaces. B. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before application of paint. C. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint. 1. Apply finish coat to doors indicated as prefinished by electrostatically spraying and baking, to produce paint thickness of 1.25 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01. INSTALLATION A. Installation of doors and frames shall be performed under Section 06 20 00, Finish Carpentry. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 00 6 of 6 This Page Intentionally Left Blank Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Wood Composite Doors and Frames 08 14 00 Page 1 of 4 SECTION 08 14 00 Wood and Composite Doors and Frames PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein. B. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Rated and unrated molded composite doors as indicated on door schedule. a. 20 minute rated unit entry doors b. All interior unit entry doors 2. Rated and un rated solid core flush wood doors for installation in new frames, complete with hardware cut-outs, transfer grilles and glazing stops as indicated on the drawings. a. 60 minute stairway doors b. 20 minute corridor doors c. 20 minute non-unit space entry doors d. Doors are to be factory finished. e. Doors are to be factory glazed. 3. Factory glazing of doors. C. Alternates: Not Applicable. D. Install Items Furnished Under Other Sections: Not Applicable. E. Furnish Items to Other Sections: 1. Section 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY a. Installation of doors, frames and transoms. b. Installation of grilles and louvers. F. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 2. Section 08 11 00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 3. Section 08 51 00 FIBERGLASS WINDOWS 4. Section 08 71 00 HARDWARE 5. Section 08 81 00 GLASS AND GLAZING 1.03. SUBMITTALS A. All submittals, including shop drawings, manufacturer's specifications and product data shall be submitted for the following in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures and Substitutions. B. Product Data: Submit product data for each type of wood door, including details of core and edge construction, and trim for openings. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Wood Composite Doors and Frames 08 14 00 Page 2 of 4 C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware, and blocking, and requirements for factory finishing and other pertinent data. 1.04. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standards: Provide wood flush doors complying with the following standards: 1. ANSI/NWMA IS.1: "Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors", published by National Woodwork Manufacturers Association (NWMA). 2. Provide wood flush doors complying with Section 1300 and panel doors complying with Section 1400 of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" published by Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI). Designations for grade and door construction under types of doors refers to these standards. B. Manufacturer: Obtain doors from a single manufacturer to ensure uniformity in quality of appearance and construction, unless otherwise indicated. 1.05. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect wood doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced ANSI standard and recommendations of NWMA pamphlet "How to Store, Handle, Finish, Install, and Maintain Wood Doors", as well as with manufacturer's instructions. B. Package doors at factory prior to shipping using manufacturer's standard method. C. Identify each door with individual opening numbers which correlate with designation system used on shop drawings for door, frames, and hardware, using temporary, removable or concealed markings. 1.06. PRODUCT WARRANTY A. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: 1. Submit written agreement on door manufacturer's standard form signed by Manufacturer, installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors which have warped (bow, cup, or twist) or which show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of NWMA and AWI. 2. The warranty shall also include reinstallation which may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors where defect was not apparent prior to hanging. 3. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time after date of substantial completion: Life of installation. 4. Contractor shall be responsible for replacement or refinishing of doors where Contractor's work contributed to rejection or to voiding of manufacturer's warranty. 1.07. JOB CONDITIONS A. Examine all doors, frames and openings to determine extent of work required and take field measurements for fabrication of doors and frames at existing openings. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Wood Composite Doors and Frames 08 14 00 Page 3 of 4 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01. MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flush wood doors of one of the following or equal: 1. Solid Core Doors - Wood Veneer Faces: Graham Manufacturing Company, Algoma Hardwoods Inc., Eggers Industries, Weyerhaeuser Co, . 2.02. MOLDED COMPOSITE DOORS A. Core, Frame and Panel: 1. Manufacturer: Masonite International, Model Logan. 2. Combination wood / MDF solid core and frame, 1 3/8” thick for non rated up to 20 minute rating. 3. Solid mineral core with all wood frame, 1 ¾” thick for 45 minute and 60 minute fire rating. 4. Smooth surface MDF panels in configuration indicated on drawings. 5. Provide factory undercut doors as indicated on door schedule. 6. Finish: Factory primed. 2.03. INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS A. Construction: Flush faced solid core wood doors shall be PC-5 ME Bonded Particle core construction in accordance with AWI, 1-3/4 inches thick, AWI Premium Grade. 1. Faces to meet ANSI/HPVA A Grade, minimum 1/50” face veneer. 2. Core to meet ANSI/A208.1 1-LD-2 Particle Core Standards. 3. Solid hardwood rails and stiles to exceed AWI/NWWDA Premium Grade standards. 4. Stiles to match face veneer standards. 5. Stiles and rails to be fully bonded to core. 6. Core /frame assembly to be fully sanded to uniform thickness. 7. Adhesives to be Type 1 formulated using no formaldehyde. 8. Lifetime of original warrantee. B. Face veneer to be birch with clear finish. 2.04. FIRE RATED SOLID CORE DOORS A. Fire door and frame assemblies shall meet or exceed fire-protection ratings indicated when tested in accordance with ASTM-E-152, NFPA 252, UL 10. B, C and UBC 7-2. B. Doors must meet test requirements and carry identifying labels certified by independent testing agencies. C. Provide faces and AWI grade to match non-rated doors. D. Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction as required to provide fire resistance rating indicated. E. Edge Construction: 1. Provide manufacturer's standard laminated edge construction for improved screw-holding capability and split resistance as compared to edges composed of a single layer of treated lumber. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Wood Composite Doors and Frames 08 14 00 Page 4 of 4 2. Provide factory furnished rated astragals and metal edges on all rated pairs. 2.04. TRANSFER GRILLES A. Transfer grilles to be stationary type, non-vision, inverted "V" louver blades with double flange; 20 gauge frame and louver blades with double flange; installed with beveled 2" holding both sides of door. Airolite No. 685, or equal. 2.05. GLAZING A. Doors to be factory glazed with ¼” tempered glass, tape and sealant in accordance with glass and accessory specifications in Section 08 81 00 Glass and Glazing . 2.06 FABRICATION: INTERIOR DOORS A. Fabricate doors in accordance with requirements of AWI Quality Standards. B. Bevel strike edge of single acting doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches. C. Prepare doors to receive hardware. Pre-machine and pre-fit doors as per hardware schedule except for those items considered surface mounted. After hanging, the maximum allowable clearance shall be 1/8 inch at each side and top, 1/4 inch clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold or 1/2" to decorative floor finish or covering with no floor finish. Refer to Section 08 70 00 - Hardware for hardware requirements. D. Factory glaze doors, see 2.05 above. E. Factory Finish: Before delivery of doors to project site, apply factory prime to all surfaces. 2.07. WOOD FRAMES A. Wood frames to manufactured according to AWI/AWAMAC – 8th Edition Quality Standards, Frames and Jambs, Section 900. Split jambs and finger jointed material are not acceptable. B. Interior Frames: 1. Custom Grade 2. Clear pine or poplar. 3. Solid wood, single rabbet profile. 4. Dado joinery. C. Fire door and frame assemblies shall meet or exceed fire-protection ratings indicated when tested in accordance with ASTM-E-152, NFPA 252, UL 10. B, C and UBC 7-2. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01. INSTALLATION A. Installation will be performed under Section 06 20 00, Finish Carpentry. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08 41 13 1 of 10 SECTION 08 41 33 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein B. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. New storefront at main entrances as indicated on drawings. 2. Aluminum Storefront Systems to include perimeter trims, stools, accessories, shims and anchors, and perimeter sealing of storefront units. 3. Thermally Broken Aluminum Entrances, glass and glazing, and door hardware and components. 4. Treated wood blocking, fillers and nailers, metal straps, anchors and other devices as required for secure installation. 5. Foam insulation between window frames and adjacent construction. 6. Sealing of all joints within each assembly. 7. Sealing of entire exterior perimeter of assembly after installation. 8. Furnish, install and remove all staging and planking required to complete the work. C. Alternates: Not Applicable. D. Install Items Furnished Under Other Sections: Not Applicable E. Furnish Items to Other Sections: Not Applicable. F. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 062000 FINISH CARPENTRY 2. Section 079200 JOINT SEALANTS 3. Section 081100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 4. Section 08 14 00 WOOD AND COMPOSITE DOORS AND FRAMES 5. Section 08 71 00 HARDWARE 6. Section 08 81 00 GLASS AND GLAZING Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08 41 13 2 of 10 1.03. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed entrance doors shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: B. Aluminum-Framed Entrance Performance Requirements: 1. Wind loads: Provide entrance system; include anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design pressures of 25 PSF external and10 PSF Internal. The design pressures are based on ASCE 7-05. 2. Air Infiltration: For single acting offset pivot or butt hung entrances in the closed and locked position, the test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at a pressure differential of 1.57 psf (75 Pa) for pairs of doors. A single 3'0" x 7'0" (915 mm x 2134 mm) entrance door and frame shall not exceed 1.0 cfm/ft2. A pair of 6'0" x 7'0" (1830 mm x 2134 mm) entrance doors and frame shall not exceed 1.0 cfm per square foot. 3. Uniform Load: A static air design load of 20 psf (958 Pa) shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330. There shall be no deflection in excess of L/175 for typical application or L/180 for Small-Missile and Large-Missile impact, of the span of any framing member. At a structural test load equal to 1.5 times the specified design load, no glass breakage or permanent set in the framing members in excess of 0.2% of their clear spans shall occur. 4. Blast Mitigation Performance: Shall be tested or proven through analysis to meet ASTM F1642, GSA-TS01, and UFC 04-010.01 performance criteria. To meet UFC 04-010-01, B-3.3 Standard 12 for exterior doors and Standard 10 for glazing and frame bite provisions, the following options are available: a. Section B-3.1.1 Dynamic analysis b. Section B-3.1.2 Testing c. Section B-3.1.3 ASTM F2248 Design Approach 5. Forced Entry: Tested in accordance with AAMA 1304. 6. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the thermal transmittance (U-factor) shall not be more than: a. Insulated Glass – 0.29. 7. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Glazed thermally broken aluminum door and frame shall have a solar heat gain coefficient of no greater than .38 as determined according to NFRC 200. 8. Condensation Resistance (CRF): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the condensation resistance factor shall not be less than: a. Insulated Glass – 57frame and 71glass (low-e). 9. Condensation Resistance (I): When tested to CSA A440, the condensation resistance factor shall not be less than: Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08 41 13 3 of 10 a. Insulated Glass – 48frame and 69glass (low-e). 10. Sound Transmission Class (STC) and Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class (OITC): When tested in accordance with ASTM E 90, the STC and OITC ratings shall not be less than: a. 32 (STC) and 28 (OITC). C. Storefront System Performance Requirements: 1. Wind loads: Provide storefront system; include anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design pressures of 25 PSF external and10 PSF Internal. The design pressures are based on ASCE 7-05. 2. Air Infiltration: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. Air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft2 (0.3 l/s · m2) at a static air pressure differential of 1.57 psf (75 Pa). 3. Water Resistance: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. There shall be no leakage at a minimum static air pressure differential of 10 psf (479 Pa) as defined in AAMA 501. 4. Uniform Load: A static air design load of 30 psf (1436 Pa) shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330. There shall be no deflection in excess of L/175 of the span of any framing member. At a structural test load equal to 1.5 times the specified design load, no glass breakage or permanent set in the framing members in excess of 0.2% of their clear spans shall occur. 5. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the thermal transmittance (U-factor) shall not be more than: a. 0.29. 6. Condensation Resistance (CRF): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the condensation resistance factor shall not be less than: a. 68 frame and 68 glass (low-e). 7. Condensation Resistance (I): When tested to CSA A-440, the condensation index shall not be less than: a. 60 frame and 62 glass (low-e). 8. Sound Transmission Class (STC) and Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class (OITC): When tested to AAMA Specification 1801 and in accordance with ASTM E1425 and ASTM E90, the STC and OITC Rating shall not be less than: a. 37 (STC) and 30 (OITC). 9. Blast Mitigation Performance: Shall be tested or proven through analysis to meet ASTM F1642, GSA-TS01, and UFC 04-010.01 performance criteria. To meet UFC 04-010.01, B-3.1 Standard 10 for Windows and Skylights, the following options are available: a. Section B-3.1.1 Dynamic analysis. b. Section B-3.1.2 Testing. c. Section B-3.1.3 ASTM F2248 Design Approach. 1.04. SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and installation instructions for each type of aluminum-framed storefront system indicated. C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, and attachments to other work, operational clearances and installation details. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08 41 13 4 of 10 D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes including samples of hardware and accessories involving color selection. E. Samples for Verification: For aluminum-framed storefront system and components required. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for each type of aluminum-framed storefront. G. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum- framed systems, made from 12" lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following: 1. Joinery, including welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage. H. Other Action Submittals: 1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware. 1.05. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An installer which has had successful experience with installation of the same or similar units required for the project and other projects of similar size and scope. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating thermally broken aluminum-framed entrance doors and storefronts that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion of test reports and calculations. C. Source Limitations: Obtain thermally broken aluminum-framed door through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of aluminum-framed glass entrance doors and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section “Product Requirements”. Do not modify size and dimensional requirements. E. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. G. Build mockup for type(s) of swing entrance door(s) indicated, in location(s) shown on Drawings. H. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08 41 13 5 of 10 1.06. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials and products in labeled, protective packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and FGMA 1980 Handbook. 1. Protect from all possible damage. 2. keep shipping containers closed when not in use. 3. Protect materials during storage from moisture, sunlight, excess heat, sparks and flame. 4. Carefully store materials to avoid overloading any building component or structure. a. Store sloped skylight panels on the long edge, several inches above the ground, blocked and under cover to prevent warping 5. Provide adequate ventilation to prevent buildup of dangerous solvent concentrations. 6. Use clean gloves and tools when handling materials. Avoid contamination. 7. Use rolling blocks and suction cups to move glass not in shipping crates. 1.07. JOB CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of aluminum-framed storefront openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.08. WARRANTEES A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty. 1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from Date of Substantial Completion of the project provided however that the Limited Warranty shall begin in no event later than six months from date of shipment by manufacturer. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01. MANUFACTURERS A. Storefront Framing: 1. Kawneer Company Inc. 2. Trifab™ 451UT Framing (Thermal) 3. System Dimensions: 2" x 4-1/2" (50.8 mm x 114.3 mm) 4. Glass: Center Plane B. Entrances: 1. Kawneer Company Inc. 2. The door stile and rail face dimensions of the AA™250 3. Thermal Entrance will be as follows: Door AA™250 Vertical Stile Top Rail Bottom Rail 2 1/2" 2 1/2" 3 7/8" 4. Major portions of the door members to be 0.125" (4) nominal in thickness and glazing molding to be 0.05" (1.3 mm) thick Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08 41 13 6 of 10 5. Glazing gaskets shall be either EPDM elastomeric extrusions or a thermoplastic elastomer. 6. Provide adjustable glass jacks to help center the glass in the door opening. 2.02. MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum-framed door manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish and not less than 0.090" wall thickness at any location for the main frame and door leaf members. B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel or other materials to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum-framed door members, trim hardware, anchors, and other components. C. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. D. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc- coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. E. Slide-In-Type Weather Stripping: Provide woven-pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric. Comply with AAMA 701/702. F. Weather Seals: Provide weather stripping with integral barrier fin or fins of semi-rigid, polypropylene sheet or polypropylene-coated material. Comply with AAMA 701/702. G. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated storefront system, provide permanently elastic, non-shrinking, and non-migrating type recommended by sealant manufacturer for joint size and movement. H. Tolerances: Reference to tolerances for wall thickness and other cross-sectional dimensions of storefront members are nominal and in compliance with AA Aluminum Standards and Data. 2.03. STOREFRONT FRAMING SYSTEM A. Thermal Barrier Trifab™ 451UT: 1. Kawneer DUAL IsoLock™ Thermal Break with two (2) 1/4" (6.4 mm) separations consisting of a two-part chemically curing, high-density polyurethane, which is mechanically and adhesively joined to aluminum storefront sections. a. Thermal Break shall be designed in accordance with AAMA TIR-A8 and tested in accordance with AAMA 505. B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. Where exposes shall be stainless steel. D. Perimeter Anchors: When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between steel material and aluminum material to prevent galvanic action. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08 41 13 7 of 10 2.04. GLAZING A. Glazing: Comply with Division 08 Section “Glazing”. 1. Outside glazed pressure plate format with 1" (25.4) double glazed insulating glass. B. Glazing Gaskets: Gaskets to meet the requirements of ASTM C864. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion. E. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer for joint type. 2.05. HARDWARE F. Door hardware with the exception of door hinges shall be as specified in Section 08 71 00 - HARDWARE. The finish hardware supplier shall be responsible for furnishing hardware to the entrance manufacturer prior to fabrication, and for coordinating hardware delivery requirements with the hardware manufacturer, the Contractor and the entrance manufacturer to insure the building project is not delayed. See below for general guidelines. A. Standard Hardware: 2. Weather-stripping: a. Meeting stiles on pairs of doors shall be equipped with two lines of weather-stripping utilizing wool pile with polymeric fin. b. The door weathering on a single acting offset pivot or butt hung door and frame (single or pairs) shall be comprised of a thermoplastic elastomer weathering on a tubular shape with a semi-rigid polymeric backing and a wool pile with polymeric fin. c. Sill Sweep Strips: EPDM blade gasket sweep strip in an aluminum extrusion applied to the interior exposed surface of the bottom rail with concealed fasteners (Necessary to meet specified performance tests). 3. Threshold: Extruded aluminum, thermally broken, with ribbed surface. 4. Offset Pivots: standard top pivot / ball bearing bottom pivot / surface applied intermediate pivots. 5. Push/Pull: TBD. 6. Exit Device: TBD. 7. Closer: TBD. 8. Security Lock/Dead Lock: Active Leaf TBD. 9. Latch Handle: TBD. 10. Cylinder(s)/Thumbturn: TBD. 2.06. FABRICATION A. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fit joints; make joints flush, hairline and weatherproof. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08 41 13 8 of 10 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. B. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. C. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary support device to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures. D. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using manufacturer’s standard installation instructions. E. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. F. Fabricate thermally broken aluminum-framed entrance doors in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring doors. G. Fabricate thermally broken aluminum-framed doors that are reglazable without dismantling perimeter framing. 1. Door corner construction shall consist of mechanical clip fastening, SIGMA deep penetration plug welds and 1" (24 mm) long fillet welds inside and outside of all four corners. Glazing stops shall be hook-in type with EPDM glazing gaskets reinforced with non-stretchable cord. 2. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints hairline in appearance. 3. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware. 4. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. H. Weather-stripping: Provide weather-stripping locked into extruded grooves in door panels or frames as indicated on manufactures drawings and details. 2.07. ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. Factory Finishing: 1. Kawneer Permanodic™ AA-M10C21A44 / AA-M45C22A44, AAMA 611, Architectural Class I Color Anodic Coating or as selected by owner.. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01. EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate and operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weather tight aluminum- framed storefront installation. 1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08 41 13 9 of 10 2. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches (76 mm) of opening. 3. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02. INSTALLATION A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing aluminum-framed storefront system, accessories, and other components. B. Install aluminum-framed storefront system level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weather tight construction. D. Install aluminum-framed storefront system and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within aluminum-framed storefront system to the exterior. E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.. 3.03. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: Architect shall select storefront units to be tested as soon as a representative portion of the project has been installed, glazed, perimeter caulked and cured. Conduct tests for air infiltration and water penetration with manufacturer's representative present. Tests not meeting specified performance requirements and units having deficiencies shall be corrected as part of the contract amount. 1. Testing: Testing shall be performed by a qualified independent testing agency. Refer to Testing Section for payment of testing and testing requirements. Testing Standard per AAMA 503, including reference to ASTM E 783 for Air Infiltration Test and ASTM E 1105 Water Infiltration Test. a. Air Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E 783. Allowable air infiltration shall not exceed 1.5 times the amount indicated in the performance requirements or 0.09 cfm/ft2, whichever is greater. b. Water Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E 1105. No uncontrolled water leakage is permitted when tested at a static test pressure of two-thirds the specified water penetration pressure but not less than 6.24 psf (300 Pa). B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Upon Owner’s written request, provide periodic site visit by manufacturer’s field service representative.. 3.04. PROTECTION, ADJUSTMENTS AND CLEANING A. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing aluminum framed storefronts. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. B. Clean glass immediately after installation. Comply with glass manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08 41 13 10 of 10 C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. D. Send to Architect, with copy to Owner, written recommendations for maintenance and protection of windows following Substantial Completion of Replacement Window Contract. Provide walkthru with architect and building maintenance personnel to illustrate care and maintenance procedures. E. This Subcontractor shall be responsible at all times up to the completion of his work for all glazing scratched, broken, or damaged in any way. Upon completion of the Subcontractor's work, and after acceptance by the General Contractor, the General Contractor will assume all the responsibility for broken and damaged glazing up until the time of Substantial Completion. As part of the requirements for Substantial Completion the General Contractor will do all final cleaning of the glass. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Fiberglass Windows 08 57 20 Page 1 of 6 SECTION 08 57 20 WINDOWS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accom- modated in the execution of the work specified herein B. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Fiberglass windows. 2. UPVC Windows C. Alternates: Not Applicable. D. Install Items Furnished Under Other Sections: Not Applicable. E. Furnish Items to for installation under other Sections: Not Applicable. F. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 2. Section 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY 3. Section 08 11 00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 4. Section 08 14 00 WOOD AND COMPOSITE DOORS AND FRAMES 5. Section 08 71 00 HARDWARE 6. Section 09 90 00 PAINTING 1.03. ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, glazing and fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, and finishes for fiber- glass windows. B. Shop Drawings: For fiberglass windows. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens, opera- tional clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color specified, 2 by 4 in size. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied finishes. 1. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving color selection. E. Samples for Verification: For fiberglass windows and components required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Exposed Finishes: [2 by 4 inches (50 by 100 mm)] <Insert dimensions>. 2. Exposed Hardware: Full-size units. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Fiberglass Windows 08 57 20 Page 2 of 6 F. Product Schedule: For fiberglass windows. Use same designations indicated on Draw- ings. 1.04. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For each type of fiberglass window, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Field quality-control reports. D. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's warranties. 1.05. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating fiberglass windows that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by test reports and calculations. B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to fiberglass window manufacturer for instal- lation of units required for this Project. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demon- strate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such devia- tions in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.06. WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fiberglass windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, and air infiltration. c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of materials and finishes beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass. 2. Warranty Period: a. Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing Units, Non-Laminated: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Glazing Units, Laminated: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01. MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain fiberglass windows from single source from single manufacturer. 2.02. WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions and min- imum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication un- less more stringent requirements are indicated. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Fiberglass Windows 08 57 20 Page 3 of 6 1. Window Certification: WDMA certified with label attached to each window. B. Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 as follows: 2. Minimum Performance Class: LC. C. Minimum Performance Grade: 50. D. Thermal Transmittance: NFRC 100 maximum whole-window U-factor of 0.29 Btu/sq. ft. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): NFRC 200 maximum whole-window SHGC of 0.30. E. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Rated for not less than 28 STC when tested for labora- tory sound transmission loss in accordance with ASTM E90 and determined by ASTM E413. 2.03. FIBERGLASS WINDOWS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Pella Corpora- tion; Pella® Impervia® or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Marvin Integrity All Ultrex 2. Accurate Dorwin. 3. Inline Fiberglass Ltd. 4. Milgard Manufacturing, Inc. B. Operating Types: Provide the following operating types in locations indicated on Drawings: 1. Casement: Project out. 2. Awning: Project out. 3. Single hung. 4. Double hung. 5. Horizontal sliding. 6. Fixed. C. Frames and Sashes: Pultruded fiberglass complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 and with exposed exterior fiberglass surfaces finished with manufacturer's standard enamel coating complying with AAMA 623. 1. Exterior Color: Brown. 2. Interior Finish: White. D. Glass: Clear annealed glass, ASTM C1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3. 1. Kind: Fully tempered as required by building code or as indicated on drawings. E. Insulating-Glass Units: ASTM E2190. 1. Glass: ASTM C1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3. a. Tint: Clear b. Kind: Fully tempered as required by building code or as indicated on drawings. 2. Lites: Simulated divided lite w/out bar in mullion configuration as per drawing. 3. Filling: Fill space between glass lites with argon. 4. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second or third surface. F. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weather- tight seal. G. Hardware, General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with adjacent materials; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and se- curely lock fiberglass windows, and sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions. 1. Exposed Hardware Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Fiberglass Windows 08 57 20 Page 4 of 6 H. Projected Window Hardware: 1. Gear-Type Rotary Operators: Complying with AAMA 901 when tested in accordance with ASTM E405, Method A. Provide operators that function without requiring the re- moval of interior screens or using screen wickets. a. Type and Style: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of types and styles. 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard type for sash weight and size indicated. 3. Single-Handle Locking System: Operates positive-acting arms that pull sash into locked position. Provide one arm on sashes up to 27-1/2 inches (700 mm) tall and two arms on taller sashes. 4. Limit Devices: Concealed friction adjustor, adjustable stay bar limit devices designed to restrict sash opening where required by building code. a. Limit clear opening to 4 inches for ventilation; with custodial key release. I. Hung Window Hardware: 1. Counterbalancing Mechanism: Complying with AAMA 902, concealed, of size and capacity to hold sash stationary at any open position. 2. Locks and Latches: Allow unobstructed movement of the sash across adjacent sash in direction indicated and operated from the inside only. Provide custodial locks. 3. Tilt Hardware: Releasing tilt latch allows sash to pivot about horizontal axis to facili- tate cleaning exterior surfaces from the interior. J. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash unless otherwise indicated. K. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to greatest extent possible. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened. 2.04. INSECT SCREENS A. General: Fabricate insect screens to integrate with window frame. Provide screen for each operable exterior sash. Screen wickets are not permitted. 1. Type and Location: Full, inside for project-out; Full, outside for double-hung. B. Aluminum Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with SMA 1004 or SMA 1201. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints or corner extrusions, concealed fasteners, and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame. 1. Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum sheet. 2. Finish for Interior Screens: Baked-on organic coating in [color selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>. 3. Finish for Exterior Screens: Matching color and finish of unit. C. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18-by-16 mesh of PVC-coated, glass-fiber threads; woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration. Comply with ASTM D3656/D3656M. 1. Mesh Color: Manufacturer's standard. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Fiberglass Windows 08 57 20 Page 5 of 6 2.05. FABRICATION A. Fabricate fiberglass windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for installing and anchoring windows. B. Glaze fiberglass windows in the factory. C. Weather strip each operable sash to provide weathertight installation. D. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design wind loads of window units. E. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the fac- tory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01. EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances. C. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in com- ponents to ensure weathertight window installation. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02. INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accesso- ries, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E2112. B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent con- struction to produce weathertight construction. 3.03. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspec- tions. 1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from requirements. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Fiberglass Windows 08 57 20 Page 6 of 6 B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of installed windows shall take place as follows: 1. Testing Methodology: Testing of windows for air infiltration and water resistance shall be performed in accordance with AAMA 502. 2. Air-Infiltration Testing: a. Test Pressure: That required to determine compliance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 performance class indicated. b. Allowable Air-Leakage Rate: 1.5 times the applicable AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 rate for product type and performance class rounded down to one decimal place. 3. Water-Resistance Testing: c. Test Pressure: Two-thirds times test pressure required to determine compliance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 performance grade indicated. d. Allowable Water Infiltration: No water penetration. 4. Testing Extent: Three windows of each type as selected by Architect and a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. Windows shall be tested after perimeter sealants have cured. 5. Test Reports: Prepared in accordance with AAMA 502. C. Windows will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.04. ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. 1. Keep protective films and coverings in place until final cleaning. C. Remove and replace sashes if glass has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or dam- aged during construction period. D. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from con- struction operations. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove con- taminants immediately in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Skylights 08 63 00 1 of 8 SECTION 08 63 00 Metal Framed Skylights PART I GENERAL 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein B. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Fabrication and installation of new skylights and curbs complete with all glazing, anchors, flashing and accessories as required for a complete installation. 2. Removal from site and legal disposal of all packaging, banding and all other surplus materials and equipment. 3. Sealing of all joints within each assembly. 4. Sealing of entire exterior perimeter of skylight units after installation. 5. Field observations and measurements of curb openings and conditions. 6. Furnish, install and remove all staging and planking required to complete the work. 7. Coordinate with Roofing Subcontractor responsible for demolition and removal of existing skylights, preparation of curbs, and for roofing and flashing work. C. Alternates: Not Applicable. D. Install Items Furnished Under Other Sections: Not Applicable. E. Furnish Items to Other Sections: Not Applicable. F. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 2. Section 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY 3. Section 09 90 00 PAINTING 4. Section 07 53 00 MEMBRANE ROOFING AND FLASHING 1.03. REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 1. 501.1 - Standard Test Method for Metal Curtain Walls for Water Penetration Using Dynamic Pressure. 2. 501.2 - Field Check of Metal Curtain Walls for Water Leakage. 3. 501.3 - Field Check of Water Penetration Through Installed Exterior606.1 - Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Air Pressure Difference. 4. 603.8 - Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Extruded Aluminum. 5. 605.2 - Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Skylights 08 63 00 2 of 8 6. 606.1 - Voluntary Guide Specification and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. 7. 607.1 - Voluntary Guide Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodize Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. 8. Sloped Glazing literature. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings. C. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A193 - Standard Specifications for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Materials for High Temperature Service. 2. A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. 3. B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 4. B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Bar, Rod, and Wire. 5. B316 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rivet and Cold- Heading Wire and Rods. 6. C719 - Standard Test Method for Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants Under Cycle Movement. 7. C794 - Standard Test Method for Adhesion-in-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 8. C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass. 9. C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. 10. D395 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber-Property - Compression Set. 11. D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension. 12. D1171 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration - Surface Ozone Cracking Outdoors or Chamber (Triangular Specimens). 13. D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness. 14. E283 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 15. E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 16. E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 17. E773 - Standard Test Method for Accelerated Weathering of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. 18. E774 - Standard Specification for Classification of Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. 19. E783 - Standard Test Method for Field Measurement of Air Leakage Through Installed Exterior Windows and Doors. D. Glass Association of North America (GANA) - Glazing Manual. E. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) - Classification of Insulating Glass Units. 1.04. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Complete, weather and air tight skylight assembly. B. General: Provide unit skylights capable of withstanding loads as prescribed by the prevailing code for the project location. C. Unit skylights must be tested in accordance with AAMA\WDMA\CSA\101\I.S.2\A440 as Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Skylights 08 63 00 3 of 8 required by Section 2405.5 of the International Building Code. D. Unit skylights must be tested and certified by NFRC for thermal performance. Products must be listed on the NFRC Certified Products directory. E. System Performance Requirements: 1. Triple dome models: i. U-factor shall be .46 BTU/HR-ft2-F maximum per NFRC 100 ii. SatinSky2/Clear/Clear: 1. SHGC shall be .37 per NFRC 200 2. Visible light transmission shall be 49% per ASTM E972 iii. SatinSky2/Clear/SatinIce853: 1. SHGC shall be .35 per NFRC 200 2. Visible light transmission shall be 46% per ASTM E972 1.05. SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete shop drawings in accordance with the General Provisions. B. Submittals for Review: 1. Shop Drawings: Submit plan, section, elevation, and perspective drawings as necessary to depict each specified skylight. Include flashing, connection, and termination details. 2. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: a. Preparation instructions and recommendations. b. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. c. Installation methods. 3. Samples: a. [12 x 12] [__ x __] inch glass samples. b. [6] [__] inch long extrusions samples showing specified finish. B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's certification that skylight system was designed, fabricated, installed in accordance with specified requirements. 2. Certificate of Compliance from Professional Structural Engineer performing system design. Engineering data and Shop Drawings shall be stamped and signed by a registered professional engineer licensed in the State of Massachusetts. C. No fabrication work or materials purchase shall commence until written approval of all required submittals has been received by the Contractor from the Architect. 1.06. QUALITY ASSURANCE D. Include design, engineering and fabrication under a single manufacturer. E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide Thermoformed domes fabricated from sheets identical to those tested for the following fire-test-response characteristics, per ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify plastic sheets with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1. Self-Ignition Temperature: 651 deg F (343 deg C) or greater when tested per ASTM D 1929 on plastic sheets in the thickness intended for use. 2. Smoke density of 75 or less when tested per ASTM D 2843 on plastic sheets in the thickness intended for use. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Skylights 08 63 00 4 of 8 3. Relative- Burning Characteristics: As follows, when tested per ASTM D 635: 4. Class CC2 Burning rate of 2.5 inches (64 mm) per minute or less when tested on plastic glazing indicated above with a nominal thickness of 0.060 inch (1.5 mm) or the thickness intended for use. 1.07. SCAFFOLDING AND HOISTS F. Furnish, erect and maintain all necessary scaffolding, ladders, platforms, planks and hoisting equipment required for the execution of the work. Remove these items when no longer needed. G. All such apparatus, equipment and construction shall meet the requirements of the Labor Laws and State Laws and regulations applicable thereto and the authorities having jurisdiction over this work. 1.08. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials and products in labeled, protective packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations 1.09. WARRANTY B. General: Warranties specified in this section shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Skylight Warranty: Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace work that exhibits defects in materials or workmanship and guaranteeing weather-tight and leak-free performance. “Defects” is defined as uncontrolled leakage of water and abnormal aging or deterioration. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Plastic Warranty: Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace work that has or develops defects in the plastic. “Defects” is defined as abnormal aging or deterioration. 2. Warranty Period: years from date of Substantial Completion against yellowing or breakage. E. Finish Warranty: Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace work with finish defects. “Defects” is defined as peeling, chipping, chalking, fading, abnormal aging or deterioration, and failure to perform as required. 1. Warranty Period for Anodized Finish: 5 year from date of shipment from the manufacturer. 2. Warranty Period for 2604 Powder Finish: 10 years from date of shipment from the manufacturer. 3. Warranty Period for 2605 Liquid Finish: 10 years from date of shipment from the manufacturer. (20 years available if specified). 4. Warranty Period for 2605 Powder Finish: 20 years from the date of shipment from the manufacturer. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Skylights 08 63 00 5 of 8 PART II MATERIALS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Wasco Skylights part of the Velux Group, Wells, ME (800-388-0293). B. Substitutions: Manufactures shall not be considered without prior approval in writing no later than ten (10) calendar days prior to bid. Substitute manufacturers must have been in the custom skylight business for not less than a period of 15 years and must submit to the Architect the following: 1. List of similar projects successfully completed within the last five years. 2. Proof of financial capability. 3. Complete details of proposed skylight. 4. Complete specifications for Architect’s review. 5. Test reports showing units have been tested with NFRC 6. NFRC Certified Products Directory (CPD#) number. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Curb Frame: High performance PVC with minimum effective thickness of 0.060 inch (1.5mm). Provide integral condensation gutter system with corners fully welded for waterproof quality. B. Retainer Frame: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T5 (min). ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M) with minimum effective thickness of 0.60 inch (1.5 mm). C. Plastic Sheets: Monolithic, formable, transparent (colorless) or translucent (white) sheets with good weather resistant. D. Thermal Break: Fabricate skylight units with thermal chambered PVC. E. Gaskets: Structural glazing tape to form adhesive bond between PVC curb and inner dome and between inner and outer dome. Butyl tape between outer dome and extruded aluminum retainer. Gaskets form an air and water impenetrable barrier between adjacent surfaces. F. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other non- corrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. 2.03 PLASTIC SKYLIGHT UNITS A. General: Factory-assembled, curb-mounted unit consisting of plastic glazing, gasketing, inner frame designed to mount on separate curb, and self-contained flashing. 1. Products: Provide EcoSky model CEC3, meeting the requirements of this section. B. Curb: Pre-Fabricated Curbs 1. Wasco Thermally Enhanced Curb (CCAW) C. Condensation Control: Fabricate skylight units with integral internal gutters and weeps to collect and dispose of condensation. D. Thermal Break: Fabricate skylight units with thermal chambered PVC. E. Shape and Size: As indicated by model number. F. Outer Glazing: [Dome] or [Pyramid] thermoformed: a. Acrylic: Acrylite® Satin Sky 2 translucent. G. Middle Glazing (for triple domes only): Thermoformed Dome Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Skylights 08 63 00 6 of 8 a. Acrylic: Clear. H. Inner Glazing: Thermoformed Dome: a. Acrylic [Clear], [SatinIce853 translucent] 2.04 FABRICATION A. Framing Components: As follows: 1. Factory fit and assemble components. 2. Fabricate components to drain condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within skylight system to the exterior. 3. Fabricate components to accommodate expansion, contraction, and field adjustment, and to provide for minimum clearance and shimming at skylight perimeter. 4. Fabricate components to ensure that glazing is thermally and physically isolated from framing members. 5. Fit and secure joints in aluminum by heliarc welding. 2.05 ALUMINUM FINISHES FOR GLAZING RETAINER A. General: Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” recommendations for application and designations of finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system for designations of aluminum finishes established by the Aluminum Association. 1. Mill Finish: Manufacturer’s standard mill finish. PART 1 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting skylight performance. a. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for protecting, handling, and installing skylight components. B. Coordinate with installation of roof deck and other substrates to receive skylight units. C. Coordinate with installation of vapor barriers, roof insulation, roofing, and flashing as required to assure that each element of the work performs properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weather tight. Anchor units securely to supporting structural substrates, adequate to withstand lateral and thermal stresses as well as inward and outward loading pressures. D. Counter Flashing: Where counter flashing is required as a component of the skylight, install to provide an adequate waterproof overlap with roofing or roof flashing (as counter flashing). Seal with thick bead of mastic sealant, except where overlap is indicated to be left open for ventilation. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Skylights 08 63 00 7 of 8 3.01. PROTECTION, ADJUSTMENTS AND CLEANING A. After other trades have completed work on adjacent material, carefully inspect glazing installation and make adjustments necessary to insure proper installation and weather- tight conditions. B. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of windows, exercising care to avoid damage to protection coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. C. Remove all shipping crates and waste material from the project. D. Send to Architect, with copy to Owner, written recommendations for maintenance and protection of skylights following Substantial Completion. Provide walkthru with architect and building maintenance personnel to illustrate care and maintenance procedures. E. This Subcontractor shall be responsible at all times up to the completion of his work for all glazing scratched, broken, or damaged in any way. Upon completion of the Subcontractor's work, and after acceptance by the General Contractor, the General Contractor will assume all the responsibility for broken and damaged glazing up until the time of Substantial Completion. As part of the requirements for Substantial Completion the General Contractor will do all final cleaning of the glass. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Skylights 08 63 00 8 of 8 This Page Intentionally Left Blank February 24, 2024 087100 Hardware Page 1 of 26 08 71 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA SECTION 08 71 00 – DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein B. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Furnish and deliver to the Contractor, F.O.B. the job site, all finish door hardware as specified and scheduled. 2. Furnish all required schedules and templates. 3. Hardware supplier shall determine condition and material of frames and doors for application of hardware. 4. The General contractor shall be responsible for the quantity of hardware hereinafter specified to complete the job. C. Alternates: Not Applicable. D. Install Items Furnished Under Other Sections: Not Applicable. E. Furnish Items to Other Sections: 1. Section 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY a. Installation of doors and hardware. F. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 2. Section 08 11 00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 3. Section 08 14 00 WOOD AND COMPOSITE DOORS AND FRAMES 4. Section 08 41 13 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 5. Section 08 81 00 GLASS AND GLAZING 6. Division 09 90 00 PAINTING 7. Division 26 ELECTRICAL a. For connections to electrical power system and for low-voltage wiring. 8. Division 27 Communication a. For coordination with other components of electronic access control system and fire alarm system. 1.03. REFERENCES A. UL - Underwriters Laboratories 1. UL 10B - Fire Test of Door Assemblies 2. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Test of Fire Door Assemblies 3. UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies 4. UL 305 - Panic Hardware February 24, 2024 087100 Hardware Page 2 of 26 08 71 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA B. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute 1. Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule 2. Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware 3. Key Systems and Nomenclature C. NFPA – National Fire Protection Association 1. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code 2. NFPA 80 – 2016 Edition – Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives 3. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code 4. NFPA 105 – Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies 5. NFPA 252 – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies D. ANSI - American National Standards Institute 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.1 - A156.29, and ANSI/BHMA A156.31 - Standards for Hardware and Specialties 2. ANSI/BHMA A156.28 - Recommended Practices for Keying Systems 1.04. SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Submit in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 Submittal Procedures. 2. Prior to forwarding submittal: a. Comply with procedures for verifying existing door and frame compatibility for new hardware, as specified in PART 3, “EXAMINATION” article, herein. b. Review drawings and Sections from related trades to verify compatibility with specified hardware. c. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify on submittals: deviations from Contract Documents, issues of incompatibility or other issues which may detrimentally affect the Work. B. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: Submit technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. 2. Riser and Wiring Diagrams: After final approval of hardware schedule, submit details of electrified door hardware, indicating: a. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring and including: 1) Details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security systems. 2) Schematic diagram of systems that interface with electrified door hardware. 3) Point-to-point wiring. 4) Risers. 3. Samples for Verification: If requested by Architect, submit production sample of requested door hardware unit in finish indicated and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule. a. Samples will be returned to supplier. Units that are acceptable to Architect may, after final check of operations, be incorporated into Work, within limitations of key coordination requirements. February 24, 2024 087100 Hardware Page 3 of 26 08 71 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA 4. Door Hardware Schedule: a. Submit concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate fabrication of other work critical in Project construction schedule. b. Submit under direct supervision of a Door Hardware Institute (DHI) certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) or Door Hardware Consultant (DHC) with hardware sets in vertical format as illustrated by Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule published by DHI. c. Indicate complete designations of each item required for each opening, include: 1) Door Index: door number, heading number, and Architect’s hardware set number. 2) Quantity, type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. 3) Name and manufacturer of each item. 4) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 5) Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings. 6) Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 7) Mounting locations for hardware. 8) Door and frame sizes and materials. 9) Degree of door swing and handing. 10) Operational Description of openings with electrified hardware covering egress, ingress (access), and fire/smoke alarm connections. 5. Key Schedule: a. After Keying Conference, provide keying schedule that includes levels of keying, explanations of key system's function, key symbols used, and door numbers controlled. b. Use ANSI/BHMA A156.28 “Recommended Practices for Keying Systems” as guideline for nomenclature, definitions, and approach for selecting optimal keying system. c. Provide 3 copies of keying schedule for review prepared and detailed in accordance with referenced DHI publication. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key to unique door designations. d. Index keying schedule by door number, keyset, hardware heading number, cross keying instructions, and special key stamping instructions. e. Provide one complete bitting list of key cuts and one key system schematic illustrating system usage and expansion. Forward bitting list, key cuts and key system schematic directly to Owner, by means as directed by Owner. f. Prepare key schedule by or under supervision of supplier, detailing Owner’s final keying instructions for locks. 6. Templates: After final approval of hardware schedule, provide templates for doors, frames and other work specified to be factory or shop prepared for door hardware installation. C. Informational Submittals: 1. Provide Qualification Data for Supplier, Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant. 2. Provide Product Data: a. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire- rated doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies. b. Include warranties for specified door hardware. Closeout Submittals: February 24, 2024 087100 Hardware Page 4 of 26 08 71 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA 3. Operations and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Division 01 and include: a. Complete information on care, maintenance, and adjustment; data on repair and replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes. b. Catalog pages for each product. c. Factory order acknowledgement numbers (for warranty and service) d. Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer. e. Parts list for each product. f. Final approved hardware schedule edited to reflect conditions as-installed. g. Final keying schedule h. Copies of floor plans with keying nomenclature i. Copy of warranties including appropriate reference numbers for manufacturers to identify project. j. As-installed wiring diagrams for each opening connected to power, both low voltage and 110 volts. 1.05. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications and Responsibilities: 1. Supplier: Recognized architectural hardware supplier with record of successful in- service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that provides certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) or Door Hardware Consultant (DHC) available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the Work for consultation. a. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. b. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. c. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. d. Coordination Responsibility: Assist in coordinating installation of electronic security hardware with Architect and electrical engineers and provide installation and technical data to Architect and other related subcontractors. 1) Upon completion of electronic security hardware installation, inspect and verify that all components are working properly. 2. Installer: Qualified tradesperson skilled in the application of commercial grade hardware with experience installing door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality as indicated for this Project. 3. Architectural Hardware Consultant: Person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and meets these requirements: a. For door hardware: DHI certified AHC or DHC. b. Can provide installation and technical data to Architect and other related subcontractors. c. Can inspect and verify components are in working order upon completion of installation. d. Capable of producing wiring diagram and coordinating installation of electrified hardware with Architect and electrical engineers. 4. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer. B. Certifications: 1. Fire-Rated Door Openings: a. Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. b. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed products tested by Underwriters Laboratories, Intertek Testing Services, or other testing and February 24, 2024 087100 Hardware Page 5 of 26 08 71 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated, based on testing at positive pressure and according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C and in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels. 2. Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies: a. Provide door hardware that meets requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105 b. Comply with the maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. (3 cu. m per minute/sq. m) at tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg (75 Pa) of water. 3. Electrified Door Hardware a. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Accessibility Requirements: a. Comply with governing accessibility regulations cited in “REFERENCES” article, herein for door hardware on doors in an accessible route. C. Pre-Installation Meetings 1. Keying Conference a. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including: 1) Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion. 2) Preliminary key system schematic diagram. 3) Requirements for key control system. 4) Requirements for access control. 5) Address for delivery of keys. 2. Pre-installation Conference a. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. b. Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed by other trades. c. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in for electrified door hardware. d. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware. e. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures. f. Review questions or concerns related to proper installation and adjustment of door hardware. 3. Electrified Hardware Coordination Conference: a. Prior to ordering electrified hardware, schedule and hold meeting to coordinate door hardware with security, electrical, doors and frames, and other related suppliers. 1.06. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to Project site. Promptly replace products damaged during shipping. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. Deliver each article of hardware in manufacturer’s original packaging. February 24, 2024 087100 Hardware Page 6 of 26 08 71 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA C. Maintain manufacturer-recommended environmental conditions throughout storage and installation periods. D. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project. Control handling and installation of hardware items so that completion of Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. E. Handle hardware in manner to avoid damage, marring, or scratching. Correct, replace or repair products damaged during Work. Protect products against malfunction due to paint, solvent, cleanser, or any chemical agent. F. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner. 1.07. COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of floor-recessed door hardware with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory or shop prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. C. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant. D. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems. E. Existing Openings: Where existing doors, frames and/or hardware are to remain, field verify existing functions, conditions and preparations and coordinate to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation. 1.08. WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within published warranty period. 1. Warranty does not cover damage or faulty operation due to improper installation, improper use or abuse. 2. Warranty Period: Beginning from date of Substantial Completion, for durations indicated in manufacturer’s published listings. a. LCN 1) Automatic Operator: 2 year mechanical b. Falcon 1) SC Series: 10 year mechanical 2) 24/25 Series Exits: 10 year mechanical 3) Lock: 10 year mechanical c. Ives 1) Continuous Hinges: Lifetime 1.09. MAINTENANCE A. Furnish complete set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of hardware, including changing of cylinders. B. Turn over unused materials to Owner for maintenance purposes. February 24, 2024 087100 Hardware Page 7 of 26 08 71 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01. MANUFACTURERS A. Approval of manufacturers and/or products other than those listed as “Scheduled Manufacturer” or “Acceptable Manufacturers” in the individual article for the product category shall be in accordance with QUALITY ASSURANCE article, herein. B. Approval of products from manufacturers indicated in “Acceptable Manufacturers” is contingent upon those products providing all functions and features and meeting all requirements of scheduled manufacturer’s product. C. Where specified hardware is not adaptable to finished shape or size of members requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having same operation and quality as type specified, subject to Architect's approval. 2.02. MATERIALS A. Fasteners 1. Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. 2. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish, or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work including prepared for paint surfaces to receive painted finish. 3. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units exposed when door is closed except when no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless thru-bolts are required to fasten hardware securely. Review door specification and advise Architect if thru-bolts are required. 4. Install hardware with fasteners provided by hardware manufacturer. B. Modification and Preparation of Existing Doors: Where existing door hardware is indicated to be removed and reinstalled. 1. Provide necessary fillers, Dutchmen, reinforcements, and fasteners, compatible with existing materials, as required for mounting new opening hardware and to cover existing door and frame preparations. 2. Use materials which match materials of adjacent modified areas. 3. When modifying existing fire-rated openings, provide materials permitted by NFPA 80 as required to maintain fire-rating. C. Provide screws, bolts, expansion shields, drop plates and other devices necessary for hardware installation. 1. Where fasteners are exposed to view: Finish to match adjacent door hardware material. D. Cable and Connectors: Hardwired Electronic Access Control Lockset and Exit Device Trim: 1. Data: 24AWG, 4 conductor shielded, Belden 9843, 9841 or comparable. 2. DC Power: 18 AWG, 2 conductor, Belden 8760 or comparable. 3. Provide type of data and DC power cabling required by access control device manufacturer for this installation. February 24, 2024 087100 Hardware Page 8 of 26 08 71 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA 4. Where scheduled in the hardware sets, provide each item of electrified hardware and wire harnesses with sufficient number and wire gauge with standardized Molex plug connectors to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Provide Molex connectors that plug directly into connectors from harnesses, electric locking and power transfer devices. Provide through-door wire harness for each electrified locking device installed in a door and wire harness for each electrified hinge, electrified continuous hinge, electrified pivot, and electric power transfer for connection to power supplies. 2.03. HINGES A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Ives 5BB series. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Hager BB series, McKinney TA/T4A series, Stanley FBB Series. B. Requirements: 1. Provide hinges conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.1. 2. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors, up to and including 36 inches (914 mm) wide: a. Exterior: Standard weight, bronze or stainless steel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high b. Interior: Standard weight, steel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high 3. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors over 36 inches (914 mm) wide: a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze/stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high 4. 2 inches or thicker doors: a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze or stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high 5. Provide three hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches (2286 mm) or less in height, and one additional hinge for each 30 inches (762 mm) of additional door height. 6. Where new hinges are specified for existing doors or existing frames, provide new hinges of identical size to hinge preparation present in existing door or existing frame. 7. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: a. Steel Hinges: Steel pins b. Non-Ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins c. Out-Swinging Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins d. Out-Swinging Interior Lockable Doors: Non-removable pins e. Interior Non-lockable Doors: Non-rising pins 8. Width of hinges: 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) at 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors, and 5 inches (127 mm) at 2 inches (51 mm) or thicker doors. Adjust hinge width as required for door, frame, and wall conditions to allow proper degree of opening. 9. Provide hinges with electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide with sufficient number and wire gage to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Locate electric hinge at second hinge from bottom or nearest to electrified locking component. 10. Provide mortar guard for each electrified hinge specified. 11. Provide spring hinges where specified. Provide two spring hinges and one bearing hinge per door leaf for doors 90 inches (2286 mm) or less in height. Provide one additional bearing hinge for each 30 inches (762 mm) of additional door height. February 24, 2024 087100 Hardware Page 9 of 26 08 71 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA 2.04. CYLINDRICAL LOCKS A. Grade: Grade 1, Falcon T series specified below for exterior locks. Grade 2 Falcon B series is appropriate for interior doors. B. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Falcon T series. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Dorma CL800 series, Sargent 10- Line. Requirements: 3. Provide cylindrical locks conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1, and UL Listed for 3 hour fire doors. 4. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein. 5. Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset, unless noted otherwise, with 1/2 inch latch throw. Provide proper latch throw for UL listing at pairs. 6. Provide locksets with separate anti-rotation thru-bolts, and no exposed screws. 7. Provide independently operating levers with two external return spring cassettes mounted under roses to prevent lever sag. 8. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim. 9. Provide electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. 10. Lever Trim: Solid cast levers without plastic inserts and wrought roses on both sides. a. Lever Design: Falcon AVA 2.05. EXIT DEVICES A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Falcon 24/25 series, Rim and vertical rod. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Sargent 19-43-GL-80 series, Precision Apex series. B. Requirements: 1. Provide exit devices tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1 and UL listed for Panic Exit or Fire Exit Hardware. 2. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein. 3. Provide touchpad type exit devices, fabricated of brass, bronze, stainless steel, or aluminum, plated to standard architectural finishes to match balance of door hardware. 4. Touchpad must extend a minimum of one half of door width. No plastic inserts are allowed in touchpads. 5. Provide exit devices with deadlatching feature for security and for future addition of alarm kits and/or other electrified requirements. 6. Provide flush end caps for exit devices. 7. Provide exit devices with manufacturer’s approved strikes. 8. Provide exit devices cut to door width and height. Install exit devices at height recommended by exit device manufacturer, allowable by governing building codes, and approved by Architect. 9. Mount mechanism case flush on face of doors, or provide spacers to fill gaps behind devices. Where glass trim or molding projects off face of door, provide glass bead kits. 10. Provide cylinder or hex-key dogging as specified at non fire-rated openings. 11. Removable Mullions: 2 inches (51 mm) x 3 inches (76 mm) steel tube. Where scheduled as keyed removable mullion, provide type that can be removed by use of a keyed cylinder, which is self-locking when re-installed. 12. Provide factory drilled weep holes for exit devices used in full exterior application, highly corrosive areas, and where noted in hardware sets. 13. Provide electrified options as scheduled. 14. Provide exit devices with optional trim designs to match other lever and pull designs February 24, 2024 087100 Hardware Page 10 of 26 08 71 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA used on the project. 2.06. ELECTRIC STRIKES A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Von Duprin 6000 Series. B. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Folger Adam 300 Series, HES 1006 Series. Requirements: 1. Provide electric strikes designed for use with type of locks shown at each opening. 2. Provide electric strikes UL Listed as burglary-resistant. 3. Where required, provide electric strikes UL Listed for fire doors and frames. 4. Provide transformers and rectifiers for each strike as required. Verify voltage with electrical contractor. C. Provide card/fob reader at exterior doors with electric strikes. 2.07. ROLLER LATCHES A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Rockwood. B. Requirements: 1. Provide roller latches with 4-7/8 inches (124 mm) strike at single doors to fit ANSI frame prep. If dummy levers are used in conjunction with roller latch mount roller latch at a height as to not interfere with proper mounting and height of dummy lever. 2. Provide roller latches with 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) full lip strike at pair doors. Mount roller in top rail of each leaf per manufacturer’s template. 2.08. RESTROOM PRIVACY DEADBOLT A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Falcon D271. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: As approved 3. Style Deadbolt 4. Strike 2-3/4" x 1-1/8" lipless standard 5. Deadbolt Full 1" throw - with free-turning 1/4" thick, hardened steel, saw-resistant roller 6. Faceplate 1-1/8" x 2-1/4" square corner deadbolt 7. Exposed Trim Wrought brass or bronze reinforced with steel insert 8. Backset 2-3/8" - 2-3/4" adjustable deadbolt 9. Door Thickness 1-3/8" to 1-7/8" 10. Function: a. Deadbolt is thrown or retracted by turn unit only b. Occupancy indicator on outside (reads either "in use" or vacant with color coding) c. Bolt automatically deadlocks when fully thrown- Emergency key supplied 2.09. CYLINDERS A. Manufacturers and Products: 11. Scheduled Manufacturer: Falcon. 12. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: As approved B. Requirements: 1. Provide cylinders/cores from the same manufacturer of locksets], compliant with ANSI/BHMA A156.5; latest revision; cylinder face finished to match lockset, manufacturer’s series as indicated. Refer to “KEYING” article, February 24, 2024 087100 Hardware Page 11 of 26 08 71 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA herein. 2. Provide cylinders in the below-listed configuration(s), distributed throughout the Project as indicated. d. Conventional Open: cylinder with small format interchangeable core (SFIC) core with open keyway C. Construction Keying: 1. Replaceable Construction Cores. a. Provide temporary construction cores replaceable by permanent cores, furnished in accordance with the following requirements. 1) 3 construction control keys 2) 12 construction change (day) keys. b. Owner or Owner’s Representative will replace temporary construction cores with permanent cores. 2.10. KEYING A. Provide a factory registered keying system, complying with guidelines in ANSI/BHMA A156.28, incorporating decisions made at keying conference. B. Provide cylinders/cores keyed into Owner’s existing factory registered keying system. Comply with guidelines in ANSI/BHMA A156.28, incorporating decisions made at keying conference. C. Requirements: 1. Provide permanent cylinders/cores keyed by the manufacturer according to the following key system. a. Master Keying system as directed by the Owner. 2. Forward bitting list and keys separately from cylinders, by means as directed by Owner. Failure to comply with forwarding requirements will be cause for replacement of cylinders/cores involved at no additional cost to Owner. 3. Provide keys with the following features: a. Material: Nickel silver; minimum thickness of .107-inch (2.3mm) 4. Identification: a. Mark permanent cylinders/cores and keys with applicable blind code per DHI publication “Keying Systems and Nomenclature” for identification. Do not provide blind code marks with actual key cuts. b. Identification stamping provisions must be approved by the Architect and Owner. c. Stamp cylinders/cores and keys with Owner’s unique key system facility code as established by the manufacturer; key symbol and embossed or stamped with “DO NOT DUPLICATE” along with the “PATENTED” or patent number to enforce the patent protection. d. Failure to comply with stamping requirements will be cause for replacement of keys involved at no additional cost to Owner. e. Forward permanent cylinders/cores to Owner, separately from keys, by means as directed by Owner. 5. Quantity: Furnish in the following quantities. a. Change (Day) Keys: 3 per cylinder/core. b. Control Keys: 3. c. Master Keys: 6. D. Provide card/fob reader at exterior doors with electric strikes. February 24, 2024 087100 Hardware Page 12 of 26 08 71 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA 2.12. KEY CONTROL SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Telkee. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: HPC, Lund. B. Requirements: 1. Provide key control system, including envelopes, labels, tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet, all as recommended by system manufacturer, with capacity for 150% of number of locks required for Project. a. Provide complete cross index system set up by hardware supplier, and place keys on markers and hooks in cabinet as determined by final key schedule. b. Provide hinged-panel type cabinet for wall mounting. 2.13. DOOR CLOSERS A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Falcon SC70A series. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Norton 7500 series, Sargent 351 series Requirements: 3. Provide door closers conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements by BHMA certified independent testing laboratory. ISO 9000 certify closers. Stamp units with date of manufacture code. 4. Provide door closers with fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with aluminum cylinder. 5. Closer Body: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) diameter with 5/8 inch (16 mm) diameter heat- treated pinion journal. 6. Hydraulic Fluid: Fireproof, passing requirements of UL10C, and requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F. 7. Spring Power: Continuously adjustable over full range of closer sizes, and providing reduced opening force as required by accessibility codes and standards. 8. Hydraulic Regulation: By tamper-proof, non-critical valves, with separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and backcheck. 9. Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) Technology: Not permitted. 10. Provide special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or adapters for arms as required for details, overhead stops, and other door hardware items interfering with closer mounting. 2.14. DOOR CLOSERS A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Falcon SC80A series. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Norton 8000 series, Sargent 1331 series Requirements: 3. Provide door closers conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements by BHMA certified independent testing laboratory. 4. Provide door closers with fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with aluminum cylinder. 5. Closer Body: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) diameter, with 5/8 inch (16 mm) diameter heat- treated pinion journal. 6. Hydraulic Fluid: Fireproof, passing requirements of UL10C, and requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F. February 24, 2024 087100 Hardware Page 13 of 26 08 71 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA 7. Spring Power: Continuously adjustable over full range of closer sizes, and providing reduced opening force as required by accessibility codes and standards. 8. Hydraulic Regulation: By tamper-proof, non-critical valves, with separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and backcheck. 9. Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) Technology: Not permitted. 10. Provide special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or adapters for arms as required for details, overhead stops, and other door hardware items interfering with closer mounting. 2.15. DOOR CLOSERS A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Falcon SC60A series. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Norton 1600 series, Sargent 1131 series Requirements: 3. Provide door closers conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements by BHMA certified independent testing laboratory. 4. Provide door closers with fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with aluminum cylinder. 5. Closer Body: 1-3/8 inch (35 mm) diameter with 5/8 inch (16 mm) diameter pinion journal. 6. Hydraulic Fluid: Fireproof, passing requirements of UL10C. 7. Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) Technology: Not permitted. 8. Provide special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or adapters for arms as required for details, overhead stops, and other door hardware items interfering with closer mounting. 2.16. ELECTRO-MECHANICAL AUTOMATIC OPERATORS A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: LCN Senior Swing. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Besam Swingmaster MP, Horton 4000LE series B. Requirements: 1. Provide low energy automatic operator units that are electro-mechanical design complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.19. a. Opening: Powered by DC motor working through reduction gears. b. Closing: Spring force. c. Manual, hydraulic, or chain drive closers: Not permitted. d. Operation: Motor is off when door is in closing mode. Door can be manually operated with power on or off without damage to operator. Provide variable adjustments, including opening and closing speed adjustment. e. Cover: Aluminum. 2. Provide units with manual off/auto/hold-open switch, push and go function to activate power operator, vestibule interface delay, electric lock delay, hold-open delay adjustable from 1 to 32 seconds, and logic terminal to interface with accessories, mats, and sensors. 3. Provide drop plates, brackets, and adapters for arms as required to suit details. 4. Provide hard-wired motion sensors and/or actuator switches, and receivers for operation as specified. Provide weather-resistant actuators at exterior applications. 5. Provide key switches, with LED’s, recommended and approved by manufacturer of automatic operator as required for function as described in operation description of hardware sets. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein. 6. Provide card reader at exterior doors with electric strikes. February 24, 2024 087100 Hardware Page 14 of 26 08 71 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA 7. Provide complete assemblies of controls, switches, power supplies, relays, and parts/material recommended and approved by manufacturer of automatic operator for each individual leaf. Actuators control both doors simultaneously at pairs. Sequence operation of exterior and vestibule doors with automatic operators to allow ingress or egress through both sets of openings as directed by Architect. Locate actuators, key switches, and other controls as directed by Architect. 2.17. DOOR TRIM A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Rockwood. Requirements: 3. Provide push plates, push bars, pull plates, and pulls with diameter and length as scheduled. 2.18. PROTECTION PLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Rockwood. Requirements: 3. Provide protection plates with a minimum of 0.050 inch (1 mm) thick, beveled four edges as scheduled. Furnish with sheet metal or wood screws, finished to match plates. 4. Protection plates are to be sized based on the door bottom rail size: 3” less in width and 1” less than height. For solid flush doors, kick plate is to be 3” less in width by 10” high. 2.19. OVERHEAD STOPS AND OVERHEAD STOP/HOLDERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturers: Glynn-Johnson. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Rixson, Sargent. Requirements: 3. Provide overhead stop at any door where conditions do not allow for a wall stop or floor stop presents tripping hazard. 4. Provide friction type at doors without closer and positive type at doors with closer. 2.20. DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Rockwood. Provide door stops at each door leaf: 3. Provide wall stops wherever possible. Provide concave type where lockset has a push button of thumbturn. 4. Where a wall stop cannot be used, provide universal floor stops. 5. Where wall or floor stop cannot be used, provide overhead stop. 6. Provide roller bumper where doors open into each other and overhead stop cannot be used. February 24, 2024 087100 Hardware Page 15 of 26 08 71 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA 2.21. THRESHOLDS, SEALS, DOOR SWEEPS, AUTOMATIC DOOR BOTTOMS, AND GASKETING A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Zero International. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: National Guard, Reese. B. Requirements: 1. Provide thresholds, weather-stripping, and gasketing systems as specified and per architectural details. Match finish of other items. 2. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meets requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. 3. Provide door sweeps, seals, astragals, and auto door bottoms only of type where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available. 4. Size thresholds 1/2 inch (13 mm) high by 5 inches (127 mm) wide by door width unless otherwise specified in the hardware sets or detailed in the drawings. 2.22. SILENCERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Rockwood. Requirements: 3. Provide "push-in" type silencers for hollow metal or wood frames. 4. Provide one silencer per 30 inches (762 mm) of height on each single frame, and two for each pair frame. 5. Omit where gasketing is specified. 2.23. DOOR POSITION SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Schlage. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: GE-Interlogix, Sargent. Requirements: 3. Provide recessed or surface mounted type door position switches as specified. 4. Coordinate door and frame preparations with door and frame suppliers. If switches are being used with magnetic locking device, provide minimum of 4 inches (102 mm) between switch and magnetic locking device. 2.24. DOOR VIEWERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Rockwood. B. Provide appropriate door viewer for door type and rating with minimum of 180- degree view area. 1. Provide one viewer for standard unit entries, two viewers for accessible unit entries February 24, 2024 087100 Hardware Page 16 of 26 08 71 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA 2.25. POCKET DOOR HARDWARE A. Johnson Hardware heavy duty, 400 lb. capacity, model 2000 Series Heavy Duty Pocket Door Frame, or similar with equal capacity. 1. Max. Weight Per Door 400 lbs. 2. Min. Wall Structure Thickness 3-1/2" (2 x 4) 3. Max. Door Width 60" (5'- 0")] 4. Max. Door Height 108" (9'-0") 5. Door Thickness 1-1/8" to 1-3/4" 6. Frame Header Material Spruce, Pine or Fir (#3 or better) 7. Split Stud Construction 18 Gauge Cold Rolled Galvanized Steel 8. Track Profile I-Beam 9. Track Material 6063T6 Extruded Aluminum 10. Track Finish Mill Aluminum 11. Wheel Type Nylon Encapsulated Sealed Ball Bearing 12. Steel Components 12-14 Gauge 13. Steel Component Finish Zinc Trivalent Plate B. Pocket door pull hardware to be ADA compliant equal to Trimco ADA Pocket Door Pull 1069 Series, installed so as not to reduce clear opening dimension. 2.26. BI-FOLD HARDWARE A. Johnson Hardware heavy duty, 125 lb. capacity, 200FS Side Mounted Bi-Fold Door Hardware or similar with equal capacity. 1. 200FS Side Mounted Bi-Fold Door Hardware 2. 125lbs [57kg] Max Panel Weight Each 3. 48" [1219mm] Max Panel Width Each 4. 108" [2743mm] Max Panel Height 5. 1-3/8" [35mm], 1-3/4" [35mm], 2-1/4" [57mm] Panel Thickness 6. Side Mount Hanger Type 7. Commercial Grade Top Hung Bi-Fold Door Hardware 2.27. FINISHES A. Finish: BHMA 626/652 (US26D); except: 1. Hinges at Exterior Doors: BHMA 630 (US32D) 2. Continuous Hinges: BHMA 630 (US32D) 3. Continuous Hinges: BHMA 628 (US28) 4. Push Plates, Pulls, and Push Bars: BHMA 630 (US32D) 5. Protection Plates: BHMA 630 (US32D) 6. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA 630 (US32D) 7. Door Closers: Powder Coat to Match 8. Wall Stops: BHMA 630 (US32D) 9. Latch Protectors: BHMA 630 (US32D) 10. Weatherstripping: Clear Anodized Aluminum 11. Thresholds: Mill Finish Aluminum February 24, 2024 087100 Hardware Page 17 of 26 08 71 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01. EXAMINATION A. Prior to installation of hardware, examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. Verify doors, frames, and walls have been properly reinforced for hardware installation. B. Field verify existing doors and frames receiving new hardware and existing conditions receiving new openings. Verify that new hardware is compatible with existing door and frame preparation and existing conditions. C. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. D. Submit a list of deficiencies in writing and proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02. PREPARATION A. Where on-site modification of doors and frames is required: 1. Carefully remove existing door hardware and components being reused. Clean, protect, tag, and store in accordance with storage and handling requirements specified herein. 2. Field modify and prepare existing doors and frames for new hardware being installed. 3. When modifications are exposed to view, use concealed fasteners, when possible. 4. Prepare hardware locations and reinstall in accordance with installation requirements for new door hardware and with: a. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6. b. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors." c. Doors in rated assemblies: NFPA 80 for restrictions on on-site door hardware preparation. 3.03. INSTALLATION A. Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following, unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations, using only fasteners provided by manufacturer. C. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. Protect all installed hardware during painting. D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. February 24, 2024 087100 Hardware Page 18 of 26 08 71 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. F. Install operating parts so they move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking, or excessive clearance. G. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than quantity recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. H. Lock Cylinders: 1. Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. 2. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying section. 3. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation. I. Wiring: Coordinate with Division 26, ELECTRICAL sections for: 1. Conduit, junction boxes and wire pulls. 2. Connections to and from power supplies to electrified hardware. 3. Connections to fire/smoke alarm system and smoke evacuation system. 4. Connection of wire to door position switches and wire runs to central room or area, as directed by Architect. 5. Testing and labeling wires with Architect’s opening number. J. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule. K. Door Closers: Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors from corridors. Mount closers so they are not visible in corridors, lobbies and other public spaces unless approved by Architect. L. Closer/Holders: Mount closer/holders on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors. M. Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings or in equipment room, or alternate location as directed by Architect. N. Thresholds: Set thresholds in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." O. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they may impede traffic or present tripping hazard. P. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. Q. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. R. Door Bottoms and Sweeps: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. February 24, 2024 087100 Hardware Page 19 of 26 08 71 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA 3.04. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage qualified, independent, Door Hardware Institute (DHI) Certified, Fire Door Assembly Inspector (CFDAI) or Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to perform inspections, prepare inspection reports, and issue inspection reports. 1. Representative will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted. 2. Representative will inspect fire rated doors and state in report whether installed work complies with NFPA 80. 3.05. ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. 2. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three to six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant must examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors and door hardware. 3.06. CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items per manufacturer’s instructions to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.07. DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. The intent of the hardware specification is to specify the hardware for interior and exterior doors, and to establish a type, continuity, and standard of quality. However, it is the door hardware supplier’s responsibility to thoroughly review existing conditions, schedules, specifications, drawings, and other Contract Documents to verify the suitability of the hardware specified. B. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware, and missing items are to be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application. C. Hardware items are referenced in the following hardware schedule. Refer to the above- specifications for special features, options, cylinders/keying, and other requirements. February 24, 2024 087100 Hardware Page 20 of 26 08 71 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA 2.028. HARDWARE SETS A. Each Hardware Set listed below represents the complete hardware requirements for one opening (single door or pair of doors). Furnish the quantities required of each set for the work. 1. Hardware Set #01 Doors EXT 002, EXT 003 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER ITEMID MFR 6 EA HINGES I MUILTIPLE LATCHING 1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 CON  VON 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 24-V-C-LBR-718 FAL 1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE MEL-24-V-C-LBR-718-CON 24 VDC  FAL 3 EA RIM/MORTISE IC CORE CYLINDER AS REQUIRED FAL 3 EA PERM CORE SFIC FAL 2 EA LONG DOOR PULL 9264 36" 20" STD IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 SS FAL 1 EA SURF. AUTO OPERATOR 9542 MS AS REQ (120/240 VAC)  LCN 1 EA ACTUATOR, WALL MOUNT 8310-853T  LCN 1 EA SURFACE MOUNT BOX 8310-867S  LCN 1 EA THRESHOLD 8655A (VERIFY JAMB DEPTH) ZER 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A ZER 2 1 SET EA GASKETING PUSH BUTTON 429AA-S 830-59J-HSS-RG ZER SED 1 EA CARD / FOB READER Operational Description: Auto operator at active door leaf only. Electrified exit device at active leaf only. Provide Card/fob access control at opening. Free egress at all times. Ingress via intercom, mechanical cylinder on exit device trimsets or keyswitch / card / fob on outside push button actuator. Aluminum clad doors with surface vertical rod exit devices less bottom rods. Mount pulls to allow access to keyed cylinders. Blocking at header to allow mounting of auto operator. Location of press actuators and card/fob readers as directed by architect. Inside actuator always operational. Outside actuator operational immediately after activation of intercom or use of keyswitch at outside actuator. Outside actuator typically left in inactive state. Door to return to locked state after opening. February 24, 2024 087100 Hardware Page 21 of 26 08 71 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA 2. Hardware Set #02 Door 001 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER 6 EA HINGES EXI 2 EA PUSH BAR 9100HO 630 IVE 2 EA LONG DOOR PULL 9264 36" 20" STD 630- IVE 316 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 SS 689 FAL 1 EA SURF. AUTO OPERATOR 9542 MS AS REQ (120/240 VAC) ANCLR LCN 2 EA ACTUATOR, WALL MOUNT 8310-853T 630 LCN 2 EA SURFACE MOUNT BOX 8310-867S 689 LCN EA THRESHOLD 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER 1 GASKETING Operational Description: Auto operator at active door leaf only. Inside and outside actuator always operational. No locking or latching of these doors. Free egress at all times. Aluminum clad doors with push/pull hardware. Blocking at header to allow mounting of auto operator. Location of press actuators as directed by architect. 3. Hardware Group # 03 Doors 005, 006, 007, 008, 009, 010, 011 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER ITEMID MFR 3 EA HINGES IVE 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE F-25-R-L-NL-AVA FAL 1 EA RIM/MORTISE IC CORE CYLINDER AS REQUIRED FAL 1 EA PERM CORE SFIC FAL 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 SS FAL 1 EA STOP AS SPECIFIED WS407CCV/FS436/FS438 IVE 1 SET GASKETING 429AA-S ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 8655A (VERIFY JAMB DEPTH) ZER 1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05HM/WD  SCE February 24, 2024 087100 Hardware Page 22 of 26 08 71 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA 4. Hardware Group No. 04 For use on Door #(s): 1-001 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER ITEMID MFR 2 EA HINGES IVE MUILTIPLE LATCHING 2 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE F-25-R-L-NL-AVA FAL 2 EA RIM/MORTISE IC CORE CYLINDER AS REQUIRED FAL 2 EA PERM CORE SFIC FAL 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 SS FAL 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS IVE 2 EA STOP AS SPECIFIED WS407CCV/FS436/FS438 IVE 2 SET GASKETING 429AA-S ZER 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A ZER 2 EA THRESHOLD 8655A (VERIFY JAMB DEPTH) ZER 2 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05HM/WD  SCE 2 EA MAG HOLD OPEN 5. Hardware Group No. 05 For use on Door #(s): 1-016, 1-017, 1-018, 1-019, 1-025, 1-026, 1-027, 2-012, 2-013, 2-015, 2-020, 2-021 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following QTY DESCR IPTION CATALOG NUMBER ITEMID MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 AS SPECIFIED IVE 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE F-25-R-L-BE-AVA FAL 1 EA SURFA CE CLOSER SC71 REG OR PA AS REQ FAL 1 EA KICK PL ATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS IVE 1 EA STOP AS SPECIFIED WS407CC V/FS436/FS438 IVE 1 EA GASKE TING 488S ZER 1 EA DOOR SW SWEEP 39A ZER 6. Hardware Group No. 06 For use on Door #(s): 1-009, 1-009, 1-012, 1-007, 1-021 2-008,2-005,2-003,2-016 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCR IPTION CATALOG NUMBER ITEMID MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 AS SPECIFIED IVE 1 EA LATCH SET T SERIES FAL 1 EA PERM CORE SFIC FAL 1 EA SURFA CE CLOSER SC71 REG OR PA AS REQ FAL 1 EA STOP AS SPECIFIED WS407CC V/FS436/FS438 IVE 1 EA GASKE TING 488S ZER 1 EA DOOR S WEEP 39A ZER February 24, 2024 087100 Hardware Page 23 of 26 08 71 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA 7. Hardware Group No. 07 For use on Door #(s): 1-002, 1-003, 1-004, 1-005, 1-006, 1-006a, 1-013, 1-014, 1-022, 1-024, 2-001, 2-002, 2-007, 2-009, 2-010, 2-017, 2-019 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCR IPTION CATALOG NUMBER ITEMID MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 AS SPECIFIED IVE 1 EA CLASSR ROOM LOCK T561BDC AVA FAL 1 EA PERM CORE SFIC FAL 1 EA SURFA CE CLOSER SC71 REG OR PA AS REQ FAL 1 EA STOP AS SPECIFIED WS407CC V/FS436/FS438 IVE 1 EA GASKE TING 488S ZER 1 EA DOOR SW SWEEP 39A ZER 7a. Hardware Group No. 07a For use on Door #(s): 1-011, 1-020 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCR IPTION CATALOG NUMBER ITEMID MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 AS SPECIFIED IVE 1 EA STORE ROOM LOCK T58/1BDC AVA FAL 1 EA PERM CORE SFIC FAL 1 EA SURFA CE CLOSER SC71 REG OR PA AS REQ FAL 1 EA STOP AS SPECIFIED WS407CC V/FS436/FS438 IVE 1 EA GASKE TING 488S ZER 1 EA DOOR SW SWEEP 39A ZER 8. Hardware Group No. 08 For use on Door #(s): 2-006 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCR IPTION CATALOG NUMBER ITEMID MFR 6 EA HINGE 5BB1 AS SPECIFIED IVE 1 EA CLASSR ROOM LOCK T561BDC AVA FAL 1 EA PERM CORE SFIC FAL 1 EA SURFA CE CLOSER SC71 REG OR PA AS REQ FAL 2 EA STOP AS SPECIFIED WS407CC V/FS436/FS438 IVE 2 EA GASKE TING 488S ZER 2 EA DOOR SW SWEEP 39A ZER 2 EA FLUSH BOLTS February 24, 2024 087100 Hardware Page 24 of 26 08 71 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA 9.Hardware Group No. 09 For use on Door #(s): 1-010, 1-028 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCR IPTION CATALOG NUMBER ITEMID MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 AS SPECIFIED IVE 1 EA PRIVACY LOCK T301S AVA FAL 1 EA INDICATOR DEADBOLT D271 FAL 1 EA SURFA CE CLOSER SC71 DEL REG OR PA AS REQ FAL 1 EA ARMOR PLATE 8400 34" X 2" LDW B-CS IVE 1 EA STOP AS SPECIFIED WS407CC V/FS436/FS438 IVE 1 EA GASKE TING 488S ZER 10. Hardware Group No. 10 For use on Door #(s): Unit Entry Doors except entry doors at Types A-1, C-1, F-1 & E-2 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: 10.a Hardware Group No. 10a For use on Door #(s): Unit Entry Doors except entry doors at Types A-1, C-1, F-1 & E-2 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Operational Description: Doors are to be wired for electric strike (Included) and for power door opener, card / fob reader and push paddles (for future installation). QTY DESCR IPTION CATALOG NUMBER ITEMID MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 AS SPECIFIED IVE 1 EA DORMI TORY LOCK T571BDC AVA FAL 1 EA SURFA CE CLOSER SC61 REG OR PA AS REQ FAL 1 EA KICK PL ATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS IVE 1 EA STOP AS SPECIFIED WS407CC V/FS436/FS438 IVE 1 EA GASKE TING 488SBK PSA ZER 1 EA DOOR SWSwEEP 39A ZER 1 EA DOOR VI EWER COVER 890311613 IVE 1 EA VIEWER U698 IVE QTY DESCR IPTION CATALOG NUMBER ITEMID MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 AS SPECIFIED IVE 1 EA DORMI TORY LOCK T571BDC AVA FAL 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 1 EA SURFA CE CLOSER SC61 REG OR PA AS REQ FAL 1 EA KICK PL ATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS IVE 1 EA STOP AS SPECIFIED WS407CC V/FS436/FS438 IVE 1 EA GASKE TING 488SBK PSA ZER 1 EA DOOR SWWEEP 39A ZER 1 EA DOOR VI EWER COVER 890311613 IVE 2 EA VIEWERS U698 IVE February 24, 2024 087100 Hardware Page 25 of 26 08 71 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA 11. Hardware Set #11 For use on Door #(s): Swing Closet Doors Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: 3 Each Hinges 1 Passage Latchset 1 Stop 12. Hardware Set #12 For use on Door #(s): Bathroom and bedroom Doors Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: 3 Each Hinges 1 Privacy Latchset 1 Stop 13. Hardware Set #13 For use on Door #(s): Closet Doors Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: 1 Heavy Duty Bifold Door Kit 1 ADA Pulls 14. Hardware Set #14 For use on Door #(s): Closet Doors Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:1 Heavy Duty Pocket Door Kit 1 ADA Pocket Door Pull END OF SECTION February 24, 2024 087100 Hardware Page 26 of 26 08 71 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA This Page Intentionally Left Blank Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Glass and Glazing 08 81 00 1 of 8 SECTION 08 81 00 Glass and Glazing PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein B. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Insulated glazing of aluminum entrances and storefronts. 2. Insulated glazing of exterior hollow metal doors, transoms, sidelights and borrowed lights. 3. Glazing of interior hollow metal doors, transoms, sidelights and borrowed lights, both rated and unrated. 4. Glazing of miscellaneous doors windows and frames not indicated as "pre-glazed". 5. Removal from site and legal disposal of all removed materials, debris, packaging, banding and all other surplus materials and equipment. 6. Bidders shall survey existing conditions prior to bidding. 7. Sealing of all joints within each glazing assembly. C. Alternates: Not Applicable. D. Install Items Furnished Under Other Sections: Not Applicable E. Furnish Items to Other Sections: Not Applicable. F. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY 2. Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS 3. Section 08 11 00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 4. Section 08 14 00 WOOD AND COMPOSITE DOORS & FRAMES a. Factory glazed solid flush doors. 5. Section 08 41 13 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 6. Section 08 53 45 WINDOWS a. Factory glazed windows 1.03. SUBMITTALS A. All submittals, including shop drawings, manufacturer's specifications and product data shall be submitted for the following in accordance with the requirements of Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures and Substitutions. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Glass and Glazing 08 81 00 2 of 8 B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each glazing material and fabricated glass project required; including installation and maintenance instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing glazing, flashing, anchors, hardware and other components. D. Samples: Submit samples as follows: 1. One sample of each required aluminum finish, on 12 inch long sections of extrusion shapes and aluminum sheets as required for window units. 2. One sample of each type of glazing material, 12"x12", bearing the name of the manufacturer, thickness, and quality of glass. E. Submit statement from sealant manufacturer indicating that glass and glazing materials have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants and interpreting test results relative to material performance, including recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion. F. No fabrication work or materials purchase shall commence until written approval of all required submittals has been received by the Contractor from the Architect. 1.04. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide glass and glazing that has been produced, fabricated and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading and impact loading (where applicable), without failure including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glass and glazing materials and other defects in the work. 1. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as the failure of the hermetic seal due to other causes than glass breakage which results in the intrusion of dirt or moisture, internal condensation or fogging, deterioration of internal glass coating if any, resulting from failure, and any other visual evidence of seal or performance failure 2. Normal thermal movement is defined as that resulting from an ambient temperature range of 120 deg. F (67 deg. C) and from a consequent temperature range within glass and glass framing members of 180 deg. F (100 deg. C). B. Source: For each type of glass and glazing material required for the work of this section, provide primary materials which are products of one manufacturer. provide secondary materials which are compatible with and acceptable to the manufacturers of the primary products. All glass of each type shall exactly match. C. General Standards: Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Association Glazing Manual and Sealant Manual. D. Primary Glass Standards: Comply with Federal Specification DD-G-451 requirements for type, class and form. E. Safety Glass Standards: Provide safety glass which complies with ANSI Z97.1, standard for safety glazing materials of all types and requirements of Safety Commission Standard 16 CFR1201, Category I or Category II materials and is permanently marked with certification label of Safety Glass Certification Council. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Glass and Glazing 08 81 00 3 of 8 F. Heat Treated and Tempered Glass Standards: Comply with Federal Specification DD-G-1403 requirements for type, class and form. G. Insulated Glass Standards: provide insulating glass assemblies which are permanently marked with certification label of either the Insulating Glass Certification Council or Associated Laboratories, Inc. Provide units which comply with ASTM E774, Class A requirements and SIGMA 65-7-2, 1974 edition. 1.05. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING H. Deliver materials and products in labeled, protective packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and FGMA 1980 Handbook. 1. Protect from all possible damage. 2. keep shipping containers closed when not in use. 3. Protect materials during storage from moisture, sunlight, excess heat, sparks and flame. 4. Carefully store materials to avoid overloading any building component or structure. a. Store sloped skylight panels on the long edge, several inches above the ground, blocked and under cover to prevent warping 5. Provide adequate ventilation to prevent buildup of dangerous solvent concentrations. 6. Use clean gloves and tools when handling materials. Avoid contamination. 7. Use rolling blocks and suction cups to move glass not in shipping crates. 1.06. JOB CONDITIONS A. Glazing shall not be installed when the ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F., except that Contractor may erect suitable enclosures with adequate heating of enclosed space to raise surface temperatures of frames and glass above 40 degrees F. 1.07. WARRANTEES A. Provide written warrantees signed by manufacturer and installer, agreeing to repair or replace work which exhibits defects or deterioration in materials or workmanship as defined above, Section 08800, paragraph 1.05.A.1-2. Provide warrantee periods standard with manufacturer, but not less than the following: 1. Insulating Glass: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Glass and Glazing 08 81 00 4 of 8 PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01. ACCEPTABLE GLASS MANUFACTURERS A. Provide glass products of one of the following manufacturers if they meet or exceed the requirements of these specifications. 1. Guardian Industries 2. Hordis Brothers, Inc. 3. Libbey -Owens-Ford 4. PPG Industries, Inc. 5. Viracon, Inc. 2.02. GLASS MATERIALS A. Glass shall be as specified herein and shall be located by types where indicated on the Drawings. All glass materials shall be clear. B. Clear Float Glass: Type 1 - transparent, flat, class 1 - clear, quality q3, glazing select. C. Wire Glass: Provide U.L. listed, fire rated, 1/4 inch thick rolled flat glass conforming to ASTM C1036, Type II, Class 1, Form 1, wired and polished both sides, Quality q8- glazing, mesh pattern m2-square. Mesh shall be stainless steel and the openings in the square mesh shall not exceed 5/8 inch between wire intersections measured along a side of a square. D. Clear Tempered Glass: Provide ASTM C1048, Condition A, Type 1, Class 1, Quality q3, kind FT E. Laminated Glass: Refer to float and tempered glass requirements relating to properties of uncoated glasses making up laminate glass products. 1. Plastic Interlayer: a. Provide glass fabricators standard polyvinylbutyl Interlayer for laminating panes of glass, with a proven record of showing no tendency to bubble, discolor, or loose physical or mechanical properties after laminating and installation, in clear colors and of thickness indicated. b. Product: Monsanto Co. Model Saflex or similar by PPG, Guardian or Viracon. 2. Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass using laminator's standard heat- plus-pressure process to produce glass free from foreign substances and air/glass pockets. 3. Laminate safety glass: a. Two panes of glass of equal thickness, laminated together with a 0.030 in. thick plastic interlayer. b. Glass Characteristics: Float glass c. Class: 1, transparent and translucent, milky white, or translucent pattern as selected by the Architect. d. Thickness: 1/4" or as shown on drawings. e. color of interlayers: Clear. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Glass and Glazing 08 81 00 5 of 8 F. Sealed Insulated Glass Units: Provide preassembled units consisting of organically sealed panes of glass enclosing a hermetically sealed dehydrated air space and complying with ASTM E 774 for performance classification indicated as well as with other requirements specified for glass characteristics, air space, sealing system, sealant, spacer material, corner design and desiccant. 1. For properties of individual glass panes making up units refer to product requirements specified elsewhere in this section applicable to types, classes, kinds and conditions of glass products indicated. 2. Provide heat treated panes of kind and at locations indicated or, if not indicated, provide heat strengthened panes where recommended by manufacturer for application indicated and tempered where indicated or where safety glass is designated or required. 3. Uncoated Insulating Glass Units: Manufacturer's standard units complying with the following requirements: a. Exterior Pane: 3/16" clear float glass. b. Interior Pane: 3/16 " laminated glass. c. Air Space: 5/8". G. Low Emissivity (Low-E) Glass. 1. Low-E glass to be Pyrolytic Low-E glass on 3rd surface of insulated units. Incorporate into glazed units at locations indicated on drawings. 2.03. GLAZING MATERIALS A. General Glazing Requirements: provide sealants and gaskets which have performance characteristics suitable for applications intended. Make sure that glazing sealants are compatible with sealants used in insulated glass fabrication and with surfaces to be in contact. B. Elastic Glazing Compound: Shall be elastic glazing compound, metal type, meeting Federal Specifications TT-C-004-10c as manufactured by Pecora, Inc., Kuhls Co., DAP or equal. Color shall be as selected by the Architect. C. Glazing Sealant: Shall be a one part liquid polymer, acrylic based sealant, Pecora "60 Unicrylic", Tremco "Mono", W.R. Grace "Draseal-A" or equal. Primer shall be as recommended by manufacturer. Color shall be as selected by Architect. D. Glazing Tape: Shall be polyisobutylene or polybutene tape, flat or tapered configurations as required, 1/8 inch minimum thickness, by glazing sealant manufacturer. E. Setting Blocks and Spacers: Shall be made of resilient material such as neoprene, with 70-90 durometer for setting blocks and 40-50 durometer for spacers. F. Glazier's Points for Wood: Shall be triangular, zinc, two at top and bottom of each light. For face glazed metal sash use stainless steel spring wire clips. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Glass and Glazing 08 81 00 6 of 8 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01. INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Do not remove existing glazing until new replacements are available, ready for immediate installation. Do not leave any openings uncovered at end of working day, during wind- driven precipitation or during excessively cold weather. B. All removal to be in strict accordance to the requirements of Section 02050: Demolition. C. Before beginning work, glazier shall inspect sash, frames, and doors to determine that other trades have completed preparatory work and that sash, frames, and doors are ready to receive his work. D. Surfaces to receive glazing materials shall be free of dirt, dust, grease, oil, and other foreign materials, and shall be painted or sealed before work under this Section is begun. 3.02. DISPOSAL A. Existing glazing and other materials removed from site become property of the Contractor who shall promptly remove same and legally dispose of at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Comply with all applicable laws, rules and regulations and herein specifications. 3.03. INSTALLATION A. Comply with combined printed recommendations of glass manufacturers, of manufacturers of sealants, gaskets and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those of referenced glazing standards. B. All tempered or heat strengthened glass shall be manufactured to exact sizes required, all other glass shall be clean cut. Nipping to remove flares or to reduce oversize dimensions will not be permitted. Glass shall be shop cut to fit opening allowing required clearance. Openings to receive glass shall be reported and corrected before glass is sized. C. Cut glass accurately to fit openings. Sizes of glass indicated on the Drawings are approximate only and the actual sizes required shall be determined by measuring the frames to receive the glass. Size glass to permit required clearance and bit around full perimeter as set forth in the FGMA Manual. D. Follow "Surround Preparation" instruction of FGMA Glazing Manual. Thoroughly clean glazing surfaces of sash or frame. E. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants. F. Apply glazing compounds and other materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations. G. Glass shall be set without springing with proper clearances at all edges. Edge clearance and tolerance shall be in accordance with recommendations of FGMA Glazing Manual, latest edition. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Glass and Glazing 08 81 00 7 of 8 3.04. PROTECTION, ADJUSTMENTS AND CLEANING A. After other trades have completed work on adjacent material, carefully inspect glazing installation and make adjustments necessary to insure proper installation and weather- tight conditions. B. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of windows, exercising care to avoid damage to protection coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. C. Remove all shipping crates and waste material from the project. D. Send to Architect, with copy to Owner, written recommendations for maintenance and protection of windows following Substantial Completion of Replacement Window Contract. Provide walkthru with architect and building maintenance personnel to illustrate care and maintenance procedures. E. This Subcontractor shall be responsible at all times up to the completion of his work for all glazing scratched, broken, or damaged in any way. Upon completion of the Subcontractor's work, and after acceptance by the General Contractor, the General Contractor will assume all the responsibility for broken and damaged glazing up until the time of Substantial Completion. As part of the requirements for Substantial Completion the General Contractor will do all final cleaning of the glass. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Glass and Glazing 08 81 00 8 of 8 This Page Intentionally Left Blank Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Gypsum Board and Plaster 09 20 00 Page 1 of 8 SECTION 09 20 00 Gypsum Board and Plaster PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein B. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Metal framing, support and furring materials and systems for all wall partition, soffits and ceilings. 2. Gypsum Board at walls over metal framing including rated and un-rated in thicknesses indicated on drawings. 3. Moisture resistant drywall at kitchen walls, bathrooms and where indicated on drawings. 4. Cement board on walls behind shower units. C. Alternates: Not Applicable. D. Install Items Furnished Under Other Sections: Not Applicable. E. Furnish Items to Other Sections: Not Applicable. F. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 2. Section 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY 3. Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING 4. Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS 5. Section 09 90 00 PAINTING 1.03. SUBMITTALS A. All submittals, including shop drawings, manufacturer's specifications and product data shall be submitted for the following in accordance with the requirements of Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures and Substitutions. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for each material, including other data as may be required to show compliance with these specifications. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Gypsum Board and Plaster 09 20 00 Page 2 of 8 1.04. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Job Mock-Up: 1. Sample drywall installation to illustrate coordination with air barrier and compartmentalization methods: a. Contractor shall perform sample drywall installation markups to illustrate coordination with air barrier and compartmentalization methods at areas and conditions identified on the compartmentalization drawings for review. The materials and workmanship used to build the mock-up shall be representative of those that will be contained within the actual project construction. The mock-up shall form the basis for all testing. General dry wall installation shall not commence until reviewed by both CET, the Architect and the General Contractor. All costs associated with this preconstruction testing shall be borne by the General Contractor. 2. Mock-ups and methods will become standard for Work of this Section. B. CET has been contracted to be the HERS rater for this project. The contractor is to coordinate with and provide access to the site for inspection and testing over the course of the work, and to meet all Checklist Requirements as verified by CET. C. Gypsum Board Standards: Gypsum Association GA-216-82, Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. D. Allowable Tolerances: For flat surfaces, not to exceed 1/8" in 8'-0" for bow or warp of surface, and for plumb or level. E. Metal framing system shall conform to ASTM CC645-83, C754-82. F. All materials shall be the product of one manufacturer. Products of different manufacturers may be used only upon approval of the Architect. G. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. 1.05. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All materials shall be delivered in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name, applicable standard designation and name of manufacturer or supplier for whom product is manufactured. B. All materials shall be kept dry, preferably by being stored inside building-under roof. Where necessary to store gypsum board products and accessories outside, they shall be stacked above ground, properly supported on a level platform and fully protected from weather and direct sunlight exposure. C. Gypsum board shall be neatly stacked flat with care taken to prevent sagging or damage to edges, ends and surfaces. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Gypsum Board and Plaster 09 20 00 Page 3 of 8 1.06. JOB CONDITIONS A. Examine surfaces and materials to receive gypsum board to see that they are in proper condition to receive the work specified. Report to architect in writing any surfaces that are unacceptable. Starting work in any area shall constitute acceptance of that surface. Defects resulting from use of accepted surfaces shall be corrected at no additional expense to the Owner. B. All materials and the room where work is to be installed shall be maintained at a minimum of 50 degrees F for at least 24 hours before, during and for 48 hours after final installation. C. Provide adequate protection for all finish work in place at time of installation of gypsum board. The accumulation of dirt, dust, and debris shall be kept to a minimum to avoid damage to finish surfaces. Correct all damage to the Work of other Sections caused by the Work of this Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01. MANUFACTURERS A. Gypsum drywall products shall be as manufactured by one of the following or equal: 1. United States Gypsum Company (gold bond) 2. National Gypsum Company 3. The Flintstone Company B. Where a particular manufacturer's model number is referenced, it is used to indicate a type or style of product required and is not intended to indicate a preference nor limit competition. 2.02. METAL SUPPORT MATERIALS A. Interior Wall/Partition Support Materials: 1. Studs: ASTM C645; 20 gage or 25 gage as indicated on drawings, channel type. a. Depth of Section: 3-5/8 inches, 5-5/8 inches, or as indicated on drawings. b. Runners: Match studs; provide type recommended by stud manufacturer for floor and ceiling support of studs and for vertical abutment of veneer plaster work to other work. 2. Furring Members: ASTM C645; 0.0179 inches minimum thickness of base metal, hat-shaped or cold rolled channels 16 gage 3/4 inches or 1-1/2 inches deep. a. Where shown as "Resilient", provide manufacturer's special type designed to reduce sound transmission. b. Fasteners for Furring Members: Type and size recommended by furring manufacturer for substrate and application indicated B. Ceiling Support Materials and Systems: 1. General: Size ceiling support components to comply with ASTM C754 unless indicated otherwise. 2. Main runners: Steel channels with rust inhibitive paint finish, hot or cold rolled. 3. Hanger Wire; ASTM 641, soft, Class 1 galvanized. 4. Hanger Rods and Flats: Mild steel, zinc or cadmium plated or protected with rust inhibitive paint. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Gypsum Board and Plaster 09 20 00 Page 4 of 8 5. Hanger Anchorage Devices: Screws, clips, bolts, cast-in-place concrete inserts or other devices applicable to the indicated method of structural anchorage for ceiling hangers and whose suitability for use intended has been proven by certified test data a. Size devices for 3 times calculated load supported except size direct pull-out concrete inserts for 5 times calculated loads. 6. Furring Members: ASTM C645; 0.0179 inch minimum thickness of base metal, hat-shaped. 7. a Where shown as "Resilient", provide manufacturer's special type designed to reduce sound transmission. 8. Furring Members: ASTM C645; 0.0179 inch minimum thickness of base metal, "C"-shaped studs. 9. Furring Anchorages: 16-gage galvanized wire ties, manufacturer's standard wire- type clips, bolts, nails or screws as recommended by furring manufacturers and complying with ASTM C754. 2.03. GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Complying with ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. United States Gypsum Corporation. b. Georgia Pacific Gypsum. c. National Gypsum Company. d. Or Equal approved by the Architect and Owner in accordance with General Conditions. B. Fire-Resistant Type X: 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. D. Wet locations: Fiberglass faced (no paper facing) Moisture Resistant Board – Fire rated where required. 1. Use at kitchen walls behind cabinets, bathrooms – all surfaces, utility rooms, and where indicated on drawings. 2. USG Glass Mat Panels 3. GP Dens Amor Plus Interior Panels 4. Thickness: 1/2 or 5/8 inch. 5. Long Edges: Tapered. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Gypsum Board and Plaster 09 20 00 Page 5 of 8 2.04. TILE BACKER BOARD A. Cementitious fiber-mat reinforced sheathing: ASTM C 1325, ANSI A118.9, cementitious backer board in thicknesses shown on drawings. 1. Use behind tile installations and behind all tubs and showers. 2. Thickness: ½” and 5/8” as appropriate. ¼” allowed for use behind showers and tubs. 3. Available Products: Subject to compliance with contract requirements, products which may be incorporated into the work include the following: a. USG: Durock. b. James Hardie: HardieBacker. c. Georgia Pacific: DensShield d. Or Equal approved by the Architect and Owner in accordance with General Conditions. 2.05. JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 2.06. ACCESSORIES A. Ceiling access panel to have steel frame and panel, lockable, baked on white enamel, size 30”x30” model DSC-214M by Karp or equal, rated as required. B. Acoustical sealant shall be one part acrylic latex sealant (non-sag) conforming to ASTM C834. C. Fasteners 1. Screws for attachment of gypsum board to light-gage steel studs and metal furring shall be Type S, self-drilling Phillips head drywall screws conforming to ASTM C1002. 2. Screws for attachment of gypsum board to heavier gage steel studs and for attaching metal studs to pressed metal frames shall be Type S-12, self-tapping, Phillips head drywall screws conforming to ASTM C100 3. Screws for attaching gypsum sheathing and veneer anchors shall be cadmium plated. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Gypsum Board and Plaster 09 20 00 Page 6 of 8 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01. INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Subcontractor shall inspect job conditions and related work and report to the General Contractor conditions affecting gypsum board and plaster work. Commencement of work shall constitute acceptance of conditions. B. Refer to the architectural drawings, mechanical drawings and the specifications for demolition, plumbing, heating, ventilating and air condition, and electrical work related to plastering work. C. Work under this Section shall be properly coordinated with the work of other Sections. In no case shall work of other Sections which is to be concealed by the work of this Section be so concealed until it has been inspected. D. Make all changes and adjustments in gypsum board and lath and all other work under this Section as needed to accommodate the work of other Sections and other trades. 3.02. INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical work which is to be placed in or behind partition framing. 3.03. FRAMING INSTALLATION: A. Erect framing and panels plumb, level and square in strict accordance with approved drawings. B. Handle and lift prefabricated panels in a manner to not cause distortion in any member. C. Anchor runner track securely to the supporting structure. Install concrete anchors only after full compressive strength has been achieved. D. Butt all track joints. Securely anchor abutting pieces of track to a common structural element, or splice them together. E. Align and plumb studs, and securely attach to the flanges or webs of both upper and lower tracks. F. Attach wall stud bridging when required in a manner to prevent stud rotation. Space bridging rows according to manufacturer's recommendations. G. Provided temporary bracing until erection is completed. H. Where indicated in the drawings, provide for structural vertical movement using means in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. I. Cut all framing components square for attachment to perpendicular members or as required for an angular fit against abutting members. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Gypsum Board and Plaster 09 20 00 Page 7 of 8 3.04. FURRED WALL SYSTEM ERECTION A. All furred walls shall be fire stopped, at least once between the floor and the underside of slab 1. Fire stopping shall run continuously between vertical framing and shall be constructed of steel framing members, or other material as may be approved by the authority having jurisdiction. B. Direct Furring Channel Attachment: Attach metal furring channels vertically or horizontally spaced 24 inches on center to masonry or concrete surfaces with hammer set or power driven fasteners or concrete stub nails staggered 24 inches on center opposite flanges. Nest channels 8 inches at splices and anchor with two fasteners in each wing. C. For channels positioned horizontally, attach a furring channel not more than 4 inches from both the floor line and the ceiling line. For channels positioned vertically, attach a horizontal channel between each vertical channel at a height of 4 inches above floor line. D. Provide free standing furring where indicated on 2-1/2 inch 20 gage studs at 16 inches on center. E. Attach mitered furring channels horizontally around masonry corners at window locations. Miter channels in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. Furring with metal studs: Install steel studs, top and bottom runners and gypsum boards as hereinbefore specified for metal stud partitions. Brace studs to walls wherever furred height exceeds manufacturer's recommended limit height for stud indicated. Install insulation full height of stud. 3.05. CEILING GRILLAGE INSTALLATION A. Coordinate location of hangers with other work. B. Install ceiling grillage independent of walls. C. Space main carrying channels at maximum 48 inches on center, not more than 6 inches from perimeter walls. Lap splices minimum 12 inches and secure together 2 inches from each end of splices. D. Place furring channels perpendicular to carrying channels at 16 inches on center not more than 2 inches from perimeter walls. Lap splices minimum 8 inches and secure together from each end of splice. E. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels, with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24 inches past each end of openings. 3.06. GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install gypsum board in accordance with recommendations of GA-216, and the manufacturer's printed instructions. All fire-rated partitions shall conform to the requirements for the fire-rated designs and hourly rating indicated. B. Ceilings: Apply ceiling board using maximum practical lengths with the long dimension at right angles to the furring. Fit joints neatly and accurately. Stagger end joints from those in adjacent panel rows. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Gypsum Board and Plaster 09 20 00 Page 8 of 8 C. Apply single layer gypsum panels either parallel to studs or perpendicular to studs, whichever direction is more practical and economical. Position all edges over studs of parallel application; all ends over studs for perpendicular application. Use maximum practical length to minimize end joints. Fit ends and edges closely, not forced together. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partition. D. Fasten all gypsum board and lath with screws to furring or framing. Staples shall not be used. Fasten all wallboard by means of power-driven screws located not over 12 inches on center along edges and in the field except at fire-rated partitions which shall be fastened 12 inches on center in the field and 8 inches on center along the edges. Stagger screws in adjacent sheets on opposite sides of joints. Depress screw heads slightly below surface of the wallboard. Do not drive screws closer than 3/8 inch to edges and ends of the board. Where double layer wallboard application is indicated, both layers shall be applied by use of power-driven screws. E. Install gypsum board control joints where required, and as indicated on the drawings. 3.07. FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below: 1. GA Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas and concealed areas not exposed to view. 2. GA Level 3: Not used. 3. GA Level 4: Panel surfaces that will be exposed to view (typical panels). 4. GA Level 5: On all fiberglass faced panels and where indicated on drawings. 3.08. ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Installer shall advise the Contractor of requirements for the protection of gypsum board from deterioration and damage during the remainder of the construction period. B. Defects of damage in the gypsum wallboard shall be repaired or replaced before final painting operations are started. The resulting repaired area shall be flat, true and plumb with adjacent surfaces and shall have a smooth surface ready for decoration. C. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces which have been stained, marred or otherwise damaged during the plastering work. When plastering work is completed, remove unused materials, containers and equipment and clean floors of plaster debris leaving them broom clean. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Ceramic Tile 09 30 00 Page 1 of 6 SECTION 09 30 00 Ceramic Tile PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein. B. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Ceramic tile floors 2. Ceramic tile backsplash at kitchen counters. C. Alternates: Not Applicable. D. Install Items Furnished Under Other Sections: Not Applicable. E. Furnish Items to Other Sections: Not applicable. F. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 2. Section 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY 3. Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS 4. Section 09 20 00 GYPSUM BOARD 5. Section 09 68 00 CARPETING 6. Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING 1.03. SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete shop drawings in accordance with the General Provisions. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and complete range of color samples for quarry tile, marble thresholds, setting mortar, grout and accessories. C. Samples: Submit samples of quarry tile, ceramic tile, marble thresholds, in complete range of colors for final selection. D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing tile pattern for review by the Architect prior to commencing any tile work. Shop drawing to be based on tile pattern indicated on the drawings. Drawings must include exact proposed layout for all surfaces based on field dimensions. 1.04. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable provisions of the following trade standard publications shall apply to work of this Section, and are hereby incorporated into the Contract Documents. 1. "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation", latest edition, as published by the Tile Council of America, Inc., F113-94, W244-94. 2. ANSI A108.1 - 1985: Installation of ceramic tile with Portland cement mortar. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Ceramic Tile 09 30 00 Page 2 of 6 3. ANSI A108.5 - 1985: Installation of ceramic tile with dry set or with Portland cement mortar. 4. ANSI A108.10- 1985: Installation of grout in tile work. 5. ANSI A118.1 - 1985: Dryset Portland cement mortar. 6. ANSI A118.4 - 1985: Latex Portland cement mortar. 7. ANSI A118.6 - 1985: Ceramic tile grouts. 1.05. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all products to job site in manufacturer's unopened containers with grade seals unbroken and labels intact. B. Store and handle materials in a manner to prevent damage or contamination by water, freezing or foreign matter. 1.06. JOB CONDITIONS A. Examine surfaces to receive tile to see that they are in proper condition to receive the work specified. Starting work in any area shall constitute acceptance of that surface. Defects resulting from use of accepted surfaces shall be corrected by tile contractor at no additional expense to the Owner. B. Tile, adhesive, grout, and the room where work is to be installed shall be maintained at a minimum of 60 F for at least 24 hours before, during, and for 48 hours after final grouting. C. Protect adjoining work surface before tile work begins. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01. TILE PRODUCTS A. Porcelain Ceramic Tiles for Floors: Standard grade tile and trim conforming to ANSI A137.1 standards: 1. Applicable Standards: a. Water absorption : < 0.5 % (ASTM C373) b. Breaking strength: > 275 lbs. (ASTM C648) c. Chemical Resistance: Resistant (ASTM C650) 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with contract requirements, products which may be incorporated into the work include porcelain ceramic tile by the following manufacturers as specified below: Daltile, American Olean, Pantheon, Or Equal approved by the Architect and Owner in accordance with General Conditions. 3. Type 1 Tile: Daltile Colorbody Porcelain: Assemble, size 12x12; or equal as approved by architect. 4. Colors to be selected by architect. Tile type’s may be required to be ordered in more than one color Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Ceramic Tile 09 30 00 Page 3 of 6 B. Porcelain Ceramic Tiles for Baack Splash: Standard grade tile and trim conforming to ANSI A137.1 standards: 1. Applicable Standards: a. Water absorption : < 0.20.0 % (ASTM C373) b. Breaking strength: > 120-230 lbs. (ASTM C648) c. Chemical Resistance: Resistant (ASTM C650) 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with contract requirements, products which may be incorporated into the work include porcelain ceramic tile by the following manufacturers as specified below: Daltile, American Olean, Pantheon, Or Equal approved by the Architect and Owner in accordance with General Conditions. 3. Type 1 Tile: Daltile Color Wheel Classic, Arctic White, Glossy, square, size 3x6; or equal as approved by architect. 2.02. SETTING PRODUCTS A. Portland cement mortar: 1. Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C150, Type I, gray or white. 2. Aggregate shall be fine sand in accordance with ASTM C144. Fine sand shall be clean, graded, and shall pass a 16-mesh screen. 3. Water shall be clean and potable. 4. Mortar to be 1 part Portland cement and 6 parts damp sand by volume. B. 100 % epoxy grout. C. Cleavage membrane e to be 15 lb. roofing felt or 4 mil polyethylene film. D. Bond coat to be Portland cement paste on a bed that is still plastic or dry set mortar or latex-Portland cement mortar on a cured bed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01. SURFACE PREPARATION A. Prior to commencing ceramic tile work the tile Contractor shall inspect surfaces to receive tile and accessories and he shall prepare the surfaces to insure a satisfactory tile installation. Installation of tile work shall not proceed until satisfactory conditions are provided which include: 1. All surfaces shall be dry, clean, free of oily or waxy films and firm. B. Maximum variation in surfaces to receive tile shall be as follows: 1. Prior to installing wall tile, ensure surfaces are plumb and straight, with maximum surface variation of 1/8 inch in 8 feet. 2. Where surfaces are inadequate grind concrete smooth and/or apply leveling compound to meet surface requirements. 3.02. INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. All materials shall be installed by experienced mechanics and in accordance with the methods of installation detailed in the Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation by the Tile Council of America, Inc. B. C. Install tile backer board according to manufacturer’s instructions. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Ceramic Tile 09 30 00 Page 4 of 6 D. Install waterproofing membrane according to manufacturer’s instructions. E. Layout tile according to approved tile pattern. F. Lay out work so that no tile less than half-size occurs. Align joints at right angles to each other and straight with walls to conform to patterns selected. Verify locations of accessories before installing tile. Coordinate with plumbing and other trades. Fully tile behind all surface-mounted items. G. Install all tile using lighting conditions that will closely approximate the proposed lighting required in the areas involved in order to achieve uniformity in finished work. H. Smooth cut edges: Install tile without jagged or flaked edges. All tile to be saw cut with diamond blade wet system for tile work. No chipped tile will be acceptable. I. Supply all trim and accessories required to respond to layout requirements including, bullnoses, edge tiles, cove tiles, etc. 3.03. GROUTING A. Do not commence grouting for at least 48 hours after placing of tile. Follow specific instructions of listed standards. Where special acid-resisting grout is required, mix and apply in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Latex Portland cement grout shall consist of dry-set grout with latex additive and shall be prepared according to grout manufacturer's recommendations. C. Force maximum grout into joints with trowel or squeegee. Before grout sets, strike or tool joints to base of cushion and fill all skips and gaps. D. Cure grout joints by maintaining damp condition for 3 days by sponging down, fog spraying, or other methods approved by the Architect. 3.04. PROTECTION A. The tile subcontractor shall exercise every reasonable precaution to avoid damage to the work of other trades and shall repair at his own expense any damage so caused. He shall protect his work at all times and shall arrange with the General Contractor for closing off of all traffic and other work when this is necessary to avoid all damage to the finished surfaces before they are set up. 3.05. ADJUSTING A. Correction of Defective Work: For a period of one year following Substantial Completion, return to the job and correct all defective work. Defective work includes, without limitation, tiles broken in normal use due to deficiencies in the setting bed, loose tile or loose grout and all other defects which may develop as a consequence of poor workmanship or defective materials. B. Nothing in the above paragraph shall alter or reduce the Contractor's obligation to perform the Work of this Contract fully, or reduce the Owner's rights under law to recover damages during the full statutory period allowed for the Contractor's failure to perform. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Ceramic Tile 09 30 00 Page 5 of 6 3.06. CLEAN-UP A. Keep work areas clean during progress of tile installation. Remove empty cartons and sweep out excess mortar and other debris daily. B. Upon completion of setting and grouting, thoroughly sponge, and wash tile. Finally polish glazed tile with clean, dry cloths. C. At completion of installation work, remove all tools, equipment, containers and debris from job and leave work areas broom clean. D. Replace or restore work of other trades damaged or soiled by the tile work. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Ceramic Tile 09 30 00 Page 6 of 6 This Page Intentionally Left Blank Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Acoustic Ceiling Panels 09 51 13 Page 1 of 6 SECTION 095113 Acoustic Ceiling Panels PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Acoustical ceiling tiles and panels rated and unrated. 2. Suspension systems, grid systems and ceiling hangers, rated and unrated. 3. Acoustical sealant at edge moldings at acoustical ceilings. B. Alternates: Not Applicable. C. Items To Be Installed Only: Install the following items as furnished by the designated Sections: D. Items To Be Furnished Only: Not Applicable. E. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 09 20 00 - GYPSUM BOARD AND PLASTER for gypsum board ceilings and soffits. 2. Section 26 00 00 - ELECTRICAL for light fixture and alarm system components located in ceilings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following: 1. Ceiling suspension members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. Furnish layouts for cast-in- place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices whose installation is specified in other Sections. 3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. 4. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Acoustic Ceiling Panels 09 51 13 Page 2 of 6 C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6 inch square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12 inch long Samples of each type, finish, and color. D. Asbestos Certification: Manufacturer's written certification that acoustical ceiling products contain no asbestos (0.0000%). Product labels indicating that it is the user's responsibility to test the products for asbestos are unacceptable and sufficient cause for rejection of the product on site. E. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. 2. Suspension Systems: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency. b. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Acoustic Ceiling Panels 09 51 13 Page 3 of 6 B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. 3. Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, provide one of the following products for each type indicated. B. Products specified are by Armstrong World industries. Equal products by USG, Certainteed, or approved equal are acceptable. 2.02 STANDARD ACOUSTIC PANELS A. Product: FINE FISSURED, 1728 square Lay-In 15/16 as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries. 1. Location: See Finish Schedule 2. Surface Texture: Medium 3. Composition: Mineral Fiber 4. Color: White 5. Size: 24 in x 24 in 6. Edge Profile: Square Lay-In 15/16 in 7. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM C 423; Classified with UL label on product carton 0.55 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Acoustic Ceiling Panels 09 51 13 Page 4 of 6 8. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC) : ASTM C 1414; Classified with UL label on product carton 33 9. Articulation Class (AC): 10. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Fire Resistive 11. Light Reflectance (LR) White Panel: ASTM E 1477; 0.85 12. Dimensional Stability: HumiGuard Plus 13. Recycle Content: Post-Consumer - 0% - 1% Pre-Consumer - 33% - 54% 14. Suspension System: Prelude XL 15/126 2.03 RATED ACOUSTIC PANELS A. Product: FINE FISSURED, FireGuard square Lay-In 15/16 as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries. 15. Location: See Finish Schedule 16. Surface Texture: Medium 17. Composition: Mineral Fiber 18. Color: White 19. Size: 24 in x 24 in 20. Edge Profile: Square Lay-In 15/16 in 21. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM C 423; Classified with UL label on product carton 0.55 22. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC) : ASTM C 1414; Classified with UL label on product carton 33 23. Articulation Class (AC): 24. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Fire Resistive 25. Light Reflectance (LR) White Panel: ASTM E 1477; 0.85 26. Dimensional Stability: HumiGuard Plus 27. Recycle Content: Post-Consumer - 0% - 1% Pre-Consumer - 33% - 54% 28. Suspension System: Prelude XL 15/126 FireGuard 2.04 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Product: PRELUDE XL 15/16" 7300 Exposed Tee as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries. 1. Components: Main beams and cross tees, base metal and end detail, fabricated from commercial quality hot dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653. Main beams and cross tees are double-web steel construction with type exposed flange design. Exposed surfaces chemically cleansed, capping prefinished galvanized steel in baked polyester paint. Main beams and cross tees shall have rotary stitching. a. Structural Classification: ASTM C 635 Intermediate Duty. b. Color: White and match the actual color of the selected ceiling tile, unless noted otherwise. c. Sustainability: Environmental Product Declaration (EPD), Health Product Declaration (HPD) 2. Attachment Devices: a. Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated. 3. Wire for Hangers and Ties: a. ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft annealed, with a yield stress load of at least time three design load, but not less than 12 gauge. 4. Edge Moldings and Trim: a. 7800HRC - 12ft Hemmed Angle Molding. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Acoustic Ceiling Panels 09 51 13 Page 5 of 6 2.05 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 1. The layout and installation of acoustical panel ceilings and suspension systems shall be coordinated with other work penetrating the ceiling. This includes, but is not limited to, light fixtures, HVAC diffusers and equipment, and fire suppression system components. 2. Acoustical panels shall be cut and fit around light fixtures, HVAC diffusers and equipment and fire suppression system components to set flush or recessed as recommended by manufacturer. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Acoustic Ceiling Panels 09 51 13 Page 6 of 6 performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 7. Space hangers not more than 48 o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 2. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Resilient Flooring 09 65 00 1 of 8 SECTION 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein B. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Vinyl sheet goods in baths and as indicated on Finish Schedule. 2. LVP-1 Vinyl luxury tile plank within units and as indicated on Finish Schedule. a. Beauflor Essence Planks, Style Name: Essence Plank Dry Back, 7” x 49”, direct glue down. 3. LVP-2 Vinyl luxury tile plank at common spaces including elevator cab and as indicated on Finish Schedule. a. CORtec Stone, 12 x 24, direct glue down. 4. VCT in corridors and as indicated on Finish Schedule. 5. Standard Vinyl Base and as indicated on Finish Schedule. 6. Solid Vinyl Base and as indicated on Finish Schedule. 7. Rubber stair treads, risers and landings as indicated on Finish Schedule. 8. Glue down acoustic membrane over subfloor. 9. Floor prep with cement based floor levelling compound. 10. Entry Walk-off Floor Mat C. Alternates: Not Applicable D. Install Items Furnished Under Other Sections: Not Applicable. E. Furnish Items to Other Sections: Not Applicable. F. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 01 22 00 UNIT PRICESS a. Floor leveling and patching Unit Price 2. Section 03 30 00 CONCRETE 3. Section 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 4. Section 06 16 00 SHEATHING 5. Section 06 17 53 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 6. Section 062000 FINISH CARPENTRY 7. Section 14 21 00 TRACTION ELEVATORS Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Resilient Flooring 09 65 00 2 of 8 1.01. SUBMITTALS A. All submittals, including shop drawings, manufacturer's specifications and product data shall be submitted for the following in accordance with the requirements of Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures and Substitutions. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data including installation instructions for resilient flooring, vinyl base, stair treads, adhesives and all accessories. C. Samples: Submit color samples of flooring, base, stair treads, and accessories; duplicate 12"x12" sized samples of each flooring material; and 12" long samples of base and transition pieces. 1.02. REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E 648 Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source 2. ASTM E 662 Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials 3. ASTM F 710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring 4. ASTM F 1482, Standard Guide to Wood Underlayment Products Available for Use Under Resilient Flooring 5. ASTM F 1700 Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Tile 6. ASTM F 1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base 7. ASTM F 1869 Standard Test Method for Measuring Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride 8. ASTM F 2170 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes 1.03. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The work under this Section shall be performed by a subcontractor who has experience in the type of work specified herein. The actual work shall be done by qualified and experienced mechanics working under the subcontractor's supervision, or under the supervision of an experienced supervisor. B. Resilient flooring contractor shall provide type of flooring and accessories as produced by a single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, and leveling compounds. C. All resilient flooring shall be rated Class A or B as defined in Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures, NFPA 101, 1976, when tested in accordance with ASTM Designation E8 1. Proof of such certification shall be forwarded to the Architect. 1.04. DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials to the job site in original unopened containers with manufacturer's brand name clearly marked thereon. B. Store all materials to protect them from moisture and extremes of heat and cold. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Resilient Flooring 09 65 00 3 of 8 C. After installation, in areas requiring further work by other trades, the general contractor shall protect all carpeting by a layer of non-staining reinforced heavy building paper with all edges lapped not less than six inches (6") and sealed with non-staining adhesive. The protective paper shall be kept in repair. 1.05. JOB CONDITIONS A. Examine all surfaces to receive resilient flooring to see that they are in proper condition to receive the work specified. Report to the Architect in writing any surfaces that are not acceptable. Starting of work in any area shall constitute acceptance of such surface as being satisfactory, and any defects resulting from use of such accepted surface shall be corrected by resilient flooring subcontractor at no additional expense to the Owner. B. Maintain minimum temperature of 65 degrees F in spaces to receive resilient flooring for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Store resilient flooring materials in spaces where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation. Subsequently, maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F in areas where work is completed. C. Install resilient flooring and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Do not install resilient flooring over concrete slabs until the latter have been cured and are sufficiently dry to achieve bond with adhesive as determined by resilient flooring manufacturer's recommended bond and no moisture test. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01. FLOOR COVERING MATERIALS A. Luxury Vinyl Plank Flooring: 1. LVP-1 For Use in Units as indicated on Finish Schedule: Beauflor Essence Planks a. Style Name: Essence Plank Dry Back b. Bevel: 4 Sided Micro Bevel c. Nominal Wear Layer Thickness: 22 Mils (0.55 Mm) d. Nominal Product Thickness: 2.3 Mm e. Nominal Plank Size: 7.01” W X 49.21”L X .09” H f. Installation Method: Direct Glue Down g. Installation: Adhesives and accessories as recommended by manufacturer. h. Lifetime Limited Residential Wear, Manufcturing Defect, Fade, Stain, Waterproof Warranty: 10 Year Limited Light Commercial Wear, Manufacturing Defect Warranty 2. LVP-2 For Use in Corridors and common areas as indicated on Finish Schedule: CORtec Stone a. Style Name: CORtec Stone b. Bevel: 4 Sided Micro Bevel c. Nominal Plank Size: 12.01" x 24.02" x 8 mm d. Installation Method: Direct Glue Down e. Installation: Adhesives and accessories as recommended by manufacturer. f. Lifetime Limited Residential Wear, Manufcturing Defect, Fade, Stain, Waterproof Warranty: 10 Year Limited Light Commercial Wear, Manufacturing Defect Warranty 3. Furnish 5% replacement stock at end of job. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Resilient Flooring 09 65 00 4 of 8 B. Homogeneous Sheet Vinyl Flooring: Armstrong Accolade Plus. 1. Description: An unbacked, nonlayered, homogeneous sheet vinyl flooring. Protected by a UV-cured polyurethane finish, the colors and pattern detail are dispersed uniformly throughout the thickness of the product. Color pigments are insoluble in water and resistant to cleaning agents and light. 2. Homogeneous sheet flooring shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F1913 Standard Specification for Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering Without Backing 3. Pattern and Color: in [%COLOR%][color selected from the range currently available from Armstrong Flooring Inc.] 4. Width: 6 ft. (1.83 m). 5. Length: up to 65.6 lineal feet (20 meters) 6. Thickness: 0.080 in. (2.0 mm) 7. Wear layer thickness: 0.080 in. (2.0 mm) 8. Vinyl Weld Rod: a. Solid color vinyl weld rod from same source manufacturer, and intended for heat welding of seams. Color shall be compatible with field color of flooring or as selected by Architect to contrast with field color of flooring. Color selected from the range currently available. 9. Seam Adhesive: a. Seam Adhesive at seams as recommended by the resilient flooring manufacturer. 2.02. RUBBER TREADS, RISERS AND STRINGERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer’s: Roppe, Tarkett, or equal. B. Heavy Duty Ribbed Square Nose Tread and landing flooring: 1. Nose Type: Square angled 2. Leading Edge Thickness: 1/4" (6.35 mm) 3. Back Edge Thickness: 1/8" (3.2 mm) 4. Landing tile thickness 0.125” (3.18 mm) 5. Pattern and colors selected by Owner 6. Contrasting color to Riser C. Risers 1. Height: 7" (177.8 mm) 2. Thickness: 0.080 (2 mm) 3. Contrasting color to Tread D. Rubber Stringers 1. Thickness: 0.080" (2 mm) 2. 10" (25.4 cm) height x 6 ft. (1.83 cm) long 2.03. SOUND ABSORBING UNDERLAYMENT A. Sound absorbing underlayment for use in double glue down installations to be a single layer membrane product: Proflex LV-100 by Proflex Products, Floor Muffler Ultra Seal by Diversified Industries, AccousticTECH LV Membrane by Finitec hardwood Products, Inc. 1. Use moisture resistant adhesives that are compatible with the floor and underlayment membrane. Use accessories recommended by manufacture and compatible with finish flooring. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Resilient Flooring 09 65 00 5 of 8 2.04. Walk-Off Floor Mat A. A Heat welded flexible extruded PVC with 86% pre-consumer and 1.4% postconsumer recycled content when produced in black and 27.52% preconsumer and 1.4% post- consumer recycled content when produced in gray. B. 100% Premium Polyamide Nylon Fibers (6.6). Contact our trained Product Specialists for additional insert options. Surface Aspect Open construction vinyl grid with nylon fiber inserts. C. Technical Specifications: 1. Thickness: 3/8” 2. Roll Sizes: 3’ x 40’ and 4’ x 40’ 3. Custom Sizes: 3’ and 4’ wide by custom lengths up to 40’ 4. Appearance: Deeply etched textured surface with alternating carpet strips providing slip resistant properties. 5. Workability: Flexible PVC is easy to roll up for cleaning and is easily trimmed on site to fit any application. 6. Durability: One-piece welded construction ensures long, maintenance-free life. 7. Coefficient Of Friction: 0.97 Dry; 1.01 Wet (per ASTM C1028) 8. Critical Radiant Flux: Class 1 (per ASTM E648) 9. Maximum Rolling Load: 1,200 lbs (per wheel assuming level base install) 10. UV Stability: Resistance to PVC degradation (fully pigmented) 2.05. RESILIENT BASE: A. Solid rubber base to be Roppe Contours #65 Vertical, PV4065, 4 5/8" x 3/8", Color as selected by owner B. Vinyl Base to be standard vinyl cove base, Roppe vinyl cove base1/8” thick by 4 ½” , Color as selected by owner 2.06. SURFACE PREPARATION A. Sub-Floor Filler and Leveling Compound: One component, portland cement based self- leveling underlayment and patching compound equal to Bondex BDX-1000, Ardex K-15, or equal material reaching a compressive strength of 5,000 psi. 1. See Section 01 22 00 Unit Prices. 2.07. ACCESSORIES / ADHESIVES / SEALERS A. Reducer strips shall be pure vinyl of thickness as required to form a smooth transition between floor thicknesses. B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; of types recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer for specific material. C. Adhesives to be low VOC with < 250 grams/liter rating. D. Sealer and Wax: Type recommended by resilient flooring material manufacturer for material type and location. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Resilient Flooring 09 65 00 6 of 8 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01. SURFACE PREPARATION A. Removal of existing flooring to expose subfloor as detailed on drawings for proper installation of new work is performed by others prior to work of this contract. Flooring Contractor is to perform final cleaning, scraping and preparation of floors to remove remaining glues and debris to provide a smooth surface for tile work. B. Prior to commencing resilient flooring work the Flooring Contractor shall inspect surfaces to receive flooring and accessories and shall prepare the floor to ensure a satisfactory installation. Installation shall not proceed until satisfactory conditions are provided which include: 1. All surfaces shall be dry, clean, free of oily or waxy films and firm. Concrete surfaces shall be free of form oil and curing compounds. 2. Concrete floors are to be scraped and abraded and all holes, uneven areas etc. are to be filled with an approved cement based leveling and patching material, compatible with flooring adhesives. 3. Monolithic concrete floors and floor fill concrete shall receive a steel-trowel and fine broom finish. 4. Floor levelling and patching is subject to Section 01 22 00 Unit Prices. 5. Maximum variation in surfaces to receive tile shall be as follows: a. Prior to installing floor flooring, ensure surfaces are level, with maximum surface variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. b. Prior to installing wall flooring, ensure surfaces are plumb and straight, with maximum surface variation of 1/8 inch in 8 feet. c. Where surfaces are inadequate grind concrete smooth and/or apply leveling compound to meet surface requirements. 3.02. INSTALLATION - SOUND ABSORBING UNDERLAYMENT A. Do not start work until subfloor surface is prepared and ready to receive material according to these specifications and underlayment and finish floor manufacturer recommendations. B. Install according to manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions using recommended adhesives and methods. 3.03. INSTALLATION - RESILIENT FLOORING A. Installation of sheet goods shall extend under all cabinets, wall to wall. B. Installation of resilient flooring shall be in strict accordance with instructions of selected manufacturer. C. Full width sheets of resilient flooring shall be used whenever possible. Installer shall consult with Architect about location of any joints. D. Open floor tile cartons, enough to cover each area, and mix tile to ensure shade variations do not occur within any one area. E. Clean substrate. Spread cement evenly and in quantity recommended by manufacturer to ensure adhesion over entire area of installation. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of flooring before initial set. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Resilient Flooring 09 65 00 7 of 8 F. Set flooring in place, press with 100 lb or heavier roller to ensure full adhesion. G. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern. H. Install with minimum tile width 1/2 full size at room or area perimeter, with pattern grain alternating with adjacent unit to produce basket weave pattern. I. Terminate resilient flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar. J. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges where flooring terminates. K. Scribe flooring to walls, cabinets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. 3.04. INSTALLATION - ACCESSORIES C. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practicable, with preformed corner units, or fabricated from base materials with mitered or coped inside corners. Tightly bond base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. 1. On masonry surfaces, or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 2. Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain long continuous runs with no pieces less than 12' long. Use premolded sections for external and internal corners and exposed ends. 3. Install straight and level to a maximum variation of plus or minus 1/8 inch over 10 feet. 4. Install topset cove base after resilient flooring is installed. Install toeless straight base before carpeting is installed. Hold the bottom of toeless straight base 3/8 inch above underlayment where carpeting is scheduled. D. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with adhesive. Install edging strips at edges of flooring which would otherwise be exposed. E. Apply resilient accessories to stairs as indicated and in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.05. PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP F. Prohibit traffic from floor finish for 48 hours after installation. G. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base and wall surfaces without damage. H. Clean, seal and wax floor and base surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. I. Protect resilient flooring with heavy Kraft type paper, taped at perimeter and joints. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Resilient Flooring 09 65 00 8 of 8 3.06. GUARANTEE J. All work, materials and labor performed under this Section shall be guaranteed in writing to the Owner by the Contractor and manufacturer for a period of one year, all in accordance with the requirements of Part A. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Painting 09 90 00 Page 1 of 10 SECTION 09 90 00 Painting PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and other division 1 specification sections, apply to this section B. Reference is made to Exhibits as follows: 1. EXHIBIT C – Asbestos and Hazardous Materials Report, dated 10.7.19 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein. B. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Preparation of all interior and exterior surfaces to receive paint. 2. Preparation of surfaces involving hazardous materials such as lead: of all hazardous materials, see hazardous material report referenced as Exhibit C for lead and asbestos, including lead paint from trim to remain that is within heights capable of coming into human contact. 3. Painting of all new work except as noted. 4. Exterior Painting: a. Stucco spandrels. b. Exterior doors and frames: prime and 2 finish coats. c. Windows are prefinished. d. Entrance and interior storefronts are prefinished 5. Interior Painting: a. Drywall walls and ceiling: prime and 2 finish coats. b. Interior wood and composite doors, frames, base and wood trim: i. Unprimed wood: Prime and 2 finish coats. ii. Factory primed wood: 2 finish coats. c. Interior hollow metal doors and frames: prime and 2 finish coats. B. Alternates: Not Applicable. C. Install Items Furnished Under Other Sections: Not Applicable. D. Furnish Items to Other Sections: Not Applicable. E. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY 2. Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS 3. Section 08 14 00 WOOD AND COMPOSITE DOORS AND FRAMES 4. Section 08 53 13 WINDOWS 5. Section 09 20 00 GYPSUM BOARD Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Painting 09 90 00 Page 2 of 10 1.03. SUBMITTALS A. All submittals, including shop drawings, manufacturer's specifications and product data shall be submitted for the following in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures and Substitutions. B. Product data: Submit manufacturer's product data for paints including application instructions and flame rating certifications. C. Samples: 1. The Architect will furnish a schedule of colors for each area and surface. Prepare color samples proposed for use for Architect's approval. Identify each sample as to finish, formula, color name and number and sheen name and gloss units. 2. Samples of all colors, stains, and finishes shall be prepared in advance of requirements so as not to delay work, and shall be submitted to the Architect for approval before any work is commenced. Any work done without such approval shall be redone to Architect's satisfaction, at the painting subcontractor's expense. i. Samples shall include selection samples and 12” x 12” verification samples. 1.04. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with all regulations, including but not limited to, OSHA, EPA, and hauling and disposal regulations of the authority having jurisdiction. B. Preparation of surfaces involving hazardous materials such as lead: See hazardous material report referenced as Exhibit C for lead and asbestos, including lead paint from trim to remain. Follow all federal, state and local regulations during preparation and lead removal. C. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. D. The painting subcontractor shall determine that the materials specified in the painting schedule are compatible with shop coats to which these materials are to be applied, and he shall bring to the Architect's attention any condition which may require a change in the Specifications before proceeding with his work. Failure to do so shall be construed as acceptance of the paints specified, and the painting subcontractor shall correct at his own expense any defects in his work resulting from the use of such materials. E. Do not paint over code-required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates. 1.05. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver paint materials in sealed original labeled containers, bearing manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, color designation and instructions for mixing and/or reducing. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Painting 09 90 00 Page 3 of 10 B. Provide adequate storage facilities. Store paint in well ventilated area in a manner which meets the requirements of applicable codes and fire regulations. C. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustions. Each space shall be provided with a fire extinguisher of carbon dioxide or dry chemical type, bearing the label of the National Board of Fire Underwriters and tag of recent inspection. 1.06. JOB CONDITIONS A. Examine surfaces to receive paint and finishes to see that they are in proper condition to receive the work specified. Starting work in any area shall constitute acceptance of that surface. Defects resulting from use of accepted surfaces shall be corrected at no additional expense to the Owner. B. Do not begin final painting until work of other trades, except for finish flooring, has been substantially completed. C. No painting shall be done in rainy weather or until the materials are thoroughly dry. If requested measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture contents of surfaces are below following maximums: 1. Veneer plaster: 12 percent. 2. Interior located wood: 7 percent. 3. Concrete block: 12 percent. D. Ensure surface temperatures or the surrounding air temperature is above 40 degrees F. before applying finishes. Minimum application temperatures for latex paints for interior work is 45 degrees F. and 50 degrees F. for exterior work. Minimum application temperature for urethane finishes is 60 degrees F. E. Provide adequate continuous ventilation and sufficient heating facilities to maintain temperatures above 45 degrees F. for 24 hours before, during and 48 hours after application of finishes. F. Provide minimum 40 foot candles of lighting on surfaces to be finished. 1.07. SCAFFOLDING A. Painting subcontractor is to provide all staging, platforms, ladders, and other scaffolding necessary for the performance of this work. Observe all requirements of OSHA with respect to safety of scaffolding. 1.08. MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Leave on premises, where directed by Owner, factory sealed unopened one gallon containers as follows: 1 gallon of each main wall color, and 1 gallon of each trim / accent color. B. Additional containers to be tightly sealed and clearly labeled for identification. C. Leave on site 2 copies of color chart and room by room color schedule. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Painting 09 90 00 Page 4 of 10 PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01. MANUFACTURER A. Subject to compliance with requirements provide paint products as manufactured by one of the following: 1. Sherwin Williams 2. Pratt & Lambert Inc. (P&L) 3. Benjamin Moore (Moore) 4. Or approved equal. B. Where manufacturer makes more than one grade of any material specified, the painting subcontractor shall use the highest grade of each type, whether or not the material is mentioned by any trade name in these Specifications. 2.02. MATERIALS A. Materials used on the work shall be the brand and quality specified and shall be delivered in the original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact. All materials shall be used only as specified by the manufacturer's direction label on the container. B. Products to be low VOC with < 250 grams/liter rating. C. Colors: 1. Colors will be selected by the Architect from the selection offered by the paint manufacturer. 2. Colors of priming coats (and body coats where specified) shall be lighter than those of finish coat. The Architect shall have unlimited choice of colors without extra cost. 3. Where accent and bright colors are to be selected, primer and first coats shall be white or "off-white" beneath two coats of finish color. 4. Colors shall be pure non-fading pigments, finely ground in approved medium. All materials shall be subject to the Architect's approval. 5. Multiple paint colors shall be used on the project, with up to 3 wall colors, a trim color and ceiling color in any given room. Color change lines to be as indicated on drawings or in approved color schedule. a. Public spaces, halls and corridors to be assigned different colors by floor. D. Sealers and primers shall be as recommended by the finish paint manufacturer. E. Spackle shall be an approved plaster filler. F. Gypsum board joint compound finish system shall be as approved by gypsum board manufacturer. G. Wood filler shall be of the paste type. H. Linseed oil shall be pure, settled, clear and raw or boiled as required to produce best results. I. Thinner shall be the best grade, pure grain spirits of turpentine distilled from the sap of live trees. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Painting 09 90 00 Page 5 of 10 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01. INSPECTION A. Thoroughly examine surfaces scheduled to be painted prior to commencement of work. Report in writing to Owner's Representative, any condition that may potentially affect proper application. Do not commence until such defects have been corrected. 3.02. PREPARATION A. Remove dirt and grime by scrubbing with soapy water or with spirits as described below. Dust clean. B. All wood shall be sandpapered to a smooth, even surface and dusted off. Surface imperfection shall be filled with wood filler and sanded smooth. Larger imperfections including splintered, broken, loose and missing trim pieces shall be brought to the attention of the General Contractor and are to be repaired under Section 6B - Carpentry. No painting shall commence until such defects have been corrected. C. Steel, iron and ductwork shall be cleaned with turpentine or benzine and all greasy or oil substances removed. Rust, scale, paint runs or sags shall be removed by scraping, wire brushing or sandblasting. Abrasions or chipped places in shop coats shall be touched up. D. All aluminum surfaces to be painted shall be wire brushed, washed with a detergent and rinsed clean with water. E. All galvanized metal surfaces to be painted shall be wire brushed, acid etched or cleaned thoroughly with a cutting solvent such as mineral spirits and washed with detergents. F. Masonry surfaces to be painted shall be prepared by removing all dirt, dust, oil and grease stains and efflorescence and by acid etching when necessary to provide good adhesion for the paint. G. All prepared surfaces shall be given a prime coat of an appropriate primer prior to application of finish coats of paint. H. After prime coat inspect painted surfaces to see that they are in proper condition to receive the finish coats. Starting further work in any area shall constitute acceptance of that surface. All minor repairs of scratches, cuts, dimples, ridges and other imperfections that are required are to be carried out by the painting contractor by means of spackle, joint compound, fillers, sanding or other means. Larger imperfections in plaster and drywall surfaces shall be brought to the attention of plaster and gypsum subcontractors for repair under. Application of finish coats of paint shall not commence until all defects have been corrected. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Painting 09 90 00 Page 6 of 10 3.03. PROTECTION A. Abide by local, state and federal regulations in regard to safety and the prevention of or protection against fire. B. Adequately protect other surfaces from paint and damage. Repair damage as a result of inadequate or unsuitable protection. C. Furnish sufficient drop cloths, shields and protective equipment to prevent spray or droppings from fouling surfaces not being painted and in particular, surfaces within storage and preparation area. D. Place cotton waste, cloths and material which may constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. E. Remove electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings and fastenings, prior to painting operations. These items are to be carefully stored, cleaned and replaced on completion of work in each area. Do not use solvent to clean hardware as that may remove permanent lacquer finish. F. The painter shall not use any plumbing fixture or pipe for the disposal of waste materials. Carry all water required to the mixing room and dump all waste materials in containers outside the building. Remove oily rags and other combustible waste materials from the building daily. G. Operating Parts: Unless otherwise indicated, moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts will not require finish painting. H. Any damage to adjacent work caused by paint or painting operations shall be rectified by this subcontractor. 3.04. REMOVAL OF ACCESSORIES A. Prior to painting remove and replace all finished hardware applied to doors, except butts, and be responsible for the removal and replacement of accessories, plates, and fixtures by other trades as necessary for the satisfactory completion of work under this section. B. Doors already in place shall be removed and the top and bottom edges painted as specified. Doors shall be replaced after edges are dry. C. In no case shall there be any attempt to paint around finish hardware, or other removable items which are already in place. 3.05. APPLICATION A. All work shall be done in a workmanlike manner and by skilled mechanics. All materials shall be cut in neatly to spread evenly, flowed on smoothly, free from brush marks, hair, runs and sags. No paint or enamel shall be applied until preceding coat is thoroughly dry and hard. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Painting 09 90 00 Page 7 of 10 B. All spaces shall have permanent lighting operating, be broom-clean and all surfaces dry before painting is started. All dust, dirt, plaster, grease, and other extraneous matter affecting the finish work shall be removed. Foreign matter on surfaces left by other trades shall be removed by the respective trades. C. No exterior painting shall be done in frosty, rainy, damp weather, until the surface is thoroughly dry, or when the temperature is below 50 degrees F. or above 90 degrees F. D. No interior painting will be permitted until the building has been thoroughly dried out. E. In general and unless otherwise specified, exterior paints shall be allowed to dry at least 72 hours between coats and interior paints shall be allowed to dry at least 48 hours between coats. All nail holes, open places or cracks shall be filled with wood filler, tinted to match finish after the priming coat has been applied. F. The painter shall be responsible for and shall rectify any unsatisfactory finishing that results due to surfaces being unsuitable to receive paint. G. All materials shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and any thinning required shall be done in the manner and exclusively with the type of reducer recommended. H. The priming coat and undercoat on all surfaces shall be tinted the approximate shade of the final coat. Consult color schedule before priming all work. Each succeeding coat shall be tinted a slightly different shade from the preceding coat. I. Cracks between wood and metal surfaces shall be filled with paste filler, caulk or spackle before priming. J. All exterior and interior wood finish shall be back-primed immediately following delivery of such materials to job site. K. Priming coat shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the succeeding coats. L. Paint finish shall be dull flat, eggshell, semi-gloss or gloss as selected and directed by the Architect. M. No spray painting will be permitted unless permission is obtained from the Architect and the Owner. 3.06. MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK AND EQUIPMENT A. Paint all exposed metal except stainless steel, hardware, anodized metals and some factory finished items provided under the Mechanical and Electrical Divisions. Paint all exposed wall louvers, radiator enclosures, registers, control piping, grilles, filters, pumps, fans, enclosures, hangers, electrical boxes and all other apparatus and appurtenances. Paint registers and grilles that are not final factory finished. Interiors that show through grilles shall be painted. All pipes, pipe coverings, conduits and ducts shall be painted except in concealed spaces. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Painting 09 90 00 Page 8 of 10 B. All access doors shall be opened and edges of door frame (metal bead) cleaned before painting to prevent chipping when door is opened. The cadmium plate screw used for identification shall be painted to the Standard Color Code System identifying the item it conceals. C. Painting subcontractor shall be held responsible for having reviewed scope of painting work included in Mechanical and Electrical Sections of the specifications and for avoiding the duplication of work included therein. 3.07. EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Products by Sherwin Williams are listed. Equal products by Pratt & Lambert Inc. (P&L), Benjamin Moore (Moore), Or approved equal are acceptable. B. New Ferrous and Non-ferrous Metal (Not Shop-primed) 1. First Coat: Primer: B66W01310 - pro industrial PROCRYL Primer. 2. Second and Third Coats: 2 Coats: B66W01051 - Pro Industrial DTM Acrylic Gloss l. C. Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Metal (Shop Primed) 1. First and Second Coats: 2 Coats: B66W01051 - Pro Industrial DTM Acrylic Gloss. D. Galvanized Metal 1. First Coat: Primer: B50WZ0030 - Galvite® HS Solvent Based Acrylic Coating Off White. 2. Second and Third Coats: 2 Coats: B66W01051 - Pro Industrial DTM Acrylic Gloss. E. Wood Painted (Opaque Finish) 1. First Coat: Primer: Y24W00820 - A-100® Exterior Oil Wood Primer Low VOC . 2. Second and Third Coat: 2 Coats: K33W00251 - Duration® Coating Exterior Latex Satin. F. Wood Natural Finish (Transparent Finish) 1. First Coat and Second Coat: MINWAX Helmsman® Spar Urethane 350 VOC Compliant 2. Third Coats: MINWAX Helmsman® Spar Urethane 350 VOC Compliant Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Painting 09 90 00 Page 9 of 10 3.08. INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Plaster and Gypsum Board Walls 1. First Coat: Primer: B28W02600 - ProMar® 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer. 2. Second and Third Coats: 2 Coats: B20W12651 - ProMar® 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-Shell. B. Plaster and Gypsum Board Ceilings 1. First Coat: Primer: B28W02600 - ProMar® 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer. 2. Second Coat and Third Coats: 2 Coats: B30W02651 - ProMar® 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Flat. C. New Metal (Not Factory-Primed) 1. First Coat: Primer: B66W01310 - PRO INDUSTRIAL PROCRYL PRIMER. 2. Second and Third Coats: 2 Coats: B66W00651 - Pro Industrial High Performance Acrylic - Semi- Gloss D. Metal (Factory-primed) 1. First and Second Coats: 2 Coats: B66W00651 - Pro Industrial High Performance Acrylic - Semi- Gloss. E. Wood Painted (Opaque Finish) 1. First Coat: Primer: B28W02600 - ProMar® 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer. 2. Second and Third Coats: 2 Coats: B66W00651 - Pro Industrial High Performance Acrylic - Semi- Gloss s. F. Wood Natural Finish (Transparent Finish) 1. First Coat: Coat 1: 00WL08613 - Wood Filler - Carpenters Wood Filler Natural Color 2. Second and Third Coats: Coats: 319000000 - MINWAX FD POLYURETHANE GLOSS. G. Piping, Electric Conduits, Fittings, Hangers, Brackets, Sleeves, Plates Including All Exposed Copper Control Piping 1. First Coat: Primer: B69A00045 - Zinc Clad® 5 Organic Zinc-Rich Primer. 3. Second and Third Coats: 2 Coats: B66W00651 - Pro Industrial High Performance Acrylic - Semi- Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Painting 09 90 00 Page 10 of 10 3.09. COMPLETION A. Cleaning: At the completion of the work, remove all paint and varnish spots and all oil, grease, or other stains caused by this work from floors, walls, glass, fixtures, hardware, equipment and other surfaces, leaving their finishes in satisfactory condition. Remove all equipment, materials and debris caused by work of this Section and leave the site of the work in a clean condition insofar as this work is concerned. B. Retouching: Touch up and repair any work applied under the Contract which for any reason has been damaged during the construction work. All finished work applied under this Section shall have perfect surfaces when completed work is ready for inspection for substantial completion. C. Final inspection: Protect all painted surfaces against damage until the date of substantial completion of work. The Architect will at this time conduct a final inspection of all painting work. All areas which do not comply with the requirements of this specification shall be repainted or retouched to the satisfaction of the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Miscellaneous Specialties 10 00 00 Page 1 of 8 SECTION 10 00 00 Miscellaneous Specialties PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein B. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Toilet accessories, medicine cabinets, grab bars, toilet paper dispensers, coat hooks, towel bars, padded shower seats. 2. Fire extinguishers 3. Mail boxes 4. Access panels 5. Louvers and vents. 6. Display Cases. 7. Signage 8. Rated and unrated ceiling access hatches. 9. Roof hatches C. Alternates: Not Applicable. D. Install Items Furnished Under Other Sections: Not Applicable. E. Furnish Items to Other Sections: 1. Section 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY a. Installation of items 1-8. 2. Section 07 53 00 ROOFING AND FLASHING a. Installation of item 9. F. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY a. Blocking for accessories and signage 1.03. SUBMITTALS A. All submittals, including shop drawings, manufacturer's specifications and product data shall be submitted for the following in accordance with the requirements of Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures and Substitutions. B. Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each item specified. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Miscellaneous Specialties 10 00 00 Page 2 of 8 C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings for signage indicating size of sign and font, colors and materials. 2. Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorage devices in other work. a. Indicate materials, sizes, configurations, and applicable substrate mountings. b. Typography sample for message strips and headers copy. c. Artwork for special graphics. D. Signage Schedule: Complete with location of each sign and the required copy/text. E. Samples: Submit full-size samples of units if requested by Architect for review of design and operation. Acceptable samples will be returned and may be used in the work. F. Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorage devices in other work. G. Mock-Up: Sign manufacturer shall provide a mock-up of select sign types as required for evaluation by the Owner or Architect. Such sample(s) shall be large enough and complete enough to fully convey the manufacturer’s capabilities and the products’ quality. 1. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, graphics, and installation are approved the Owner or Architect. 1.04. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete or built into masonry; coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. B. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to avoid interference and to assure proper operation and servicing of accessory units. 1.05. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver items in manufacturer's original unopened protective packaging. B. Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent soiling, physical damage, or wetting. C. Handle so as to prevent damage to finished surfaces. D. Protection: Maintain protective covers on all units until installation is complete. Remove protective covers at final clean up of installation. 1.06. GUARANTEE A. Guarantee the work of this section in writing for one year from the date of substantial completion. Defects in materials, equipment, workmanship or installation that develop within this period shall be repaired and replaced promptly to the Architect's satisfaction at no cost to the owner. Written guarantee shall stipulate that damage caused in making necessary repairs and replacements shall be corrected at no cost to the owner Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Miscellaneous Specialties 10 00 00 Page 3 of 8 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01. GENERAL A. Products: If the General or Subcontractor wishes to use materials or equipment other than those specifically designated herein as being equal to those specifically designated, he or she shall submit the proposed substitution before purchase and / or fabrication for approval in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions. 2.02. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Furnish fire extinguishers, cabinets and accessories for installation under Section 06 20 00: 1. Size & capacity: 5 lbs. 2. U/L Rating: 2A 3. Height: 15 1/2” 4. Width: 7 1/4” 5. Finish: Red. 6. Cabinet: Semi-recessed. 2.03. RANGEHOOD FIRE SUPPRESSOR CANISTER A. Furnish Rangehood fire suppressor canisters for installation in rangehoods, 2 per range hood. Acceptable products: Rangehood by Stovetop Firestop, Auto-Out Venthood by Auto-Out, Williams RDM 675-3D Stovetop Firestop Rangehood by Williams RDM, Inc. 2.04. TOILET ACCESSORIES A. Furnish toilet accessories for installation under section 06 20 00. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Products shall be as manufactured by American Specialties, Inc., Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., Watrous Incorporated, A & J Washroom Accessories, or an approved equal. Model numbers specified are intended to indicate style and quality only and are not to be construed as limiting competition. C. Materials: 1. Sheet Steel: ASTM A366, cold-rolled stretcher leveled; 1.25 oz./sq. ft.. galvanized coating. 2. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, commercial grade, seamless welded. 3. Adhesive: Epoxy type contact cement. 4. Unless otherwise noted, finish of all metal accessories shall be satin stainless steel or dull chrome (US 26D) on non-ferrous metal. 5. Screws to affix accessories to be stainless steel. 6. Include all fastening and attachment devices suitable for surface to which accessory will be applied. Thru bolt when mounting to toilet partitions. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Miscellaneous Specialties 10 00 00 Page 4 of 8 D. Accessory Schedule: See drawings and below. Toilet Accessory Schedule Key Description 1 Coat Hook: Bobrick B-672 Double Robe Hook 2 Grab Bars: 42”, ASI 1 ¼”, snap flange concealed, SS Peened. Provide Blocking. 2a Grab Bars: 12”, ASI 1 ¼”, snap flange concealed, SS Peened. Provide Blocking. 3 Recessed Medicine Cabinet: Jensen Horizon 16 x 36 Frameless, reversable door. 4 Surface Mount Toilet Paper Holder: ASI 7305-S toilet tissue dispenser. 5 Bath Towel Bar: Bobrick B-674 18” and 24” 6 Surface Mirror: 24” x 42”, ASI 0600 standard frame mirror, ss frame. 7 Paper Towel Dispenser: Black plastic 8” hoard wound, push paddle dispensing. Baywest or WB Mason. 8 Soap Dispenser: Black plastic manual, refillable soap dispenser, Hillard Bulk Foam Hill22297, or from WB Mason. 9 Shower Curtain Rod: Bobrick B-16107x60 2.05. SIGNAGE A. Signage under this section is intended to include items for identification, direction, control, and information of building where installed as complete integrated system. See drawings for signage details and schedule. B. ADA design requirements: Signage requiring tactile graphics: a. Wall mounted signs designating permanent rooms and spaces such as, room numbers and restroom, department, office, and fire exit identifications. b. Individually applied characters are prohibited. Signage not requiring tactile graphics but which are required to comply to other ADA requirements include signs providing direction to or information about function of space such as, directional signs (signs with arrow), informational signs (operating hours, policies, etc.), regulatory signs (no smoking, do not enter), and ceiling and projected wall mount signs. Excluded signage: a. Exterior signs. b. Building directories. c. Menus. d. Temporary signs, include personnel signs and tenant identification; suite numbers are not considered temporary. C. ADA performance requirements: Tactile graphics signs mounting requirements: a. Single doors: Mount 60 inches (1524 mm) to sign centerline above finish floor and on wall adjacent to latch side of door. b. Openings: Mount 60 inches (1524 mm) to sign centerline above finish floor adjacent opening. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Miscellaneous Specialties 10 00 00 Page 5 of 8 c. No wall space adjacent latch side of door, opening, or double doors: Mount 60 inches (1524 mm) to sign centerline above finish floor on nearest adjacent wall. D. System Requirements General: a. Sign system shall feature solutions for all required sign types, including but not limited to wall mounted personnel signs, work station personnel signs, primary room identification, directories, directionals, overhead signs, projection wall signs, free standing signs, restroom signs, regulatory and information signs, stair signs and changeable slide conference room signs. All signs within the system must feature the same family of components and convey a uniform look throughout. Features: a. No wall mounted signs should feature a depth greater than 11/16 of an inch. b. Wall mounted signs 11 inches wide or less shall feature a maximum depth of 7/16 of an inch. c. Mounting: Signs shall accommodate installation via fully concealed mechanical fasteners as required. Graphics and Typography: As selected from manufacturer’s standards. Reference sign drawings. Colors and Finishes: As selected from manufacturer’s standards. Reference sign drawings. ADA Compliance: Sign system shall comply with all current and applicable ADA regulations, including requirements regarding which sign types require Braille/tactile features, character heights, color contrast and installation locations and mounting heights within the facility. Materials: a. Face: Photopolymer Face, in matte (non-glare) finish. b. Backing Plate: Acrylic. E. Fabrication Options Tactile Graphics and Text: a. Fabrication process: Provide tactile copy [and grade 2 Braille] raised 1/32 inch minimum from plaque first surface by manufacturer’s photopolymer bonded process. Sign face of single material, tactile characters and Braille integral to photopolymer. Adhesive-fixed characters are not acceptable. b. Provide lettering and graphics precisely formed, uniformly opaque to comply with relevant ADA regulations and requirements indicated for size, style, spacing, content, position, and colors. Tactile characters to be raised min. 1/32” from surface. Computerized translation of sign copy to be responsibility of the manufacturer. Size: See drawings Thickness: a. .125 inch thick matte finished acrylic. F. Background Appearance Options: Custom colors as selected by Owner. SIGNAGE G. Furnish and install accessible signage at accessible and van accessible parking spaces. Rigid coated aluminum conforming to the following specifications: 1. Rust free aluminum signs usually coated white on both sides. 2. Graphics are digital or screen printed with UV inks. 3. Aluminum will not chip, crack or rust. 4. Aluminum is one of the most durable material options offered, with excellent resistance to harsh weather conditions. Printed image will resist fading and mild chemicals. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Miscellaneous Specialties 10 00 00 Page 6 of 8 5. Outdoor Durability: 5 to 7 years 6. Service Temp Range: -40°F to 212°F 7. Ink Features: Printed with UV Inks 8. Printing Process: Digital or Screen 9. Over laminate: None H. Sign posts for parking and site signs to be u-channel posts conforming to the following specifications: . 1. Galvanized Steel. 2. Mounting holes: 3/8" on 1" centers beginning from the top of the post, running the entire length of the post. 3. 10 foot length. 2.06. WALL-MOUNTED CENTRALIZED MAIL RECEPTACLES (MAILBOXES) A. Front-Loading Mailboxes: Consisting of multiple compartments as indicated on drawings. Provide access to compartments for distributing incoming mail from front of unit by unlocking master lock and swinging side-hinged master door to provide accessibility to entire group of compartments. Include out-going mail slotted box 1. Model: Florence Versatile 4C Mailbox Suites by Florence Corporation. 2. Compartments: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Front-Loading Master Door: Fabricated from extruded aluminum and braced and framed to hold compartment doors; with master door lock and concealed, full-length, extruded aluminum integral hinge on one side. Fabricate master door to remain open while mail is deposited. a. Master Door Lock: Prepare master door to receive common key lock furnished by manufacturer. 4. Compartment Doors: Fabricated from extruded aluminum. Equip each compartment door with lock, engraved tenant identification, and concealed, continuous hinge on one side. a. Tenant Identification: 1) Standard silver adhesive decals, 1-1/2”H x 1-3/4”W. Black lettering Allowing up to five characters (alpha and numeric) per decal. b. Compartment Door Locks: 1) 5-pin tumbler, cylinder cam locks capable of at least 1000 key changes; with 2 keys for each compartment door. Key each compartment differently. c. Frames: Fabricated from extruded aluminum with snap on trim. 5. Concealed Components and Mounting Frames: a. Aluminum b. Steel sheet. 6. Material and Finish: Aluminum. a. Finish: Anodized aluminum: Clear. b. Finish: Selected from manufacturer's standard powder coat colors. 7. Provide surface mount collar option. 2.07. FRAMED ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. Furnish for installation under Section 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY framed louver assemblies, as shown on Drawings, and not specified under HVAC: 1. Stationary louver assemblies as shown, including fixed blades, heads, sills, jambs, mullions, insect and/or bird screens and blank-off panels. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Miscellaneous Specialties 10 00 00 Page 7 of 8 2. All fastenings and anchorage devices shown and as required to properly complete the installation. 3. Sealing of all metal to metal contacts within the louver assembly. 4. Louvers shall be: Ruskin Model ELF 375-D or approved equal. 5. All colors are to be custom as selected by Architect. 2.08. ACCESS PANELS AND HATCHES A. Furnish for installation under Section 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY access panels for wall and ceiling, in sizes as shown on drawings and as required: 1. Universal Flush Access Door Model DSC-214M by Karp Associates, Inc., or equal. 2. Rated and insulated ceiling access hatch model KRP-150FR by KARP, or equal. a. For Walls and Ceilings (Max. 24x36 for Ceilings) b. Frame: 16 gauge steel and 1 inch wide. c. Door: 20 gauge steel, welded pan type filled with 2" thick fire-rated insulation and opens to 175°. The door is self-latching with automatic closer and interior latch release. d. Hinge: Continuous piano hinge. 2.09. ROOF HATCHES AND CURBS A. Furnish for installation under Section 07 53 00 ROOFING AND FLASHING new roof hatches to replace, sized to fit existing openings: 1. Thermally Broken Roof Hatch, Bilco Model: Type E-50TB – Verify Opening Size 2. Material: Cover and frame are 11 gauge (2.3 mm) aluminum. 3. Cover: Brake formed, hollow-metal design with 3" (75 mm) concealed polyisocyanurate insulation (R Value of 20+), 5" (100 mm) beaded, overlapping flange, fully welded at corners, and internally reinforced for 40 psf (195kg/m2) live load. (See note below for Type GS-50-TB models) 4. Curb: 12" (305 mm) in height with integral cap flashing, 3" (75 mm) polyisocyanurate insulation (R Value of 20+), fully welded at corners, and 5-1/2" (114 mm) mounting flange with 7/16" holes (11 mm) provided for securing frame to the roof deck. 5. Gasket: Extruded EPDM rubber gasket permanently adhered to cover. 6. Hinges: Heavy-duty pintle hinges with 3/8" (9 mm) Type 316 stainless steel hinge pins. 7. Latch: Slam latch with interior and exterior turn handles and padlock hasps. 8. Lift Assistance: Compression spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes. Automatic hold-open arm with grip handle release. 9. Finish: Mill finish aluminum 10. Hardware: Type 316 stainless steel hinges. All other hardware is zinc plated/chromate sealed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01. Installation is performed under other sections as indicated. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Miscellaneous Specialties 10 00 00 Page 8 of 8 This Page Intentionally Left Blank Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Appliances 11 31 00 Page 1 of 4 SECTION 11 31 00 Appliances PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein B. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including supply and installation of appliances as follows: 1. All appliances to be Energy Star certified where applicable 2. Standard Units: a. Range - Electric b. Range hood - recirculating c. Refrigerator 3. Accessible Units: a. Wall oven - Electric b. Cooktop - Electric c. Range hood - recirculating d. Refrigerator 4. Common Laundry: a. ADA compliant washer and dryers - Electric b. Stackable washers and dryers - Electric C. Alternates: n/a. D. Install items furnished under other sections: not applicable. E. Furnish items to other sections: n/a. F. Related work: the following items are not included in this section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY 2. Section 12 35 00 CASEWORK AND COUNTERTOPS 3. Division 22 00 00 PLUMBING 4. Division 23 00 00 HVAC 5. Division 26 00 00 ELECTRICAL 1.03. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with referenced standards and the Americans with Disabilities Act as applicable for fixtures for the disabled. B. Energy Rating: Provide appliances with the EPA Energy Star label where applicable. C. Coordinate rough-in requirements with adjacent construction. Coordinate components and fittings to ensure compatible parts are installed. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Appliances 11 31 00 Page 2 of 4 1.04. REFERENCES A. ANSI A117.1 - Guidelines for Accessible and Useable Buildings and Facilities. B. EPA - Energy Star Appliances. C. Public Law 101-336 - Americans with Disabilities Act. 1.05. SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Model number and selected options for each appliance. 2. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Installation methods. 5. List of maintenance parts. 6. Energy Star certification and energy use statement. C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. 1.06. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING D. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged rolls/pallets with identification labels intact. E. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. 1.07. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.01. WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard written limited one-year warranty for each type of appliance specified. B. Provide manufacturer's standard written limited parts warranty for each type of appliance specified. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Appliances 11 31 00 Page 3 of 4 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01. RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES: A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Models shown are Kenmore. Models from the following manufacturers that meet or exceed the specifications of the model shown are acceptable. 1. GE Appliances. 2. Whirlpool. 3. Frigidaire. 4. Kenmore. 5. Or Equal 6. All appliances to be Energy Star certified. B. Appliance Schedule: 1. See appliance schedule on drawings for unit/kitchen specifics. Appliances listed below: C. Washer/Dryer: Single and stacked configurations 1. WASHER 4.4 cu ft front load washer, Energy Star Rated, Electrolux Model #EFLS627UIW 2. DRYER 8 cu ft electric dryer, Energy Star Rated, Electrolux Model #EFME627UIW 3. Furnish base for non-stacked units. PART 3 EXECUTION 301. EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Coordinate with other trades to insure that surface conditions, cabinets and counters, openings and tolerances are acceptable for installation of appliances. Notify Architect in writing of deviations from manufacturer's recommended installation tolerances and conditions. B. Do not proceed with installation until substrates, electrical connections, and plumbing piping for appliances have been installed and have been properly prepared and deviations from manufacturer's recommended tolerances are corrected. C. Prepare substrates using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the appliance installation under the project conditions. D. Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance of conditions. 302. INSTALLATION E. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and approved submittals. Appliances ID No Type Size Brand/Model Color Energy Star kwh R1 Range 24"Hotpoint® Model#: RAS240DMWW Blk NA R2 Range 30"Hotpoint® Model#: RBS160DM Blk NA RH1 Range Hood 24" x 5 1/2"GE JVX3240SJ Blk NA RH2 Range Hood 30" x 5 1/2"GE JVX3300DJ Blk NA RF1 Refrigerator-Top Freezer 28" 13.9 cft Figidaire FFTR1425VW Blk Yes 369kwh RF2 Refrigerator-Top Freezer 30" 19.1 cft GE GTE19JSN/JTN Blk Yes 379kwh RF3 Refrigerator-Side by Side 33" 21.4 cft GE WRS331SD Blk Yes 602kwh SK-1 Sink-Non Accessible 25" x 22 x 9"Elkay HDSB252293PW SS NA SK-2 Sink - Accessible 25" x 22 x 5 3/8" Dayton GE12522 SS NA DW-1 Dishwasher 24"LG LDF5545WW Blk Yes 258kwh WO-1 Wall Oven 27" cabinet GE JKS3000DN/SN Blk NA CO-1 30" Cooktop 30"GE PP7030DJ Blk NA Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Appliances 11 31 00 Page 4 of 4 F. Coordinate with other trades and installation of other materials for proper tolerances and the sequence of the Work being performed. G. Coordinate with other trades for connections of appliances to plumbing, HVAC and electrical equipment, piping, wiring and ducting. H. Test for operation and adjust until satisfactory results are obtained. 303. CLEANING AND PROTECTION I. Protect installed products from damage during remainder of construction period, per manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Window Treatments 12 21 13 1 of 6 SECTION 12 21 13 Window Treatments PART 1 GENERAL 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein B. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Aluminum Blinds at all unit windows. C. Alternates: Not Applicable. D. Install Items Furnished Under Other Sections: Not Applicable. E. Furnish Items to Other Sections: Not Applicable F. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY a. wood blocking for mounting window treatments and accessories 2. Section 08 53 45 WINDOWS 3. Section 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 4. Section 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING 1.01 REFERENCES A. GREENGUARD Gold Certified. B. NFPA No.701 – Standard Method of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films, 2015 Edition, Small Scale. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product: 1. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for window treatments 2. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Installation methods. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for window treatments. C. Selection Samples: for each color and texture specified, submit 2 sets of samples Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Window Treatments 12 21 13 2 of 6 representing manufacturer’s standard range of finishes for aluminum slats at 6 inches (152 mm) long. 1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection D. Verification Samples: Samples for Verification: for each color and texture specified, submit 2 sets of samples representing actual finishes for aluminum slats at 6 inches (152 mm) long. 1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection. E. Window treatments Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For window treatments to include in maintenance manuals. B. Sample warranty document. 1.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Window treatments: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each size and color material indicated, but no fewer than [two] <Insert number> units. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum ten (10) years of experience manufacturing similar products. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of Products. 1. Installer shall be qualified to install specified products by prior experience and approved by Springs Window Fashions LLC. 2. Installer shall be responsible for acceptable installation in accordance with instructions published by Springs Window Fashions LLC 3. Single Source Requirement: To the greatest extent possible, provide Classics™ 1” Aluminum Blinds from the same manufacturer for the entire project C. Mock-Up: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver product in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings Store and dispose of solvent- based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. B. Store product in clean, dry areas indoors, in manufacturer’s unopened packaging, laid flat to prevent sagging and twisting until ready for installation, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions C. Handling: Protect materials and finish from damage during handling and installation Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Window Treatments 12 21 13 3 of 6 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install window treatments until construction and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use B. Field Measurements: Where window treatments are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1.08 WARRENTY A. Limited Lifetime Warranty per manufacturer standard. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with contract requirements, products which may be incorporated into the work include the following: 1. SWF contract by Springs Window Fashions, LLC / 7549 Graber Rd / Middleton, WI 53562 / Phone: 1-800-327- 9798 or Email: architectsolutions@SWFcontract.com / Website: https://www.SWFcontract.com/ 2. Architect approved equivalent B. 1” ALUMINUM HORIZONTAL BLINDS Doors & drawer fronts: 1. Product: SWF contract Classics™ 1” Aluminum Blinds. a. Materials: 1) Headrail shall be 1" high x 1-1/2" wide x .025" thick U-shaped steel. The steel finishing process includes phosphate treatment for corrosion resistance, a chrome-free sealer, a low HAP urethane primer, and a topcoat of low HAP polyester-baked enamel. 2) Tilter shall be made of injection-molded thermoplastics for smooth low- friction operation and shall incorporate a clutch mechanism to prevent damage due to over tilting. 3) Tilt rod shall be electro-zinc coated solid steel measuring 1/4" square. 4) Tilt wand shall be clear polycarbonate with a hexagonal cross section measuring approximately 1/4" diameter and attached to the tilter shaft by means of a spring clip for easy removal. 5) Cordlock shall be a snap-in design made of durable high-impact nylon with a stainless-steel wear guard incorporating a floating shaft-type locking pin. The design provides a crash-proof safety feature that will lock the blinds automatically upon release of the lift cord 6) Drum and cradles shall be low-friction thermoplastic and provided for each ladder. 7) Installation brackets shall be made of phosphate-treated steel with a urethane primer and polyester-baked enamel finish to match headrail. The design shall incorporate a hinged front cover. 8) Braided ladder shall be made of 100% polyester yarn, incorporating two extra-strength rungs per ladder for slat support. Standard ladder spacing shall be 21.5mm. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Window Treatments 12 21 13 4 of 6 9) Slats shall be 5000 series cold-rolled aluminum containing the maximum allowable recycled content to produce a high-strength and corrosion- resistant flexible product. Slats shall be nominally 1" wide x .006" thick and processed to provide a smooth, hard, less porous surface with antistatic performance to repel dust. Slats shall be treated with a topcoat of polyester-baked enamel . 10) Bottom rail shall be a completely enclosed tubular shape made of phosphate-treated steel for corrosion resistance and finished with a chrome-free sealer, low HAP urethane primer, and a topcoat of low HAP, polyester-baked enamel. Bottom rail shall measure .025" thick . 11) Additional Options: .008" thick slat, 20mm ladder spacing, 22.5mm ladder spacing, Perforated slat, Inverted slats, Tilt limiter, Ring tilt, Top- lock cordlock, Ring pull, turn clips for extruded pocket, Extension brackets, Hold down brackets, Cut-outs, Two-slat valance, Deluxe two- slat valance and Specialty shapes (arches, circles, and angles). 2.02 ALUMINUM BINDS BODY A. Finishes 1. Slats a. 1” Aluminum Slats finish selection: 544 True White, 760 Structured White, 205 White Satin, 005 White Gloss, 637 White Pearl, 375 Birch White, 386 Snowcap White, 629 Crystal White, 630 Coconut, 042 Matte White, 065 Almost White Gloss, 112 Alabaster, 326 Alabaster Pearl, 376 Navajo White, 963 Stucco, 541 Flax, 724 Almond, 100 Vanilla, 670 Creamy Beige, 625 Desert Sand, 011 Beige, 126 Ash Metallic, 175 Weathered Taupe, 405 Gray Dawn, 122 Greige ,044 Granite, 751 Toffee Crunch, 060 Milk Chocolate, 758 Burnished Bronze, 062 Char Brown, 168 Dark Bronze, 233 Black Satin, 763 Structured Black, 752 Simply Black, 006 Raw Umber, 749 Modern Slate, 095 U.N. Gray, 680 Skyline, 648 Magnet, 756 Brushed Pewter, 771 Mercury, 747 Soft Gray, 026 Smokey Gray, 983 Gray Haze, 737 Silver, 034 Aluminum, 121 Brushed Aluminum, 761 Structured Aluminum, 121P Perforated Brushed Aluminum. 2. Cords a. color coordinated with slats 3. Tassels a. color coordinated with slats PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01. EXAMINATOIN A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, [accurate locations of connections to building electrical system,] and other conditions affecting performance of the work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02. WINDOW TREATMENT INSTALLATION A. Install window treatments level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units per manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install with adequate clearance to permit smooth operation of the window treatments through the entire operational range. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Window Treatments 12 21 13 5 of 6 3.03. ADJUSTING A. Adjust and balance window coverings to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout the entire operational range. 3.04. CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean surfaces after installation, per manufacturer's written instructions. Do not use cleaning methods involving heat, bleach, abrasives, or solvents. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, ensuring that window treatments are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Replace damaged window treatments that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion. 3.05. DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain window treatments. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Window Treatments 12 21 13 6 of 6 This Page Intentionally Left Blank Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Cabinets and Countertops 12 35 00 1 of 6 SECTION 12 35 00 Cabinets And Countertops PART 1 GENERAL 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein B. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Wood kitchen cabinetry a. Must meet HUD severe use specifications. 2. Wood Vanity cabinetry 3. Fabricated bathroom lav support casework with brackets and solid surface panels. 4. Solid Surface kitchen countertops. C. Alternates: D. Deduct Alternate 7: Deduct solid surface kitchen countertops and substitute plastic laminate countertops and equal surface mount kitchen sinks. E. Install Items Furnished Under Other Sections: Not Applicable. F. Furnish Items to Other Sections: 1. Section 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY a. Installation of the work of this section. G. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY a. Blocking for cabinets 2. Section 11 31 00 APPLIANCES 3. Division 22 PLUMBING a. One piece lav and top 4. Division 26 ELECTRICAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. ANSI/KCMA A161.1 2000 Performance & Construction Standards For Kitchen Cabinets. B. National Kitchen Cabinet Association (NKCA). C. HUD – Severe Use Specifications for Public and Indian Housing – Sept. 1993. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Cabinets and Countertops 12 35 00 2 of 6 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate type, location, size, and hand of each component. Include requirements for blocking and relationship with adjacent construction. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors. E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square representing actual product, color, and patterns. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum ten (10) years of experience manufacturing similar products. B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum two (2) years of experience installing similar products. C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. 1. Finish areas designated by Architect. 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are approved by Architect. 3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Cabinets and Countertops 12 35 00 3 of 6 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD CABINETRY MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with contract requirements, products which may be incorporated into the work include the following: 1. Merillat. 2. Metropolitan Cabinet. 3. MasterBrand Cabinets, Inc. 4. Or Equal approved by the Architect and Owner in accordance with General Conditions. 2.02 HARDWOOD DOORS A. Doors & drawer fronts: 1. Hardwood plywood door with flat profile. 2. Hardwood plywood drawer front. 3. Finish: clear, or to be selected by Owner / Architect. 2.03 CABINET BODY A. See 2.07 DUD Severe use specifications below for cabinet specs that override below paragraphs. B. Cabinet Height: 1. Base cabinet height at accessible (2) units shall enable 34” max countertop height. C. Face Frames: 1. Construction: Mortise and tenon, glued and fastened. 2. Horizontal Rails: 3/4 inch by 1-1/2 inches (19 mm by 38 mm) kiln dried hardwood. 3. Vertical Stiles: 3/4 inch by 1-1/2 inches (19 mm by 38 mm) kiln dried hardwood. D. Cabinet Ends: 1. Exposed Ends: 1/2 inch (13 mm), hardwood plywood. 2. Wall Cabinet Ends: Rabbeted to receive tops and bottoms. 3. Base Cabinet Ends: Rabbeted to receive floor and shelf. E. Drawer Box Construction: 1. Drawer Header, Slab: Solid hardwood, lap joinery construction, top coated (4 sides). 2. Bottom: 1/4 inch (6 mm) plywood, matches interior. 3. Sides: Rabbet joint machined all four sides. 4. Joints: Glued and power nailed. 5. Undermount Drawer Guides: Full extension, heavy duty, soft action, 75 lb. capacity F. Wall Cabinet and Base Cabinet Shelving: 1. Wall Shelving: Adjustable 5/8 inch (16 mm) hardwood plywood banded shelving in all wall cabinets; 2. Base Shelving: Base Shelf to be half depth, adjustable. No shelving in sink base. 3. One roll-out base drawer shelf per base cabinet, with full extension, heavy duty, soft action, 75 lb. capacity slides G. Wall Cabinets Top and Bottom: Not less than 1/2 inch hardwood plywood; let into sides and face frame. Joints glued and power nailed. H. Base Cabinet Floors: 1/2 inch hardwood plywood; let into sides and face frame. Joints glued and power nailed. Back of floor set on supporting member, glued and fastened. I. Cabinet Backs: 1/2 inch hardwood plywood. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Cabinets and Countertops 12 35 00 4 of 6 J. Door Hinges: Self-closing 108 degree opening concealed hinges. K. Finish: Conversion varnish, non-yellowing durable finish which provides excellent chemical resistance. All exposed interior sides, shelving and wall cabinet bottoms. L. Particle board should not be used in any part of cabinets. M. Stapled connections are not acceptable. N. Door & drawer hardware: 1. 5” wire pull. 2. Finish: Brushed stainless. 2.04 SILESTONE QUARTZ AGGREGATE COUNTERTOPS: A. Countertops – product by Silestone, quartz bonded with resins. Include front edge profile options. Backsplash is ceramic tile. 2.05 PLASTIC LAMINATE A. Plastic laminate panels at desks and counters as indicated on drawings and for Alternate 7. 1. Plastic laminate covered exterior 3/4" plywood, square edged with continuous edges and no metal moldings. All exposed surfaces to be covered with plastic laminate. Edge detailing as indicate on drawings. B. Plastic laminate shall be installed as recommended by manufacturer of selected product using adhesive of that manufacturer. C. Plastic laminate to be equal to Formica, Micarta, or Wilson Art. Color to be solid color selected by Architect, from the full line. D. Support Brackets: Furnish and install steel support brackets where indicated on drawings. Brackets shall be capable of carrying 300 lb. load minim and be anchored into stud at wall and to underside of counter, and to not interfere with clear floor space below counter top. 2.06 BATHROOM VANITY BRACKETS AND PANELS FOR ADA LAVS: A. Furnish vanity brackets for support of one piece lav supplied under plumbing: 1. Brackets to be Counter Balance ADA Vanity Brackets by Chemical Concepts or equal a. 12 Gauge Steel b. White c. Accommodate 22” to 26” deep countertops d. Spring clips & screws for easy on/off skirt attachment e. No visible fasteners 2. Fabricate and furnish solid surface backsplash, apron, side and front panels. a. Sidesplash to be Swanstone CHVTSS ¾” x 3 ½” b. Apron to be VT#&FA 8” x 37” c. Side panels and shroud to be cut from matching Swanstone sheet panel. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Cabinets and Countertops 12 35 00 5 of 6 2.07 HUD Severe Use Specifications: Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Cabinets and Countertops 12 35 00 6 of 6 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01. Installation is performed under Section 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Passenger Elevators 14 20 00 1 of 6 SECTION 14 20 00 Passenger Elevators PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein B. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Refurbish existing elevators: a. Update , replace, repair hoistway gears and machinery. b. Update , replace, repair machine room machinery. c. Refurbish elevator cabs 2. Close hoistway top vents. C. Alternates: Not Applicable. D. Install Items Furnished Under Other Sections: Not Applicable. E. Furnish Items to Other Sections: Furnish the following items for installation under other sections. 1. Section 04 20 00 MASONRY a. Elevator hoist beam. b. Rail attachments inserts. F. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY a. Lifeline attachments cable at hoistways. b. Removable barricades at hoistway openings. 2. Section 06 10 00 FINISH CARPENTRY a. Access doors as required. 3. Section 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING a. Installation elevator cab flooring – LVT-2. 4. Division 23 00 00 HVAC a. Supply and installation of machine room ventilation. 5. Section 26 00 00 ELECTRICAL a. Temporary lighting, including temporary lighting in hoistway for machine space with switch located in hoistway on the strike jamb side of top landing door. b. Permanent lighting for elevator pit and machine room. c. Fire alarm coordination d. Telephone coordination a. Power to elevator and machine room. 1.01. SUBMITTALS A. All submittals, including shop drawings, manufacturer's specifications and product data shall be submitted for the following in accordance with the requirements of Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures and Substitutions. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product literature for each proposed system. 1. Cab design, dimension and layout DRAFT UNTIL INPUT RECEIVED FROM UNITED ELEVATOR Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Passenger Elevators 14 20 00 2 of 6 2. Layout, finishes, and accessories and available options. 3. System capacity and performance. 4. Controls, signals and operating system. 5. Color selection charts for cab and entrances. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Clearances and travel of car. 2. Clear inside hoistway and pit dimensions. 3. Location and layout of equipment and signals. 4. Car, guide rails, buffers and other components in hoistway. 5. Maximum rail bracket spacing. 6. Maximum loads imposed on building structure. 7. Hoist beam requirements. 8. Location and sizes of access doors. 9. Location and details of hoistway door and frames. 10. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements. D. Closeout Submittals: 1. Two sets of manufacturer's standard operation and maintenance information; provide in CD format. 2. Inspection certificates and permits. 3. Standard manufacturer warranty A. Diagnostic Tools 1. Prior to seeking final acceptance for the completed project as specified by the Contract Documents, the Elevator Contractor shall deliver to the Owner any specialized tool(s) that may be required to perform diagnostic evaluations, adjustments, and/or parametric software changes and/or test and inspections on any piece of control or monitoring equipment installed. This shall include any specialized tool(s) required for monitoring, inspection and/or maintenance where the means of suspension other than conventional wire ropes are furnished and installed by the Elevator Contractor. Any and all such tool(s) shall become property of the Owner. Any diagnostic tool provided to the Owner by the Elevator Contractor shall be configured to perform all levels of diagnostics, systems adjustment and parametric software changes which are available to the Elevator Contractor. In those cases where diagnostic tools provided to the Owner require periodic recalibration/or re-initiation, the Elevator Contractor shall perform such tasks at no additional cost to the Owner for a period equal to the term of the maintenance agreement from the date of final acceptance of the competed project During those intervals in which the Owner might find it necessary to surrender a diagnostic tool for re- calibration, re-initiation, or repair, the Elevator Contractor shall provide a temporary replacement for the tool at no additional cost to the Owner. The Elevator Contractor shall deliver to the Owner, printed instructions for the proper use of any tool that may be necessary to perform diagnostic evaluations, system adjustment, and/or parametric software changes on any unit of microprocessor-based elevator control equipment and means of suspension other than standard elevator steel cables furnished and install by the Elevator Contractor. Accompanying the printed instructions shall be any and all access codes, password, or other proprietary information that is necessary to interface with the microprocessor-control equipment. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Passenger Elevators 14 20 00 3 of 6 1.02. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Car Performance 1. Car Speed ± 5% of contract speed under any loading condition or direction of travel. 2. Car Capacity: Safely lower, stop and hold (per code) up to 125% of rated load. B. System Performance 1. Vertical Vibration (maximum): 25 mg 2. Horizontal Vibration (maximum): 25 mg 3. Jerk Rate (maximum): 1.3 ft/sec3 4. Acceleration (maximum) 1.3 ft/sec2 5. In Car Noise: ≤ 55 dB(A) 6. Leveling Accuracy: ±0.2 inches 7. Starts per hour (maximum): 120 1.03. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Shall have a minimum of 15 years experience in the fabrication, installation and service of elevators. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified, and have a documented quality assurance program. B. Installer: Elevator shall be installed by the manufacturer, or a manufacturer recommended installer with a minimum 15 years experience in the installation and service of traction elevators. C. Inspection and Testing: In accordance with requirements of local jurisdiction, obtain required permits, inspections and tests. D. Prior to beginning work of this Section, attend a pre-installation meeting. Owner, Design Professional, and contractors with adjacent or related work shall attend. 1.04. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Coordinate delivery of elevator material throughout construction. If the construction site is not prepared to receive the elevator equipment at the agreed ship date, the General Contractor shall be responsible to provide a safe, dry, and easily accessible storage area on or off the premises. Additional labor costs for double handling will be the responsibility of the general contractor. B. Store elevator materials in protected environment in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. A minimum storage area of 10 feet by 20 feet per elevator is required adjacent to the hoistway at the main egress landing. 1.05. WARRANTY A. Provide Manufacturer warranty for a period of 12 months. Warranty period to begin upon final acceptance of elevator work and turnover into operation. Warranty covers defects in materials and workmanship. Damage due to ordinary use, vandalism, improper or insufficient maintenance, misuse, or neglect does not constitute defective material or workmanship. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Passenger Elevators 14 20 00 4 of 6 1.06. MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Provide maintenance service consisting of examinations and adjustments of the elevator equipment for a period of 12 months after final acceptance of elevator work and turnover into operation. B. Maintenance service shall be provided by elevator manufacturer recommended service personnel. Manufacturer recommended parts and supplies shall be used in maintenance service as in the original manufacture and installation. C. Maintenance service be performed during regular working hours of regular working days and shall include regular time call back service. D. Maintenance service shall not include adjustments, repairs or replacement of parts due to negligence, misuse, abuse or accidents. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Passenger Elevators 14 20 00 5 of 6 PART 2 PRODUCTS PART 3 EXECUTION END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Passenger Elevators 14 20 00 6 of 6 This Page Intentionally Left Blank Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Closed Loop Geothermal Heat Exchanger 23 57 33 1 of 14 SECTION 237000 CLOSED LOOP GEOTHERMAL HEAT EXCHANGER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The work of the section includes permitting, fabrication, construction, and testing of a complete closed-loop vertical bore ground source heat exchanger (GSHX). This work includes: (1) Regulatory permitting and/or registration, including assistance to Owner, for the installation and operation of the GSHX. (2) Regulatory permitting for discharge of water during drilling (3) Shop drawings and submittals (4) Drilling boreholes to depths indicated (5) Installing vertical u-bends and grouting (6) Installing horizontal manifolding and piping connecting vertical u-bends to vault, and mains into building, including trenching and backfilling to rough grade (7) Pressure testing, flow testing, and pressure drop testing (8) Bedding horizontal piping in sand (9) Flushing debris out of entire system (10) Fill system with prescribed antifreeze (11) Purge system (12) Additional water management equipment and labor to meet all local, state and federal requirements (13) Site work by site contractor (14) Piping and components inside the building by HVAC and controls contractors 1.2 INSTALLATION PERSONNEL AND TRAINING REQUIRED A. The geothermal loop contractor, or contractor designate, must be certified and be current as an International Ground Source Heat Pump Association (IGSHPA) Accredited Installer and/or Accredited Well Driller, having completed an IGSHPA training course in the fundamentals of design, installation, and operation of geothermal systems, and having passed the examination and pipe fusion tests. B. Ground heat exchanger fabricators must have completed a heat fusion school in which each participant has performed heat fusion procedures under direct supervision of an IGSHPA-certified heat fusion technician. The fusion technician must be thoroughly familiar with heat fusion procedures, and have had formal training and testing at a heat fusion school under direct supervision of an IGSHPA-certified instructor. C. Certified pipe fusion technicians must attend a retraining school every three years. A single failure of a fusion joint will void the certification, and the technician must be retested to demonstrate satisfactory performance. D. Local and state laws and ordinances as they pertain to buried pipe systems shall be strictly followed or a variance obtained. 1.3 DESIGN BASIS A. The geothermal bore field design is based upon ground conditions as encountered and tested with the thermal conductivity test well. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Closed Loop Geothermal Heat Exchanger 23 57 33 2 of 14 B. The geothermal designer shall be notified at least 5 days in advance of scheduled installation of the first bore. The bore depths may be adjusted based on the first bore underground conditions, or a test bore in the vicinity. C. Installation including earth characteristics, loop field sizing and layout, pipe sizing and flows are as shown on G-series drawings. 1.4 PLANNING A. Prior to any excavation, trenching, or drilling, all buried utilities, drainage, and irrigation systems shall be located and flagged by the appropriate utility and contractor representatives. 1.5 RECORDS A. The contractor shall provide final record documentation of the buried GSHX piping relative to a permanent structure and buried conduits. B. Any loop registration program shall conform to IGSHPA specifications. 1.6 RESTORATION A. The geothermal contractor shall not be responsible for site restoration requirements. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. All items listed and identified on the WellSpring Geothermal Submittal Log shall be submitted by the appropriate contractor. Each item must be clearly referenced per the item number on the log. See sheet G-107 for log sheet. 1.8 PROJECT COORDINATION A. Related to the geothermal borefield installation, the Geothermal Contractor shall coordinate with the General Contractor, Architect, the Geothermal Engineer, and other trades all work including permitting, drilling, trenching, separation from storm drains, piping installation and fusion, pressure testing, bedding in sand, flushing and purging. B. The geothermal contractor must meet the requirements of any site SWPPP, NPDES and all erosion control measures at the site. C. Prior to drilling the vertical bores, the GC shall locate the vertical bores with stakes. The Architect and geothermal designer shall be notified of any discrepancies or conflicts. D. The geothermal contractor shall install the horizontal piping on a minimum 6” bed of clean sand, and coordinate with geothermal engineer for inspections prior to burial. Piping trenches shall not be backfilled until inspections are completed. E. Drilling contractor shall install 14 gage copper wire prior to bedding with minimum 6” sand above all piping in trenches. Contractor shall backfill trenches and compact in 12 inch lifts. F. The Geothermal Contractor may or may not have access to temporary construction utilities. The Geothermal Contractor shall be responsible for completing the work and possibly providing temporary construction utilities at no cost to the owner. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Closed Loop Geothermal Heat Exchanger 23 57 33 3 of 14 G. The HVAC and controls contractors shall be responsible for all piping and components inside the building, other than isolation valves just inside the mechanical room. 1.9 BIDDING A. The Geothermal Contractor shall bid on a complete and ready to operate geothermal system outside the facility, including the piping and isolation valves just inside the building. Coordinate main supply/return pipes interface to in-building piping with mechanical contractor. B. The Geothermal Contractor is ultimately responsible for ensuring any discharged water meets all local, state and federal requirements, and must include this in the base bid. C. The Geothermal Contractor shall bid based on removed and properly disposing of the drilling spoils off site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BOREHOLES A. The vertical boreholes shall be located by geothermal contractor at locations according to the locations on the G-series drawings. B. The drill log of the first borehole must be submitted to WellSpring Geothermal immediately after completion. Subsequent borehole drilling logs shall be submitted regularly to corroborate the actual to anticipated formations at the site, and may result in altered borefield parameters. C. The contractor shall record the actual depth of insertion of the HDPE U-bend on the final borehole log. D. After inserting the U-bend to the design depth within 24hrs of drilling each bore, vertical boreholes must be grouted per IGSHPA standards with high conductivity thermally enhanced bentonite grout that is saline resistant. The average thermal conductivity of the grout must be 1.2 Btu/hr-ft-F or greater. E. Manufacturer’s published data sheets including thermal conductivity, permeability, percent solids, grout weight, linear shrinkage potential, maximum particle size and unit yield shall be submitted and must be approved prior to use. F. Grout material shall be pressure pumped through a tremie pipe from the bottom to the top of the bore. The grouting process shall conform to the manufacturer’s instructions and “Grouting for Vertical Geothermal Heat Pump Systems – Engineering Design and Field Procedures Manual” as published by IGSHPA. Completed grouted surface shall be placed at ground level to ensure complete fill of the bore column. G. The thermally enhanced grouting material shall be mixed according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Per sheet G-105, samples of grout shall be taken by the contractor and tested by the manufacturer, and results submitted. Additional samples shall be taken and tested upon request of the geothermal designer. H. The contractor shall record the depth of insertion of the tremie pipe, as well as the number of batches of grout installed in each borehole on the final borehole log. The tremie pipe shall be clearly marked in increments of 10ft or less. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Closed Loop Geothermal Heat Exchanger 23 57 33 4 of 14 2.2 HORIZONTAL & PIPING SYSTEMS A. Refer to G-102 and G-104 for vertical borehole locations and piping sizes for horizontal connections. Geothermal Contractor must submit detailed layout of horizontal piping prior to installation. B. Site Contractor shall provide trenching for the geothermal heat exchanger piping, as well as sand for bedding piping. Bedding sand shall have no particles larger than ½ inch. C. Geothermal Contractor shall lay, fuse and test all piping prior to final bedding and burial. D. Sharp bending of pipe around trench corners must be prevented by using a shovel to round corners, or by installing an appropriate elbow fitting. Manufacturer’s procedures must be followed. E. Backfilling procedure will include prevention of any sharp-edged rocks from coming into contact with the pipe by removal of the rocks before backfilling. Geothermal Contractor is responsible for ensuring the quality of the bedding around all the geothermal piping prior to and during backfilling. Use the IGSHPA Slinky backfilling procedures founding IGSHPA’s Slinking Installation Guide to assure elimination of air pockets around the pipes. F. Return bends in narrow trenches must be partially backfilled by hand to properly support the pipes and prevent kinking. G. Backfill shall be compacted in 12-inch lifts and thoroughly watered after compaction. H. All buried GHP pipes in systems containing an antifreeze and passing parallel within 5 feet (1.524 m) of any wall, structure, or water pipe shall be insulated with R2 minimum closed cell insulation. 2.3 GROUND HEAT EXCHANGER MATERIALS A. The acceptable pipe and fittings materials for the underground portion of the ground heat exchanger is polyethylene, as specified in Section 1.5B2. B. Specifications for the polyethylene heat exchanger are as follows: (1) General: All pipe and heat fused materials shall be manufactured from virgin polyethylene extrusion compound material in accordance with ASTM D-2513, Section 4.1 and 4.2. Pipe shall be manufactured to outside diameters, wall thickness, and respective tolerances as specified in ASTM, D-3035, D-2447 or F- 714. Fittings shall be manufactured to diameters, wall thickness, and respective tolerances as specified in ASTM D-3261 for butt fusion fittings, ASTM D2683 for socket fusion fittings and ASTM F-1055 for electro fusion fittings. (2) Material: The material shall have a Hydrostatic Design basis of 1600 psi (11.03Mpa) at 73°F (23°C) per ASTM D-2837. The material shall be listed in PPI TR4 as either PE 3408/3608 or PE 4710 piping formulation. The material shall be a high-density polyethylene compound having a minimum cell classification of PE345464C as specified in ASTM D-3350. (3) Dimensions: Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Closed Loop Geothermal Heat Exchanger 23 57 33 5 of 14 (a) Pipe with diameter of less than 1 ¼” (3.175cm) (nominal) shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D-3035 with a minimum (based on pressure rating) dimension ratio of 11. (b) Pipe manufactured with a diameter of 1 ¼” (3.175cm) (nominal) and larger shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D-3035 (minimum [based on pressure rating] dimension ratio of 15.5) or ASTM D-2447 (Schedule 40). If the pipe is used in a vertical bore application it shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D-3035 with a minimum (based on pressure rating) dimension ration of 11. (c) Pipe 3” (7.62cm) (nominal) and larger shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D-3035, (with a minimum [based on pressure rating] dimension ratio of 17) or D-2447 (Schedule 40). (d) Table of Water Pressure Ratings at 73.4F (23.5C) for DR-PR PE 3408/3608 Plastic Pipe Dimension Ratio Pressure Rating, psi 7 267 9 200 9.3 193 11 160 13.5 128 15.5 110 17 100 (e) Table of Water Pressure Ratings at 73.4F (23.5C) for DR-PR PE 4710 Plastic Pipe Dimension Ratio Pressure Rating, psi 9 252 11 202 13.5 161 15.5 139 17 126 21 101 (4) Markings: Sufficient information shall be permanently marked on the length of the pipe as defined by the appropriate ASTM pipe standard. (5) Certification Materials: Manufacturer shall supply a notarized document confirming compliance with the above standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE JOINING METHODS A. The only acceptable methods for joining buried pipe systems are a heat fusion process. Stab-type fittings quality controlled to provide a leak-free union between pipe ends that is stronger than the pipe itself may be submitted, two-weeks prior to required approval, and subject to engineer approval. B. Polyethylene pipe shall be heat fused by butt, socket, sidewall, or electro- fusion in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s procedures. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Closed Loop Geothermal Heat Exchanger 23 57 33 6 of 14 C. Barbed fittings are not permitted to be connected directly to polyethylene pipe, with the exception of stab-type fittings, as described above. All mechanical connections must be accessible. D. All fusion joints must meet the requirements of Performance Pipe’s bulletin PP 750 - “Heat Fusion Joining Procedures and Qualification Guide”. 3.2 UNDERGROUND HDPE INSULATION REQUIREMENTS A. Any underground geothermal HDPE piping that within 5 feet of a sewer, storm drain, or other water containing conduit must be separated by insulation. 3.3 GSHX CONSTRUCTION OVERSIGHT A. The Geothermal Engineer shall witness the installation and testing of the first vertical u- bend. B. The Geothermal Engineer shall inspect all HDPE fused joints prior to burial. C. The Geothermal Engineer shall witness a sampling of the following construction items: (1) Drilled bore depth (2) Vertical u-bend inserted depth (3) Verification of grouting from bottom to top of vertical bore (4) Flow rate tests (5) Pressure hold tests D. The General Contractor shall provide a qualified individual to witness all recorded testing results required in section 3.4 that are not witnessed by the Geothermal Engineer. 3.4 FLUSHING, PURGING, PRESSURE AND FLOW TESTING A. All fusion joints and loop lengths shall be visually inspected prior to flow pressure drop and pressure hold testing. See drawing sheet G-105 for details on field testing methods. B. A minimum velocity of 2ft/sec (0.6069m/sec) in each piping section must be maintained for a minimum of 15 minutes, until all air is removed. Any visible bubbles in the purge tank, or a change of more than one inch (2.54cm) in the level of fluid in the purge pump tank during pressurization indicates air still trapped in the system. C. All vertical u-bend loops shall be pressure tested before installation in borehole. Chart of approved test results for all system boreholes must be submitted. D. After installation and grouting vertical borehole, each u-bend loop shall be tested for pressure drop at full flow and compared to anticipated values, as well as hydrostatically tested. Leaks, a lack of flow or high pressure drop must be remedied at no cost to the owner. Chart of approved test results for all system boreholes must be submitted. E. All horizontal GHX module components of the GSHX shall be flow pressure drop tested, and hydrostatically tested per ASTM F2164-18 to 90psi prior to bedding in sand and backfilling. Chart of approved test results for all circuits must be submitted. F. Final installed system shall be tested again to verify each GHX module meets the flow pressure drop within 15%, and pressure hold tested to 90 psi per ASTM F2164-18. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Closed Loop Geothermal Heat Exchanger 23 57 33 7 of 14 3.5 ANTIFREEZE SELECTION AND USE A. FLUID MATERIAL. The propylene glycol fluid must meet the following requirements: (1) The fluid must be industrially inhibited propylene glycol (phosphate-based). (2) The fluid must be easily analyzed for glycol concentration and inhibitor level, and easily reinhibited using inhibitors readily available from the fluid manufacturer. (3) If the system contains more than 250 gallons of fluid, annual analysis must be provided free of charge by the fluid manufacturer. Manufacturer must also provide testing guidelines for use by the operator of a smaller system. (4) The fluid must pass ASTM D1384 (less than 0.5 mils penetration per year for all system metals). (5) The system shall be charged with a 25% solutions by volume of propylene glycol, for a maximum of 14F freeze protection. B. FLUID INSTALLATION. Follow these installation procedures: (1) All piping shall be thoroughly flushed of debris prior to charging with glycol. (2) Use only good quality water in solution with the propylene glycol fluid. Use water with low levels (less than 25 ppm) of chloride and sulfate, and less than 50 ppm of hard water ions (Ca++, Mg++). Distilled or deionized water is recommended. C. The geothermal contractor shall coordinate with the mechanical contractor about the requirements and installation of the propylene glycol antifreeze. The geothermal contractor shall provide all the antifreeze in the ground loop piping, up to and including the blocking valves in the lower level of the building. D. The geothermal contractor is responsible for the water quality properties in the entire ground heat exchanger. The water must meet the minimum requirements of both the in- building equipment and the antifreeze manufacturer prior to installation of antifreeze. The geothermal contractor shall include treatment of water in the ground heat exchanger as part of the base bid. 3.6 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Particulate contaminants must be flushed from entire piping system prior to initial start- up. B. Start-up pressurization of the circuit to a minimum of 20 to 30 psi (1.38-2.07 bar) when installed in the summer with circulating water temperature of 70-90F (20-30C) and 40 to 50 psi (2.76-3.45 bar) when installed in the winter with circulating water temperature of 40-50F (5-10C) is required. C. The circulation system must incorporate provisions for flow and temperature-sensing capability for testing the performance of the water side of the heat pump system. D. Loop charging valve handles must be removed and/or the ports sufficiently plugged to prevent accidental discharge of system fluid and pressure. 3.7 WARRANTY A. The geothermal contractor shall guarantee all workmanship for this project for a period of 18 months from the date of acceptance by the Owner as determined by the Construction Manager. The warranty shall apply to: (1) All vertical heat exchangers installed within the property limits. (2) All horizontal piping and manifolding. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Closed Loop Geothermal Heat Exchanger 23 57 33 8 of 14 (3) All valves, valve vault, and fittings serving the ground heat exchanger, excluding those installed inside the building by the mechanical contractor. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Closed Loop Geothermal Heat Exchanger 23 57 33 9 of 14 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Closed Loop Geothermal Heat Exchanger 23 57 33 10 of 14 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Closed Loop Geothermal Heat Exchanger 23 57 33 11 of 14 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Closed Loop Geothermal Heat Exchanger 23 57 33 12 of 14 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Closed Loop Geothermal Heat Exchanger 23 57 33 13 of 14 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Closed Loop Geothermal Heat Exchanger 23 57 33 14 of 14 END OF SECTION 23 70 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Site Demolition and Clearing 31 10 00 1 of 6 SECTION 31 10 00 Site Demolition & Clearing PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS A. Attention is directed to the requirements of the printed form of Contract and to General Requirements of which this section is hereby made a part. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Work by General Contractor Demolition, clearing and grubbing required for this work includes, but is not necessarily limited to removal and disposal, removal and delivery to the Owner, or removal and reuse of the following: 1. Curbing 2. Concrete walks and pavement 3. Bituminous walks and pavement 4. Trees, shrubs, vegetation 5. Debris and rubble within project 6. Fencing 7. Other items as noted on the drawings B. Site Controls Contractor shall incorporate traffic control measures, including signage and fencing, throughout the work. The Owner shall be afforded access to the Contractor-occupied areas of the site as required for obtaining owner-salvaged materials, work other than by the Contractor and for the normal operation and maintenance of the school building. C. Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. Section 02 41 00 DEMOLITION a. Demolition and removal of existing house 2. Section 31 20 00 EARTHWORK D. Definitions The terms "demolition, clearing and grubbing," as used herein, includes the removal of all existing objects (except for those objects designated to remain) down to the existing ground level, including their underground root systems, plus such other work as is described in this Section of these Specifications. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Site Demolition and Clearing 31 10 00 2 of 6 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during demolition operations and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the procedures involved and who shall direct and coordinate the operation and ensure coordination with the applicable utility agencies. B. Codes and Standards In addition to complying with all pertinent code and regulations, comply with the requirements of those insurance carriers providing coverage for this work. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Dust and Mud Control Use all means necessary to prevent the spread of dust and mud during performance of the work of the Section; thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent mud and dust from being a nuisance to the site residents and the neighbors. B. Inspections Contractor shall undertake daily inspections of site controls (construction fencing, signage, erosion controls) and existing site items, both to remain and to be removed. Repair and remediation, where required, shall be undertaken immediately. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONSTRUCTION FENCE Standard chainlink construction fence shall include mesh screen that prevents dust and screens the view of the abutting property at 126 Main Street. Mesh screen to include graphic. Design of graphic provided by Owner. 2.02 OTHER MATERIALS All materials, not specifically described, but required for proper completion of the work of this Section, shall be as selected by the Contractor, subject to approval of the Landscape Architect. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Site Demolition and Clearing 31 10 00 3 of 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Notification Notify the Landscape Architect at least two full working days prior to commencing the work of this Section. B. Site Inspection Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the entire site and all objects designated to be removed and to be preserved. C. Clarification 1. The drawings do not purport to show all objects existing on the site. 2. Before commencing the work of this Section, verify with the Landscape Architect all objects to be removed and all objects to be preserved. D. Scheduling 1. Schedule all work in a careful manner with all necessary consideration for the Owner. Before commencing any work, submit a schedule for review to the Landscape Architect showing the commencement, the order and the completion dates for the various parts of this work. 2. Avoid interference with use of, and passage to and from, adjacent buildings and facilities. 3. Prior to any work performed on the site, the Contractor shall notify Dig Safe at the following number, 1-800-322- 4844. 4. Prior to the start of any work within the town right-of-way along Bay Road, the Contractor shall coordinate with the Amherst DPW. The Contractor shall be responsible for traffic management plan and any traffic controls required by the DPW and/or police department. E. Disconnection of Utilities Before starting site operations, disconnect or arrange for disconnection of all utility services designated to be removed or that require temporary discontinuance for the duration of the work, as shown in the drawings, performing all such work in accordance with the requirements of the utility company or agency involved. F. Protection of Utilities: Preserve, in operating condition, all active utilities traversing the site and not designated to be disconnected. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Site Demolition and Clearing 31 10 00 4 of 6 G. Tree Protection 1. All trees noted on construction documents as to be preserved, shall be protected during construction. A. Protection-Zone Fencing: Fencing fixed in position and meeting the following requirements: 1. Chain Link Tree Protection-Zone Fencing a. Height: 6 feet. b. Fences to be mounted on two-inch diameter galvanized iron posts, driven into the ground to a depth of at least 2-feet at no more than 10-foot spacing. c. The diameter of the fencing shall have a minimum diameter of 5’ beyond the tree’s dripline. d. Install tree protection-zone fencing along edges of protection zones before materials or equipment are brought on the site and construction operations begin in a manner that will prevent people from easily entering protected area except by entrance gates. e. Construct fencing so as not to obstruct safe passage or visibility at vehicle intersections where fencing is located adjacent to pedestrian walkways or in close proximity to street intersections, drives, or other vehicular circulation. f. All equipment and stockpiles shall be kept off of the enclosed area. g. If any construction is required through the area of protection, all efforts shall be made to minimize disturbance to the tree trunk, branches and root system. Any roots encountered during construction shall be either trenched around or avoided if possible and/or hand pruned. h. Trees should receive a root fertilization treatment. 2. Plastic Snow Fencing to Wrap Tree Trunks a. Plastic snow fencing constructed of high-density extruded and stretched polyethylene fabric with 2-inch (50-mm) maximum opening in pattern and weighing a minimum of 0.4 lb/ft. (0.6 kg/m); remaining flexible from minus 60 to plus 200 deg F (minus 16 to plus 93 deg C); inert to most chemicals and acids; minimum tensile yield strength of 2000 psi (13.8 MPa) and ultimate tensile strength of 2680 psi (18.5 MPa); secured with plastic bands or galvanized- steel or stainless- steel wire ties b. Height: 4 feet (1.2 m). c. Color: High-visibility orange, non-fading. 3. Excavation in Tree Protection Zones a. General: There shall be no disturbance to existing trees that are to be preserved. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Site Demolition and Clearing 31 10 00 5 of 6 b. The contractor is to report weekly to Hampshire College terms of protection zone maintenance and necessary disturbance for the purposes of demolition, excavation and construction. c. Standard excavation equipment will not be permitted in tree protection zones. The contractor shall submit a plan of proposed demo work and proposed excavation and/or construction within the tree protection zone to Hampshire College for approval prior to beginning work within the tree protection zone. H. Perform demolition work in accordance with applicable rules, regulations, codes and ordinances of local, State and Federal Authorities, and in accordance with the requirements of Public Utility Corporations having jurisdiction over the work. Obtain and pay for all necessary permits, licenses and certificates and give all notices as required during the performance of the demolition work. 3.02 DEMOLITION All items designated to be salvaged shall be carefully removed from the site so as not to damage them. Damaged items shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no extra charge to the Owner. The contractor shall take possession of all demolished materials not scheduled for reuse and completely remove from site and legally dispose of same. 3.03 REMOVAL OF DEBRIS Remove all debris from the site and leave the site in a neat and orderly condition to the approval of the Landscape Architect. 3.04 SALVAGE OF ITEMS FOR RE-USE Any items that are designated for salvage and delivery to Owner or for salvage and re- use shall be carefully removed as to not damage, scratch or otherwise marr the object in any way, and then shall then be stored by the Contractor until such time as the Contractor is ready for installation of the item. Installation of salvaged items shall include footings or any other necessary installation procedures required for the complete, safe use of the item installed. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Site Demolition and Clearing 31 10 00 6 of 6 This Page Intentionally left Blank Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Earthwork 31 20 00 Page 1 of 24 SECTION 31 20 00 Earthwork PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section B. Reference is made to Exhibits as follows: 1. EXHIBIT D -- Geotechnical Engineering Recommendations Report, dated November 9, 2020 2. EXHIBIT E – Soils Evaluation Report, dated December 3, 2018 3. EXHIBIT F – Decision on Application for Comprehensive Permit G.L. C. 40B, Sections 20-23, dated October 29, 2020 1.02. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: B. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein C. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Installation of Erosion Control Barrier as shown and detailed on drawings prior to start of any work. Another section? 2. Protection of all subgrade surfaces prior to start of work including sewer, water, electric and other underground utilities. 3. Contact DIGSAFE prior to commencing work and confirm locations of all underground utilities. 4. Clearing and preparation of site. (see Division 1 Site Demolition, Clearing and Grubbing Spec) 5. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. (see Division 1 Site Demolition, Clearing and Grubbing Spec) 6. Removal, hauling and stockpiling of suitable excavated materials for subsequent use in the work. 7. Protection of work areas, environmental controls. 8. Excavation: a. General excavation to lines and grades indicated. b. Excavation and backfill of utility trenches. c. Excavation and backfilling of trenches under structures. d. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried utilities and pits for buried utility structures. e. Excavation and backfill of rock and boulders in areas of construction. f. Excavation and backfill for removal of all walks, pads and footings. g. Excavation and backfill for all new foundations, retaining walls, and slabs- on-grade. h. Excavation and site grading to create grades and walk slopes indicated on drawings. i. Excavation and backfill for storm water drainage systems. j. Excavation for walks and pads. 9. General exterior rough grading, cutting and filling required. 10. Filling and backfilling as required for walls, including furnishing of any extra material required. 11. Base and subbase course materials under pavements, slabs and site footings, including compaction. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Earthwork 31 20 00 Page 2 of 24 12. Excavation and disposal of excess or unsuitable material. Excavation shall include removal and satisfactory disposal of all unclassified material encountered throughout the site. 13. All rehandling, hauling and placing of stockpiled materials for use in refilling, filling, backfilling, grading and other such operations. 14. Pumping and dewatering of excavation as may be required. Excavation and removal associated with demolition of existing house. 15. Coordination with soils and fill testing as specified. D. Alternates: Not Applicable. E. Furnish Items to Other Sections: Not Applicable. F. Items To Be Furnished Only: Not Applicable. G. Related work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 02 41 00 DEMOLITION 2. Section 03 30 00 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 3. Section 07 10 00 WATERPROOFING AND DAMPPROOFING 4. Section 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION 5. Section 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING 6. Section 32 20 00 ASPHALT PAVING 7. Section 32 90 00 PLANTING 8. Section 33 10 00 WATER UTILITIES 9. Section 33 23 30 SEWER UTILITIES 10. Section 33 40 00 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 11. Section 33 56 00 UNDERGROUND PROPANE STORAGE 1.03. DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. 3. Utility Trench Backfill - is the area bounded by the proposed finished subgrade and the cover material over the respective pipe or conduit. This material shall conform with applicable requirements for embankment, structural backfill or utility company requirements depending on the area or zone into which the utility is installed. B. Base Course: Layer placed between the subbase course and asphalt paving. C. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. D. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. E. Embankment - shall be defined as any area on the site filled to raise grades to proposed subgrade elevations. Embankments are placed in layers to a predetermined elevation and cross-section. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Earthwork 31 20 00 Page 3 of 24 F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations. 1. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by Landscape Architect. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. 2. Bulk Excavation: Excavations more than 10 feet (3 m) in width and pits more than 30 feet (9 m) in either length or width. 3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated dimensions without direction by Landscape Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Landscape Architect, shall be without additional compensation. G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. H. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits and boulders of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. (0.57 cu. m) or more in volume that when tested by an independent geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586, exceeds a standard penetration resistance of 100 blows/2 inches (97 blows/50 mm). I. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. J. Subbase Course: Layer placed between the subgrade and base course for asphalt paving, or layer placed between the subgrade and a concrete pavement or walk. K. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, structural soil or landscape soil materials. Subgrade - shall be that portion of the soil or rock which remains after stripping of topsoil, excavation, and prior to filling, or placement of roadway subbase. In proposed building area, subgrade shall be soil or rock which remains after stripping of topsoil and subsoil. L. Subsoil - loose silt and fine sand layer located directly below the topsoil M. Topsoil - The upper layer of the soil profile which is supporting the growth of vegetation as evidenced by the existence therein of numerous roots and other organic matter. N. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. O. Unsuitable Material - material which is classified as "unsuitable" shall be material having at least one of the following properties: 1. Material with a maximum unit dry weight per cubic foot less than 90 lb. as determined by ASTM D 1557. 2. Material containing visible organic matter, topsoil, organic silt, peat, construction debris, roots and stumps. 3. Material which has a Liquid Limit greater than 50. 4. Material designated in the field by the Engineer. P. Rock and Boulder Excavation—shall be defined as the removal of sound and solid mass, layer, or ledge, or ledge of mineral matter as follows: Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Earthwork 31 20 00 Page 4 of 24 1. Rock excavation shall mean the removal of bedrock (ledge) which, in the opinion of the landscape architect, requires for its removal, drilling, blasting, wedging, sledging or barring and boulders which, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, require blasting for removal. Rock excavation shall be made to the widths and depths as described for pay lines or as directed by the Architect in the field. 2. Boulder excavation shall mean the removal of rock fragments exceeding 2 cubic yards in volume which can be removed without resorting to blasting. 1.04. REFERENCED REPORTS AND DOCUMENTATION A. Exhibits as listed above B. Existing Ground Survey: A survey for design purposes has been prepared by Others on behalf of the Owner. Verify accuracy of survey, report any discrepancies and undertake any additional surveying at no cost to the Owner. Include all costs for variations in material volume and handling associated within the stated survey accuracy and tolerance. C. Existing Underground Utility Diagram: A diagram for design purposes has been prepared for the Owner. The data is made available only for information and not for construction. Verify accuracy of the diagram, report any discrepancies and undertake any additional utility locating at no cost to the Owner. 1.05. SUBMITTALS A. All submittals, including shop drawings, manufacturer's specifications and product data shall be submitted for the following in accordance with the requirements of Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures and Substitutions. B. Samples of any material shall be submitted for inspection and approval upon the Architect's request. Analyses shall be certified by the testing laboratory. Samples shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1. Results of sieve analyses and Proctor Tests of proposed materials for controlled structural fill and source of materials. C. Materials proposed as fill, ordinary fill structural gravel fill, gravel borrow, crushed stone and sand, sieve analysis, proctor tests, and source of materials. D. Materials proposed for base courses under pavement. E. Materials proposed for perimeter and under slab drain lines and including filter fabric and piping system. 1.06. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surveyor Qualifications: An independent licensed surveyor, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and experienced in ground surveys. B. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock-definition testing, as documented according to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548. C. Mockup: Construct a mockup of rough grading to a bermed landform nominated by the Landscape Architect. Establish grading standards for “crisp” & “sharp” ridges/toes and Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Earthwork 31 20 00 Page 5 of 24 planar grading of slopes to the satisfaction of the Landscape Architect. If approved, mockup may be incorporated into the works. D. Field Observation: Give not less than 14 working days’ notice so that field observations may be made of the following: 1. Mockup. 2. Grading operations. E. Pre-excavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." The Landscape Architect may conduct a presentation illustrating the intent of the grading. Ensure that key layout and grading personnel are in attendance. F. The Owner reserves the right to retain an independent testing laboratory to perform on- site observation and testing during the following phases of the construction operations. The services of the testing laboratory may include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Observation during excavation and replacement of existing fill under paved or slab areas. 2. Observation of compaction of paved and slab area subgrades. 3. Observation during placement and compaction of fills. 4. Laboratory testing and analysis of fill and bedding materials specified, as required. 5. Observation of subgrade preparation for paved or slab areas. 6. Observe construction and perform water content, gradation, and compaction tests at a frequency and at locations determined by the testing agency. The results of these tests will be submitted to the Architect, copy to the Contractor, on a timely basis so that the Contractor can take such action as is required to remedy indicated deficiencies. 7. Observation of fills following interruptions by rains or other inclement weather. G. The testing agency's presence does not include supervision or direction of the actual work by the Contractor, his employees or agents. Neither the presence of the testing agency, nor any observations and testing performed by him shall excuse the Contractor from defects discovered in his work. H. Compaction Control 1. Wherever a percentage of compaction for backfill is indicated or specified, it shall be the in-place dry density divided by the maximum dry density and multiplied by 100. 2. The maximum dry density shall be the density at optimum moisture as determined by ASTM Standard Methods of Test for Moisture - Density Relations of Soil Using 10-lb. Rammer and 18-inch Drop, Designation D1557-78. (Method C). 3. The in-place dry density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM Standard Method of Test for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method, Designation D1556-82 or ASTM Standard Method of Test for Density of Soil in Place by Nuclear Methods, Designation D2922-81. 1.07. COORDINATION A. Prior to start of Earthwork, the Contractor shall arrange an on-site meeting with the Architect for the purpose of establishing Contractor’s schedule of operations and scheduing inspection procedures and requirements. B. As construction proceeds, the Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Landscape Architect prior to start of earthwork operations requiring inspection and/ or testing. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Earthwork 31 20 00 Page 6 of 24 C. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining test samples of soil materials proposed to be used and transporting them to the site sufficiently in advance of time planned for use of these materials for testing of materials to be completed. Use of these proposed materials by the Contractor prior to testing and approval or rejection, shall be at the Contractor’s risk. 1.08. LAYOUT AND GRADES A. All lines and grades not presently established at the site shall be laid out by the Contractor in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. The Contractor shall establish permanent bench marks by employment of an independent Registered Land Surveyor or Professional Civil Engineer. All established bounds and bench marks shall be maintained and any which are destroyed or disturbed shall be replaced as directed. B. Unless otherwise indicated, project site areas shall be given uniform slopes between points for which finished grades are indicated or between such points and existing established grades. C. All walks are to be graded at <4.5% running slope and 1.5% cross slope maximum. All plazas and accessible parking spaces and aisles are to be graded at <1.5% in all directions. 1.09. JOB CONDITIONS A. Dust Control 1. Use all means necessary to control dust on and near the work and on and near all off-site borrow areas, if such dust is caused by the Contractor's operations during performance of the work or if resulting from the condition in which the Contractor leaves the site. 2. Thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent dust being a nuisance to the public, neighbors and concurrent performance or other work on the site. B. Protection of Existing Structure and Utilities 1. The work shall be executed in such manner as to prevent any damage to adjacent property and any other property and existing improvements such as, but not limited to : streets, curbs, paving, trees, utility lines and structures, monuments, bench marks and other public and private property, and to protect existing structures and foundations from damage caused by settlement, lateral earth movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. 2. In case of any damage or injury caused in the performance of the work, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, make good such damage or injury to the satisfaction of, and without cost to the Owner. Existing roads, sidewalks, and curbs damaged during the project work shall be repaired or replaced to their original condition at the completion of operations. The Contractor shall replace, at his cost, existing bench marks, monuments, and other reference points which are disturbed or destroyed. 3. Buried structures, utility lines, etc., including those which project less than 18 inches above grade, which are subject to damage from construction equipment shall be clearly marked to indicate the hazard. Markers shall indicate limits of danger areas, by means which will be clearly visible to operators of trucks and other construction equipment, and shall be maintained at all times until completion of project. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Earthwork 31 20 00 Page 7 of 24 1.10. DRAINAGE AND DEWATERING A. The Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, adequate pumping and drainage facilities to keep excavated areas sufficiently dry from groundwater and/or surface runoff so as not to adversely affect construction procedures or cause excessive disturbance of underlying natural ground or footing and slab subgrades. B. The Contractor shall grade and pitch the site as necessary to direct surface runoff away from open excavations and subgrade surfaces. Positive drainage (minimum 1.0% slope) shall be maintained at all times. C. Water from trenches and excavations shall be routed through the temporary sediment basins in such a manner as will not cause injury to public health nor to public or private property, not to the surface of roads, walks, and streets, not cause any interference with the use of the same by the public. Methods of disposal of pumped effluent shall not cause erosion or siltation. D. Under no circumstances shall the Contractor place fills, pour concrete, or install piping and appurtenances in excavations containing free water. E. There shall be sufficient pumping equipment, in good working order, available at all times to remove water. F. Where, in the opinion of the Architect, pumping of excavations is not effective in maintaining a dry, firm subgrade, other acceptable dewatering methods shall be employed. 1.11. FROST PROTECTION Frozen, excessively moist or material containing snow shall not be placed as fill or backfill. Special care should be taken when placing fill material when the temperature is below 32oF. 1.12. SHORING AND SHEETING A. Provide shoring, sheeting and/or bracing at excavations, as required, to prevent collapse of earth at site of excavations. B. Comply with federal, state and local regulations and provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). C. Remove sheeting and shoring and the like, as backfilling operations progress, taking all necessary precautions to prevent collapse of excavation sides. 1.13. DISTURBANCE OF EXCAVATED OR FILLED AREAS DURING CONSTRUCTION A. The contractor shall take all necessary steps to avoid disturbance of subgrade, underlying natural soils and compacted fill during excavation and filling operations. Methods of construction shall be revised as necessary to avoid disturbance described above, including restricting construction access and types of vehicles or equipment, dewatering, or other acceptable control measures. Disturbance shall be construed to include deterioration of soils due to the contractor's operations, such as moving equipment, hauling, etc. The Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Earthwork 31 20 00 Page 8 of 24 contractor shall cooperate with the engineer to modify operations as necessary to minimize disturbance and protect bearing soils. A. All excavated or filled areas that are disturbed during construction, including all loose or saturated soils, fill that cannot be compacted within 48 hours due to saturation and other areas that will not meet compaction requirements as specified herein shall be removed and replaced with compacted Granular Fill Sand-Gravel, or Crushed Stone at the Contractor's expense. 1.14. DISPOSITION OF EXISTING UTILITIES A. Information shown on the Drawings as to location of existing utilities is from the best available sources, but no guarantee is inherent or is it to be assumed that such information is accurate or complete. The Contractor shall exercise special care during his operations to avoid damage to underground utilities and structures. The Contractor shall cooperate with, and consult with representatives of the Town, utility companies and Dig Safe in order to avoid damage to the structures. The Contractor shall furnish and erect suitable supports and shoring or other means of protection, all at his own expense, where required. Hand methods of excavating shall be used around buried utilities and is included in the work to be done under this Contract, at no additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, preserve and protect from injury all property along and adjacent to the line of work, and be responsible for and repair any and all damage and injury thereto, arising out of or in consequence of any act or omission of his. B. If existing utilities are encountered on the site, they shall be carefully protected from damage and relocated or removed as directed, as required by the work. When a utility line is exposed during construction, both the Architect and the Utility Owner shall be notified in writing. C. Active utilities existing on the site shall be carefully protected from damage and relocate or remove as required by the work. When an active utility line is exposed during construction, both the Architect and the Utility Owner shall be notified in writing. D. Inactive utilities encountered during construction operations or utilities to be abandoned shall be removed, plugged or capped. The location of such utilities shall be reported in writing to the Architect. 1.15. MEASUREMENT A. Measurement for unanticipated soil conditions, excavation shall be by the cubic yard. The yardage to be paid for under these items will be the number of cubic yards of material, measured in original position, acceptably excavated and disposed of as herein specified. B. When during the course of excavation, unanticipated soil conditions is encountered, such material shall be uncovered and exposed. The Architect shall be notified by the Contractor before proceeding further. The areas in question shall then be cross-sectioned as hereinafter specified. C. Failure on the part of the Contractor to fully uncover such material and to notify the Architect and proceeding with the excavation before cross-sections are taken will constitute forfeiture by the Contractor of all right to claim credit. D. The Contractor shall employ and pay for registered Civil Engineer or land surveyor to take cross-sections before and after removal and to make all computations of volume of excavated within payment lines. Cross-sections shall be taken in the presence of the Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Earthwork 31 20 00 Page 9 of 24 Owner's Representative and the computations shall be approved by the Architect. The Owner has the right to have independent cross-sectioned and computations performed. E. Where removal of unanticipated soil conditions is required outside established payment lines the extent of this removal and the basis of payment shall be determined by the Architect. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01. FILL MATERIAL, GENERAL A. Approval Required 1. All fill material shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. 2.02. COMMON FILL MATERIAL, ORDINARY BORROW A. Common fill / ordinary borrow material shall be well graded, natural inorganic soil, approved by the Engineer and meeting the following requirements: 1. It shall be free of organic or other weak or compressible materials, of frozen materials, and of stones larger than six inches maximum dimensions. 2. It shall be of such nature and character that it can be compacted to the specified densities. 3. It shall be free from highly plastic clays, from all materials subject to decay, decomposition, or dissolution and from cinders or other material which will corrode piping or other metal. 4. It shall have a maximum dry density of not less than 100 lbs. per cubic foot. B. Re-use of excavated on site common fill is dependent upon meeting compaction criteria. 2.03. ENGINEERED FILL RECOMMENDATIONS A. Four engineered fill types are recommended: 1. Sand and Gravel for use immediately below footings, slabs, and sidewalks; 2. Crushed Stone in place of Sand and Gravel fill; 3. Gravel Base Course for use beneath pavements; and 4. Granular Fill for use as miscellaneous fill. B. Grain size distribution requirements are presented below. Please note that the Sand and Gravel specification is approximately that for Mass Highway M1.03.0, Type B Gravel Borrow. All material shall be free from ice and snow, roots, sod, rubbish and other deleterious or organic matter Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Earthwork 31 20 00 Page 10 of 24 Grain Size Distribution Requirements Size Sand and Gravel Gravel Base Course Granular Fill Crushed Stone Percent Finer by Weight 3 inch 100 100 100 --- 1 ½ inch --- 70-100 --- --- 1 inch --- --- --- 100 ¾ inch --- 50-85 --- 90-100 ½ inch 50-85 --- --- 10-50 ⅜ inch --- --- --- 0-20 No. 4 40-75 30-60 --- 0-5 No. 10 --- --- 30-90 --- No. 40 10-35 --- 10-70 --- No. 200 0-10 0-10 0-15 --- 2.04. LOAM A. Loam shall consist of natural loam topsoil, free from subsoil, obtained from an area which has never been stripped. It shall be removed to a depth of one (1) foot or less if subsoil is encountered. Loam shall be of uniform quality, free from hard clods, stiff clay, hardpan, sods, partially disintegrated stone, lime, cement, ashes, slag, concrete, tar residues, tarred paper, boards, chips, sticks or any other undesirable materials. B. Loam shall contain between 5.5 and 7.5 percent organic matter determined by loss on ignition of moisture-free samples dried in accordance with the current method of the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. The acidity range shall be pH 5.0 to pH 7.0 inclusive. The mechanical analysis of the soil shall be as follows: Passing Retained On Percentage 1" screen 100% 1" screen 1/4" screen (gravel) not more than 3# 1/4" screen #100 U.S.S. mesh sieve (sand) 49% - 60% #100 U.S.S. mesh sieve (very fine sand, silt and clay 40% - 60% C. The Contractor shall furnish a certified report of and approved analytical chemist showing the analysis of representative samples of the loam which he proposes to use. The Contract Price shall include inspection and laboratory charges. No loam shall be delivered until the approval of samples by the Architect, but such approval shall not constitute the final acceptance. The Architect reserves the right to reject on or after delivery any material which does not, in his opinion, meet these specifications. D. The Architect reserves the right to reject loam in which more than sixty (60) per cent of the material passing No. One Hundred (100) U.S.S.- mesh sieve consists of clay as determined by the Buoyoucus Hydrometer or by the decantation method. All percentages are to be based on dry weight samples. If the Architect directs, loam which varies only slightly from the Specifications may be made acceptable by such corrections as the Architect deems necessary. E. Lime shall be ground limestone containing not less than eighty-five (85) per cent of total carbonates and shall be ground to such a fineness that fifty (50) per cent will pass through a twenty (20) mesh sieve. Coarser material shall be acceptable provided specified rates of application are increased proportionately on the basis of quantities passing the one hundred (100) mesh sieve. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Earthwork 31 20 00 Page 11 of 24 F. Commercial fertilizer shall contain not less than eight percent (8) per cent nitrogen, six percent (6%) phosphorus, and four percent (4%) potash, by weight, and shall conform to applicable state fertilizer laws. It shall be uniform in composition, dry and free flowing and shall be delivered to site in original, unopened containers, each bearing manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. Any fertilizer which becomes caked or otherwise damaged, making it unsuitable for use, will not be accepted. At least forty (40) percent by weight of the nitrogen contents of fertilizer shall be derived from organic materials. G. Water used in this work shall be furnished by the Town of Greenfield. Contractor shall verify that water source is suitable for irrigation and free from ingredients harmful to plants. Hose and other watering equipment required shall be furnished by Contractor. H. Manure shall be well-rotted, unleached stable manure not less than eight (8) months old and not more than two (2) years old. It shall be free from sawdust, shavings or refuse of any kind and shall not contain over twenty-five (25) per cent of straw. Furnish information to the Architect as to the kind of disinfectant or chemicals, if any, that may have been used in storage of, or otherwise in connection with, the manure. No manure may be used until found satisfactory after sampling and testing. A composition of peat humus or peat moss to which has been incorporated commercial dehydrated manure in the proportion of one hundred (100) pounds of dehydrated manure per cubic yard of peat, may be substituted for manure as specified above. I. Humus shall be ground or shredded peat which will have been stockpiled for at least one (1) year prior to its use. 2.05. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Nonwoven geotextile fabric for use between natural subgrade and crushed stone layer to be medium weight as manufactured by US Fabrics or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Existing Utilities: Locate and mark existing utilities, underground structures, and aboveground obstructions before excavation. Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Owner’s Representative. 3.02 GENERAL A. Prior Familiarization Prior to all work of this Section, become thoroughly familiar with the site, the site conditions, and all portions of the work falling within this Section. B. The Contractor shall establish the baseline shown on the drawings and accurately lay out all improvements related thereto. All work and control points shall be preserved by a system of offsets and/or ties in order to prevent destruction. Elevations shall be established from the project benchmark shown on the Contract Plans. C. Backfilling Prior to Approvals 1. Do not allow or cause any of the work performed or installed to be covered up or enclosed by work of Section prior to all required inspections, tests and approvals. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Earthwork 31 20 00 Page 12 of 24 2. Should any of the work be so enclosed or covered up before it has been approved, uncover all such work at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. After the uncovered work has been completely tested, inspected and approved, make all repairs and replacements necessary to restore the work to the condition in which it was found at the time of uncovering, all at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Stripping of Topsoil Any topsoil within "Limits of Work" and where excavation or filling will occur shall be stripped, cleaned of all rocks and debris and stockpiled on site for use in finish grading. See Division 31 Site Demolition and Clearing. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Protect utilities, structures, foundations, sidewalks, pavements, other facilities, lawns and plants from damage caused by operations or as a result of operations. 1. Utilities: After locating and marking, verify the status of utilities. Protect or temporarily divert existing utilities to remain active. Rectify immediately any obstruction or damage to utilities to remain active and provide and pay for temporary utilities whilst repairs are carried out to the satisfaction of the utility owner. 2. Property: Do not interfere with or damage property that is to remain on or adjacent to the site, including adjoining property to the site, and trees. Rectify immediately any interference or damage to such property. 3. Trees: If the trees are damaged or placed under unnecessary and avoidable stress by the Contractor, the Owners Representative shall deduct damages from the Contractor’s progress claim. 4. Irrigation: Install a temporary diversion main, control cable and valves to isolate contract area and to maintain service to areas outside of the contract area. F. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. G. Provide temporary erosion-control and slope stability measures to prevent erosion, displacement of soils, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and completed work. Be responsible for any additional measures in areas that rely on the establishment of plant roots to stabilize soils and slopes. 3.04 LAYOUT, FINISH ELEVATIONS, AND LINES A. Contractor shall be responsible for setting and establishing finish elevations and lines, to the required tolerances. Carefully preserve all data and all monuments set and, if displaced or lost, immediately replace to the approval of the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Lines and Elevations: The visual appearance and acceptable tolerances of the design is critically dependent upon the layout of the works. Include all costs and provide all instruments necessary to lay out the works accurately. Establish lines and elevation markers by survey instrumentation for finish grades and locations. C. Include all costs and provide all calculations necessary to verify the subgrade, substrate and/or structural set-down elevations from the finish grades to earthwork grades. If any discrepancy is found notify the Owner's Representative in writing prior to commencement of rough grading. D. Provide additional grade stakes and string lines as required to achieve grades and to enable field observations by the Landscape Architect. Re-instate markers/stakes as required throughout the Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Earthwork 31 20 00 Page 13 of 24 works. The Landscape Architect may direct the layout of the more important landform elements and/or shall review the works when laid out and retains the right to adjust the layout within 2 days. 3.05 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.06 EXCAVATING GENERALLY A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions. 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. 2. Barricade open excavations and post with warning tape. B. Excavate site as shown on the drawings and cross-sections. All suitable material must be stored on site and utilized as backfill or in embankments. Surplus or unsuitable material shall be removed and disposed of off the site. C. Depressions Resulting from Removal of Obstructions Where depressions result from, or have resulted from, the removal of surface or subsurface obstructions, open the depression to equipment working width and remove all debris and soft material as directed by the Architect. D. Sheeting, shoring, bracing, pumping, bailing, and other incidental work necessary to make and maintain excavations and keep them free from water at all times during placing of concrete, utility lines, and fill/backfill materials, shall be performed or supplied as required. Fill and backfill shall be placed in dry or dewatered areas only. E. Sheeting shall be installed, where required, to maintain safe and workable conditions in excavations and where adjacent tree protection zones prohibit sloped trench walls without damaging of the tree. Sheeting, including necessary wales and struts, shall be selected and designed by the Contractor. Use of sheeting shall equal or exceed minimum required for safety and/or conformance to law and/or OSHA Standards. F. Structures, pipes, pavement, earth, and other property liable to damage from excavation operations shall be braced, underpinned, and supported as required to prevent damage and movement. G. As excavation approaches underground utilities and structures, excavation shall be done by hand tools. Such manual excavation is incidental to normal excavation and no special payment will be made. H. As excavation shall include satisfactory disposal of excavated material not employed as backfill or fill material. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Earthwork 31 20 00 Page 14 of 24 I. Excavation for pipe and other items shall be carried far enough below underside of item to accommodate bedding material. J. Excavations which extend below indicated or specified levels (over-excavation), shall be filled to those levels with compacted Granular Fill. K. If bearing surface of subgrade which is to receive fill, concrete footing, structure, or other construction becomes softened, disturbed, or unstable, unsuitable material shall be removed down to a firm bearing surface and replaced with suitable material at no additional cost to the Owner. Subgrade shall then be protected from further disturbance until construction item is placed. L. Excavations shall not be wider than required to set, place, and remove forms for concrete, install piping, or perform other necessary work. Width of trench at 12 inches above top of pipe or conduit shall be less than the outside diameter of the pipe or the conduit plus 3 feet. Sides of trench shall be sloped in accordance with OSHA standards. In materials where sloping walls are not stable, or tree damage may occur, trench walls shall be supported by sheeting or trench box. 1. Should it be necessary to lower the utilities below the grade indicated on the Drawings because of existing pipes or structures, the excavation below normal grade shall be made to such widths and depths as the Engineer may direct. M. Below-ground Demolition 1. Underground construction, pipe, and similar items indicated on the Drawings as to be demolished or removed, shall be demolished and/or removed. Other items, not indicated on the Drawings, which impede construction of new work indicated, shall be abandoned, demolished and/or removed only with the approval of the Architect. 2. Pipe which is to be abandoned in place shall be suitably and permanently plugged at end. Plug shall be stiff concrete, with a thickness, measured parallel to pipe axis of 1 pipe diameter, for pipe less than 18 inches in diameter. Both inner and outer faces of plug for pipe equal to or greater than 18 inches in diameter shall be formed. Pipe less than 4 inches in diameter need not be plugged. Abandoned pipes within proposed building (if exist) shall be removed or if left in place, they shall be properly grouted. 3.07 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to required elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 2. Pile Foundations: Stop excavations from 6 to 12 inches (150 to 300 mm) above bottom of pile cap before piles are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displaced material. Excavate to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps. 3. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Earthwork 31 20 00 Page 15 of 24 minus 1 inch (25 mm). Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended for bearing surface. B. Barricade open excavations and post with warning tape. 3.08 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. 1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line. B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Clearance: unless otherwise shown 12 inches (300 mm) on each side of pipe or conduit. C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches (100 mm) deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe. D. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. E. Barricade open excavations and post with warning tape. 1. Reinstating: If non-cohesive backfill is exposed adjacent to existing utilities ensure it is reinstated to that before the works. Prevent cross connections between subdrains and existing utilities with non-cohesive backfilled trenches. 3.09 UNATHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used when approved by Landscape Architect. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Landscape Architect. 3.10 SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND COMPACTION A. Subgrade preparation for retaining wall footings shall be conducted in such a way as to minimize disturbance of the subgrade. B. If the natural soil subgrade is dry, densify the exposed bearing subgrade with four passes of a minimum 250 pound vibratory plate compactor. Protect footing subgrades from frost at all times. Fill should not be placed over frozen soil. C. In proposed fill areas, after the removal of topsoil and subsoil and prior to any fill placement proofroll/ compact the exposed subgrade with a minimum of 4 passes of a vibratory drum roller having a minimum weight of 5,000 pounds (static weight). If soft and unstable material is observed, it should be overexcavated and replaced with Granular Fill, compacted as specified herein at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Where test pit excavations extended below the future proposed footing subgrade level, they should be re-excavated and backfilled with properly compacted Granular Fill or Sand-Gravel Fill prior to foundation construction or fill placement. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Earthwork 31 20 00 Page 16 of 24 C. Notify Landscape Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade. D. If Landscape Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. 1. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. E. Proof roll subgrade with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof roll wet or saturated subgrades. F. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Landscape Architect. 3.11 BACKFILL GENERALLY A. Excavation below finished grades shall be backfilled. Temporary planking, timbering, forms, debris, and refuse shall be removed before backfill is placed. B. Backfilling shall be done in any area only after the Owner or Architect or Engineer have inspected and approved subgrade, foundations, or other work in excavations. Notice that the work is ready for inspection shall be given promptly, and sufficient time shall be allowed for making necessary examinations. C. In order to prevent lateral movement, care shall be exercised in placing backfill adjacent to utility lines and other structures. Backfill on opposite sides of such items shall be kept at approximately the same elevation as backfilling progresses to prevent unbalanced earth pressure. During backfilling, the difference in elevation of backfill on opposite sides of the structure shall not exceed 12 inches. 1. Shoring shall be employed as necessary to protect such items. B. Except as otherwise noted, tolerance of top surface of completed backfill shall be + 6 inches from true grade indicated, and variations from indicated tolerance shall approximately compensate within each 100-foot area. C. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Letting new concrete walls reach 28-day compressive strength. 2. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 3. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents. 4. Inspecting and testing underground utilities. 5. Removing concrete formwork. 6. Removing trash and debris. 7. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 8. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. 3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. B. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450 mm) of bottom of footings; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Earthwork 31 20 00 Page 17 of 24 C. Provide 4-inch- (100-mm-) thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches (750 mm) below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase. D. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25 mm), to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the utility pipe or conduit. 1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system. 2. Compact non-cohesive backfill material by water only if bottom of trench has positive drainage or subdrainage and compacting in lifts. Do not use water to compact cohesive backfills. E. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. F. Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing, and as sheeting is removed. G. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade. 3.13 BEDDING A. Minimum width of bedding material shall be at least as wide as the item to be installed on it. Where width of bed is less than full width of trench, Sand-Gravel shall be placed adjacent to bedding material to fill full width of the trench, and shall be compacted with bedding material. 1. Width of bedding for pipe shall extend full width of trench excavation. B. Where bed is damaged during excavation or while placing pipe, or otherwise, it shall be repaired to specified grade, contour, and compaction before weight of pipe is placed on it. C. Bedding material and embedment material for utilities will be furnished, placed, and compacted under the appropriate utility specification section. Bedding material to be Crushed Stone. 3.14 FILL A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills. (See requirements in Demolition Clearing and Grubbing Division 31) B. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. C. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material that is suitable as a subsoil. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. (see part 2 requirements) 4. Under structural slabs, use engineered fill. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Earthwork 31 20 00 Page 18 of 24 6. Under grass and planted areas on slopes steeper than 1 in 3, use satisfactory soil material that is stable at the proposed grade. Construct filled landforms and berms by overfilling and cutting back to ensure even compaction. Ensure soil material in each layer is homogenous to avoid perched lenses of groundwater forming. D. Fill shall be placed below base course and subbase course materials as required per Part 2 of this specification section. Fill DOES NOT replace those required materials. 3.15 COMPACTION A. Degree of compaction shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557, Method C. B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Except as otherwise noted, fill and backfill materials shall be placed in successive horizontal lifts which do not exceed specified thickness. D. Subgrade and backfill of indicated areas or structures shall be compacted as specified in the following table: Fill Area % of Maximum Dry Density Beneath slabs 95 Pavement base course 95 Beneath pavement base course 92 Backfill for foundation wall 95 Beneath landscape areas 80-85 D. Compaction requirements shall apply to material directly below the indicated support item (base course or footing), and to all material above the undisturbed earth beneath fill, and enclosed by the following planes: 1. Horizontal plane at the elevation of the bottom of the supported item (base course, footing, or structure), within a perimeter line located 2 feet beyond the exterior face or edge of item. 2. Flat planes extending from the perimeter line downward and outward at a 45 degree angle with the horizontal, to where the planes intersect undisturbed earth. Where zones of higher and lower percentages of compaction overlap, that of the higher percentage shall apply. F. Compaction of backfill shall be to a density not less than that required of the surrounding area fill. G. Equipment and methods employed to achieve specified compaction shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and equipment shall be replaced and methods revised as directed until specified compaction is obtained. H. Compaction of each lift shall be completed before placing of the next lift is started. I. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Earthwork 31 20 00 Page 19 of 24 Grading tolerance Rough Grade Pavement areas plus/minus 0.05 ft. Landscape areas plus/minus 0.10 ft. Finish Grade Pavement areas plus/minus 0.01 ft. Landscape areas plus/minus 0.05 ft. A. Backfill adjacent to wall, conduit, pipe and similar items, and in other areas where wheeled equipment can not safely be employed, shall be placed in 4 inch thick layers, to the specificed compaction using mechanical tampers 3.16 COMPACTION METHODS The Compaction alternative given below are stated to provide minimum compaction standards only and in no way relieves the Contractor of his/her obligation to achieve the specified degree of compaction by whatever additional effort that is necessary. Contractor shall also review the general guidelines for compaction means and methods,( Table 1-2) from the geotechnical recommendations report. A. COMPACTION METHODS The Compaction alternative given below are stated to provide minimum compaction standards only and in no way relieves the Contractor of his/her obligation to achieve the specified degree of compaction by whatever additional effort that is necessary. Contractor shall also review the general guidelines for compaction means and methods,( Table 1-2) from the geotechnical recommendations report. Compaction Method Maximum Loose Lift Thickness Minimum # passes Against Less Against Less Maximum Walls Critical Walls Critical Stone Size* and Pavement Areas & Pavement Areas Hand-operated vibratory plate or light roller in confined areas 3" 6" 8" 4 4 Hand-operated vibratory drum rollers weighing at least 1,000# in confined areas 3" 10" 12" 4 4 Light vibratory drum roller minimum minimum 3" 12" 18" 4 4 weight dynamic at drum force 5000# 10,000# Medium vibratory drum roller minimum minimum 3" 12" 24" 6 6 weight dynamic at drum force 10,000# 20,000# *And no more than two-thirds (2/3) loose lift thickness. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Earthwork 31 20 00 Page 20 of 24 3.17 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES A. After the subgrade has been completed per all Division 31 requirements and reviewed by the Landscape Architect or Field Engineer and approved, roll the surface to a smooth an uniform texture free from lumps, rock pockets, soft spots, and spongy areas. B. Under pavements and walks, place subbase course on separation fabric according to fabric manufacturer's written instructions. C. Place the base course and subbase in strict accordance with the project specifications. D. Place base course material over subbase. E. The base shall be constructed of two courses of gravel. The first course shall not be less than ½ the thickness of the base required when thoroughly compacted. The second course shall complete the thickness of the base required. Compaction shall be done with a vibrator compactor. 1. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches (150 mm), place materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick when compacted. 2. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course is 6 inches (150 mm) or less, place materials in a single layer. F. Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. G. Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. H. Under cast-in-place concrete and asphalt pavements: a. when thickness of compacted subbase or base course is 6 inches or less, place materials in a single layer. b. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches, place materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when compacted. I. Under Unitized paving pavements: a. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course is less than 3”, place materials in equal layers, with each layer no greater than 3 inches thick. Compact each layer to 95% proctor. b. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 3”, place materials in equal layers, with each layer no greater than 3 inches thick. Compact each layer to 95% proctor, prior to placing additional layers. c. J. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches wide, of satisfactory soil materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. K. All joints at existing paving shall be sawed vertical butt joints which shall receive a light coating of asphalt emulsion a short time before new paving commences. Interface between new and existing pavement shall result in a smooth continuous surface. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Earthwork 31 20 00 Page 21 of 24 L. Compact the base course to a minimum degree of compaction of 95 percent at optimum moisture content. M. Roll the base course until entire surface is firm, dense, and free from rock pockets and mud pads; do not slurry the base course. N. Water the base course after compaction. 3.18 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Grade with constant slope between points where elevations are given. 3. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. 4. Slope grades to direct water away from buildings to drains or subdrains and to prevent ponding. 3.19 TOLERANCES A. Comply with tolerances for lawn, grass and planting areas as follows: 1. Elevation: 1 inch . 2. Surface smoothness: Gap below 10-foot- (3-m-) long straightedge not to exceed 1 inch in any direction. 3. Slope: unless otherwise noted on the Drawings not less than 1% fall. B. Comply with tolerances for pavement and building areas as follows: 1. Elevation: 1/2 inch. 2. Surface smoothness: Gap below 10-foot- long straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch in any direction. 3. Slope: unless otherwise noted on the Drawings not less than 1% fall. 3.20 ADUSTING EXISTING UTILITY FEATURES A. Adjust existing utility surface features to suit finish grade. Extend or reduce risers, boxes, chambers, basins and rings and reset castings, frames, grout beds, access doors, lids, covers and the like. 3.21 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Earthwork 31 20 00 Page 22 of 24 B. Variation of moisture content in fill and backfill material shall be limited to Optimum Moisture (-1% to +3%). Moisture content shall be as uniformly distributed as practicable within each lift, and shall be adjusted as necessary to obtain the specified compaction. C. Material which does not contain sufficient moisture to be compacted to the specified densities shall be moisture conditioned by sprinkling, disking, windrowing, or other method approved by the Architect. 1. Material conditioned by sprinkling shall have water added before compaction. Uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material to obtain sufficient moisture content. The Contractor shall maintain sufficient hoses and/or water distributing equipment at the site for this purpose. D. Material containing excess moisture shall be dried to required Optimum Moisture Content before it is placed and compacted. Excessively moist soils shall be removed and replaced or shall be scarified by use of plow, discs, or other approved methods, and air-dried to meet the above requirements. E. Materials which are within the moisture requirements specified above, but which display pronounced elasticity or deformation under the action of earthmoving and compaction equipment, shall be reduced to Optimum Moisture Content, or below, to secure stability. F. In the event of sudden downpours or other inclement weather, exposed subgrades and fills which, in the opinion of the Architect become inundated or excessively moistened, shall have excess water removed and soil dried as specified above. E. Backfill stock piles shall be protected from adverse weather conditions. 3.22 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing shall be coordinated with the Owner paid for by the owner. B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing. C. Inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. D. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Landscape Architect. E. Test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Perform tests at the following locations and frequencies: 1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. 2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests. 3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for each 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests. 4. Filled Landforms: At subgrade slopes along the shear plane and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft., but in no case fewer than three tests. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Earthwork 31 20 00 Page 23 of 24 F. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. G. Compliance Survey: Conduct a survey of completed Earthwork to show grading compliance. H. Review by Owner Representative: The Landscape Architect shall review the rough grading shaping and retains the right to direct adjustments the grading within 2 days of review. Adjustments that only involve cut to fill without exporting or importing additional material shall be executed without cost to the Owner. 3.23 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Landscape Architect; reshape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible. 3.24 DISPOSAL A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. 3.25 CLEANING UP Upon completion of the work of this Section, immediately remove all debris and excess earth materials from the site. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Earthwork 31 20 00 Page 24 of 24 This Page Intentionally Left Blank Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Erosion and Sedimentation Controls 31 25 10 1 of 6 SECTION 31 25 00 Erosion and Sedimentation Controls PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT A. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide all equipment and materials and do all work necessary to construct a complete erosion and sediment control program for minimizing erosion and sediment control provisions detailed on the Drawings and specified herein are the minimum requirements for an erosion control program. The Contractor shall provide additional erosion sediment control materials and methods as required to affect the erosion and siltation control principles specified herein. B. Erosion control and maintenance program, shall include, but not be limited to, installation and maintenance of silt fences, hay bale check dams, and installation schedules of erosion control structures. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and performance of the erosion control measures throughout the project D. Related work specified elsewhere Site Demolition & Clearing............................................................ Section 02 41 13 Excavation and Fill........................................................................ Section 31 23 00 1.05 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): Specifications Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges B. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Department of Transportation / Highway Department (MassDOT): Specifications Standard Specifications for Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Erosion and Sedimentation Controls 31 25 10 2 of 6 Highways and Bridges 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Proposed methods, materials to be employed, and schedule for effecting erosion and siltation control and preventing erosion damage shall be submitted for approval. Submittals shall include: 1. List of proposed material including manufacturer's product data. 2. Schedule of erosion control program indicating specific dates for implementing programs in each major area of work. B. The following samples shall be submitted: Sample Size Silt fence fabric 12 x 12 in. C. Seed mixture for temporary seed cover shall be submitted for approval of the Architect. 1.07 EROSION CONTROL PRINCIPLES A. The following erosion control principles shall apply to the land grading and construction phases: 1. Stripping of vegetation, grading, or other soil disturbance shall be done in a manner which will minimize soil erosion. 2. Whenever feasible, natural vegetation shall be retained and protected. 3. Extent of area which is exposed and free of vegetation and duration of its exposure shall be kept within practical limits. 4. All areas of disturbance shall be stabilized as soon as possible with vegetation. Areas of disturbance shall be stabilized with hay or other much or measures until the site can be seeded and planted to initiate stabilization. 5. Drainage provisions, such as temporary sediment basins, shall accommodate increased runoff resulting from modifications of soil and surface conditions during and after development or disturbance. Such provisions shall be in addition to existing requirements. 6. Sediment shall be retained on-site. 7. Erosion control devices shall be installed as early as possible in the construction sequence prior to start of clearing and grubbing operations and excavation work. B. Cut and fill slopes and stockpiled materials shall be protected to prevent erosion. Slopes shall be protected with permanent erosion protection when erosion exposure period is expected to be greater than or equal to six months, and temporary erosion protection when erosion exposure period is expected to be less than six months. 1. Permanent erosion protection shall be accomplished by seeding with grass and covering with an erosion protection material, as appropriate for Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Erosion and Sedimentation Controls 31 25 10 3 of 6 prevailing conditions. 2. Temporary erosion protection shall be accomplished by covering with an erosion protection material, as appropriate for prevailing conditions. 3. Except where specified slope is indicated on Drawings, fill slopes shall be limited to a grade of 2:1 (horizontal: vertical), cut slopes shall be limited to a grade of 2:1. C. Construction Entrances shall incorporate trap rock stone tracking pads. Either a 25’ undisturbed buffer of vegetation or a hay bale, silt fence barrier between the work site and any public roads or neighboring properties shall be installed to prevent erosion and sedimentation from being carried off site. 1.08 EMERGENCY OPERATION PROCEDURES A. The Contractor shall have on-call at all times capable, responsible representatives who, when authorized, will mobilize the necessary personnel, materials, and equipment, and otherwise provide the required action when notified of any impending emergency situation. B. The Contractor shall supply a telephone number to the Owner with which the Contractor may be contacted in the evenings and on weekends. The Contractor shall prepare a 24- hour "duty roster" for this purpose and submit it in writing to the Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SILT FENCE A. Silt fence shall be "Envirofence" preassembled silt fence structure, manufactured by Mirafi, Inc., Charlotte, NC, or approved equal. 1. Each package shall include oak post, industrial polypropylene netting, Mirafi 100 sediment control fabric, metal coupler and instructions. 2. Overall length of each fence section shall be minimum 100 ft.; fabric width minimum of 3 ft., post length minimum of 4 ft. - 6 in.; and post spacing minimum of 8 ft. 3. Posts shall be tapered for ease of installation and beveled at top to resist splitting. 2.02 HAY BALES A. Hay bales for construction of straw bale check dam and catch basin filter dam shall be new, firm wire or nylon-bound livestock grade. 2.03 CRUSHED STONE A. Crushed stone for hay bale check dam and catch basin filter dam shall conform to MDOT Specifications Section M2.01.3 2.04 FILTER FABRIC A. Filter fabric for catch basin filter dam shall be Mirafi 140N drainage fabric, manufactured by Mirafi, Inc., Charlotte, NC, or approved equal. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Erosion and Sedimentation Controls 31 25 10 4 of 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SILT FENCE A. Silt fencing shall be placed around existing drainage channels and at the outfall of the drainage lines before commencement of any earthwork. Silt fencing shall be installed prior to all upgradient earthwork. 3.02 HAY BALE DAM A. Bales shall be placed in a row with ends tightly abutting the adjacent bales. Each bale shall be embedded in the soil a minimum of 4 inches. Bales shall be securely anchored in place by stakes or re-bars driven through the bales. The first stake in each bale shall be angled toward the previously laid bale to force the bales together. 3.03 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL OF EROSION CONTROL DEVICES A. The Contractor shall inspect the effectiveness and condition of the erosion control devices during storm events, after each rainfall of one-inch magnitude or greater, prior to weekends, and prior to any forecasted storm events. B. Wetland areas, water courses, and drainage swales adjacent to construction activities shall be monitored twice each week for evidence of silt intrusion and other adverse environmental impacts, which shall be corrected immediately upon discovery. C. Culverts and drainage ditches shall be kept clean and clear of obstructions during construction period. 1. Cleaning: Sediment build-up at silt fencing and hay bale structures shall be removed when the sediment accumulation is 1/2 the design height. Sediment basin shall be cleaned when the sediment accumulates to one foot of depth. 2. The Contractor shall repair or replace damaged erosion control devices immediately, and, in no case, more than four hours after observing such deficiencies, and as directed by the Architect. 3. The Contractor shall be prepared to implement interim drainage controls and erosion control measures as may be necessary during the course of construction, and as directed by the Architect. 4. The Contractor shall make available on-site, equipment, materials and labor necessary to effect emergency erosion control and drainage improvements within four hours of any impending emergency situation. 5. The Contractor shall comply with recommendations of the Architect to make repairs or supplement erosion control procedures during the course of construction. 6. If, in the opinion of the Architect, the sequencing of operations, condition of erosion control devices, and turbidity level of runoff are unsatisfactory, the Architect will direct the Owner to order the Contractor to cease work and order the Contractor to make corrections within 24 hours, at no expense to the Owner. 7. The Contractor shall make a final inspection, clean all cross culverts and sweep off roadways as approved by the Architect before Contract closeout. 8. Condition of erosion control device shall be checked twice each month Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Erosion and Sedimentation Controls 31 25 10 5 of 6 or more frequently as required. Damaged and/or deteriorated items shall be replaced. Erosion control devices shall be maintained in place and in effective condition. 9. Hay bales shall be inspected frequently and maintained or replaced as required to maintain both their effectiveness and essentially their original condition. Underside of bales shall be in close contact with the earth below at all times, as required to prevent water from washing beneath bales. 10. Sediment deposits shall be disposed of off-site, in a location and manner which will not cause sediment nuisance elsewhere. E. Removal of Erosion Control Devices 1. Erosion control devices shall be maintained until all disturbed earth has been paved or vegetated, at which time they shall be removed. After removal, areas disturbed by these devices shall be regraded and seeded. 2. Erosion protection material shall be kept securely anchored until acceptance of completed slope or entire Project, whichever is later. END OF SECTION*** Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Erosion and Sedimentation Controls 31 25 10 6 of 6 This Page Intentionally Left Blank February 24, 2024 Bituminous Concrete Pavement Page 1 of 6 32 12 16 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA SECTION 32 12 16 Bituminous Concrete Pavement PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Attention is directed to the requirements of the printed form of Contract and to Division 1, General Requirements, of which this section is hereby made a part. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Work by General Contractor Bituminous concrete pavement and granite curbing required for this work is indicated on the drawings and includes, but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Parking lot and roadway pavement 2. Walkway pavement 3. Line painting 4. Precast concrete curbing 5. Granite Curbing 6. ADA Detectable Warning Strips B. Related Work Described Elsewhere Excavating, Filling & Grading...............................................................Section 31 23 00 Site Improvements and Amenities ......................................................Section 32 30 00 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Workmen 1. Provide at least one person who shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required, be completely familiar with the design and application of the work described in this Section, be present at all times during progress of the work of this Section, and direct all work performed under this Section. 2. For actual finishing of bituminous concrete surfaces and operation of the required equipment, use only personnel thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required. B. Codes and Reference Standards In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with the referenced portions of Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges, MassDOT/Massachusetts Highway Department (MDOT)/State Specifications. 1. ASTM D570 Standard Test Method for water absorption of plastics. 2. ASTM D36 ASTM D36-06 Standard Test Method for Softening Point of Bitumen (Ring-and- Ball Apparatus). 3. AASHTO T250 Binder Content 4. ASTM D792 Standard Test method for density and specific gravity (relative density) and density of solid plastics. 5. AASHTO T250 Low Temperature Stress resistance 6. ASTM D 2240 Standard Test Method for Rubber property – Durometer hardness. 7. ASTM D256, Method A Standard Test Method for determining the IZOD pendulum October 1, 2021 Bituminous Concrete Pavement Page 2 of 6 32 12 16 East Gables Amherst, MA impact resistance of plastics. 8. ASTM D92 Test Method for Flash points 9. ASTM D977-03 Standard Specification for Emulsion Asphalt 10. ASTM D2397-02 Standard Specification for Cationic Emulsified Asphalt. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Bituminous Concrete Mix Submission of the job-mix formula for the bituminous concrete surface course shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, and it shall be submitted to the Architect for approval 10 days prior to the pavement construction. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection Use all means necessary to protect bituminous concrete pavement materials before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Landscape Architect at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Dust Control 1. Use all means necessary to prevent the spread of dust during performance of the work of this Section. 2. Thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent dust being a nuisance to the public, neighbors and concurrent performance of other work on the job site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GRAVEL BASE A. The gravel base course material shall consist of bankrun gravel conforming to the requirements of Section 405, Subsection M1.03, Type B, of the State Specification. 2.02 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING A. All courses of the bituminous concrete paving shall consist of Class I, Type I-1, conforming to the requirements of Section 460, Subsection M3.11.0, of the State Specifications. 2.03 BITUMINOUS TACK COAT A. Bituminous tack coat material shall conform to AASHTO M82. 2.04 TRAFFIC PAINT A. Parking space pavement striping conform to Section M7.01.10 and M7.01.07 of the MDOT Specifications, OR approved equal permanent reflectorized pavement marking. 2.05 PRECAST CONCRETE CURB A. Precast concrete curb shall be new precast curb as manufactured by United Concrete or approved equal. February 24, 2024 Bituminous Concrete Pavement Page 3 of 6 32 12 16 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA 2.06 GRANITE CURB A. Granite concrete curb shall be new granite as detailed and per Mass DOT specifications. 2.07 Flexi-Pave Walkway A. Flexi-Pave walkway to be Flexi-Pave HD2000 by KBI or approved equal. Landscape architect to select from full range of colors. 2.08 ADA Dectactable Warning Strips A. ADA Dectable Warning Strips complying with MAAB and FEDERAL ADA requirements. Submit product information. Landscape architect to select from full range of colors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection 1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that bituminous concrete pavement be installed in strict accordance with the original design, all pertinent codes and regulation, and all pertinent portions of the referenced standards. 3. Flag in the field centerline alignments prior to clearing. Notify Landscape Architect for review. Adjust alignments until the satisfaction of Landscape Architect. B. Discrepancies 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Landscape Architect. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.02 EQUIPMENT A. Compacting Equipment All equipment for compacting shall be steel-tired power rollers having a minimum weight of 10 tons, except that hand held vibrator compactors may be used in areas not accessible to rollers where specifically approved in advance by the Owner. B. Paving Equipment All equipment for paving shall be spreading, self-propelled asphalt paving machine capable of maintaining line, grade and minimum surface course thickness specified, with laser grading sensors for tolerance accuracy. October 1, 2021 Bituminous Concrete Pavement Page 4 of 6 32 12 16 East Gables Amherst, MA 3.03 PLACEMENT OF GRAVEL BASE COURSE A. Preparation 1. After subgrade has been completed, as described in Section 02200 of these Specifications, and has been approved by the Landscape Architect or Field Engineer, roll the surface to a smooth and uniform texture free from lumps, rock pockets, soft spots, and spongy areas. B. Placement 1. Place the base course in strict accordance with the Standard Specifications. 2. The base shall be constructed of two courses of gravel. The first course shall be not less than 1/2 the thickness of the base required when thoroughly compacted. The second course shall complete the thickness of base required. Compaction shall be done with a vibrator compactor. C. Compaction 1. Compact the base course to a minimum degree of compaction of 95 percent at optimum moisture content. 2. Roll the base course until entire surface is firm, dense, and free from rock pockets and mud pads; do not slurry the base course. 3. Water the base course after compaction. 3.04 PLACEMENT OF BITUMINOUS CONCRETE SURFACING A. Preparation Bituminous concrete mixtures shall be laid only when surface is free of foreign matter and when the weather is not foggy or rainy, and further these operations shall be carried on only when the atmospheric temperature is not less than 40 degrees F in the shade. B. Placement Bituminous concrete surfaces shall be placed in two courses with minimum thicknesses shown on the drawings. The two course placement of the new bituminous concrete surfaces shall be as follows: 1. The binder course shall confirm to State Specifications for Binder Course Bituminous Concrete in accordance with job-mix formula, and it shall be constructed in a minimum thickness shown on the drawings after compaction. The bottom course shall be parallel to the proposed grade of the finished bituminous concrete surface. 2. The surface course shall conform to State Specifications for Top Course Bituminous Concrete in accordance with the job-mix formula, and it shall be constructed to a minimum thickness shown on the drawings after compaction. The finished surface shall conform to proposed grades. A bituminous tack coat shall be applied immediately prior to surface course application at a rate of 0.05 gallons per square yard. 3. All joints at old pavement shall be sawed vertical butt joints which shall receive a light coating of asphalt emulsion a short time before paving commences, as directed by the Landscape Architect. 4. Existing areas shall not be disturbed by utility construction. 5. Construction methods shall conform to the Massachusetts Department of Transportation Specifications, Section 460, Class 1, Bituminous concrete pavement, Type-I. 6. Submission of the job-mix formula for the bituminous concrete surface course shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, and it shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect for approval 10 days prior to the pavement construction. February 24, 2024 Bituminous Concrete Pavement Page 5 of 6 32 12 16 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA 7. Establishment of grades, grade control, and conformance to finished pavement surface grade tolerances required shall be the responsibility of the Contractor in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. See below for finish tolerances. 8. Roll the surface until a smooth and dense texture is obtained, free draining, and free from any and all birdbaths. C. Installation shall be timed to permit placing curb during daylight hours, unless artificial light satisfactory to the Architect is provided. 3.05 TRAFFIC STRIPING A. Equipment, methods of placement, and precautions to be observed as to weather, condition of surface, etc., shall conform to MDOT Specifications for traffic striping first class road work. Striping shall not begin until all asphalt surfaces have cured for a minimum of 14 days. 3.06 FINISH TOLERANCES A. Bituminous Concrete Surface Plus or minus 0.01 feet at any point from line grade shown on the Drawings. 3.07 REMEDIAL MEASURES A. Upon direction of the Landscape Architect, cut out, and/or rework all surfaces and subgrade areas which do not meet the requirements of this Section; perform all remedial measures at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.08 SPECIAL CONDITIONS A. Work shall be properly coordinated with the work of other trades. Other trades shall be consulted in advance so that proper provisions may be made for installation of their work and so that the work of this section may be properly finished and connected to the work of other trades. 3.09 GUARANTEE Contractor shall guarantee all workmanship for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance. END OF SECTION October 1, 2021 Bituminous Concrete Pavement Page 6 of 6 32 12 16 East Gables Amherst, MA This Page Intentionally Left Blank Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 00 1 of 26 SECTION 32 13 00 CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.02. ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.03. EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT A. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.04. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The full set of contract documents affects this section and such effects shall be accommodated in the execution of the work specified herein B. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Concrete Sidewalks 2. Concrete Paving 3. Concrete Dumpster Pad 4. Concrete footings for exterior slabs, posts, and utility structures 5. Concrete curbs as shown and specified. 6. Stamped Concrete/ Custom Aggregate Finishes 7. Concrete unit pavers and flush concrete curbing. 8. Reinforced Concrete retaining walls 9. Refer to Earthwork Filling and Grading for 10. Refer to structural drawings for detailed notes and reinforcing requirements. C. Alternates: Not Applicable. D. Items To Be Installed Only: Not Applicable. E. Items To Be Furnished Only: Not Applicable. F. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 00 2 of 26 1.05. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications for Workers 1. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the Work, shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in placing the types of concrete specified, and shall direct all Work under this Section. 2. For finishing of exposed surfaces of the concrete, use only thoroughly trained and experienced journeyperson concrete finishers, recommended by the concrete supplier. B. Comply with Section 02000 requirements. C. Testing and Inspection: Performed by a qualified independent testing laboratory. D. Provide and pay for testing and inspection during concrete operations. Laboratory shall be acceptable to the Architect. E. Materials and methods of construction shall comply with the following standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM) 2. American Concrete Institute (ACI) F. Maintain field records of time, date, place, curing, and removal of forms of concrete in each portion of work. G. Sample panel: Before installing concrete work, provide a sample panel, minimum 100 SF, using specified materials. Show color, texture, pattern, edging, and joint treatments. Correct and rebuild sample panel until Architect's acceptance of work. Retain panel during construction as a standard for completed concrete paving work. H. The approved sample panel may be a portion of the work and remain in place. Location as directed by Architect. I. Do not change source or brands of cement and aggregate during course of work. J. Codes and Standards 1. In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with all pertinent recommendations of "Structural Concrete for Builders", publication ACI 301- 66 of the American Concrete Institute. 2. Refer to the latest accessibility standards provided by both the State of Massachusetts Architectural Access Board and the United States Department of Justice 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, Titles II and III Facilities Americans With Disabilities Act. and Access Board Proposed Guidelines for Public Streets and Sidewalks 2011 proposed changes 3. Where provisions of pertinent codes and standards conflict with these Specifications, the more stringent provisions shall govern. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 00 3 of 26 K. Referenced Reports and Documentation 1. Existing Ground Survey: A survey for design purposes has been prepared for the Owner. The data is made available only for information and not for construction. Verify accuracy of survey, report any discrepancies and undertake any additional surveying at no cost to the Owner. Include all costs for variations in material volume and handling associated within the stated survey accuracy and tolerance. 2. Existing Underground Utility Diagram: A diagram for design purposes has been prepared for the Owner. The data is made available only for information and not for construction. Verify accuracy of the diagram, report any discrepancies and undertake any additional utility locating at no cost to the Owner. L. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to decorative concrete paving, including but not limited to, the following: 2. Concrete mixture design. 3. Quality control of concrete materials and decorative concrete paving construction practices. 4. Snow removal procedures and application of urea instead of salt based deicing materials. 5. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with decorative concrete paving to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete paving Installer. e. Manufacturer's representative of decorative concrete paving system. 1.06 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, expansive hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume. B. Expansion Joints: Joints used to prevent damage from differential movements. Used at regular intervals in pavement to relieve compressive stresses that may develop in very hot weather. Appropriate Use when: 1. Pavement is divided into long panels (60 feet or more) without contraction joints 2. Pavement is constructed when ambient temperatures are below 40 degrees F. 3. The Pavement is constructed with aggregates that have high expansion characteristics C. Isolation Joints: Joints reduce stresses that develop where differential movement between the pavement and structure may take place. These are full depth, full width joints often found at bridge abutments, intersections, and in-pavement structures, such as drainage inlets, manholes, footings, and lighting structures. They are also placed adjacent to existing Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 00 4 of 26 pavements, especially when it is not possible or desirable to match joint locations in older pavement. D. Control Joints: Joints used to control the natural cracking caused by shrinkage and reductions in temperature. 1.07 SUBMITTALS All submittals, including shop drawings, manufacturer's specifications and product data shall be submitted for the following in accordance with the requirements of Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures and Substitutions. i. Submit concrete mix designs, as well as stamps, and strategy for maintaining consistency in stamp and pour. Obtain approval before placing concrete. A. Materials List Within 15 days after award of Contract and before any concrete is poured on the job site, submit to the Landscape Architect the name and address of transit-mix concrete sup plier. B. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. C. Design Mixes: For each concrete pavement mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. D. Samples: 10-lb (4.5-kg) sample of exposed aggregate. E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materials: F. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials complies with requirements: 1. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Admixtures. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Applied finish materials. 7. Joint fillers. 8. Time of Loading H. Transit-Mix Deliver Slip 1. Keep a record at the job site showing time and place of each pour of concrete, together with transit-mix delivery slip certifying contents of the pour. 2. Make a record available to the Landscape Architect for his inspection upon request. 3. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, deliver the record and the delivery slips to the Landscape Architect. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 00 5 of 26 1.08 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection Use all means necessary to protect cast-in-place concrete materials before, during and after installation, and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. Contractor to make every effort to conduct concrete pours in early morning hours to allow sufficient time for hardening. Scratches and graffiti will not be approved or accepted. B. Replacements In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Landscape Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed pavement work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mix Concrete Association's Plant Certification Program. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant and each aggregate from one source. E. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," ACI 302.1 “Guide for floor & slab construction” unless modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents. F. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes. Coordinate independent agency with owner. G. Mockups: Cast mockups of full-size sections of concrete pavement to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, color, and standard of workmanship for each pavement type. 1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Landscape Architect. 2. For colored concrete, allow time for review after 28 curing period, 3. For sandblasted finishes, split mock up areas into three 2' x 4' areas with specified sandblasting in middle zone and with a heavier and lighter version of specified sandblasting in other two zones. 4. Notify Landscape Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 5. Obtain Landscape Architect's approval of mockups before starting construction. 6. Maintain approved mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed pavement. 7. Demolish and remove approved mockups from the site when directed by Landscape Architect. 8. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 00 6 of 26 H. Before submitting design mixes, review concrete pavement mix design and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Coordinate representatives of each entity directly concerned with concrete pavement, including but not limited to the following: 1. Contractor's superintendent. 2. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixes. 3. Ready-mix concrete producer. 4. Admixture manufacturer. 5. Concrete subcontractor. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ii. Deliver curing materials, admixtures, and retarders in manufacturer's standard unopened containers with labels legible and intact. Store and protect from freezing and damage. 1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS Work notification: Notify Architect at least 24 hours prior to installation of concrete. Establish and maintain required lines and grade elevations. Do not install concrete work over wet, saturated, muddy, or frozen subgrade. Do not install concrete when air temperature is below 40°F. Use of calcium chloride, salt, or any other admixture to prevent concrete from freezing is prohibited. Protect adjacent work. Provide temporary barricades and warning lights as required for protection of project work and public safety. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01. CONCRETE MATERIALS A. General All concrete, unless otherwise specifically permitted by the Landscape Architect, shall be transit-mixed in accordance with ASTM C-94. Concrete for flatwork shall be Class D. Concrete for wall and footings shall be Class A. Color is subject to approval by the Landscape Architect. B. Quality 1. All concrete shall have the following minimum compressive strengths at 28 days and shall be proportioned within the following limits: EXTERIOR SLABS LOCATION OF CONCRETE & SITE WORK Min. psi @ 28 days 4000psi Max. size of aggregate 3/4 inch Min. sacks of cement/CY 5.50 Max. slump in inches 3” Max Air Entrainment 6% +/- 1.5% Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 00 7 of 26 2. Concrete that is subject to freezing temperatures while wet shall have a water-cement ratio not exceeding six gallons per sack and shall contain entrained air. C. Cement All cement shall be Portland cement conforming to ASTM C-150, Type I, and shall be the product of one manufacturer. The temperature of cement delivered to the plant shall not exceed 150 deg. F. Color shall match existing concrete. D. Aggregates 1. All aggregates shall conform to ASTM C-33-71, except as modified herein. 3. When used as a fine aggregate for cement concrete, sand shall be composed essentially of clean, hard, strong, durable, and impermeable particles resistant to wear and frost, inert to cement and water, reasonably free from structurally weak grains, organic matter, loam, clay, silt, salts, mica, or other fine materials that my affect bonding of the cement paste. Sand shall be taken from a natural deposit and shall be relatively spherical in shape and shall have gritty surfaces. The sieve analysis of the sand shall show it to be well graded and conforming to the following table. Size of Percent by Weight Percent Passing Sieve Minimum Maximum 3/8" 100 --- #4 95 100 #16 55 80 #50 10 25 #100 2 8 #200 0 2 3. Coarse aggregate for cement concrete shall consist of crushed rock or screened gravel and shall be composed essentially of clean, hard, strong, and impermeable particles, resistant to wear and frost, and free from deleterious amounts of organic matter, loam, clay, salts, mica, and soft, thin, elongated, laminated or disintegrated stone, and it shall be inert to water and cement. Where finishing of the concrete is to be done by hammering or any other method that breaks the surface of the concrete, only crushed rock shall be used for coarse aggregate. When tested by U.S. Standard laboratory sieves, coarse aggregate for cement concrete shall be blended from stone sizes to meet the gradation requirements for each designation listed of variation for general application and are minimum and maximum in each case. To insure uniformity of material used on any one job or project, the range of variation may be reduced to 1/2 of the master range upon determination of the character and source of the materials that the Contractor proposes to furnish. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 00 8 of 26 Designation No. C-1 No. C-2 No. C-3 Nominal Size 1 1/2" 3/4" 3/8" Sieve Size | Min. Max. | Min. Max. | Min. Max. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1 1/2 inch | 90 100 | -- -- | -- -- 3/4 inch | 35 60 | 90 100 | -- -- 1/2 inch | -- -- | -- -- | 90 100 3/8 inch | 10 25 | 20 50 | 30 70 No. 4 | 0 5 | 0 10 | 0 15 No. 8 | -- -- | 0 5 | 0 5 E. Water All water shall be clean, fresh, potable, and free from deleterious matter. A. Air-entraining admixture: ASTM C260 B. Water-reducing admixture: ASTM C494 2.02. MIXES Cement concrete shall be composed of specified proportions by weight of cement, aggregates, water and additives to form a homogeneous composition. Cement concrete shall be specified according to the classification defined in the following table. The classes of concrete to be used shall be designated on the plans or in the Specifications for the particular work. A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M), for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field experience. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete design mixtures for the trial batch method. B. Typical Proportion mixtures to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000psi (concrete walks); 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.50 3. Slump Limit: [4 inches (100 mm)], plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows: 1. Air Content: [2-1/2] percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size. 2. Air Content: [6] percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 1-inch (25-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size. 3. Air Content: [6] percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size. D. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to [0.15] percent by weight of cement. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 00 9 of 26 CLASSIFICATION OF CONCRETE MIXES Min. Min. 28 Days Coarse Maximum Class Cement Compressive Aggregate Aggregate % Air Concrete Strength* Designation Size ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- A 560#/CY 3000 psi C-1 1 1/2" 4.5 B 500#/CY 2500 psi C-1 1 1/2" 4.5 C 440#/CY 2000 psi C-1 1 1/2" 4.5 D 620#/CY 3000 psi C-2 3/4" 5.0 DE 680#/CY 3500 psi C-2 3/4" 6.0 E 720#/CY 3000 psi C-3 3/8" 7.0 F 610#/CY 3500 psi C-1 1 1/2" 6.0 * As evaluated under ASTM C94-74. All mixes above used for the Work will conform to one or more of the above mixes. Prior to actual mixing, the Contractor shall submit design mixes for each mix to the Landscape Architect for approval, as mentioned on the Plans or in the Special Provisions. A. Provide ASTM C94 ready-mixed concrete. Batch mixing at site not acceptable. 1. Strength: 4,000psi minimum at 28 days 2. Slump range: 2" to 4" maximum. B. Provide and approved water-reducing admixture in all concrete C. Provide an air-entraining admixture in all concrete. Air content 5%-7% D. Indicate water added to mix at job site on each delivery ticket. Show quantity of water added. Site water tempered mixes exceeding specified slump range will be rejected as not complying with specification requirements. 2.03. CONCRETE STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 2.04. CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless- steel bar supports. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 00 10 of 26 2.05. CONCRETE ACCESSORIES ADMIXTURES All concrete exposed to the weather shall be air-entrained. Admixtures other than those required for air entrainment shall be approved by the Engineer. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain no more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material. A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A C. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D D. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E. 2.06. STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content not less than [25] percent. B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. C. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420); deformed. D. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed bars; assembled with clips. E. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, as drawn. F. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) plain-steel bars. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. G. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified, and as follows: 1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. 2.07. EXPANSION AND ISOLATION JOINTS 1. Isolation joints should be constructed with preformed joint filler material to prevent infiltration of incompressible filler—such incompressible items that would affect the compressibility of the joint include common materials such as sand, dirt, or other debris. a. Joints should never be less than ½ inch wide, with ½ to 1 inch being the recommended width. b. Joint filler should extend the full length of the slab and be cut to 3/8 of an inch below the slab after concrete has cured. c. Concrete should not extend over, under, through, around, or between filler sections. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 00 11 of 26 2. Expansion and isolation joints shall be 3/8" x 4" preformed ethylene vinyl acetate or closed cell polyethylene foam material. Hold joint filler material down a sufficient distance to allow for the installation of retainer and sealant. Refer to details on drawings and the sealant manufacturer's standard instructions. a. Expansion Joints to be used at regular intervals of 50 feet, unless a closer interval is indicated on plans or details. 2.08. JOINT SEALANT At all construction and expansion joints, joint sealant shall be gray in color as: A. "790 Building Sealant" by Dow Corning; B. "Rubber Caulk 230 Sealant" by Products Research Chemical Corp.; B. "Perma-Joint", two component polyditremzene sealant by Tremco, or approved equal. 2.09. SEALANT RETAINER Sealant retainer shall be closed cell polythele foam cord by the following manufacturers: A. Progress Unlimited Inc., New York City, NY; B. Dow Chemical Co., Midland, MI; C. Products Research Corp., Glouster City, NJ, or approved equal. 2.10. CONCRETE CURE + SEALER A. V-Seal 102 Penetrating Sealer for exterior applications is a High-tech specially formulated concrete sealer and curing agent that contains an enhanced penetrating, inorganic, potassium siliconate modified material which forms a molecular bond with concrete. Substrates sealed with V-SEAL® 102 become stronger, moisture repellent and resistant to stains from oil, gas, grease, salts and other damaging fluids. While blocking liquids, V-SEAL®102 allows entrapped water vapors to escape at an optimum rate which facilitates a more productive curing cycle and fortifies the substrate against repeated freeze/thaw cycles. V-SEAL® 102 will wear out only when the substrate itself wears away to the lowest penetration of the sealer. B. V-SEAL® 102 meets ASTM 309 and 1315 for curing concrete. C. V-SEAL® 102 contains film forming polymers for enhanced salt and freeze/thaw protection. D. Apply with low-pressure spray. E. Flat Finish F. Color: Milky/opaque but dries clear G. Spread Rate 200-300 sq ft / gallon H. Drying time 3-5 hours Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 00 12 of 26 2.11. RELATED MATERIALS A. Joint Fillers: [ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork] in preformed strips. B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. c. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881/C 881M, two-component epoxy resin capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces; of class suitable for application temperature, of grade complying with requirements, and of the following types: 1. [Types IV and V, load bearing], for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. 2.12. OTHER MATERIALS All other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of cast-in-place concrete shall be as selected by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the Landscape Architect. A. Granular Base: AASHTO M43, #6 (3/8" to 3/4") uniformly graded, clean crushed stone or gravel. B. Forms: Wood or metal of sufficient strength to resist concrete placement pressure and to maintain horizontal and vertical alignment during concrete placement. Provide forms straight, free of defects, and distortion, and height equal to full depth of concrete work. C. Provide 2" nominal thickness, surfaces plank wood forms for straight sections. Use flexible metal 1" lumber or plywood forms to form radius bends. D. Joint filler: ASTM D1752 pre-molded resilient non-extruding non-staining closed cell foam polyethylene, PVC foam or sponge rubber, 35% wider than joint width, thickness indicated. E. Curing Compound: ASTM C309, non-yellowing, non-staining liquid membrane-forming type containing a fugitive dye. Chlorinated rubber compounds not acceptable for exterior use. F. Joint Sealants: Two-component polysulfide or polyurethane elastomeric type complying with FS TT-S-00227, self-leveling, designed for foot traffic. G. Form release agent: Non-staining chemical form release agent free of oils, waxes, and other materials harmful to concrete. 2.13. CONCRETE GRID PAVERS A. Provide concrete grid pavers at parking areas as detailed. Provide shop drawings of layout of pavers, full size and half size units and coordination with curbing and drainage. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 00 13 of 26 2.14. PRECAST CONCRETE CURB A. Precast concrete curb shall be new precast curb as manufactured by United Concrete or approved equal. Joints between units to have no chamfer. Provide shop drawings for review of all precast curbing prior to fabricating and ordering. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01. INSPECTION A. Examine subgrades and installation conditions. Do not start concrete work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02. TRAFFIC CONTROL A. Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. 3.03. EQUIPMENT: A. Equipment and tools necessary for performing all parts of the work shall be satisfactory as to design, capacity and mechanical condition for the purposes intended, and any equipment which is not maintained in full working order, or which as used by the Contractor is proven inadequate to obtain the results prescribed, shall be repaired, improved, replaced, or supplemented to obtain the progress and workmanship contemplated by the Contract. 3.04. SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection 1. Prior to all Work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that all items to be embedded in concrete are in place. 3. Thoroughly wet the forms (except in freezing weather) or oil them; remove all standing water. 4. Thoroughly clean all transporting and handling equipment. a. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances. b. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below [decorative concrete paving] to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. c. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction [and repeat in perpendicular direction]. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h). Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 00 14 of 26 d. Proof-roll with a pneumatic-tired and loaded, 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons (13.6 tons). e. Proof roll the subgrade and do all necessary rolling and compacting to obtain firm, even subgrade surface. Fill and consolidate depressed areas. Remove uncompactable materials, replace with clean fill and compact to 100% of the maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D698 Standard Proctor Method. f. Provide minimum 6" depth of compacted granular base at walks and minimum 8" depth at paving. Compact granular base to 95% of the maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D698 Standard Proctor Method. g. Install, align, and level forms. Stake and brace forms in place. Maintain following grade and alignment tolerances. h. Top of form: Maximum 1/8" in 10'-0" i. Vertical face: Maximum 1/4" in 10'-0" j. Coat form surfaces in contact with concrete with form release agent. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as necessary to assure separation from concrete without damage. k. Locate, place, and support reinforcement as indicated. i. Provide a single layer of welded wire fabric in all concrete slabs-on-grade. ii. Provide reinforcing bars at locations indicated. l. Install, set and build-in items furnished by other trades. Provide adequate notification for installation of necessary items. 4. Correct subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of [1/2 inch (13 mm)] according to materials and methods outline in specification Excavation Filling and Grading Division 31. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Forms 1. Side forms and transverse forms for sidewalks shall be smooth, free from warp, of sufficient strength to resist springing out of shape, of a depth to conform to the thickness of the proposed walk, and of a type satisfactory to the Landscape Architect. a. All mortar or dirt shall be completely removed from forms that have been previously used. The forms shall be well staked and thoroughly braced and set to the established lines with their upper edge conforming to the grade of the finished walk which shall have a sufficient pitch to the edge of the walk to provide for surface drainage, as shown on the drawings, 2% cross-slope typical. b. All forms shall be oiled before placing concrete. C. Notification Notify the Landscape Architect at least 48 hours before placing the concrete. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 00 15 of 26 D. Concrete Mixing 1. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M [ and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M]. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work. a. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 2. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer. a. For concrete batches of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. b. For concrete batches larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m). c. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixing time, quantity, and amount of water added. 3.05. PLACING CONCRETE A. Method 1. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. 2. Protect adjacent construction from discoloration and spillage during application of color hardeners, release agents, stains, curing compounds, and sealers. 3. Convey concrete from mixer to place of final deposit by methods that will prevent separation and loss of materials. 4. For chuting, pumping, and pneumatically conveying concrete, use only equipment of such size and design as to ensure a practically continuous flow of concrete at the delivery end without loss or separation of materials. 5. Deposit concrete as nearly as possible in its final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling and flowing. a. Place concrete as dry as possible consistent with good workmanship, never exceeding the maximum specified slump. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 00 16 of 26 6. Do not use retempered concrete or concrete that has been contaminated by foreign materials. B. Rate of Placement 1. Place concrete at such a rate that concrete is at all times plastic and flows readily between bare bars. 2. When placing is started, carry it on as a continuous operation until placement of the panel or section is complete. 3. Do not pour an area at one time that cannot be finished without checking; this is particularly important during hot or dry weather. 4. Do not, in any case, pour a slab greater than 18 feet without construction joints. 5. Exterior pavement slabs shall be placed in alternating sections not exceeding 18 feet in length. C. Compaction 1. Thoroughly consolidate all concrete by suitable means during placement, working it around all embedded fixtures and into corners of forms. 3. During placement, thoroughly compact the concrete by hand tamping and by mechanical vibration. D. Steel Reinforcement 1. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 2. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials. 3. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. 4. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 5. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated. 6. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 7. Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. 8. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated steel reinforcement. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 00 17 of 26 9. Zinc-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged zinc coatings with zinc repair material according to ASTM A 780/A 780M. Use galvanized-steel wire ties to fasten zinc-coated steel reinforcement. 10. Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 11. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch (50-mm) overlap to adjacent mats. 3.06. JOINTS A. General: Form construction, isolation, expansion, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated. C. When joining adjacent paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints unless otherwise indicated. D. Lay out: Coordinate lay out of joints to maintain intent of jointing pattern as instructed by the Landscape Architect. E. TYPES OF JOINTS SPECIFICALLY 1. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving terminates at isolation joints. a. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated. b. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated. c. Location: Make and locate construction joints so as to not impair the strength of the structure. d. Approval: Obtain Landscape Architect’s approval of location of all control joints and construction joints in the Work prior to the start of concrete placement. 2. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows: a. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with groover tool to the following radius. Repeat grooving of Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 00 18 of 26 contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces. i. Radius: 1/4 inch (6 mm). ii. Radius: 3/8 inch (10 mm). b. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks. 3. Expansion Joints: a. Typical placement: Locate expansion joints at intervals of 40 feet (12.192 m), unless otherwise indicated 4. Isolation Joints: Isolation joints shall be placed against buildings, around streetlight footings, or as directed by the Landscape Architect. They shall be a preformed foam material with joint sealant identical to the approved expansion joints. a. Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated. 1. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 2. Terminate joint filler less than 1/2 inch (12 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated. 3. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. 4. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint-filler sections together. 5. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. 4. Butt Joints: Use [bonding agent] [epoxy bonding adhesive] at joint locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 5. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. 6. Dowelled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. a. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. b. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to the following radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 00 19 of 26 i. Radius: 1/4 inch (6 mm). ii. Radius: 3/8 inch (10 mm). 3.07. LEVELING AND FINISHING A. General 1. Tamp slabs with a jitterbug to depress the rock and then pushfloat with a bullfloat as necessary. 2. Take care that the wet slab meets the screeds accurately and does not rise above or lower below them. 3. Carefully provide slab depressions as required for the finishes indicated on the Drawings. B. Finishing 1. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations. 2. No finishing operation shall be performed while free water is present. Finishing operations shall be delayed until all bled water and water sheen has left the surface and the concrete has started to stiffen. 3. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared, and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 4. Any honeycombed areas occurring either along the front or back of curb shall be pointed with mortar with Portland Cement mortar according to the State of Massachusetts specifications. 5. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, make all slabs even and uniform in appearance, and where no slope is required, level within plus or minus 1/8" in 10'. 6. Score lines shall be as shown on the plans. Depth of scoring shall be 1/4 inch deep. 7. After edging and jointing operations, the surface shall be floated with a wood float. Immediately following floating, the surface shall be steel troweled. 8. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an edging tool to a [1/4-inch (6-mm)] radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate edging tool marks on concrete surfaces. C. Exterior Finishes Where "broom finish" is indicated on the Drawings and where no other exterior slab finish is indicated on the Drawings, finish the exposed concrete surface by lightly combing with a medium stiff broom after troweling is complete. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 00 20 of 26 3.08. CURING A. During the entire period the concrete is being placed, cured and hardened, the Contractor shall provide protection to the concrete from damage by underground water, rain, frost, or sun in a manner satisfactory to the Landscape Architect. An approved curing method providing full saturation and protection of the concrete against drying shall be performed for a minimum period of three days. B. In cold weather (below 50 deg. F), concrete placing shall be done only within properly built enclosures capable of retaining heat or without such structures if the temperature is above 50 deg. F. The temperature within these enclosures must reach 65 deg. F before placement of concrete may begin. Only those openings required for the proper placing of concrete will be allowed in the enclosure. After the conclusion of concrete placement, the minimum temperature within the enclosure shall be 50 deg. F for a five-day period and 65 deg. F for a three-day period. The method of heating shall in no way cause a reduction in the available water content of the concrete. a. In hot and dry weather and as directed, all new concrete shall be kept shaded from the sun, shielded from the wind, kept wet with water, or protected by other approved methods to retain moisture in the concrete throughout the curing period. Manual wetting down of a particular area shall cause the area to be continually wet and not allow periods of drying to occur. Plastic roll material or impregnated paper may be utilized during the installation of the concrete and must be thoroughly wetted at least once each day. These materials are to be placed as soon as possible upon the completion of finishing of concrete in such a fashion that the surface will not be damaged or disturbed. b. All curing methods employed shall be practical for the curing situation involved, and all methods shall be subject to the approval of the Landscape Architect. No curing compounds of any kind shall be permitted, unless approved by the Landscape Architect. 3.09. CONCRETE PLACEMENT 1. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast-in. 2. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and steel reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces. 3. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment. 4. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. 5. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 00 21 of 26 6. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. 7. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M) by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. 8. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies [, reinforcement,] or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating [reinforcement] [dowels] [and] joint devices. 9. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off. 10. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments. 3.10. COLD WEATHER REQUIREMENTS A. Cold-Weather Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 and the following: 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design mixtures. 3.11. HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS A. Placement 1. Do not use concrete with a placing temperature that will cause difficulty from loss of slump, flash set or cold joints. 2. Maintain a concrete temperature during placement of less than 90 deg. F. 4. Use all means necessary to avoid drying the concrete prior to finishing operations. 5. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 6. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 7. Fog-spray forms [, steel reinforcement,] and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 00 22 of 26 B. Protection 1. Provide and use all required raincovers, sunshades, fog sprays, and other devices to protect the concrete. 2. When rain appears imminent, all paving operations shall stop, and all available personnel shall begin placing forms against the sides of the pavement and covering the surface of the unhardened concrete with the protective covering. 3. The Contractor shall have on hand at the paving site sufficient burlap, plastic, or paper to cover at least 6,000 square feet of freshly laid pavement as a protection against sudden thundershowers or heavy downpours of rain. 4. Any part of the pavement damaged by pedestrian traffic or other causes occurring prior to its final acceptance shall be repaired or replaced by and at the expense of the Contractor, in a manner satisfactory to the Landscape Architect. The Contractor shall protect the pavement against both public traffic and the traffic caused by his own employees and agents. The pavement shall be so protected until the beam test shows a strength of at least 550 pounds per square inch or a minimum of 7 days. 3.12. SEALER C. Clear Acrylic Sealer: Apply uniformly in two coats in continuous operations according to manufacturer's written instructions. Allow first coat to dry before applying second coat, at 90 degrees to the direction of the first coat using same application methods and rates. 1. Begin sealing dry surface no sooner than [14] days after concrete placement. 2. Avoid installation within rain or freezing conditions within 5 hours. Apply by low pressure spray with medium saturation, being careful not to over apply. 3. Clean surface of dirt, debris, mildew, oil, grease and other contaminants. If concrete is heavily troweled (smooth/tight) it may require acid etch to increase porosity. 4. Avoid vehicle traffic and foot traffic for a minimum of 8 hours. 5. Thoroughly mix slip-resistance-enhancing additive into sealer before applying sealer according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stir sealer occasionally during application to maintain even distribution of additive. 6. Use soap and water to clean up after applying. Avoid contact with glass, plastic, windows, and lenses. 3.13. PAVING TOLERANCES A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows: a. Elevation: 3/4 inch (19 mm). b. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch (10 mm), minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 00 23 of 26 c. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- (3-m-) long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch (13 mm). d. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Dowels: 1 inch (25 mm). e. Vertical Alignment of Dowels: 1/4 inch (6 mm). f. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/4 inch per 12 inches (6 mm per 300 mm) of dowel. g. Joint Spacing: 3 inches (75 mm). h. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus. i. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), no minus. 3.14. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspection agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement according to requirements specified in this Article. B. Testing Services: Testing shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: Representative samples of fresh concrete shall be obtained according to ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each compressive-strength test, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests will be required when concrete consistency changes. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each compressive-strength test, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength specimens. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise indicated. Cylinders shall be molded and stored for laboratory-cured test specimens unless field-cured test specimens are required. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each concrete class exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m). One specimen shall be tested at 7 days and two specimens at 28 days; one specimen shall be retained in reserve for later testing if required. 7. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for a given class of concrete, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 8. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m), Landscape Architect may waive compressive-strength testing if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 00 24 of 26 9. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory- cured cylinders, current operations shall be evaluated, and corrective procedures shall be provided for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 10. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive compressive-strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual compressive-strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa). C. Test results shall be reported in writing to Landscape Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing agency, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in pavement, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. D. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Landscape Architect but will not be used as the sole basis for approval or rejection. E. Additional Tests: Testing agency shall make additional tests of the concrete when test results indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Landscape Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. 3.15. DEFECTIVE WORK A. Inspection 1. Immediately after forms have been removed, inspect all concrete surfaces and patch all pour joints, voids, rock pockets, and other imperfections before the concrete is thoroughly dry. 2. Do not patch until concrete has been inspected by the Landscape Architect. B. Patching 1. Minor Defective Areas a. Chip away to a depth of about one inch, leaving edges perpendicular to the surface. Wet the area to be patched and a space of at least 6" wide around it to prevent water being absorbed out of the mortar. b. Coat the area to be patched with a cement wash consisting of neat cement and a solution of one part "Konset", or equal approved by the Landscape Architect, to four parts water; apply patching mortar immediately. c. Patching mortar shall consist of one part cement to three parts water to a consistency as dry as is possible within the requirements of handling and placing; thoroughly compact the mortar by ramming it into place. d. Screed off so as to leave the patch slightly higher than surrounding surfaces; Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 00 25 of 26 leave undisturbed for a period of 1-2 hours to permit initial shrinkage, and then perform final finishing. e. Finish the patch to match adjacent surfaces and keep wet for at least seven days; provide and install all required protective coverings. 2. Major Defective Areas If the defects are serious or affect the strength of the structure or if patching does not satisfactorily restore the quality and appearance of the surface, the Architect may require the concrete to be removed and replaced, completely in accordance with the provisions of this Section, at no additional cost to the Owner. a. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken or damaged or does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect. b. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. c. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections. 3.16. COMPENSATION Measurement -- All work relating to paving and surfacing as described in this Section and on the Contract Drawings shall be measured complete-in-place. In addition to the paving and surfacing items, related work including excavation, grading, gravel base course and compaction shall be paid for in this Section. 3.17. WASTE MANAGEMENT A. Separate and dispose of waste in accordance with the Project’s Waste Management Plan. 3.18. CLEANING Clean all adjacent surfaces of Concrete materials prior to drying. Protect Accessible Warning strips from spillage, tracking, or migration of cementitious materials onto the face of accessible strips. 3.19. DEICING MATERIALS Coordinate with the Owner and Landscape Architect Deicing Materials to be used within the first year of concrete’s installation in order to minimize the amount of freeze thaw cycles the newly formed concrete undergoes. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 00 26 of 26 This Page Intentionally Left Blank Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 32 13 73 Page 1 of 8 SECTION 32 13 73 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor, Subcontractors, and/or suppliers providing goods or services referenced in or related to this Section shall also be bound by the Documents identified in Division 01 Section “Summary”, Paragraph 1.1A, entitled “Related Documents.” 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included 1. Cold-applied joint sealants. 1. Hot-applied joint sealants. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere Exterior Enclosure Commissioning………………………….……...……………..….………….Division 01 General Building Commissioning Requirements…………………………………………….Division 01 Excavation Earthwork Filling and Grading………………………….…………….…………….Division 31 Cast in Place Concrete Paving..…..………………………………………………………….…..….Division 32 Asphalt Paving ……………………………………….....…………………………………………….…...Division 32 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications for Workmen 1. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the Work, shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in placing the types of concrete specified, and shall direct all Work under this Section. 2. For finishing of exposed surfaces of the concrete, use only thoroughly trained and ex- perienced journeymen concrete finishers. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 32 13 73 Page 2 of 8 B. Codes and Standards 1. In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with all per- tinent recommendations of "Structural Concrete for Builders", publication ACI 301-66 of the American Concrete Institute. 2. Refer to the latest accessibility standards provided by both the State of Massachusetts Architectural Access Board and the United States Department of Justice 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, Titles II and III Facilities Americans with Disabilities Act. 3. Where provisions of pertinent codes and standards conflict with these Specifications, the more stringent provisions shall govern. 1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, Samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1. Use [ASTM C 1087] [manufacturer's standard test method] to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 2. Submit no fewer than [eight] pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers. 5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint-preparation data that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for compatibility with and adhesion to joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. C. Pavement-Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 32 13 73 Page 3 of 8 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified [Installer] B. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for joint sealants. D. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From joint-sealant manufacturer, indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility with and adhesion to joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer. C. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer[ or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C)]. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 32 13 73 Page 4 of 8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>. 2.2 COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Silicone Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM D 5893, Type NS. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. Crafco Inc., an ERGON company; RoadSaver Silicone. b. Dow Corning Corporation; 888. c. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS. d. Or approved equivalent B. Single-Component, Self-Leveling, Silicone Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM D 5893, Type SL. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. Crafco Inc., an ERGON company; RoadSaver Silicone SL. b. Dow Corning Corporation; 890-SL. c. Pecora Corporation; 300 SL. d. Or approved equivalent C. Multicomponent, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-200. b. Or approved equivalent 2.3 HOT-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS A. Hot-Applied, Single-Component Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM D 3406. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 32 13 73 Page 5 of 8 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. Crafco Inc., an ERGON company; Superseal 444/777. b. Or approved equivalent B. Hot-Applied, Single-Component Joint Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: ASTM D 6690, Types I, II, and III. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; [Sealtight Hi-Spec] [Sealtight 3405]. b. Right Pointe; D-3405 Hot Applied Sealant. c. Or approved equivalent 2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS A. General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Round Backer Rods for Cold- and Hot-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant. C. Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and density required to control joint-sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant. D. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness and width required to control joint-sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant. 2.5 PRIMERS A. Primers: Product recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant- substrate tests and field tests. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 32 13 73 Page 6 of 8 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Joint-Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install joint-sealant backings of kind indicated to support joint sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint-sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint-sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent joint-sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install joint sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place joint sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. E. Tooling of Nonsag Joint Sealants: Immediately after joint-sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to the following requirements to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint: 1. Remove excess joint sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 32 13 73 Page 7 of 8 F. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess joint sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses, by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants, during and after curing period, from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations in repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. 3.6 PAVEMENT-JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint-Sealant Application: Joints within cement concrete pavement[ <PJS-#>]. 1. Joint Location: a. Expansion and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete pavement. b. Contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. c. Other joints as indicated. 2. Silicone Joint Sealant for Concrete: [Single component, nonsag] [Single component, self- leveling] 3. Urethane Joint Sealant for Concrete: [traffic-grade] 4. Hot-Applied Joint Sealant for Concrete: [Single component] 5. Joint-Sealant Color: [As selected by Landscape Architect from manufacturer's full range] B. Joint-Sealant Application: Fuel-resistant joints within cement concrete pavement 1. Joint Location: a. Expansion and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete pavement. b. Contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. c. Other joints as indicated. C. Joint-Sealant Application: Joints between cement concrete and asphalt pavement[ 1. Joint Location: a. Joints between concrete and asphalt pavement. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 32 13 73 Page 8 of 8 b. Joints between concrete curbs and asphalt pavement. c. Other joints as indicated. 2. Hot-Applied Joint Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: [Single component] 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range D. Joint-Sealant Application: Fuel-resistant joints between cement concrete and tar-concrete pavement 1. Joint Location: a. Joints between concrete and tar-concrete pavement. b. Joints between concrete curbs and tar-concrete pavement. c. Other joints as indicated. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range END OF SECTION 32 13 73 Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Northampton, MA RUBBER SAFETY SURFACING 32 1404 – 1 SECTION 321404 – RUBBER SURFACING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Unitary synthetic poured rubber seamless surface. B.Related Sections: 1.Division 03 Section CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE for concrete 1.3 DEFINITIONS A.Critical Height: Standard measure of shock attenuation. According to CPSC No. 325, this means "the fall height below which a life-threatening head injury would not be expected to occur." B.SBR: Styrene-butadiene rubber. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Impact Attenuation: According to ASTM F 1292. B.Accessibility of Surface Systems: According to ASTM F 1951. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B.LEED Submittals: 1.Product Data for Credit MR 4.1[ and MR 4.2]: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a.Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. C.Shop Drawings: For each surface system, include materials, plans, cross sections, drainage, installation, penetration details, and edge termination including loose fill edgings. Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Northampton, MA RUBBER SAFETY SURFACING 32 1404 – 2 D.Samples for Verification: For each type of surface system indicated. 1.Minimum 6-by-6-inch (150-by-150-mm) Sample of synthetic, dual-density, synthetic rubber surface. a.One of each color indicated on plans 2.6-inch (150-mm) long by full-size cross section of border edging. E.Product Schedule: For surface systems. F.Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved: 1.Extent of surface systems and use zones for equipment. 2.Coordination in the front entry between the poured in place rubber surface, the light wands and footings. G.Detail Layout and Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings prior to manufacturing showing all components, finishes, fabrication, assembly, and installation. Within 14 days receiving Landscape Architect’s review of shop drawings, revise and re-submit as necessary. Include plans, sections, component details and attachments to other Work. 1.In addition Shop Drawings should reflect: a.Layout plans indicating edge restraints extent, placement, and profile. H.Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. I.Material Certificates: For each type of surface system, from manufacturer. J.Material Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. K.Product Certificates: For each type of unitary synthetic surface system, from manufacturer. L.Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each unitary synthetic surface system. M.Field quality-control reports. N.Maintenance Data: For surface systems to include in maintenance manuals. O.Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B.Source Limitations: Obtain surface system materials, including primers and binders, from single source from single manufacturer. 1.Provide secondary materials including adhesives, primers, and repair materials of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of surface system materials. C.Standards and Guidelines: Comply with CPSC No. 325, "Handbook for Public Playground Safety"; ASTM F 1292; and ASTM F 1487. Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Northampton, MA RUBBER SAFETY SURFACING 32 1404 – 3 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit playground surface system installation to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.8 WARRANTY A.Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of playground surface system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Reduction in impact attenuation. b.Deterioration of surface and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2.Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A.Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 UNITARY SYNTHETIC SEAMLESS SURFACE A.Surface System: Poured-in-place, single-layer system. Provide manufacturer's standard thickness as required for overall thickness indicated, tested for impact attenuation according to ASTM F 1292 and for accessibility according to ASTM F 1951. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, basis of design product: a.Surface America 1)Pour in Play-n-Play Rubber Surfacing. 2.Binder: Weather-resistant, UV-stabilized, flexible, nonhardening, 100 percent solids polyurethane complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for nontoxic and low VOC content. 3.Overall Thickness: Not less than 1/2" Thick. 4. Primer/Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard primer and weather-resistant, moisture-cured polyurethane adhesive suitable for unit, substrate, and location indicated. 5.Color(s): a.Colors TBD B.Leveling and Patching Material: Portland cement-based grout or epoxy- or polyurethane-based formulation suitable for exterior use and approved by surface system manufacturer. Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Northampton, MA RUBBER SAFETY SURFACING 32 1404 – 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, subgrade and substrate conditions, drainage, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B.Hard-Surface Substrates: Verify that substrates are satisfactory for surface system installation and that substrate surfaces are dry, cured, and uniformly sloped to drain within recommended tolerances according to surface system manufacturer's written requirements for cross-section profile. 1.Concrete Substrates: Verify that substrates are dry, free from surface defects, and free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, hardeners, dust, dirt, loose particles, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with playground surface system or that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion, dryness, and acidity characteristics by performing procedures recommended in writing by playground surface system manufacturer. 2.Fiberglass grating and pedestals over roof deck. Verify that the substrates are tightly jointed, clipped plum and true. Verify geotechnical fabric and 1.5 inch rigid insulation is the same and drains. C.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A.General: Prepare substrates to receive surfacing products according to surface system manufacturer's written instructions. Verify that substrates are sound and without high spots, ridges, holes, and depressions. B.Concrete Substrates: Provide sound surface free of laitance, efflorescence, curing compounds, and other contaminants incompatible with playground surface system. 1.Repair unsatisfactory surfaces and fill holes and depressions. 2.Mechanically scarify or otherwise prepare concrete substrates to achieve recommended degree of roughness. 3.Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent telegraphing through playground surface system. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.General: Comply with surface system manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install playground surface system over area and in thickness indicated. Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Northampton, MA RUBBER SAFETY SURFACING 32 1404 – 5 3.4 INSTALLATION OF POURED-IN-PLACE SEAMLESS SURFACE SYSTEMS A.Seamless Surface: Mix and apply components of surface system according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface and impact-attenuating system of total thickness indicated. 1.Substrate Primer: Apply over prepared substrate at manufacturer's standard spreading rate for type of substrate. 2.Poured Cushion Course: Spread evenly over primed substrate to form a uniform layer applied at manufacturer's standard spreading rate in one continuous operation, with a minimum of cold joints. 3.Intercoat Primer: Over cured cushion course, apply primer at manufacturer's standard spreading rate. 4.Wearing Course: Spread over primed base course to form a uniform layer applied at manufacturer's standard spreading rate in one continuous operation and, except where color changes, with no cold joints. Finish surface to produce manufacturer's standard wearing-surface texture. a.Where colored pattern indicated, place adjacent colored material as soon as placed colored material is sufficiently cured, using primer or adhesive if required by manufacturer's written instructions. 5.Lacquer Topcoat: Spray or roller applied at manufacturer's standard coating rate in one continuous operation. 6. Edge Treatment: Flush and as indicated on drawings. Fully adhere edges to substrate with full coverage of substrate. Maintain fully cushioned thickness required to comply with safety performance requirements. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B.Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of playground surface system shall take place according to ASTM F 1292. C.Remove and replace applications of surface system where test results indicate that it does not comply with requirements. D.Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with requirements. 3.6 PROTECTION A.Seamless Systems: Prevent traffic over system for not less than 48 hours after installation. 3.7 CLEANING A.Clean newly installed surface of any dirt, adhesives, or debris. B.Repair and replace any surface or support materials damaged during installation. Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Northampton, MA RUBBER SAFETY SURFACING 32 1404 – 6 END OF SECTION 321404 Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Berkshire DesignGroup February 24, 2024Northampton, MA SEEDING AND SODDING 32-9200 – 1 SECTION 32 9200 - SEEDING & SODDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.The Contractor, Subcontractors, and/or suppliers providing goods or services referenced in or related to this Section shall also be bound by the Documents identified in Division 01 Section “Summary”, Paragraph 1.1A, entitled “Related Documents.” 1.2 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED A.If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.3 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT A.In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Landscape Architect’s/ Architect's interpretation. 1.4 SECTION INCLUDES A.Items required for this Work is indicated on the Drawings and, in general, includes seeding and topsoil preparation for seeding throughout the Work. 1.5 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE A.Exterior Enclosure Commissioning ………………………….…………………………. Division 01 B.General Building Commissioning Requirements………………….…………………………. Division 01 C.Excavation, Earthwork, Filling, and Grading …………………….………………. Division 31 D.For SubSoil, Rough Grading and Backfill Materials refer to Division 31, Excavation, Earthwork Filling and Grading; E.For Topsoil properties for Groundcovers Shrubs and Trees, refer to Division 32 Planting. F. For Topsoil properties for Lawn areas, Refer to Division 32 Seeding and Sodding. Prospect Place Berkshire Design Group 737 Bridge Rd June 15, 2023 Northampton, MA SEEDING AND SODDING 32-9200 – 2 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Qualifications of Workers 1.Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the Work, be thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and the best methods for their installation, and direct all work performed under this Section. B.Standards 1.All seeding materials shall meet or exceed the specifications of Federal and State laws requiring inspection for plant disease and insect control. 2.Coordinate Seed Mix with Owner’s preferred blend 3. Quality shall conform with the current edition of "Horticultural Standards" for number one grade seed or sod, as adopted by the American Association of Nurserymen. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A.Materials List 1.Within 35 days after award of Contract and before any seeding materials are delivered to the job site, submit to the Landscape Architect a complete list of all seeding and other items proposed to be installed. a. Include complete data on source, size, and quality. b.Demonstrate complete conformance with the requirements of this Section. c.This shall in no way be construed as permitting substitution for specific items described in the Drawings or these Specifications unless the substitution has been approved in advance by the Landscape Architect. B.Certificates 1.All certificates required by law shall accompany shipments. 2.Prior to installation, deliver all certificates to the Landscape Architect. 1.8 SOILS REPORTS A. Product Quality Control - Soils Report 1st draft: 1.Landscape Soil Profiles - For each profile type, submit a Soils Report describing all proposed components, composition, amendments, test results, analysis, and interpretations and source locations at least 28 days prior to ordering or processing. B.Product Quality Control - Soils Report final: Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Northampton, MA SEEDING AND SODDING 32-9200 – 3 1. Landscape Soil Profiles - For each profile type, finalize the Soils Report describing revisions as a result of undertaking field trials for mixing, spreading, infiltration and compaction at least 14 days prior to ordering or processing. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An approved independent laboratory, recognized by the local State Department of Agriculture, with a minimum of 5 years’ experience and with the capability to conduct the testing and interpretation. Provide the laboratory with representative samples and a copy of the Contract Document Planting Plans, Schedules and Specifications. Test, analyze and interpret in accordance with current Soil Science Society of America methods. B.Independent Tests: Owner reserves to right to have soil tested independently at the Contractor’s cost. Soil will be tested until amendments meet performance requirements. 1.10 PRODUCT HANDLING A.Delivery and Storage 1. Deliver all items to the site in their original containers with all labels intact and legible at time of Landscape Architect's inspection. 2.Immediately remove from the site all seeding materials which are not true to name and all materials which do not comply with the provisions of this Section of these Specifications. 3. ………………………….………………………….. B.Soil Delivery, Storage and Handling 1.Prevent spillage when hauling on or adjacent to any public street or highway. In the event that spillage occurs, remove all spillage and sweep, wash, or otherwise clean such streets or highways as required by local City, County and/or the State Authorities. 2.Take precautions to prevent a dust nuisance to adjacent public or private properties and to prevent erosion and transportation of soil to downstream or adjacent properties due to work under this Contract. At project site exit, clean dirt from tires. Do not track dirt onto highways. 3.Prior to delivery, propose suitable stockpile locations. Stockpile to a 6-foot-high maximum and protect from traffic, wind and water erosion. Provide temporary seeding and/or erosion control measures as approved by Owner's Representative. 4.Protect inorganic mulch from contamination by foreign materials. Isolate stockpiles to prevent mixing of different aggregate grades. Prevent contamination by organic materials. 5.Use quality control sampling and testing to ensure that delivered materials match the approved samples/mockups and the specified criteria. 6.Before Landscape Soils are distributed from stockpiles ensure a uniform mix, free of subgrade lenses and other irregularities. B.Replacements 1. In the event of damage or rejection, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Landscape Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner. Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA SEEDING AND SODDING 32-9200 – 4 1.11 SEQUENCING A.Coordination with Utilities: Ensure the works are staged and sequenced to; B.Minimize tracking of equipment and compacting planting areas otherwise soil will have to be re-worked again to comply with the specified requirements. C.Prevent mixing, contamination or reversing soil profile from utility excavations and back filling. Repair any disturbance to the soil layers after placing to comply with the specified requirements. D.Slopes steeper than 1V in 3H: 1.Complete all work on slopes (irrigation pipes, soil, erosion control etc.) before surrounding flatter areas are prepared for Landscape Soil. 1.12 SEEDING SEASON A.Seeding 1.Seeding shall normally be done between August 15th to October 10 and/or April 1st to June 15th. B.Variance 1.If special conditions exist which may warrant a variance in the above planting dates, a written request shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect stating the special conditions for the proposed variance. Permission for the variance will be given if warranted in the opinion of the Landscape Architect. Regardless of the time of seeding, the Contractor shall be responsible for a full growth of grass. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TOPSOIL A.General 1.Topsoil, except that existing on the site, will not be made available by the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for supplying any additional topsoil needed and hauling it to the site. It shall be obtained from naturally well-drained areas. It shall not be excessively acid or alkaline nor contain toxic substances which may be harmful to plant growth. Topsoil shall be without admixture of subsoil and shall be cleaned and free from clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots, or similar substances three quarter inch, (3/4”) or more in diameter, debris, or other objects which might be a hindrance to planting operations. Furnish all topsoil required to complete the work. Materials removed shall be disposed of by the Contractor. All topsoil, whether obtained from on site or off site shall be screened prior to use. B.Testing Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA SEEDING AND SODDING 32-9200 – 5 1.The Contractor shall take representative samples of topsoil from the site and from topsoil to be hauled in and shall submit samples to a Soil Testing Laboratory for chemical analysis, and physical analysis. The Contractor shall indicate to the testing agencies that turf is to be planted and who the Owner is. The Contractor shall forward to the Landscape Architect two copies of analysis and recommendations of the testing agencies. Contractor to amend topsoil per recommendations of the testing agency until topsoil meets target levels of organic content, pH, CaCEC. 2.2 LANDSCAPE SOILS: LAWN A.Landscape Soil Characteristics: Placed Landscape Soil Profile shall conform to the following characteristics no later than Substantial Completion. Property Unit Common to each horizon Lawn amended subgrade Lawn subsoil Lawn topsoil Physical: Particle Size Analysis Test Texture by particle size distribution analysis USDA as per site medium loamy sand course loamy sand Physical: Organic Matter Test Organic content - dry %mass < 1 1 - 2 4 - 5 Physical: In Situ Test (If determined necessary by landscape architect) Infiltration inch/hr 1 to 3 > 1 3 to 6 3 to 6 Chemical: Routine Analysis pH CaCl2 5-6.5 EC dS/m < 2 Ca / Mg ratio 3 to 6 CEC cation exch. Capacity meq% 5 to 20 N nitrogen as nitrate ppm 30 to 100 P phosphorus ppm 3 to 18 K potassium ppm 25 to 110 S sulphur ppm < 200 Cu copper ppm 0.4 to 6 Zn zinc ppm 0.3 to 10 Mn manganese ppm 3 to 15 Fe iron ppm 3 to 20 B boron ppm 0.3 to 1 Odour no strong odour Toxins Contaminants & Toxins ppm no phyto toxins EPA PRG levels EPA PRG levels Biological Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place Berkshire Design Group 737 Bridge Rd June 15, 2023 Northampton, MA SEEDING AND SODDING 32-9200 – 6 Microorganisms other than parasitic nematodes present Mycorrhiza fungi present Fungal diseases absent Weed viable reproductive parts absent B.Landscape Topsoil shall consist of the same base material as the Landscape Subsoil except with additional organic matter incorporated. 1. Landscape Soil component proportions by volume: a.For Landscape Subsoil 1) 50% minimum Imported Sand. 2) 50% maximum Existing or Imported Topsoil or Subsoil. 3) other amendments as identified in the Soils Report. b.For Landscape Topsoil 1) 50% minimum Imported Sand. 2) 45% maximum Existing or Imported Topsoil amended with, 3) 5% maximum composted organic matter. 4) other amendments as identified in the Soils Report. 5) Reinforcing products if noted on drawings. C.Refer drawings for thicknesses of horizons. 2.3 INORGANIC LANDSCAPE SOIL COMPONENTS & AMENDMENTS A.Existing Topsoil: The Owner has existing soil that may be suitable for reuse. The Owner shall not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn concerning the actual volume of conforming soil that may be recovered nor the volume of actual unsuitable material remaining. Soil testing to assess salvage potential has been carried out by the Owner. This information is not intended as representations or warranties of the continuity of such conditions between soil tests. The Owner shall not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn there from. The data is made available only for information and not for construction. Make any additional tests and other exploratory operations at no cost to the Owner. B.Imported Topsoil: Surface “A” horizon from natural or cultivated surface profile (not including bogs or wetlands) containing organic matter, sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel; and free of weeds, roots, and other deleterious materials. Percentage by mass and pH to ASTM D5268-92 specification (table 1). Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA SEEDING AND SODDING 32-9200 – 7 C.Amendments: Use amendments to make the soil conform to the specified requirements. Use amendment types as recommended by the Soils Report. 2.4 FERTILIZER A.General 1.All fertilizer proportions and applications per the recommendations of 3rd party testing laboratory. 2.Fertilizer shall be a commercial balanced, such as a 10-6-4 fertilizer delivered to the site in bags labeled with the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. B.Commercial Fertilizer 1.Commercial fertilizer shall be a complete fertilizer in which 50-70 percent of the nitrogenous elements shall be derived from organic sources; phosphate shall be derived from superphosphate containing 16-20 percent phosphoric acid or bonemeal containing 25-30 percent phosphoric acid and 2-3 percent nitrogen; and potash shall be derived from muriate of potash containing 55-60 percent potash. It shall contain the following percentages by weight. a. 18% Nitrogen - 26% Phosphoric Acid - 12% Potash 2.Fertilizer shall be mixed, as specified, and delivered to the site in standard, unopened containers showing weight, guaranteed analysis, and name of manufacturer. C.Special Protection 1.If stored at the site, protect fertilizer from the elements at all times. 2.5 SOIL AMENDMENTS A.Peat 1.Peat shall be moist, finely shredded, consist of 90 percent organic moss peat, be brown in color, and suitable for horticultural purposes. Shredded particles shall not exceed one half (1/2) inch in diameter. Peat shall be measured in air dry condition, containing not more than 35 percent moisture by weight. Ash content shall not exceed 10 percent. B.Limestone 1.Ground dolomite limestone shall be an approved agricultural limestone and shall contain not less than 85 percent of total carbonates. Limestone shall be ground to such fineness that 50 percent will pass a 100-mesh sieve, and 90 percent will pass a 20-mesh sieve. This site was a pine forest up until this past year. Provide lime applications as necessary to bring the soil pH to the proper level. More than one application may be required. 2.6 GRASS SEED A.General - All grass seed shall be: Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA SEEDING AND SODDING 32-9200 – 8 1.Free from noxious weed seeds and recleaned. 2.Grade A recent crop seed. 3.Treated with appropriate fungicide at time of mixing. 4.Delivered to the site in sealed containers with dealer's guaranteed analysis. 5. Confirmed with Client’s maintenance department for approval of seed mix blend. B.Seed blend Percent by Percent of Percent Weight Seed Purity Germination 10% Kentucky Bluegrass 85% 80% 80% Tall Fescue 98% 90% 5% Annual Ryegrass 98% 90% 5% Clover, Ladino 2.7 SOD A.Sod shall be first quality sod equal to the blend in 2.6.B. 2.8 EROSION CONTROL MATERIALS A.Erosion Control Fabric: Biodegradable woven fabric. 1. Requirements: a.Material: 100% spun coir or jute functional for at least 2 growing seasons. b.Open area: 50% to 65% suitable for seedings after installation. c.Wide width tensile (wet): 38 lbs. d.Elongation at failure (wet): 47%. e. Water Flow Velocity: 8 ft/sec. f.Application: specifically recommended for use as erosion control on slopes up to 1 in 2 until planting is established. g.Stakes: long enough to penetrate amended subgrade. 2.Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.Belton Industries Inc.– “Geocoir DeKoWe 400” Coir mat Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place Berkshire Design Group 737 Bridge Rd June 15, 2023 Northampton, MA SEEDING AND SODDING 32-9200 – 9 b.Belton Industries Inc.– “Geocoir DeKoWe 700” Coir mat c.RoLanka International Inc. – “Jute mat” d.Approved equivalent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A.Existing conditions: Before starting work, examine related work and surfaces. Verify that Earth Moving has resulted in the conforming subgrades within specified tolerances. B.Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid including, but not limited to, paint, concrete slurry, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, or acid is within planting areas. If present, remove and replace with new soil. C.Weather Limitations: Proceed with soil works when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit. D.Moisture Content: Do not work when moisture content is so great that excessive compaction will occur, nor when it is so dry that dust will form in air or that clods will not break readily. Water, if necessary, to bring soil to moisture content suitable for tilling and spreading. Do not spread if subgrade is frozen, muddy, at optimum moisture content or excessively wet. E.Inspection 1.Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades, and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2.Verify that seeding may be completed in accordance with the original design and the referenced standards. F.Discrepancies 1.In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Landscape Architect. 2.Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.2 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A.The Contractor shall do whatever grading is necessary to bring the subgrade to a true, smooth slope, parallel and 6" below finished grade, for all seed bed areas. Remove all existing lawns and grasses, including roots. B.There must be sufficient grade staked, as determined by the Architect, to insure correct line and grade of subgrade and of finished grade. C.Immediately prior to being covered with topsoil, the top 3" of the subgrade shall be raked or otherwise loosened and shall be free of stones, rock, and other foreign material 2" or greater in dimensions. Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA SEEDING AND SODDING 32-9200 – 10 D.Protect utilities, structures, foundations, sidewalks, pavements, paths, trails, other facilities, lawns and plants from damage caused by operations or as a result of operations. 1.Utilities: After locating and marking, verify the status of utilities. Protect or temporarily divert existing utilities to remain active. Rectify immediately any obstruction or damage to utilities to remain active and provide and pay for temporary utilities whilst repairs are carried out to the satisfaction of the utility owner. 2.Property: Do not interfere with or damage property that is to remain on or adjacent to the site, including adjoining property to the site, and trees. Rectify immediately any interference or damage to such property. Protect finishes from staining. 3.Trees: If the trees are damaged or placed under unnecessary and avoidable stress by the Contractor, the Owners Representative shall deduct damages from the Contractor’s progress claim. 4.Irrigation: Install a temporary diversion main, control cable and valves to isolate contract area and to maintain service to areas outside of the contract area. E.Provide temporary erosion-control and slope stability measures to prevent erosion, displacement of soils, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust on to adjacent properties and areas of completed work. Be responsible for any additional measures in areas that rely on the establishment of plant roots to stabilize soils and slopes 3.3 FINISH GRADE PREPARATION A.Topsoil shall not be worked in a frozen or muddy condition. B.Topsoil shall be spread over approved areas to a depth sufficiently greater than 6" in "loam and seed" lawn areas so that after natural settlement and light rolling, the completed work will conform to the lines, grades, and elevations indicated. If excess topsoil exists, topsoil shall be spread a maximum of 8" deep on lawn areas. C.After topsoil has been spread in approved areas, it shall be carefully prepared by scarifying or harrowing, and stones over one half inch in diameter shall be removed from the topsoil. It shall be free of roots and smaller stones in excessive quantities, as determined by the Landscape Architect. D.The whole surface shall then be rolled with a roller which weighs not more than 100 pounds per foot of width. During the rolling, all depressions caused by settlement of rolling shall be filled with additional topsoil, and the surface shall be regraded and rolled until presenting a smooth and even finish to the required grade. 3.4 LAYOUT A.Lines and Elevations: The visual appearance and acceptable tolerances of the design is critically dependent upon the layout of the works. Include all costs and provide all instruments necessary to set out the works accurately. Establish lines and elevation markers located and laid out by survey instrumentation for all finish grades. Provide additional grade stakes and string lines as required to achieve grades and to enable field observations by the Landscape Architect. Re-instate markers/stakes as required throughout the works. Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place Berkshire Design Group 737 Bridge Rd June 15, 2023 Northampton, MA SEEDING AND SODDING 32-9200 – 11 B.Verify: Include all costs and provide all calculations necessary to verify the subgrade, substrate and/or structural set-down elevations from the finish elevations minus thickness of overlying finishes. If any discrepancy is found notify the Landscape Architect before final grading. C.Review: The Landscape Architect shall review the field layout and retains the right to direct adjustments to the layout within 2 days. Include costs and allow time to adjust the layout. 3.5 GRADING AESTHETIC INTENT & FIELD ADJUSTMENTS A.Aesthetic Intent: The aesthetic intent of the grading is to appear purposeful and deliberate in its form. Edges and grade breaks shall be defined, flat surface planes shall be uniform between grade breaks and curved surfaces shall be smooth. B.Field Direction: The Landscape Architect may direct field adjustments to the documented grades including but not limited to, 1.fine grading for ridges, swales, edges, 2. transitioning to existing elements, 3.adjusting due to the tolerance of the survey, 4.creating positive drainage. C.Include costs and allow time to adjust the fine grading assuming adjustments shall be cut to fill within the project site. 3.6 PLACING AND SPREADING LANDSCAPE SOILS A.Only commence spreading after soils have been tested and shown to conform. B.Use equipment and/or methods that spread loads without over compacting the Landscape Soil profile. Do not use vibratory equipment. C.Spread Landscape Soils in lifts not exceeding 6 inches to the depths and tolerances shown on the drawings but not less than required to meet finish grades after settlement/consolidation. D.Spread Landscape Soils evenly throughout areas and rototill or disk-harrow the top of each lift before placing the next lift. Blend different soil types where they adjoin. E.On slopes steeper than 1V in 3H, place and spread Landscape Soils from the bottom up. F.If Landscape topsoil includes in-field amendments rototill before planting. G.Apply water as required to induce initial settlement and/or consolidation. H.When adequately dry, re-grade or re-screed smooth, adding additional Landscape Topsoil as required to meet finished grades and elevations. Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA SEEDING AND SODDING 32-9200 – 12 I.Grading between required lines and grades to be smooth, uniform and planar. Slope finish grades to drain surface water away from buildings, and other structures. Slope finish grades to drain with uniform slope between points where elevations are given or between points and existing grades. J.Unless otherwise noted, grade intersections of planar slopes to crisp sharp intersections at high point ridges and low point troughs and swales. Do not round off such intersections. K.Fine rake until the surface is smooth, friable, and of a uniform fine texture and compaction having no lumps or stones over the specified solid materials size. Screed if necessary to achieve smooth slopes and sharp intersections of planes. L.Protect Landscape Soil Profiles from further compaction. Where the Landscape Soil Profile exceeds specified limit after spreading, chisel to the depth of soil, till and grade smooth. Restore planting beds if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before planting. M.Hydromulch with a sterile nurse crop and/or cover with erosion control mat if Landscape Topsoil is to be exposed for more than 4 weeks. N.If possible, leave Landscape Topsoil fallow and encourage any weeds to germinate before eradicating them. O.Top-up Landscape Soils if settlement and/or consolidation occur outside the specified tolerances. 3.7 SEED/ SOD BED PREPARATION A.Follow seed/sod bed amendment recommendations of 3rd party testing laboratory. B.After the areas to be seeded have been brought to the grades specified, spread limestone at a rate of 100 pounds per 1,000 square feet. C.Apply fertilizer amendments per the recommendations of the testing laboratory within 10 days prior to seeding. Thoroughly and evenly incorporate fertilizer and lime with the soil to a depth of 3" by discing or other approved method. In areas inaccessible to power equipment, use hand tools. Adjacent to trees and shrubs, use hand tools to avoid disturbances of the roots. D.The Seeding Contractor shall reconstitute the soil, as may be recommended by a soil testing agency, prior to use as planting soil. Any deficiencies in the topsoil shall be corrected by the Contractor, as recommended, at no expense to the Owner. E. After incorporation of fertilizer and lime into the soil, the seed bed shall be fine graded to remove all ridges and depressions and the surface cleared of all debris and of all stones one half inch or more in diameter. 3.8 SEEDING A.Immediately before seeding, the ground shall be restored, as necessary, to a loose friable condition by dicing or other approved method to a depth of not less than 2". The surface shall be cleared of all roots, debris and of all stones 1/2" or more in diameter. Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place Berkshire Design Group 737 Bridge Rd June 15, 2023 Northampton, MA SEEDING AND SODDING 32-9200 – 13 B.Seed all grass areas with specified grass seed, sowing evenly with an approved mechanical seeder at the rate of 6 pounds per 1,000 square feet. Sow 3 pounds per 1,000 square feet in one direction and 3 pounds per 1,000 square feet at right angles to the first seeding. Spread seed when soil is moist. Cultipacker, or approved similar equipment, may be used to cover the seed and to firm the seed bed in one operation. In areas inaccessible to cultipacker, the seeded ground shall be lightly raked and rolled in two directions with a water ballast roller. Extreme care shall be taken during seeding and raking to ensure that no change shall occur in the finished grades and that the seed is not raked from one spot to another. Hydro-seeding is an acceptable manner of seeding, providing the Contractor certifies in writing that the hydro-seed fertilizer mix is as herein specified and applied at the equivalent rate of 6 pounds per 1,000 square feet. C.Seed all conservation areas with specified conservation seed, sowing evenly with an approved mechanical seeder at the rate of 2 pounds per 1,000 square feet. Spread seed when soil is moist. The seeded ground shall be lightly raked and rolled in two directions with a water ballast roller. Extreme care shall be taken during seeding and raking to ensure that no change shall occur in the finished grades and that the seed is not raked from one spot to another. D.Promptly after seeding, wet the seed bed thoroughly, keeping all areas moist throughout the germination period. E.Mulch shall be placed immediately after seeding. Hay that has been thoroughly fluffed shall be spread evenly and uniformly at the rate of two to three tons per acre. Lumps and thick mulch materials shall be thinned. All mulch anchor stakes, strings and matting shall be removed before final acceptance of lawns. F.Take whatever measures are necessary to protect the seeded area while it is germinating. These measures shall include furnishing warnings signs, barriers, and other needed measures of protection. 3.9 SODDING A.Moisture Content 1.Sod shall not be harvested or transplanted when moisture content (excessively dry or wet) may adversely affect its survival. B.Time Limitations 1.Sod shall be harvested, delivered and transplanted within a period of 36 hours unless a suitable preservation method is approved prior to delivery. 2.Sod not transplanted within this period shall be inspected and approved by the Architect prior to its installation. C.Transplanting 1.Moistening the Soil: During periods of higher than optimal temperature for species being specified and after all unevenness in the soil surface has been corrected, the soil shall be lightly moistened immediately prior to laying sod. Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA SEEDING AND SODDING 32-9200 – 14 2.Starter Strip: The first row of sod shall be laid in a straight line with subsequent rows placed parallel to and tightly against each other. Lateral joints shall be staggered to promote more uniform growth and strength. Care shall be exercised to ensure that sod is not stretched or overlapped and that all joints are butted tight in order to prevent voids which would cause air drying of the roots. 3.Sloping Surfaces: On 1:3 or greater slopes, sod shall be laid with staggered joints and secured by tamping, pegging or other approved methods. 4. Watering and Rolling: Water sod immediately after transplanting to prevent excessive drying during progress of work. As sodding is completed in any one section, the entire area shall be rolled. It shall then be thoroughly watered to a depth sufficient that the underside of the new sod pad and soil immediately below the sod are thoroughly wet. The Owner shall be responsible for having adequate water available. 3.10 PLACING EROSION CONTROL FABRIC A.Seek and comply with manufacturer’s written installation guidelines. Such guidelines shall be specific to the Project site and application. 3.11 MAINTENANCE A.Maintenance shall begin immediately after seeding operations and shall continue until Acceptance or for a minimum of 60 days, whichever is longer. B.Maintenance of seed areas shall consist of watering, weeding, curing, repair of all erosion, and reseeding as necessary to establish a uniform stand of grass. Lawns shall be watered in a satisfactory manner during and immediately after planting, and not less than twice per week until final acceptance. All areas which fail to show a uniform stand of grass for any reason shall be reseeded repeatedly until a uniform stand is attained. Scattered bare spots, evenly distributed and not exceeding 8" square of any lawn area will be allowed at the discretion of the Landscape Architect. C.At the time of the first cutting, there shall be a uniform stand between 3 and 3-1/2" high, and mower blades shall be set between 2-1/2" and 3" high. Catch shall be representative of seed specified. D.All planted areas shall be protected via temporary snow fence or chainlink fence during the first growing season. 3.12 ACCEPTANCE A.The Landscape Architect shall inspect all work for Acceptance upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least 10 calendar days before the anticipated date of inspection. Upon completion and re-inspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgment of the Landscape Architect, he shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to the Acceptance of the work. Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA SEEDING AND SODDING 32-9200 – 15 3.13 ACCEPTANCE IN PART A.The work may be accepted in parts when it is deemed to be in the Owner's best interest to do so and when approval is given to the Contractor in writing to complete the work in parts. Acceptance and use of such areas by the Owner shall not waive any other provisions of this Contract. 3.14 CLEANUP A.When any of this work is done while buildings are occupied, pavements shall be kept clear at all times, broom cleaned to prevent tracking dirt into buildings. B.After completion of all planting operations, dispose of all debris and excess material to the satisfaction of the Landscape Architect. All pavements shall be broomed and hosed clean. 3.15 DISPOSAL A.Disposal: Remove surplus and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose or recycle them off site. 3.16 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE A.At the end of the guarantee period, the Landscape Architect will inspect all guaranteed work for the Final Acceptance upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least 10 calendar days before the anticipated date for final inspection. B.Upon completion and re-inspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgment of the Landscape Architect at that time, he shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to the Final Acceptance of the project. END OF SECTION 32-9200 Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 1 SECTION 329300 - PLANTINGS PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Attention is called to the requirements of the printed Form of Contract and to Division 1 - General Requirements, of which this section is hereby made a part. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.The Contractor, Subcontractors, and/or suppliers providing goods or services referenced in or related to this Section shall also be bound by the Documents identified in Division 01 Section “Summary”, Paragraph 1.1A, entitled “Related Documents.” 1.3 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED A.If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.Division 01 Section “Construction Waste Management and Disposal” for waste management, recycling and disposal. 1.4 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT A.In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Landscape Architect’s/ Architect's interpretation (See Article 1 of the General and Supplementary Conditions). 1.5 EXISTING CONDITIONS A.The Contractor shall become thoroughly familiar with the site, consult records and drawings of adjacent structures and of existing utilities and their connections, and note all conditions which may influence the work of this Section. a.B. By submitting a bid, the Contractor affirms that he/she/they has carefully examined the site and all conditions affecting work under this Section. No claim for additional costs will be allowed because of lack of full knowledge of existing conditions. C.The Contractor may, at his own expense, conduct additional subsurface testing as required for his own information. 1.6 INFORMATION NOT GUARANTEED A.Information on the Drawings and in the Specifications relating to subsurface conditions, natural phenomena, and existing utilities and structures is from the best sources presently available. Such information is furnished only for the information and convenience of the Contractor, and the accuracy or completeness of this information is not guaranteed. Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 2 B.Plans, surveys, measurements, and dimensions under which the work is to be performed are believed to be correct, but the Contractor shall have examined them for himself during the bidding period, as no additional compensation will be made for errors and inaccuracies may be found therein. 1.7 SUMMARY A.This Section includes: 1.Planting trees, shrubs, ground cover. 2.Organic Mulch. 3.Inorganic Mulch 4.Tree Stabilization. B.Related Sections include: General Building Commissioning Requirements…………………….……..Division 31 Exterior Enclosure Commissioning……….….………..……………………..Division 31 Site Demolition Clearing and Grubbing…………..……………….…………....Division 31 Excavation, Filling, and Grading……………………………….………….……..Division 31 Seeding and Sodding…………………………..………….……….…...……..Division 32 C.For General Soil and Backfill Materials refer to Division 31, Excavation Filling and Grading; For Topsoil properties for Groundcovers Shrubs and Trees, refer to Division 32 Planting. For Toposil properties for Lawn areas, Refer to Division 32 Seeding and Sodding. B.For Paver Edging refer to Division 32 Unitized Paving. 1.8 REFERENCED STANDARDS A.The following are referred to in this section: 1."ANSI Z60.1 American Standard for Nursery Stock", Current Edition, American Association of Nurserymen. 2."ANSI A300 Standards for Tree Care Operations”, Current Edition, American National Standards Institute. 3.“USDA Cold Hardiness System” United States Department of Agriculture published zone map. 4.“ASTM D-3385-75 Infiltration Testing”. 5.All plants and planting material shall meet or exceed the specifications of Federal and State laws requiring inspection for plant disease and insect control. a.Quality and size shall conform to the current edition of "Horticultural Standards" for number one grade nursery stock, as adopted by the American Association of Nurserymen. Trees shall be nursery grown in New England, New York or New Jersey, whose climatic conditions are similar to the project site. b.All plants shall be true to name and one of each bundle or lot shall be tagged with the name and size of the plants, in accordance with the standards of practice of the American Association of Nurserymen. In all cases, botanical names shall take precedence over common names. 1.ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials a.ASTM C136-84a Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Course Aggregates. b.ASTM D422-63 Method for Particle Size Analysis of Soils c.ASTM D2607-69 Classification of Peats, Mosses, Humus, and Related Products. Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place Berkshire Design Group 737 Bridge Rd June 15, 2023 Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 3 d.ASTM D2974-84 Test Method for Moisture, Ash, & Organic Matter of Peat Materials. e.ASTM D2976-71 Test Method for pH of Peat Materials. f.ASTM D5268-07 Standard Specification for Topsoil Used for Landscaping Purposes. g.ASTM C33-08 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. h.ASTM D5883-08 Standard Guide for Use of Rotary Kiln produced Expanded Shale, Clay or Slate (ESCS) as a Mineral Amendment in Topsoil Used for Landscaping Purposes. C.USDA: United States Department of Agriculture 1.USDA Soil Particle Size & Texture Classes. D.SSSA: Soil Science Society of America 1.Methods of Soil Analysis. 1.9 DEFINITIONS A.General Nomenclature: as suggested by ANSI Z60.1. B.Advanced Trees: Trees greater than 2.5 inch (64mm) caliper at the time of planting. E.Amended Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, filling or backfilling. Subgrade resulting from Earth Moving may or may not be suitable for plant growth and shall be amended by the Contractor to ensure it functions as the “C” horizon for the proposed landscape. C.Balled and Burlapped (B&B) Stock: Trees dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown, wrapped in burlap and/or wire. B&B trees held long enough for new roots to begin to grow through the burlap are “heeled-in” or “cured”. D.Balled and Potted Stock: Trees dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown and placed, unbroken, in a container. E. Bare-Root Stock: Trees with a well-branched, fibrous-root system developed by transplanting or root pruning, with soil or growing medium removed. F.Clear Trunk or Branching Height: The portion of the lower trunk maintained free of any branches measured from the top of root ball to the underside of the first lowest permanent branch. G.Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted trees grown in a container with well- established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. H.Crown Spread or Diameter: the average diameter of the widest portion of the crown and that diameter perpendicular to it. I.Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted trees established and grown in-ground in a porous fabric bag with well-established root system reaching sides of fabric bag. F.Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface. Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 4 J.Hardening Off: Gradually exposing plants that have been sheltered in Greenhouse or from A more mild climate to new site conditions. Can include shading from sun, gradual reduction of watering or protecting from early exposure to cold weather. G.Landscape Topsoil: Proposed upper “A” horizon of soil in landscape areas that may or may not contain a large proportion of Topsoil. If conforming, sources may include existing topsoil unamended or amended, imported topsoil amended or unamended and manufactured and/or imported soil mixes amended or unamended. H.Landscape Subsoil: Proposed lower “B” horizon of soil in landscape areas between the Landscape Topsoil and the Amended Subgrade. If conforming, sources can include existing subsoil unamended or amended, existing subgrade unamended or amended, manufactured and/or imported subsoil amended. I.Landscape Soil Profile: Proposed Landscape Soil profile made up of amended Subgrade (“C” horizon), Landscape Subsoil (“B” horizon), Landscape Topsoil (“A” horizon), and Mulch layer (“O” horizon),. K.Included Bark: Bark between a branch and trunk or between trunks that is squeezed together in the crotch of the branch resulting in a weak branch union. L.Root Ball Diameter: The average diameter of the widest portion of the root ball and that diameter measured perpendicular to it. M.Trunk Wound: A trunk injury that is open and not callused over. A properly executed pruning cut that has yet to close over is not considered a trunk wound. N.Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface. O.Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs, vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation. P.Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk. Q.Stem Girdling Roots: Roots that encircle the stems (trunks) of trees below the soil surface. 1.10 MEASUREMENT, GRADING & QUANTITIES A.Time: The specified sizes and grades shall be at the time of delivery to site. Any assessment or measurement before this time can only be based on the plant characteristics at that time and not any future or predicted growth potential of the plant. B.Size: The measurements specified or referenced shall be the minimum sizes acceptable after any necessary pruning and with branches, trunks or canes in their normal position. Plants that meet measurements specified but do not possess a normal balance between height and spread shall be rejected. Plants larger than specified may be used if approved by the Landscape Architect. Use of such plants shall not increase the Contract price. If larger plants are approved, increase the root ball size in proportion to the size of the plant. C.Quantity: If there is a discrepancy between the number of plants drawn and the number of plants listed or noted, then the larger quantity of plants drawn shall take precedence. Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 5 1.11 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS & ALTERNATIVES A.Requirement: Supply scheduled plant species, quantities, sizes and quality on the dates required. Be responsible for all means and methods to achieve the growth rates to meet this requirement. 1.12 SUBMITTALS B.Qualification Data: Submit written particulars of each proposed grower prior to confirming the order including the following; 1.Grower’s nursery/plantation name and address. 2.Nursery/plantation layout showing lots & batches. 3.Quality and Inventory control procedures. C.Proof of Purchase: Submit copies within fourteen days after the field inspections. 1.Confirm grower, species and quantities ordered. D.Permits & Certificates: Provide evidence of all certificates and permits required by Federal, State, or local authorities in sourcing, growing and transporting plants. E.Supply Problems & Substitutions: Submit immediate notice of any supply difficulties and substantiate if any material specified is not obtainable including copies of supplier’s correspondence. Submit in writing to the Owner's Representative no later than twenty-one days after the Notice to Proceed any proposed plant substitutions of equivalent size and/or variety with corresponding adjustment of Contract Price. Substitutions shall not be considered after this time. F.Samples for Verification: For each of the following: 1. Mulch: 5 lb (2.2 kg) of mulch for each color and texture required, in labeled plastic bags. 2.Amended Topsoil: 5lb of soil G.Schedule: Proposed testing and amendment schedule to meet performance requirements. H.Product Quality Control - Soils Report 1st draft: 1.Landscape Soil Profiles - For each profile type, submit a Soils Report describing all proposed components, composition, amendments, test results, analysis, and interpretations and source locations at least 28 days prior to ordering or processing. I.Product Quality Control - Soils Report final: 1.Landscape Soil Profiles - For each profile type, finalize the Soils Report describing revisions as a result of undertaking field trials for mixing, spreading, infiltration and compaction at least 14 days prior to ordering or processing. J.Nursery Reviews: Submit written requests for review of plants at the nursery. Give a minimum of twenty-one days notice of review. State the names and addresses of the nursery/plantation and quantity of plants to be reviewed. K.Maintenance Instructions: Submit at Substantial Completion, recommended procedures to be followed by the Owner to maintain the plants during a calendar year. Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 6 L.Warranty: Sample of special warranty. M.Contractor must maintain water, fertilizing, pruning, and associated maintenance for one year after the date of substantial completion. N.Materials List :Thirty days before any planting materials are delivered to the job site, submit to the Landscape Architect a complete list of all plants and other items proposed to be installed: 1.Include a complete data on source, size, and quality. 2.Demonstrate complete conformance with the requirements of this section. 3.This shall in no way be construed as permitting substitution for specific items described in the Drawings or these Specifications unless the substitution has been approved in advance by the Landscape Architect. B.Certificates 1.All certificates required by law shall accompany shipments. 2.Upon completion of the installation, deliver all certificates to the Landscape Architect. C.All submittals shall follow the Provisions Division 01 Submittals 1.13 QUALITY ASSURANCE O.Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An approved independent laboratory, recognized by the local State Department of Agriculture, with a minimum of 5 years experience and with the capability to conduct the testing and interpretation. Provide the laboratory with representative samples and a copy of the Contract Document Planting Plans, Schedules and Specifications. Test, analyze and interpret in accordance with current Soil Science Society of America methods. P.Landscape Soil Reports: As a minimum include the following in each Soil Report; 1.Sampling: Use methods to achieve a true representation of soil variability. 2.Soil Analysis: Test for the specified characteristics. USDA Texture shall be tested to ASTM D 422-63 and presented in graph form. Continue to sample and retest until each proposed soil type conforms to the specified characteristics. Pay for all such testing. 3.Interpretation: Report on suitability of each proposed soil type for growing plants indicated on the Plant Schedule and propose recommended quantities of amendments to be added to produce conforming soils. Substantiate with data and/or research any proposed alternatives. Q.Independent Soil Tests: Owner reserves to right to have soil tested independently at the Contractor’s cost. Soil will be tested until amendments meet performance requirements. R.Installer Qualifications: Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the Work, thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and the best methods of their installation, and direct all work performed under this Section. Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place Berkshire Design Group 737 Bridge Rd June 15, 2023 Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 7 1.A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of exterior plants. a.Sourcing: Require an experienced plant finder whose work has resulted in successful sourcing, selection and delivery of quality plants. Hire a plant broker if necessary. b.Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association. c.Delivery Supervision: Require an experienced person who can assess the condition of the plants at the time of loading and unloading and who can resolve any disputes on site. d.Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when exterior planting is in progress. e.Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial. S.Inspections 1.Certificates of inspection shall accompany invoices for each shipment of plants as may be required by law for transportation. File certificates with the Landscape Architect prior to acceptance of the material. Inspection by Federal or State Governments at place of growth does not preclude rejection of plants at the work site. T.Selection and Tagging 1.Plants shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Landscape Architect at their place of growth and upon delivery for conformity to specification requirements. Such approval shall not impair the right of inspection and rejection during the progress of the work. A Contractor's representative shall be present at all inspections. 2.Written requests for inspection of plant material at their place of growth shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect at least 10 calendar days prior to digging. Written requests shall state the place of growth and quantity of plants to be inspected. The Landscape Architect may refuse inspection at this time if, in his judgment, a sufficient quantity of plants are not available for inspection. 3.Plants identified as "specimen" shall be approved and tagged at their place of growth. For distant material, submit photographs for pre-inspection review. U.Field Observations: 1.SOILS: Give not less than 14 working days notice so that field observations may be made of the following: a.Trials. b.First Amended Subgrade area prior to spreading Landscape Subsoil. c.Fine grading operations. 2.PLANTINGS: Plants shall be subject to review both at the nursery and at the delivery site for quality and conformity. Acceptance at the nursery shall not impair the right of review and rejection during progress of the Work onsite. Owner's Representative reserves the right to postpone the review if, in the Landscape Architect’s opinion, a sufficient quantity of plants are not available. Plants identified as "Specimen" shall be reviewed and tagged at the place of growth by the Landscape Architect / Owner's Representative. 3.Notify Landscape Architect of sources of plants within fourteen days of proposed nursery inspections. 4.Notify Landscape Architect when lay out of plants is ready for review fourteen days in advance of delivery to site. Prospect Place Berkshire Design Group 737 Bridge Rd June 15, 2023 Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 8 V.Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with Project Management and Coordination requirements. W.Prior to planting, confirm review of subgrade and finish grade elevations has recevieved approval by the landscape architect and owners project representative. X.Prior to planting, confirm soil meets performance requirements. Retest the soil after amendment until it meets performance requirements. 1.14 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Y.Packing: Prior to delivery, propose suitable temporary storage locations. Deliver the plants to the site after preparations have been made and as close as possible to the time of planting. Z.Protecting: Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sunscald, drying, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Ensure all machinery handling plants have sharp edges padded. Do not bend or bind-tie plants in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery. Handle plants by the root ball. AA. Acceptance at Site: Inspect unloaded plants in an upright position with tops untied to enable inspection of all sides. The Landscape Architect and/or Owners Representative may also review. If the plant is not in accordance with the Contract, 1.Reject and remove the plant(s) from site and replace it within 2 days at no cost. 2.Or if approved in writing by the Landscape Architect accept the plant(s) on-site and at lower value as assessed by the Landscape Architect. BB. Storage: If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery and acceptance, set plants and protect from stress, traffic, erosion, wilting, wind and secure against theft. 1.Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, mulch, or other acceptable material. 2.Set plants so that no branches are in contact with the ground. 3.Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting. 4.Water root systems of plants stored on-site with a fine-mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist condition. 5.Store bulbs, corms, and tubers in a dry place at 60 to 65 deg F (16 to 18 deg C) until planting. CC.SOIL DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1.Prevent spillage when hauling on or adjacent to any public street or highway. In the event that spillage occurs, remove all spillage and sweep, wash, or otherwise clean such streets or highways as required by local City, County and/or the State Authorities. 2.Take precautions to prevent a dust nuisance to adjacent public or private properties and to prevent erosion and transportation of soil to downstream or adjacent properties due to work under this Contract. At project site exit, clean dirt from tires. Do not track dirt onto highways. 3.Prior to delivery, propose suitable stockpile locations. Stockpile to a 6 foot high maximum and protect from traffic, wind and water erosion. Provide temporary seeding and/or erosion control measures as approved by Owner's Representative. 4.Protect inorganic mulch from contamination by foreign materials. Isolate stockpiles to prevent mixing of different aggregate grades. Prevent contamination by organic materials. Prospect Place Berkshire Design Group 737 Bridge Rd June 15, 2023 Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 9 5. Use quality control sampling and testing to ensure that delivered materials match the approved samples/mockups and the specified criteria. 6. Before Landscape Soils are distributed from stockpiles ensure a uniform mix, free of subgrade lenses and other irregularities. 1.15 DELIVERY COORDINATION A. Allow to develop and revise the delivery schedule as necessary. During delivery periods update daily to show actual number of plants delivered. B. Any delays in the installation of the plants that results in delays to delivery may be subject to damages. C. Deliver all items to the site in their original containers with all labels intact and legible at time of Landscape Architect's inspection. D. Immediately remove from the site all plants which are not true to name and all materials which do not comply with the provisions of this Section of these Specifications. E. Use all means necessary to protect plant materials before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all trades. F. Coordinating Soil stockpiles: Be responsible for any necessary temporary storage and staging of soil works including relocating stockpiles to accommodate the scheduling of other work. 1.16 DELIVERY RESPONSIBILITIES A. Responsibility of the supplier: 1. Provide delivery time frame, 2. Ensure trailers find the temporary unloading areas, 3. Remove transport ropes, covers etc, 4. Jointly inspect the plants, 5. Tag any non-conforming plants, 6. Prune any minor damage. 7. Remove and replace non-conforming plants. 8. Nominate delivery times within suppliers time frame, 9. Designate temporary unloading areas, 10. Provide trafficable access to temporary unloading areas, 11. Unload the plants & holding upright for inspection, 12. Jointly inspect the plants, 13. Store & protect the plants until needed for planting, 14. Segregate any non-conforming plants. 1.17 SCHEDULING A. At onset of project, confirm plant list and quantities and locate specimen trees in nursery. Prepare a tagging, digging, and planting schedule to address individual needs of species requiremnets for Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 10 digging (Spring/ Fall), and for project construction schedule. Consider prepurchasing of trees early in the project to ensure availability and coordination with planting. B. Schedule a nursery visit for tagging trees at the onset of the project. Digging of trees to be coordinated to take place during dormancy period. Transplanting of tree to be coordinated to minimize time root ball is out of ground. C.Ordering: Be responsible for searching, locating and ordering natural materials that are short in supply, and/or have long lead times and/or seasonal dependencies. No extensions of time or variations shall be considered if supply is compromised by late sourcing and/or ordering. This includes but is not limited to: 1.Advanced trees & hedges. D.B&B Digging Restrictions: Dig during one of the following periods or as agreed to protect the warrantee: 1.Spring Digging for deciduous trees : April to May. 2.Fall Digging for deciduous and evergreens: September to October. 3.Confirm species-by-species best time of year to dig (Fall versus Spring). Phase and schedule out appropriate nursery review process prior and appropriate digging schedule to meet the requirement of each species. Coordinate digging with installation so as to minimize time out of the ground. E.Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods or as agreed to protect the warrantee:. Coordinate planting periods with digging periods and deliveries: 1.Spring Planting: April to May. 2.Fall Planting: September to October. F.Seasonal Contingencies: Be responsible for including and executing acceptable to reduce the risk of seasonal stress while meeting completion dates and the protecting the warrantee. 1. Acceptable contingencies include: a.Predigging and hardening-off. b.Digging larger root ball. c.Storage while in leaf. d.Winterizing mulch. e.Early planting of more susceptible species. 2. Unacceptable contingencies include: a.Delayed planting of trees. b.Species substitution. G.Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit. Suspend excavation of planting pits if clay/silt based soils are wet. H.Coordination with Lawns: Plant trees and shrubs after finish grades are established and before planting lawns, unless otherwise acceptable to the Landscape Architect. I.If special conditions exist which may warrant a variance in the above planting dates, a written request shall be submitted to the Project Landscape Architect stating the special conditions and the proposed variance. Permission for the variance will be given if warranted in the opinion of the Landscape Architect. Variances permitted will not relieve the Contractor from liability for damages caused by planting out of season. 1.18. Replacements Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place Berkshire Design Group 737 Bridge Rd June 15, 2023 Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 11 J.In the event of damage or rejection, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Landscape Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.19 WARRANTY A.Special Warranty: Warrant the following plants, for the warranty period indicated, against defects and/or loss resulting from materials and execution including death and unsatisfactory growth, but excluding damage and/or loss resulting from maintenance by others, neglect by others, abuse by others, vandalism by others, theft by others and/or unseasonal severe weather conditions. 1.Warranty Period for trees, shrubs, groundcovers: Twelve months from date of Substantial Completion. 2.Warranty Period for annuals: Three months from date of Substantial Completion. B.Warrantee Replacements: Without Cost to the Owner, the Contractor shall replace any dead and/or defective plants that are more than 25 percent dead and/or in an unhealthy condition (even if they have taken root and are re-growing) immediately and replace within thirty days when weather conditions permit but before Final Acceptance. Match size and species of adjacent plants. Reinstate the warranty for the corrected work from date when the correction is completed. Plants shall be free of dead or dying branches and branch tips and shall bear foliage of a normal density, size, and color. Replacements shall closely match adjacent specimens of the same species. Replacements shall be subject to all requirements stated in this Specification. C.When work is accepted in parts, the guarantee periods extend from each of the partial acceptances to the terminal date of the last guarantee period. Thus, all guarantee periods terminate at one time. D.This warranty shall not be deemed to cover trees or planting material damaged or destroyed by acts of vandalism, motor vehicle accidents, or servere weather conditions beyond those customary in New England (such as hurricane force winds, tornadoes, or the like). E.. The guarantee of all replacement plants shall extend for an additional period of one year from the date of their acceptance after replacement. In the event that a replacement plant is not acceptable during or at the end of the said extended guarantee period, the Owner may elect subsequent replacement or credit for each item. F.During the warranty period, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining each tree in a healthy and vigorous growing condition. The Contractor shall water the tree as outlined in a tree watering plan prepared by the Contractor and approved the City. The Contractor's tree watering plan shall describe the source of the water and the equipment to be used in watering, and shall provide for each tree to receive at least 10 gallons of water every two weeks, from May 1st to August 30th. The Contractor shall also weed, prune, mulch, fertilize the trees, and take other steps necessary to ensure the long-term health of the trees, including without limitation, tightening and repairing guywires, resetting tilted or downed trees, and adding soil and/or mulch to any treewell that has settled. 1.20 SEQUENCING A.Coordination with Utilities: Ensure the works are staged and sequenced to; 1.Minimize tracking of equipment and compacting planting areas otherwise soil will have to be re-worked again to comply with the specified requirements. 2.Prevent mixing, contamination or reversing soil profile from utility excavations and back filling. Repair any disturbance to the soil layers after placing to comply with the specified requirements. Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 12 B.Slopes steeper than 1V in 3H: 1.Complete all work on slopes (irrigation pipes, soil, erosion control etc) before surrounding flatter areas are prepared for Landscape Soil. 1.21 MAINTENANCE 1.Periodically inspect the site during the warrantee period (not less than once per month) and notify the Owner in writing if proper maintenance is not being performed. A.PLANTING SOIL A.The Contractor shall supply loam which shall be prepared by the Contractor so as to be free from subsoil, stumps, roots, stones over one (1) inch diameter and other extraneous materials. Materials removed shall be disposed of by the Contractor. Soil shall not be used for planting while in a frozen or muddy condition. J. B. Planting soil amendments to be determined by 3rd party testing laboratory. Mix all materials at the proportions or amounts specified herein. Mixing shall be done by an approved method. Under no conditions shall mixing be done if materials are wet or in otherwise unsatisfactory condition, as determined by the Landscape Architect. C.LAYOUT a.Lines and Elevations: The visual appearance and acceptable tolerances of the design is critically dependent upon the layout of the works. Include all costs and provide all instruments necessary to set out the works accurately. Establish lines and elevation markers located and laid out by survey instrumentation for all finish grades. Provide additional grade stakes and string lines as required to achieve grades and to enable field observations by the Landscape Architect. Re-instate markers/stakes as required throughout the works. b.Verify: Include all costs and provide all calculations necessary to verify the subgrade, substrate and/or structural set-down elevations from the finish elevations minus thickness of overlying finishes. If any discrepancy is found notify the Landscape Architect before final grading. c.Review: The Landscape Architect shall review the field layout and retains the right to direct adjustments to the layout within 2 days. Include costs and allow time to adjust the layout. C.GRADING AESTHETIC INTENT & FIELD ADJUSTMENTS d.Aesthetic Intent: The aesthetic intent of the grading is to appear purposeful and deliberate in its form. Edges and grade breaks shall be defined, flat surface planes shall be uniform between grade breaks and curved surfaces shall be smooth. e.Field Direction: The Landscape Architect may direct field adjustments to the documented grades including but not limited to, 1)fine grading for ridges, swales, edges, 2)transitioning to existing elements, 3)adjusting due to the tolerance of the survey, 4)creating positive drainage. f.Include costs and allow time to adjust the fine grading assuming adjustments shall be cut to fill within the project site. Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place Berkshire Design Group 737 Bridge Rd June 15, 2023 Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 13 B. PLANTS 1. Plant materials shall be true to species and variety specified and shall be nursery grown in accordance with good horticultural practice under climatic conditions similar to those in the locality of the project for at least two years. They shall have been root-pruned within the last two years and shall be freshly dug. No heeled-in plants or plants from cold storage will be accepted. 2. Unless specifically noted otherwise, all plants shall be of specimen quality; exceptionally heavy; and symmetrical, so trained or favored in development and appearance as to be unquestionable and outstandingly superior in form, compactness and symmetry. They shall be sound; healthy; vigorous; well-branched and densely foliated when in leaf; free of disease; insects; eggs or larvae; and shall be free from physical damage or conditions that would prevent thriving growth. 3. Plants shall not be pruned before delivery. Trees with multiple leaders, unless specified, will be rejected. Trees with a damaged or crooked leader, abrasion of bark, sun scalds, disfiguring knots, insect damage, or cuts of limbs over 3/4" in diameter, not completely closed, will be rejected. 4. Plants shall conform to measurements specified in the Plant Lists, except that plants larger than specified may be used if approved by the Landscape Architect. Use of such plants shall not increase the Contract price. If larger plants are approved, the root ball shall be increased in proportion to the size of the plant. 5. Caliper measurement shall be taken on the trunk 6" above natural ground line for trees up to 4" in caliper and 12" above the natural ground line for trees over 4" in caliper. Height and spread dimensions specified refer to the main body of the plant and not from branch tip to tip. Plants shall be measured when branches are in their normal position. If a range of size is given, no plant shall be less than the minimum size, and not less than 50 percent of the plants shall be as large as the maximum size specified. Measurements specified are minimum size, acceptable after pruning where pruning is required. Plants that meet measurements but do not possess a normal balance between height and spread shall be rejected. 6. All plants shall be labeled with correct plant name and size. Labels shall be attached securely to all plants, bundles, and containers of plant materials delivered with care that those attached directly to plants will not restrict growth. 7. Substitutions of plant materials will not be permitted, unless authorized in writing by the Landscape Architect. If proof is submitted and substantiated in writing that any plant specified is not obtainable, a proposal will be considered for use of the nearest available size or similar variety with a corresponding adjustment of Contract price. 8. Type of Protection to Roots 1. Balled and Burlapped Plants Plants designated "B&B" in the Plant List shall be balled and burlapped. They shall be dug with firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the fibrous and feeding root system necessary for full recovery of the plant. Balls shall be firmly wrapped with burlap or similar material and bound with twine, cord, or wire mesh. Where necessary to prevent breaking or cracking of the ball during the process of planting, the ball may be secured to a platform. 2. Protection After Delivery The balls of "B&B" plants which cannot be planted immediately on delivery shall be covered with moist soil or mulch, or other protection from drying winds and sun. Bare-rooted plants shall be planted or heeled-in immediately upon delivery. All plants shall be watered as necessary until planted. Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 14 9. Labels: a.For “Grade# Specimen” plants, label each plant with securely attached, waterproof and readable tag bearing legible designation of botanical, common name and grade. b.For “Grade# 1” plants, label at least one plant of each variety and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical, common name and grade. 10.General Quality: Provide quality, size, genus, species, variety and sex of plants indicated conforming with the Plant List and which; a.Are fit for purpose and acclimated to the proposed site conditions. b.Have an optimum habit and sound, healthy, growth with normal seasonal variations. c.Comply with the requirements of ANSI Z60.1. d.Have a normal amount of flowers, fruit, cones, and seeds. e.If containerized have: 1)Sturdy root ball when stem bends along its vertical length and no pivoting at the base or moving the root ball. 2)No cracked or broken root balls. 3)A symmetrical/radial pattern of well-branched fibrous roots without crushed/torn ends. f.If non-containerized have: 1)Sufficient stored energy to ensure viability. g.Have no weeds. 11.Tree Quality: Grade plants to the following characteristics unless otherwise noted on the Plant List or agreed in writing after nursery inspections. Characteristic Trunk Dominant single straight leader, intact tip & terminal bud at the highest part of the tree, No trunk or branch greater than 2/3 the trunk diameter measured directly above the crotch, good trunk taper. No flush cuts, sunscald, or branch stubs, Open trunk wounds less than 10% of the trunk circumference and less than 2 inches tall. No suckers or lower shoots. Branches Several branches are larger and more dominant than others & spaced at least 6 inches apart along the trunk, No branch greater than 2/3 the trunk diameter measured directly above the branch, No major branches oriented nearly vertical to the trunk. Branches evenly distributed around the trunk, No major branch located directly above another, Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place Berkshire Design Group 737 Bridge Rd June 15, 2023 Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 15 No included bark at branch unions. Crown (when in leaf ) Crown full of dense foliage evenly distributed around the tree, Less than 5% branches with tip dieback, Reflects a height to spread proportion typical to the mature form of the specimen. Less than 10% of leaves are chlorotic and/or damaged from insects/disease and/or smaller than normal. Root Ball No roots over 1/5 dia. of trunkgrowing out of container/bag/wrapping, No root over 1/10 the dia. of the trunk circling around more than 1/3 of the trunk. 12.Batching: Select, grade and blend plants into batches appropriate to their final arrangement on site and delivery sequence. For formal arrangements, rows, allees, hedges and/or bosques group plants in batches so that within each batch, a.Trees shall only vary in; 1)Height less than 1 foot, 2)Spread less than 1 foot, 3)Clear trunk/branching height less than 6 inches. b.Shrubs shall only vary in; 1)Height less than 6 inches, 2)Spread less than 6 inches. 13.Annuals: Provide only plants that are acclimated to outdoor conditions before delivery and that are in bud but not yet in bloom. 14.Vines: Provide two-year plants with heavy, well-branched tops, with not less than 3 runners 18 inches (450 mm) or more in length. 15.Plug Quality: Use plugs with a minimum depth and width of 4 inches. 16.Dormant Propagule Quality: Use hard and resilient bulbs, tubers and rhizomes with top growth cut back. C.GROWING SYSTEMS 1.Cultivation: Use plants that have been propagated using established horticultural practices specifically for ornamental landscape purposes and not for agriculture, forestry, retail chain sale or Christmas tree production. a.Processed Balled: Not permitted. b.Balled and Burlapped: Sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for kind, type, and size of plant required. c.Balled and Potted: Sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for kind, type, and size of plant required. d.Container Grown: Sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for kind, type, and size of plant required. Grow plants in a medium that is compatible with the intended soils and site watering method. Do not carry out potting-on unless approved. e.Nursery Irrigation: Use an irrigation system to achieve growth rates and optimum quality. Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 16 D.SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 1.Contractor’s Delivery Supervisor: Inspect the following prior to delivery and again upon delivery: a. The quality grade, general conformance and labeling. b.The blending and batching of plants to suit the delivery sequence. c.The proposed on-site temporary delivery areas. E.LANDSCAPE SOILS GENERALLY 1.Allowed Sources: a.Reuse existing soils stockpiled on-site. Verify suitability of stockpiled soil to produce Landscape Soil Profile including but not limited to amendments, tilling, raking and/or screening. b.Supplement with imported or manufactured soils from off-site sources when existing soil quantities are insufficient. 3.Import soil or manufactured soil from off-site sources. c.Amend existing in-place soils to produce Landscape Soils. Verify suitability of stockpiled soil to produce Landscape Soil including but not limited to amendments, tilling, raking and/or screening. d.All soils to be free of weeds, pests, and diseases. Soils to demonstrate presence of healthy biology: protozoa, and ameobas. 2.Disallowed Sources: a.Do not use soil from USDA Classified Prime Farmland. 3.Blending and Batching: Ensure Landscape Soil has uniform color and texture for each vegetation type and blend materials uniformly and thoroughly incorporate soil amendments to assure uniform distribution. For each discrete Landscape Soil type use only a single supply source for the entire quantity required. 4.Do not use soil stockpiled for greater than a year. If soil stockpile has been sitting for over a year either a.Blend top several inches of soil with underlying layers to distribute healthy microbiota throughout and or b.Infuse soil with compost tea applications rich in protozoa and ameobas. 5.Sufficient soil shall be collected to complete scope of work. 6.Amendments: Use amendments to make the soil conform to the specified requirements. Use amendment types and in compositions as recommended by the Soils Report prepared by an independent testing lab. 7.Existing Topsoil: The Owner has existing soil that may be suitable for reuse. The Owner shall not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn concerning the actual volume of conforming soil that may be recovered nor the volume of actual unsuitable material remaining. Soil testing to assess salvage potential has been carried out by the Owner. This information is not intended as representations or warranties of the continuity of such conditions between soil tests. The Owner shall not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn there from. The data is made available only for information and not for construction. Make any additional tests and other exploratory operations at no cost to the Owner. 8.Imported Topsoil: Surface “A” horizon from natural or cultivated surface profile (not including bogs or wetlands) containing organic matter, sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel; and free of weeds, roots, and other deleterious materials. Percentage by mass and pH to ASTM D5268-92 specification (table 1). 1.22 LANDSCAPE SOILS TYPE 2: SHRUB & GROUNDCOVER AREAS Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 17 A.Landscape Soil Characteristics: Placed Landscape Soil Profile shall conform to the following characteristics no later than Substantial Completion. Property Unit Common to each horizon Shrub & Groundco ver amended subgrade Shrub & Groundco ver subsoil Shrub & Groundco ver topsoil Physical: Particle Size Analysis Test 14 15 16 17 18 Texture by particle size distribution analysis USDA as per site silt loam to fine sandy loam course loamy sand Physical: Organic Matter Test Organic content - dry %mass < 1 5 - 10 10 - 15 Physical: In Situ Test (If determined necessary by landscape architect) Infiltration inch/hr 1 to 3 > 1 1 to 3 2 to 3 Chemical: Routine Analysis 23 24 25 26 27 pH CaCl2 5-6.5 EC dS/m < 2 Ca / Mg ratio 3 to 6 CEC cation exch. Capacity meq% 5 to 20 P phosphorus ppm 3 to 18 K potassium ppm 25 to 110 S sulphur ppm < 200 Cu copper ppm 0.4 to 6 Zn zinc ppm 0.3 to 10 Mn manganese ppm 3 to 15 Fe iron ppm 3 to 20 Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 18 B boron ppm 0.3 to 1 Odour no strong odour Toxins Contaminants & Toxins ppm no phyto toxins EPA PRG levels EPA PRG levels Biological Micro organisms other than parasitic nematodes present Mycorrhiza fungi present Fungal diseases absent Weed viable reproductive parts absent 1.Landscape Soil component proportions by volume: a.For Landscape Subsoil 1)100% maximum Existing or Imported Topsoil or Subsoil. 2)other amendments as identified in the Soils Report. b.For Landscape Topsoil 1) 85% minimum Existing or Imported Topsoil amended with, 2)15% maximum composted organic matter, 3)other amendments as identified in the Soils Report. 2.Refer drawings for thicknesses of horizons. Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 19 2.7 LANDSCAPE SOILS TYPE: TREES A.Landscape Soil Characteristics: Placed Landscape Soil Profile shall conform to the following characteristics no later than Substantial Completion. Property Unit Common to each horizon trees amended subgrade trees subsoil trees topsoil Physical: Particle Size Analysis Test 14 15 16 17 18 Texture by particle size distribution analysis USDA as per site silt loam to fine sandy loam course loamy sand Physical: Organic Matter Test Organic content - dry %mass < 1 5 - 10 8-10 Physical: In Situ Test (If determined necessary by landscape architect) Infiltration inch/hr 1 to 3 > 1 1 to 3 2 to 3 Chemical: Routine Analysis 23 24 25 26 27 pH CaCl2 5-6.5 EC dS/m < 2 Cg / Mg ratio 3 to 6 CEC cation exch. Capacity meq% 5 to 20 N nitrogen as ammonium ppm 6 to 24 N nitrogen as nitrate ppm 30 to 100 P phosphorus ppm 3 to 18 K potassium ppm 25 to 110 S sulphur ppm < 200 Cu copper ppm 0.4 to 6 Zn zinc ppm 0.3 to 10 Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 20 Mn manganese ppm 3 to 15 Fe iron ppm 3 to 20 B boron ppm 0.3 to 1 Odour no strong odour Toxins Contaminants & Toxins ppm no phyto toxins EPA PRG levels EPA PRG levels Biological Micro organisms other than parasitic nematodes present Mycorrhiza fungi present Fungal diseases absent Weed viable reproductive parts absent B.Landscape Soil component proportions by volume: a.For Landscape Subsoil 1)100% maximum Existing or Imported Topsoil or Subsoil. 2)other amendments as identified in the Soils Report. b.For Landscape Topsoil 1)85% minimum Existing or Imported Topsoil amended with, 2)15% maximum composted organic matter, 3)other amendments as identified in the Soils Report. C.Refer drawings for thicknesses of horizons. B. FERTILIZER 1.Adjust types and composition based upon recommendations of soil test reults processed by a third party soil testing lab. 2.Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of [1] [4] percent nitrogen and [10] [20] percent phosphoric acid. 3.Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid. 4.Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: a.Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m) of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight. b.Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency. c.All shall conform to applicable State fertilizer laws. 5.Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water- insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: a.Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight. b.Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency. c.Use for each tree d.Any fertilizer which becomes caked or otherwise damaged, making it unsuitable for use, will not be accepted. Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 21 C.WATER 1.Contractor shall make, at his expense, whatever arrangements may be necessary to ensure an adequate supply of water to meet the needs of this contract. He shall also furnish all necessary hose, equipment, attachments, and accessories for the adequate irrigation of lawns and planted areas as may be required to complete the work as specified.Failures in the irrigation system shall not relieve the Contractor from watering. D.ORGANIC MULCHES 1.Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and shrubs, consisting of one of the following: a.Type: Fine Shredded hardwood b.Size Range: ½ to 1 inch diameter. c.Color: No artificial dyes permitted,dark brown color. d.The mulch must be partially decomposed. e.Non floatable for rain garden areas. 2.7 INORGANIC MULCHES D.CRUSHED STONE MULCH: f.Crushed Stone: Decomposed granite or crushed granite aggregate less than ¼ inch free from clay lumps, organic matter, and deleterious material. g.Suppliers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1)Texas Architectural Aggregate,Inc -“Sunburst Yellow” TX, 76877, 915-372- 5105. 2)Fister Quarries Group Inc-“1/4 inch pan Rustic”, IL, 800-542-7393. 3)Or approved equivalent h.Use only a single supply source for the entire quantity required. i.Screening shall be clean, hard, durable particles of fragments of select granite. Fines shall be evenly mixed throughout the aggregate. When produced from gravel, 50 percent, by weight, of the material retained on a No.4 sieve shall have one fractured face. j.The portion retained on the No.4 sieve shall have a maximum percentage of wear of 50 at 500 revolutions as determined by AASHTO T96-77. The portion passing a No. 4 sieve shall have a maximum liquid limit of 25 and a maximum plasticity index of 7, as determined by AASHTO T89-81, respectively. k.Grading requirements: Percentage of Weight Passing a Square Mesh Sieve AASHTO T11-82 and T27-82 Sieve Designations Passing Percent Sieve Designation Passing Percent No. 4 95 – 100% No. 50 25 – 35% No. 8 75 - 90 % No. 100 20 – 25% No. 16 55 - 65 % No. 200 10 – 15% No. 30 40 - 50 % 2.8 TREE STABILZATION MATERIALS Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 22 A.Stake & Tie Systems: hardwood stakes pointed at one end and of a thickness to resist loads and be visually unobtrusive and by the length indicated on details. Plastic Ties: Soft polypropylene woven tie for 900 lb strength. 1.Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equivalent. l.DeepRoot – Arbor Tie 2. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, all tree stakes shall be spruce or fir construction grade, rough-sawn, 2" x 2" x 10' long. All exposed portions of each tree stake to be stained black E. PESTICIDES 1.General: Pesticide registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use pesticides unless authorized in writing by the client. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer. Products may or may not contain Glyphosate. 2.Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already germinated. Products may or may not contain Glyphosate. F.MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS 1.Root Ball Support: Flat-bottom wire baskets manufactured to evenly distribute loads and minimize crimping. Use compatible burlap liners to prevent ball from facturing and to ensure root growth into the surrounding soil. 2.Antidesiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for trees and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according to manufacturer's written instructions. a.Anti-desiccant shall be an emulsion which provides a protective film over plant surfaces, permeable enough to permit transpiration. It shall be delivered in containers of the manufacturer and mixed according to the manufacturer's directions ("Wiltpruf" manufactured by Nursery Specialty Products Inc., Stubbings Road, Groton Falls, New York, or approved equal). 3. Trunk-Wrap Tape: Two layers of crinkled paper cemented together with bituminous material, 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide minimum, with stretch factor of 33 percent. 4. Root Barrier: High-density polyethylene (0.08") or high impact polystyrene (0.06") with vertical ribs, 24" deep unless otherwise noted on Drawings. 5.Temporary Tree Watering Systems: If there is no permanent irrigation system, provide temporary watering bags that allows the slow-release of water until new roots have established. 6.Tree Paint: Tree paint shall be “Cabot Tree Paint” or approved equal. 7.Plant Labels: Plant labels shall be durable, legible stating the correct plant name and size in weather resistant ink or embossed process lettering. Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 23 G.EROSION CONTROL PRODUCTS 1.Erosion Control Fabric: Biodegradable woven fabric. a. Requirements: 1)Material: 100% spun coir or jute functional for at least 2 growing seasons. 2)Open area: 50% to 65% suitable for seedings after installation. 3)Stakes: Sufficient to hold in place, bioderadeable, no metal stakes will be accepted. 4)Wide width tensile (wet): 38 lbs. 5)Elongation at failure (wet): 47%. 6)Water Flow Velocity: 8 ft/sec. 7)Application: specifically recommended for use as erosion control on slopes up to 1 in 2 until planting is estabilished. b.Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1)Belton Industries Inc.– “Geocoir DeKoWe 400” Coir mat 2)Belton Industries Inc.– “Geocoir DeKoWe 700” Coir mat 3)RoLanka International Inc. – “Jute mat” 4)Approved equivalent. A. EXAMINATION 1.Verify that Earth Moving has resulted in the conforming subgrades with in specified tolerances. 2.Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid including, but not limited to, paint, concrete slurry, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, or acid is within planting areas. If present, remove and replace with new soil. 3.Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. Examine preceding related work. Verify that planting may be completed in accordance with the original design and the referenced standards. Verify that previous related scopes of work are not only in compliance with the contract documents but have also been approved on site by Landscape Architect and Owner’s Representative. This includes: Rough Grading, Finish Grading, as well as Topsoil Performance Specification. Verify that Landscape Soil works are conforming and within specified tolerances. Correct non-conforming conditions before proceeding with Planting. 4.Weather Limitations: Proceed with soil works when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit. 5.Moisture Content of Soils: Do not work when moisture content is so great that excessive compaction will occur, nor when it is so dry that dust will form in air or that clods will not break readily. Water, if necessary, to bring soil to moisture content suitable for tilling and spreading. Do not spread if subgrade is frozen, muddy, at optimum moisture content or excessively wet. 6. 7. Discrepencies a.In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Landscape Architect. b.Do not proceed with the installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepencies have been fully resolved. 8.Notify Landscape Architect in writing of any non-conforming or unexpected soils and/or drainage conditions that the Contractor considers detrimental to the growth of plants prior to planting. 9.Locate and mark existing utilities, underground structures, and aboveground obstructions before planting and avoid disruption of and/or damage to utilities. Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 24 B. PREPARATION 1.Protect utilities, structures, foundations, sidewalks, pavements, other facilities, lawns and plants from damage caused by operations. a.Damage to utilities: After locating and marking, verify the status of utilities. Protect or temporarily divert existing utilities to remain “live”. Rectify immediately any obstruction or damage to utilities to remain “live” and provide and pay for temporary utilities whilst repairs are carried out to the satisfaction of the utility owner. b.Damage to property: Do not interfere with or damage property that is to remain on or adjacent to the site, including adjoining property to the site, and trees. Rectify immediately any interference or damage to such property. c.Damage to existing trees: If the trees are damaged or placed under unnecessary and avoidable stress by the Contractor, the Owners Representative shall deduct damages from the Contractor’s progress claim. d.Existing Irrigation: Install a temporary diversion main, control cable and valves to isolate contract area and to maintain service to areas outside of the contract area. 2.Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion, displacement of soils, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and completed work. Be responsible for any additional temporary erosion control in areas that rely on the establishment of plant roots to stabilize soils. C.EXCAVATION OF PLANTING AREAS 1.Stake out the ground locations for plants and outlines of areas to be planted and obtain approval of the Landscape Architect before excavation is begun. A minimum of 30 percent of total planting must be staked before inspection will be made. B.Excavate tree and shrub pits as shown on the Drawings. C.Separate sub-grade soils from the upper topsoil portions and remove immediately wherever encountered during planting operations. D.Notify the Landscape Architect in writing of all soil condition which the Contractor considers detrimental to growth of plant material. State condition and submit proposal in writing to the Landscape Architect for correcting condition. E.Notify the Landscape Architect in writing of all soil or drainage conditions which the Contractor considers detrimental growth of plant material. F.Test drainage of suspect plant beds and pits by filling with water twice in succession. Conditions permitting the retention of water in planting beds for more than 12 hours shall be brought to the attention of the Landscape Architect. F.If rock, underground construction work, tree roots, or obstructions are encountered in the excavation of plant pits, alternate locations may be considered by the Landscape Architect. Where location cannot be changed, as determined by the Landscape Architect, submit cost required to remove the obstructions to a depth of not less than 6" below the required pit depth. Proceed with work after approval of the Landscape Architect. D.LAYOUT 1. Trees: Use 3 foot wire stakes or approved equivalent, color coded for each species to stake location of each tree.The Landscape Architect may review the layout in the field and the Contractor shall adjust exact positions before planting begins. The Landscape Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 25 Architect reserves the right to refuse review at this time if, in his opinion, the layout is insufficient. 2. Shrubs and Groundcover: Delineate edges of planting beds with rope or spray paint. The Landscape Architect may review the layout in the field and the Contractor shall adjust exact positions before planting begins. The Landscape Architect reserves the right to refuse review at this time if, in his opinion, the layout is insufficient. 3.If it appears necessary to vary the locations and spacing to avoid utilities or to cover the area uniformly notify the Owner’s Representative. E.PLANTING LARGE TREES AND SHRUBS A.Digging and Handling of Plant Materials to be Relocated 1.Immediately before digging, spray all plant material in full leaf with anti-desiccant, applying an adequate film over trunks, branches, twigs, and/or foliage. 2.Dig, ball and burlap ("B&B") plants with firm, natural balls of earth with diameter not less than that recommended by American standard for Nursery Stock and of sufficient depth to include the fibrous and feeding roots. Plants moved with a ball will not be accepted if the ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. 3.Protect plants at all times from sun or drying winds. Plants that cannot be planted immediately on delivery shall be kept in the shade, well protected with soil, wet moss, or other acceptable materials and shall be kept well watered. Plants shall not remain unplanted for longer than three days after delivery. 4.Plants shall not be bound with wire or rope at any time so as to damage the bark or break branches. Plants shall be lifted and handled from the bottom of the ball only. 1.Do not excavate if soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. 2.Excavating Pits and Trenches: a.Excavate a square pit base at least 12 inches (300 mm) wider than each side of the root ball top and slope pits sides out no steeper than 1 in 1. Trim base leaving a raised and consolidated center area immediately under the root ball. b.See Document Detail drawings for subgrade shaping of tree pits on slopes and level areas. c.Scarify all sides to remove smeared hard-panned surfaces. d.Notify Landscape Architect if any obstructions detrimental to plant health or that prevent layout are encountered in excavations including but not limitted to existing utilities, unforseeable rock, industrial landfill, hardpan layers and perched water tables. Seek direction before any changes to the plant layout. 1)The owners representative and landscape architect will decide whether to continue with work or to find an alternate location. 2)Unusable tree wells are to be immediately backfilled and compacted to their original grade. e.Trees planted in paving shall have sufficient volume to encourage substantial growth and vitatily. 3.Placing: Clear surface of any weed growth prior to planting. Set plant plumb and in center of pit / trench with top of root ball [flush with] [1 inch (25 mm) above] adjacent finish grades. Consider the form and health of each plant and accordingly rotate and/or place plants in relation to sight-lines and appearance. Use best quality plants at corners and facing pavements. a.For B&B stock - remove burlap and wire baskets from tops of root balls and partially from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 26 setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. b.For container or bag stock - Carefully remove root ball from container or without damaging root ball or plant. Untangle pot-bound roots. c.For bare root stock - Spread roots without tangling or turning toward surface, and. remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break. d.Do not set root ball too low in the ground: Set plants at same relationship to finished grade as they bore to the ground from which they were dug. Set plant plumb and brace rigidly in position until prepared topsoil has been tamped solidly around ball and roots. 4.Backfilling: Place Planting Soil around root ball in lifts not exceeding 6 inches, tamping to settle mix and eliminate voids and air pockets upto ¾ of backfill depth. Do not use subgrade and sub bases as backfill. a.Place fertilizer evenly distributed when backfilled ¾ using four (4) tablets for each 1/2" of the tree caliper measured at 12" above grade. b.When plant pits have been backfilled approximately 2/3 full, water thoroughly, eliminating all air pockets. After watering, install planting soil to top of pit and repeat watering. Water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of Planting Soil. c.Form saucer with 3 inches (75 mm) high berm centered around the plant, 12 inches (303-mm) wider than ball diameter. Install a temporary 2-inch (50-mm) deep layer of mulch within berm area. Do not place mulch within 2-inches (50-mm) of trunks or stems. 5.Reinstatement: Restore any soil areas that have been compacted and /or disturbed by the planting work to a conforming condition. 6.Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to conform to specified grades after full settlement has occurred. Remove temporary saucers and mulch around trees upon installing final surface finishes. 7.Form saucer around tree as indicated on the Drawings. 8.Watering in: Hand-water plant foliage, rootball and surrounding soil during the same day of planting and continue watering until roots penetrate the surrounding soil. Do not saturate and destabilize soils on slopes greater than 1 in 3. 9.Mulch all pits and beds with a 4" layer of shredded bark mulch immediately after planting. 10. Pruning: Prune during dormancy period. Prune, thin, and shape plants according to ANSI A300. Unless otherwise indicated by Landscape Architect, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured or dead branches from flowering trees. Prune shrubs to retain natural character unless otherwise noted as a hedge. 11.Cut and remove ropes, strings and wrappings from top 1/3 of ball after plant has been set. Leave balance of wrappings intact around ball. If wrapping is plastic, remove top 2/3. 12.Cleaning: Remove all plant containers from the site immediately after planting and thoroughly clean all areas at the close of each day's planting. 13.Protecting: Install temporary measures to protect plants from physical damage and animal grazing until Final Acceptance. 14.Labels: Remove all plant labels upon Substantial Completion. 15.Guying, Staking, Wrapping and Pruning 1.Guying shall be completed immediately after planting. Drive ground anchors into ground by manual or machine method at approximately 45 degree angle to ground plane and distributed at 120 degree intervals around trunk of tree. Anchors shall be driven to minimum vertical depth after preloading as follows: Tree Caliper ...................................................... 3 to 5 inches Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 27 Anchor Size .............................................................. 4 inches Minimum Dept (feet) ...................................................... 2-1/2 Preload anchors after driving until anchor turns in the ground at 90 degree angle to line of driving force. Anchor assembly will rise 2 to 6 inches during pre-loading. Attach guying cables, turnbuckles and hose, and secure until tree is rigidly guyed. On all guys, 1/3 distance up from ground to trunk, secure white plastic flagging 1" wide x 18", ties securely. a)Trees 3" in caliper or greater shall be guyed using the 120 degree, three guy method, or as shown on the Drawings. b)Trees less than 3" in caliper shall be staked using the 180 degree, two stake method. c)Remove all wrapping and guying material at the end of guarantee period. 2.Wrap trunks of deciduous tress of 1-1/2" or more caliper with a spiral overlapping wrapping to minimum height of third branch. Wrap from bottom and tie wrapping securely in place. Remove wrapping at end of guarantee period. 3.Prune plants only at time of planting and according to standard horticultural practice to preserve the natural character of the plant. Pruning to be done under supervision of the Project Landscape Architect. Pruning and trimming shall include the following: a)Remove all dead wood, suckers, and broken or badly bruised branches, unless otherwise directed by the Landscape Architect. Contractor shall not cut main leader of tree. b)Use only clean sharp tools. c)Paint cuts over 3/4: diameter, covering all exposed, living tissue. F.PLANTING SMALL TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS 1.Watering pots: Hand water plant containers to capacity prior to planting. 2.Excavation: Excavate planting holes as detailed to dimensions dictated by the rootball dimensions. The base of excavation shall extend a minimum of 12” from the base of rootball horizontally. The sides of the excavation shall flare further out at a maximum side slope of 1:1 all the way to the surface of the soil. Form a compacted pedestal for shrubs and small strees for the root ball to sit upon. Holes should be irregular in shape. Scarify all sides to remove smeared surface. Do not excavate into subgrade unless it has been suitable prepared as subsoil and/or subdrainage is present. 3.Placing: Lay out plants to specified spacings. Clear surface of any weed growth prior to planting. Remove plants from containers and gently tease outer roots, if necessary. Immediately set plants in the centre of the hole. Stake small trees. 4.Backfilling: Backfill with planting soil and fertiliser to ensure that all plants are plumb and set to their natural growing levels flush with the surrounding soil levels. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets. Ensure soil does not mix with mulch. Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 28 5.Watering in: Hand-water plant foliage, rootball and surrounding soil during the same day of planting and continue watering until roots penetrate the surrounding soil. Do not saturate and destabilize soils on slopes greater than 1 in 3. 6.Cleaning: Remove all plant containers from the site immediately after planting and thoroughly clean all areas at the close of each day's planting. 7.Finish Grading: Grade planting beds to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. 8.Protecting: Install preventative measures to protect plants from feeding-animal damage until plants are established. 9.Labels: Remove all plant labels upon Substantial Completion. 10.Replacing: 30 days after planting replace, without cost to the Owner as soon as weather conditions permit, all plants that have not shown signs of establishing roots outside of original container potting mix as determined by the Landscape Architect. Match quality and size of adjacent species. G.TREE STABILIZATION 1.General: Be responsible for all plants remaining upright and stable in all conditions from installation through to Final Acceptance. Conform to the tree stabilization details. Attach to trunk / stem as low as possible. Verify location of utilities prior to driving stakes or anchors. For formal arrangements, rows, allees, hedges and/or bosques, stabilize all trees with the same system for uniformity. H.PLACING EROSION CONTROL FABRIC 1.Lay loosely on surface to ensure fabric/ground contact. Provide at least 12 inches (300mm) overlap at joints. If not detailed on drawings use dead stout stake to manufacturer’s written recommendations. I.PLANTERS 1.Additional Requirement: Do not penetrate or damage fabrics and/or membranes. J.PESTICIDE APPLICATION 1.Prior to applying pesticides, get permission from the School and Owner’s Representative. Apply pesticides, other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed. 2.Pre-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply to tree, shrub, and ground-cover areas in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. Do not apply to seeded areas. 3.Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply only as necessary to treat already-germinated weeds and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. K.MULCHING 1.Mulch surfaces of planting beds and other areas as indicated on the drawings. a.Prior to application of mulch remove all grass, weeds, rubbish, decomposed bark mulch and other deleterious matter from surface. b.Organic Mulch: Apply average thickness of organic mulch shown on the drawings. Do not place mulch against plant stems. c.Unless otherwise shown mulch surfaces shall finish flush with adjoining paving and 25mm below tops of walls. d.Rake surface smooth and free from clumps. e.Do not mound mulch around trees in grass. Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 Prospect Place 737 Bridge Rd Northampton, MA PLANTINGS 32-9300 – 29 2.Mulching in Rain Gardens and Bioswales a.Use shredded hardwood mulch to prevent floating during rain events L.EDGING IN PLANTING BEDS 1.Edging to be spade cut edging between planting areas and edges of planting areas. Alignments of edging to be clean and smooth. M.CLEANUP AND PROTECTION 1.Keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition. Pavements shall be kept clear at all times, broom cleaned to prevent tracking dirt into buildings. 2.Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations, operations by Others. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plants. 3.After Substantial Completion and before Final Acceptance remove nursery tags, nursery stakes, tie tape, labels, wire, burlap, temporary tree watering bags, and other debris from plant material, planting areas, and Project site. 4.After completion of all planting operations, dispose of all debris and excess material to the satisfaction of the Landscape Architect. All pavements shall be broomed and hosed clean. N.DISPOSAL 1.Disposal: Remove surplus and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose or recycle them off site. 3.14 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE A.At the end of the guarantee period, the Landscape Architect will inspect all guaranteed work for final acceptance upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least 10 calendar days before the anticipated date for final inspection. 2.Upon completion and re-inspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgment of the Landscape Architect at that time, he shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to the final acceptance of the Project. C.The Landscape Architect shall inspect all work for acceptance upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least 10 calendar days before the anticipated date of inspection. a.Acceptance of plant material by the Landscape Architect shall be for general conformance to specified size, character, and quality and shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for full conformance to the contract documents, including correct species. b.Upon completion and re-inspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgment of the Landscape Architect, he shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to the acceptance of the work. D.Acceptance in Part 3.The work may be accepted in parts when it is deemed to be in the Owner's best interest to do so and when approval is given to the Contractor in writing to complete work in parts. Acceptance and use of such areas by the Owner shall not waive any other provisions of this Contract. END OF SECTION Berkshire Design Group February 24, 2024 February 24, 2024 Water Distribution System Page 1 of 8 32 12 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA SECTION 32 12 00 Water Distribution System PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Engineer’s interpretation. 1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT A. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Engineer’s interpretation. 1.04 DESCRIPTION A. Work under this Section of the Specifications shall consist of providing all labor, materials and equipment necessary and required to install all of the water distribution and service facilities in accordance with Contract Documents. This work shall include but not be limited to: 1. Installation of water distribution system consisting of excavation, piping, valves and boxes, hydrants, pipe fittings, thrust blocks, and all necessary and required accessory items and operations including sheeting, bracing, pumping and coordination with interior plumbing and electrical contractors. 2. Connection of building water service lines to the water distribution system. 3. Testing and disinfection. 4. Installation of water lines within the public ROW and/or easements, including connections to existing water supply facilities. 5. Work performed under the Water Distribution System Scope of Services shall be limited to work outside of, and up to a point of ten (10) feet outside of the building(s) foundation wall as shown on the Drawings. Work inside the building and connection to new water service piping installed under this section shall be included under the scope of services described in the various sections of Division 15 PLUMBING and FIRE PROTECTION of these Specifications. February 24, 2024 Water Distribution System Page 2 of 8 32 12 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA 6. The Contractor shall pay for all costs and fees related to connecting water system to existing services and shall file all applications, details, and drawings, required by the local authority having jurisdiction. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere Excavation and Fill ........................................................................Division 31 Bituminous Concrete Paving.........................................................Division 32 Fire Protection........................ ..................................................... Division 21 Plumbing..................... ................................................................. Division 22 Fire Alarm..................................................................................... Division 21 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Town of Amherst Requirements 1. The Contractor shall notify the Town of Amherst Water Department sufficiently in advance of connecting new or relocated water services to existing water main. All work and materials shall be subject to approval of the Town. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all arrangements with the Town and State personnel and paying all fees associated with the water system installation and testing. 3. All water distribution materials and installation shall conform to the requirements of the referenced Town of Amherst DPW Waterworks Standards. Should discrepancies exist between the Town Standards and this Specification, the Town Standards shall prevail. For materials or methods of installation not included in the Town Standards, but specified herein, the Contractor shall submit this material or methodology to the Town DPW for approval prior to purchase and/or execution. B. Inspection and Testing 1. Pipe and fittings shall be inspected and tested at the foundry as required by the standard specifications to which the material is manufactured. The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer in duplicate sworn certificates of such tests. 2. The Owner reserves the right to have any or all pipe, fittings and special castings inspected and/or tested by an independent testing agency at either the manufacturer's plant or elsewhere. Such inspection and tests shall be at the Owner's expense. 3. Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be subjected to a careful inspection and a hammer test just before being installed. February 24, 2024 Water Distribution System Page 3 of 8 32 12 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Materials List 1. After the award of the Contract and before any water system materials are delivered to the job site, submit to the Engineer, a complete list of materials proposed to be furnished and installed. 2. Show manufacturer's name and catalog number for each item, furnish complete catalog cuts and technical data, and furnish the manufacturers' recommendations as to method of installation. 3. Upon approval of the Engineer, the manufacturers' recommendations shall become the basis for acceptance or rejection of actual methods of installation used in the work. 4. Do not permit any water system component to be brought onto the job site until it has been approved by the Engineer. B. Record Drawings 1. During the course of installation, carefully shown in red line on a print of the utility plan all changes made to the water system during installation. Provide swing tie dimensions from fixed objects to all bends, tees, valves and reducers. 2. Upon completion of the water system installation, these marked plans shall be supplied to the Engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE A. Ductile iron pipe shall be furnished and installed in sizes as shown on the drawings and in accordance with the latest ANSI Standards' Designations A21.50 (AWWA C150) for "Ductile Iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds of Sand-Lines Molds for Water or Other Liquids." Unless otherwise indicated or specified, ductile iron pipe shall be cement lined, and at least thickness Class 52. 1. DI pipe shall be push-on joint type except as otherwise indicated or specified. 2. CI or DI fittings shall conform to ASA/AWWA A21.10/C100 or ANSI/ AWWA A21.10/C110 respectfully and shall be of a pressure classification at least equal to that of the pipe with which they are used. 3. Gaskets shall conform to ANSI/AWWA A21.11/C11. 4. Inside of pipe and fittings shall be given a cement lining 1/8 inch minimum thickness on pipe 12 inches and smaller in accordance with ANSI/AWWA A21.4/C104. The outside of the pipe and fittings shall be coated with a standard bituminous coating conforming to ANSI/AWWA A21.6/C106. 5. Pipe for use with sleeve-type couplings shall be as specified above except that the ends shall be plain (without bells or beads). The ends shall be cast or machined at right angles to the axis. B. Sleeve-type couplings shall be cast iron and shall be Dresser style. 1. To ensure correct fitting of pipe and couplings, sleeve-type couplings and accessories shall be furnished by the supplier of the pipe and shall be of a February 24, 2024 Water Distribution System Page 4 of 8 32 12 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA pressure rating at least equal to that of the pipeline in which they are to be installed. 2. Couplings shall be provided with epoxy coated steel bolts. 3. Outer surfaces of couplings including bolts and nuts shall be coated with an approved tar coating upon installation. 2.02 VALVES AND VALVE BOXES A. Gate valve shall be iron body, New York Style (Metropolitan Patter) conforming to AWWA C500. Gate Valve shall have mechanical joint ends, interior epoxy coated, 2 in. square operating nut. Valve shall open to right (clockwise). Gate valve shall be designed to be bottle-tight for a minimum working pressure of 200 lb. per sq. in. B. Each valve shall be provided with a valve box. Box shall be 2 pieces slip-style cast iron and shall be an adjustable telescoping, heavy pattern type. 1. Box shall be designed and constructed to prevent the direct transmission of traffic loads to the piping or valve. 2. Upper section of box shall have a flange with sufficient bearing area to prevent undue settlement. Lower section of box shall be designed to enclose the valve operating nut and stuffing box, and rest on the backfill. 3. Boxes shall be adjustable by 6 in. vertically without reduction of the lap between sections to less than 4 in. 4. Inside diameter of box shall be at least 5 1/4 inch and length of box shall be as required to suit finish ground elevation. 5. Box cover shall be close fitting and substantially dirt-tight. Top of cover shall be flush with top of box rim. Cover shall have a word "WATER" cast into top. 6. Box shall be equal to that as manufactured by the Tyler Corporation. C. For valves installed with depth of cover substantially greater than that specified, extensions, including centering spacers, shall be added to the operation nut assembly to raise the operating nut to a depth below grade equal to that with the normal required depth of cover. D. Valve manufacturer and dimensions shall be acceptable to the local DPW waterworks. 2.03 FIRE HYDRANTS A. Hydrant shall conform to AWWA C502 and local governmental authorities having jurisdiction. Hydrant shall be positive automatic drain type to prevent freezing, and shall have one 4 1/2 inch pumper and two 2 1/2 inch hose connections, National Standard Threads. Main valve opening shall be 5 1/4 in. and valve shall open to right (clockwise). Inlet connection shall be 6 in., mechanical joint. Operating nut shall be pentagonal, 1 5/8 inches point to flat and open right (clockwise). B. Hydrant shall be local Water Department Standard Model. February 24, 2024 Water Distribution System Page 5 of 8 32 12 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection 1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that water utilities may be installed in strict accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, the referenced standards, and the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Discrepancies 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Engineer. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies are fully resolved. 3.02 PIPE INSTALLATION A. Piping shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the referenced DPW Standards and MassDOT standards for section of pipe installed in the Right of Way. Where exact locating dimensions of piping are not indicated on the Drawings, the Engineer’s approval shall be obtained for proposed locations. Coordinate installation of pipe with Engineer, MassDOT, and Town of Amherst to provide 14 days notice as to installation. B. Ductile iron pipe fittings shall be installed in accordance with the local Water Department Standards. 1. Bottom of trench excavation shall be kept dry and free of water during pipe installation. Adequate measures including dewatering as required shall be taken to prevent flotation of pipe in the trench. 2. Each pipe length shall be installed to form a close joint with the next adjoining length and bring inverts to the required grade. 3. Each pipe length shall have a firm bearing along its entire length. No pipe or fitting shall be permanently supported on saddles, blocking, or stones. 4. Where indicated, new system shall be connected to existing Municipal Water Distribution System in accordance with the Town Requirements. C. Pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation and shall be maintained free from foreign matter during installation. 1. Where necessary, tight-fitting temporary wood bulkheads shall be employed to close ends of pipeline at end of each day's work. 2. Entire length of pipe shall be thoroughly flushed clean following completion of backfill. February 24, 2024 Water Distribution System Page 6 of 8 32 12 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA D. In any pipe showing a distinct crack and in which it is believed there is no incipient fracture beyond the limits of the visible crack, the cracked portions, if so approved, may be cut off by and at the expense of the Contractor before the pipe is laid so that the pipe used will be perfectly sound. The cut shall be made in the sound barrel at a point at least 12 in. from the visible limits of the crack. 1. Except as otherwise approved, all cutting shall be done with a machine suitable for cutting ductile iron pipe. Hydraulic squeeze cutters are not acceptable for cutting ductile iron pipe. Travel type cutters and guillotine or rotary type abrasive saws may be used. All cut ends shall be examined for possible cracks caused by cutting. 2. The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that damage to the lining of pipe or fittings will render them unfit for use; he shall use the utmost care in handling and installing lined and coated pipe and fittings to prevent damage. Protective guards shall not be removed until the pipe is to be installed. E. Concrete Thrust Blocks 1. Changes in direction, both vertical and horizontal shall be braced with concrete thrust blocks. 2. Where pipe is being capped for future connection, cap shall be braced with concrete thrust block. 3. Concrete shall meet requirements of Division 32 Cast In Place Concrete 4. Thrust block sizing and installation shall be in accordance with DPW Standards. 3.03 ASSEMBLING SLEEVE-TYPE COUPLINGS A. Prior to the installation of sleeve-type couplings, the pipe ends shall be cleaned thoroughly for a distance of 8 in. Soapy water may be used as a gasket lubricant. A follower and gasket, in that order, shall be slipped over each pipe to a distance of about 6 in. from the end, and the middle ring shall be placed on the already laid pipe and until it is properly centered over the joint. The other pipe end shall be inserted into the middle ring and brought to proper position in relation to the pipe already laid. The gaskets and followers shall then be pressed evenly and firmly into the middle ring flares. B. After the bolts have been inserted and all nuts have been made up fingertight, diametrically opposite nuts shall be progressively and uniformly tightened all around the joint, preferable by use of a torque wrench of the appropriate size and torque for the bolts. C. The correct torque as indicated by a torque wrench shall not exceed the sleeve manufacturers recommendations. D. An approved tar coating shall be applied on the entire outer surface of such couplings, including bolts, following installation. 3.04 TESTING February 24, 2024 Water Distribution System Page 7 of 8 32 12 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA A. All portions of the water system installed shall be hydrostatically tested for leakage. B. General Test Requirements 1. Piping shall be adequately restrained against movement before testing. Pressure line shall have thrust blocks installed and the concrete shall have attained full design strength before test pressure is applied to the line. 2. Piping system shall be flushed clean, and sediment, scale, dirt, and debris removed before piping is tested. 3. Adequate provision shall be made for carrying off flushing without causing erosion or other damage. 4. Piping shall be tested before joints are concealed or made inaccessible. 5. Tests shall be made in the presence of an inspector of the authority having jurisdiction and in accordance with the DPW Standards. C. Notice of tests shall be made in writing to the Engineer and the DPW Water Department and received by them at least five days before the date of test. D. Hydrostatic and Leakage Tests 1. Testing shall be in accordance with AWWA Standard C600, Section 4, and at test pressure indicated in the DPW Standards. 2. Pressure pipe shall be given combined hydrostatic and leakage tests in sections of acceptable length as the Engineer shall direct. 3. Furnish and install suitable temporary testing plugs or caps; all necessary pressure pumps, pipe connections, meters, gages, and other necessary equipment; and all labor required. 4. Unless it has already been done, the section of pipe to be tested shall be filled with water of approved quality, and all air shall be expelled from the pipe. If hydrants or blowoffs are not available at high points for releasing air, make necessary excavations, do backfilling and make taps at such points. Plug holes after completion of the test. 5. The section under test shall be maintained full of water for a period of 24 hours prior to the combined pressure and leakage test being applied. 6. The meter and gage shall be installed and shall be kept in use during the test so that water entering water main under test will be measured and the pressure in the water main indicated. 7. The pressure test shall be made at 1.5 times the normal working water pressure (based on the elevation of the lowest point of the section under test), but not less than 150 PSI. If the Contractor cannot achieve the specified pressure and maintain it for the specified time, with no additional pumping, the section shall be considered as having failed to pass the test. 8. Following a successful pressure test, or concurrently with test, make a leakage test by metering the flow of water into the pipe while maintaining in the water main and pressure equal to the specified test pressure. If the average leakage during the period exceeds specified the rate of gallons per hour, the section shall be considered as having failed the leakage test. 9. If the section shall fail to pass the pressure test, the leakage test, or both, locate, uncover, and repair or replace defective pipes, fittings, or joints, without extension of time for completion of work. Additional tests and repairs shall be made until the section passes the specified tests. 10. All joints within vaults shall have no visible leakage. Joints from which water continues to run or squirt in an active manner will not be accepted. 11. Upon successful completion of the tests, plugs or caps installed for the February 24, 2024 Water Distribution System Page 8 of 8 32 12 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA testing shall be removed. 12. If, in the judgment of the Engineer, it is impractical to follow the foregoing procedure exactly for any reasons, modifications in the procedure shall be submitted for approval and be made as approved and accepted, but in any event the Contractor shall be responsible for tightness of the line within the above leakage and pressure requirements. E. Before submitting system for final approval of the authorities having jurisdiction, submit to the Engineer a written statement that work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and signed by the Contractor's Superintendent. F. Promptly following satisfactory completion of leakage testing, a report fully describing test procedure and listing test results shall be submitted to the Engineer and to governmental agencies having jurisdiction. The report shall be signed by the Contractor's superintendent. G. The contractor shall be required to conduct test in accordance with NFPA 24 for all underground piping associated with fire protection. 3.05 DISINFECTION A. The Contractor shall disinfect the lines carrying potable water. The work shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Town DPW Standards. Test results shall be sent to the Engineer and the afore mentioned DPW. B. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment and materials necessary to do the work of disinfection, and shall perform the work in accordance with procedure outlined in the latest edition of ANSI/AWWA C651 except as otherwise specified herein. C. The dosage shall be such so as to produce a chlorine concentration of no less than 25 (mg/1) ppm after a contact period of not less than 24 hours. D. After treatment, the pipeline shall be flushed with clean water until the residual chlorine content does not exceed 1.0 (mg/1) ppm. E. After flushing samples shall be collected as per Town DPW standards. F. During the disinfection period, care shall be exercised to prevent contamination of water in existing mains. G. The Contractor shall dispose of the water used in disinfecting and flushing in an acceptable manner. H. Any temporary connections required for disinfection shall be installed and subsequently properly abandoned at the Contractor's expense. END OF SECTION Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Sanitary Sewer 33 31 10 1 of 6 SECTION 33 31 00 Sanitary Sewer PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Engineer’s interpretation. 1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT A. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Engineer’s interpretation. 1.04 DESCRIPTION A. Work under this Section of the Specifications shall consist of providing all labor, materials and equipment necessary and required to install exterior sanitary sewer system beginning at a point 10 feet outside of building foundation wall, in accordance with the Contract Documents. This work shall include but not be limited to: 1. Installation of sanitary sewers consisting of manholes, drop connections, pipe, and all necessary and required accessory items and operations. 2. Pay costs and fees related to connecting sanitary sewerage system to existing services. File applications, details, and drawings required by the local authority having jurisdiction. 3. Alteration, reconstruction and/or relocation of existing sanitary sewer facilities as required. 4. Connection of building sanitary sewer service lines to the site sanitary system. 5. Installation of sanitary sewer facilities with the Public R.O.W. and/or easements, including connections to existing sanitary sewer facilities. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere Excavation and Fill......................................................................Section 31 23 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Sanitary Sewer 33 31 10 2 of 6 Cast-in-Place Concrete ...............................................................Section 32 13 13 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges 2. American Society for Testing and Materials: Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets C433 Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe D3231 Type PSM Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings D3034 Joints for Drain and Sewer and Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals D3212 3. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Department of Transportation (Mass DOT): Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges 4. Local Municipal Requirements a. The Contractor shall notify the local DPW prior to installation. All work and materials shall be subject to the approval of the local DPW. b. The abutting property owners shall be notified prior to installation of the sewer service. B. Permits The Contractor shall pay for all permits and licenses as required. C. Inspection 1. All sanitary sewer System installation shall be inspected and approved by the local DPW. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all arrangements with the DPW and paying all fees associated with the Sanitary Sewerage System installation. 2. The Contractor shall have the new pipe system televised and supply a certified video tape to the local DPW. Arrangements shall be made with the Town prior to performing the TV inspection, so the DPW personnel can witness the taping process. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for sanitary sewage system materials and products. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for sanitary sewage systems, and maintenance data. C. Record Drawings: Submit record drawings at Project Closeout. PART 2 - PRODUCTS The materials to be used in the construction shall be those indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Sanitary Sewer 33 31 10 3 of 6 2.01. IDENTIFICATION A. Provide underground-type plastic line markers, manufacturer's standard permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic tape, intended for direct-burial service. B. Size: Min. 6 in wide x 4 mils thick C. Provide green tape with black printing reading "CAUTION SEWER LINE BURIED BELOW". D. During backfilling/top-soiling of sanitary sewage systems, install continuous underground- type plastic line marker, located directly over buried line at 6 in. to 8 in. below finished grade. 2.02. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) nonpressure pipe for gravity sewers shall conform to ASTM D 3034, SDR35 minimum wall thickness. B. Pipe shall be bell-and-spigot in standard lengths of 12'-6". C. Bell end shall be an integral wall section with solid cross section rubber ring, factory assembled. D. Spigot end shall be beveled to ensure proper insertion. Spigot end shall be imprinted with an "assemble stripe", to which the bell end of the mated pipe will extend upon proper jointing of the two pipes. E. Rubber rings shall conform to ASTM D3212. F. Pipe ends shall permit checking of the rings with a feeler gage to ensure their proper location in the coupling grooves. G. PVC fittings shall be bell-and-spigot type, compatible with the pipe. H. Sewer pipe for sanitary sewer force main shall be PVC, SDR 18, meeting the requirements of AWWA C9000. Joints shall be as per ASTM D3139, and gaskets per ASTM F477. 2.03. SANITARY MANHOLES A. Precast concrete manholes shall conform to local DPW Standards and shall be sanitary manhole manufactured by Arrow Concrete, Granby, CT, or approved equal. 1. Sections shall have tongue and groove joints. 2. Joints between sections shall be made with preformed rubber gaskets Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Sanitary Sewer 33 31 10 4 of 6 conforming to ASTM C433. 3. Each section shall have no more than two lifting holes or cast-in lifting devices. 4. Precast base shall be manufactured with wall openings to receive the ends of pipes which are to be connected to structure. 5. Pipe openings in base shall be minimum size required to receive pipe, and shall be accurately set to conform to the required line and grade. B. Pipe shall be joined to precast base using a seal as indicated on the Drawings or a seal approved by the local Department of Public Works. C. Manholes shall have shaped brick inverts. D. Manhole steps shall be polypropylene plastic reinforced with 3/8 in. diameter steel rod, as manufactured by M.A. Industries, Inc. Peachtree City, GA 30269, or approved equal. 1. Steps shall be drop-front anti-skid design, 12 in wide. Projection of front edge of step shall be greater than or equal to 5 in. from manhole wall. 2. Steps shall embedded 4 in. into manhole wall. 3. Steps in precast sections shall be embedded at time of casting. E. Manholes shall be designed to safely withstand an AASHTO H-20 loading, as specified in the AASHTO Specifications. 2.04. BRICK A. Brick for support of cast iron cover and frame shall meet the physical requirements of MDOT Specifications Section M4.05.2. B. Brick for sewer manhole invert channel shall conform to MDOT Specifications Section M4.05.2. 2.05. MORTAR A. Mortar shall conform to Mass DOT Specifications Section M4.02.15. 2.06. GROUT A. Grout shall be a nonshrink cement-based type, such as Master Builders Company "Embeco", or U.S. Grout Corporation "Five Star Grout". 2.07. EXTERIOR CLEANOUTS A. Sewer Cleanouts to be submitted for review by Civil Engineer. Coordinate Cleanout placement and location with MEP scope of work. 2.08. CASTINGS A. Manhole frames and covers shall be cast iron conforming to Mass DOT Specifications Section M8.03.0 and Mass DOT Construction Standard Drawings 202.6.0, 202.7.0 and 202.8.0. Frames may be Type A or Type B. Covers shall have the letters “SEWER” cast into the cover. All covers shall be submitted to and approved by the local DPW. B. Castings shall have a shop-applied coal-tar-pitch varnish coating, thoroughly Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Sanitary Sewer 33 31 10 5 of 6 covering all metal. 2.09. EMBEDMENT MATERIALS A. PVC pipe embedment materials shall conform to Class I or Class II embedment materials as defined in ASTM D 2321. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall install all sanitary sewer structures and pipe in the locations as shown on the Drawings and/or as approved by the Owner's Field Representative and in accordance with the local DPW Standards. B. Piping - PVC 1. Inspect piping before installation to detect apparent defects. 2. Mark defective materials with white paint and promptly remove from site. 3. PVC pipe installation shall conform to ASTM D2321. 4. Bottom of trench excavation shall be kept dry and free of water during pipe installation. Adequate measures shall be taken to prevent flotation of pipe in the trench. 5. Pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation, and shall be maintained free from foreign matter during installation. 6. Each pipe length shall be installed to form a close joint with the next adjoining length and bring inverts of the required grade. 7. Piping shall be properly graded, free from pockets. 8. No pipe or fitting shall be permanently support on saddles, blocking or stones. 9. Where necessary, tight-fitting temporary wood bulkheads shall be employed to close ends of pipeline at end of each day's work. 10. Cleaning a. Clear interior of piping of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. b. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. c. In large, accessible piping, use brushes and brooms for clearing. d. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted conduit at end of day or whenever work stops. e. Flush lines between manholes if required to remove collected debris. C. Connections to existing facilities 1. The Contractor shall make all required connections of the proposed sanitary sewer into existing sanitary sewer facilities, where and as shown on the Drawings. 2. Take care while making tap connections to prevent concrete or debris from entering existing piping or structure. 3. Remove debris, concrete or other extraneous material which may accumulate. Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA February 24, 2024 Sanitary Sewer 33 31 10 6 of 6 3.02 TESTING A. The entire sewer system, including piping and manholes shall be tested for leakage. Piping shall also be tested by the use of either water or low-pressure air. Piping shall also be tested using closed circuit TV. All testing shall conform to the requirements of the Town DPW. B. General Test Requirements 1. Piping shall be adequately restrained against movement before testing. Pressure sewer line shall have thrust blocks installed (under another section of the specifications) and the concrete shall have attained full design strength before test pressure is applied to the line. 2. Piping system shall be flushed clean, and sediment, scale, dirt, and debris removed before piping is tested. 3. Adequate provisions shall be made for carrying off flushing water without causing erosion or other damage. 4. Manholes and piping shall be tested before joints are concealed or made inaccessible. 5. Tests shall be made in the presence of an inspector of the authority of having jurisdiction. C. Notice of tests shall be made in writing to the Architect, Civil Engineer, and the local plumbing inspector and received by them not less than five days before the date of test. D. Manhole Testing 1. Leakage testing of sewer manholes shall be performed. Leakage for each manhole shall not exceed 1 gal./vertical ft. of manhole per 24 hours. E. Before submitting system for final approval of the authorities having jurisdiction, submit a written statement to the Architect that work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. F. Promptly following satisfactory completion of leakage testing, a report fully describing test procedures and listing test results shall be submitted to the Architect and to governmental agencies that have jurisdiction. The report shall be signed by the Contractors' superintendent. G. Pipe deflection testing for PVC piping. 1. Six months following completion of the backfill over the PVC pipe installation, the pipeline shall be tested for deflection using a "go/no go" deflection mandrel. The "go/no-go" gage shall be passed through all sections of the pipeline. 2. Pipe deflections shall be measured and converted to percent deflection. Deflections shall be recorded, with a copy of results submitted to the Architect. Test results shall be mailed or delivered to the Architect not later than the day following the day on which test was made. 3. Sections of pipe with deflection greater than 7.5% shall be replaced. END OF SECTION February 24, 20224 Storm Drainage Page 1 of 6 33 41 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA SECTION 33 41 00 Storm Drainage PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.3 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.4 DESCRIPTION A. The storm drainage system required for this work is indicated on the drawings and includes, but is not necessarily limited to: - storm drainage pipe - yard drains, catch basins and interconnecting lateral lines - required fittings and bends - testing B. Related Work Described Elsewhere Site Demolition & Clearing.................................................. Section 02 41 13 Excavating, Filling & Grading ............................................. Section 31 23 00 Erosion and Sediment control ............................................ Section 31 25 00 Sanitary Sewer……………. ................................................ Section 33 31 00 Bituminous Concrete .......................................................... Section 32 12 16 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Installers Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work in this Section. February 24, 20224 Storm Drainage Page 2 of 6 33 41 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA B. Standards 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole C478 3. Massachusetts Department of Transportation – Highway Division: Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges C. Codes The work shall be completed in accordance with standards of the Town of Amherst and the Massachusetts Department of Transportation. D. Permits The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits and licenses as required. E. Inspection All drainage system installations shall be inspected and approved by Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all arrangements with inspectors from the local municipality and paying all fees associated with the drainage system installation. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Materials List After award of Contract and before any storm drainage system materials are delivered to the job site, manufacturer's product data shall be submitted. 1. Show manufacturer's name and catalog number for each item, furnish complete catalog cuts and technical data, and furnish the manufacturer's recommendations as to method of installation. 2. Do not permit any storm drainage component to be brought onto the job until it has been approved by the Architect. B. Record Drawings 1. During the course of installation, carefully show, in red line, on a print of the grading plan, all changes made to the storm drainage system during installation. 2. Upon completion of the storm drainage system installation, these marked plans shall be supplied to the Architect. February 24, 20224 Storm Drainage Page 3 of 6 33 41 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA 1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection Protect existing utilities as specified in these Specifications. Use all means necessary to protect storm drain system materials before, during and after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Delivery and Storage Deliver all materials to the job site in their original containers, with all labels legible at time of use. Store in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, as approved by the Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CASTINGS A. The drainage structure frames and covers shall be as listed on the drawings or approved equal. 2.2 CATCH BASINS AND DRAIN INLETS A. Catch basins shall be constructed of the materials, size, form, thickness and in the manner as shown on the details. B. 3/4" crushed stone foundation six (6) inches in depth is required under the pre-cast base at no additional cost. C. Traps, frames, grate and inlets shall be furnished and installed as specified. The grates shall fit so as to prevent rocking or unnecessary space at the joints. 2.3 HDPE DRAINAGE PIPE This pipe shall conform to MassDOT Standard Specifications Section M5.03.01. The pipe shall be constructed of high-density polyethylene. The pipe shall be seamless with corrugations on the exterior and shall have a smooth interior waterway. 2.4 ADJUSTING AND REMODELING OF DRAINAGE STRUCTURES Existing manhole and catch basin structures to be adjusted or remodeled shall be adjusted and remodeled in conformance to MassDOT Specifications Section 210. February 24, 20224 Storm Drainage Page 4 of 6 33 41 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection 1. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that storm drainage system may be installed in strict accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, the referenced standards, and the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Discrepancies 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.2 FIELD MEASUREMENTS Make all necessary measurements in the field to ensure precise fit of items in accordance with the original design. 3.3 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING Perform all trenching and backfilling necessary for this portion of the work, strictly conforming to the requirements for trenching described in Section 31 23 00 of these Specifications. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPING A. General Piping shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the Town of Amherst DPW and Mass DOT Standards. B. Approvals No pipe shall be laid without prior notification of the Architect. Each pipe shall be subject to inspection by the Architect immediately before it is laid, and defective pipe will be rejected. Pipe lines shall be laid to the grades and alignment indicated on the drawings. Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. C. Controls The grade and alignment of all pipe laid in trenches shall be controlled by batter boards, laser equipment, or parallel offset lines with accurate horizontal and vertical control checkout points spaced not greater than 25 feet. Grades and lines between points shall be set and checked with grade and alignment squares. Layout of controls shall be February 24, 20224 Storm Drainage Page 5 of 6 33 41 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA established by a Registered Professional Engineer or Land Surveyor. Alignment tolerances shall be 1 in 1,000 vertical and 1 in 500 horizontal. Pipe shall be inspected for alignment, and approval shall be obtained from the Architect before backfilling work commences. D. Procedure 1. Before being laid, each pipe length shall be inspected and tested to verify that it is not cracked, permanently dented or deformed. Pipe of the required size shall be laid to conform to the lines and grades indicated on the drawings or given by the Contracting Officer. 2. Pipe shall be laid with the groove or bell end upstream. Bell shall rest over a shallow excavation in pipe bedding to prevent pipe weight from bearing on bell. 3. Each pipe shall be so laid as form a close joint with the next adjoining pipe and bring the inverts continuously to required grade. Each pipe shall be supported with compacted crushed stone, graded in size from 1/4 inch to 3/4 inch, to obtain a substantially unyielding bed. 4. Unless recommended by the ASTM standards and by the manufacturers of the various kinds and types of pipe, the Contractor shall not joint pairs of pipe before laying them. 5. No pipe or fitting shall be permanently supported on saddles, blocking, or stones. 6. Pipe shall not be backfilled until joints have been fully inspected, and approved. 7. Entire length of pipe shall be thoroughly flushed clean following completion of backfill. A. General All drainage structures to be constructed within this contract shall be as indicated on the drawings and location shall be in strict accordance with the plans. Manholes and catch basins shall be plumb and vertical, with each section in true alignment. Materials shall be as listed herein and exceptions shall not be taken without prior approval. 1. Lifting holes in precast sections shall be thoroughly plugged with mortar and finished smooth and flush with adjoining surfaces. 2. Drain pipe shall extend, around its entire circumference, to inside surface of wall of structure into which it is inserted. Pipe shall be joined to manhole wall using either a flexible manhole sleeve or non-shrink grout. For grouted joints, surface between pipe and wall shall be filled with non-shrink grout. B. Castings Casting frames shall be set as recommended by the manufacturer of the drainage structure. February 24, 20224 Storm Drainage Page 6 of 6 33 41 00 Prospect Place Family Housing Northampton, MA 3.5 CERTIFICATES Affidavits shall be furnished from the manufacturer of pipe and appurtenances furnished and installed under this Section, certifying that such materials delivered to the project conform to the requirements of these Specifications. END OF SECTION